Installation and Operating Manual For Transformer-Email

Installation and Operating
Manual for Transformer
Indonesia Tolo Windfarm Project
Rated Power 45/27 MVA
Product Power Transformer
Transformer type TLSN7752

Serial no. V101175
Document no. STWHMIV101175
Edition date 2017-12
Volume of
Unrestricted
Table of Contents
Siemens Transformers
Table of Contents
Overview of Revisions
Publisher Information
Warranty and Maintenance Declaration
Chapter 1 Ordering Data
Chapter 2 Technical Data
Chapter 3 Safety and Environment
Chapter 4 Transport, Arrival Inspection and Storage
Chapter 5 Assembly, Evacuation and Oil Filling
Chapter 6 Commissioning
Chapter 7 Operation
Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspection
Chapter 9 Technical Documentation of the Heavy Part and Accessories
Chapter 10 Test Certificates of Accessories
Chapter 11 Test Certificates of Transformer
Chapter 12 Drawings
Chapter 13 Photographs
Chapter 14 Spare Parts and Special Tools
Chapter 15 Check Lists
Unrestricted © Siemens AG 2017 I

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Rev. Chapter/Page(s) Description of changes Date
0 First edition 2017-12
Unrestricted © Siemens AG 2017 II

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Publisher and Service Information
Siemens Transformer (Wuhan) Co., Ltd
Energy Sector
Power Transmission Division
Transformers
No.1 Jingyang Avenue
Yangluo Economic Development Zone
Wuhan, 430415
P.R.China
Customer Support Center:
Phone: +86 27 89669866
Fax: +86 27 89669927
email: cs.stwh.cn@siemens.com
Unrestricted © Siemens AG 2017 III

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175

Siemens´ warranty obligations shall depend on and be subject to the following conditions.
The goods have been stored, handled, or installed according to these instructions.
Operating and maintenance was done by the Customer under the supervision of the
Customer’s senior staff following Siemens´ operating instructions and complete
operating manuals are kept by the Customer and are available to Siemens during the
applicable warranty period.
Warranty claims may only be asserted if the Customer can prove that there is regular
inspection and service.
No responsibility of Siemens under warranty shall arise from consequences of
alterations and repairs by the Customer or third parties. This does, however, not
apply for repairs carried out by the Customer or third parties upon the request or
with the consent of Siemens and following the instruction and/or under the
supervision of Siemens.
No responsibility of Siemens under warranty shall arise from consequences of use of
components and parts which are not provided by Siemens.
A defect or deficiency has occurred for which Siemens is responsible due to not
proper performance or not proper fulfillment of its obligations under the contract.
The warranty obligations of Siemens do not apply to normal wear and tear. Therefore
in cases of warranty claims, ageing shall be given due consideration.
Subsequently the Customer shall do all of the inspection and service work in the intervals
stated and shall replace all the components and parts before they have reached their
expected lifetime.
Defects and deficiencies which result from service errors, exceeding the inspection and
service periods, operating errors, failure to replace the components and parts which have
reached their expected lifetime, or not observing the operating regulations shall not justify
any warranty claims.
In case of warranty claims, documentary evidence for the inspection or service work shall be
sent without delay to Siemens including the date and duly signed. Siemens shall also be
notified without delay of any defects or deficiencies, which could lead to a not proper
performance.
The inspection or service work has to be done by technical personnel, who is trained and
authorized for it. You may find detailed information on doing the inspection or service work
in the various documents in the operating and installation instruction for transformer. With
larger and more complicated sealing, assembly or service work and load interrupter switch
inspection, we recommend that you request mechanics from Siemens, who are especially
trained for this.
Unrestricted © Siemens AG 2017 IV

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
1 Order Data
1 Order Data
Customer: Indonesia Tolo Windfarm Project
Station/Plant: Tolo windfarm
Serial no.: V101175
Product: Power Transformer
Transformer type: TLSN7752
Rated power: 45/27MVA
Ratio: 150±8x1.25% / 33 kV
Production plant: Siemens Transformers (Wuhan)

Co., Ltd.
Unrestricted © Siemens 2017 Date, Ref. 1–1

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
3 Safety and Environment
3.1 Safety
3.1.1 General
Statutory health, safety and environmental provisions and internally applicable healthy,
safety and environment protection provisions of the transformer/reactor operator must be
complied with and are merely amended by these provisions.
This chapter contains basic notes to be observed for transport, set-up, assembly, oil filling,
commissioning, operation and maintenance. These provisions raise no claim to considering
all details or offering a solution for all events.
For safety notes for the individual components and their handling, see the respective
chapters.
Non-observance of these operating instructions and improper work during transport, set-up,
assembly, oil filling, commissioning, operation and maintenance may endanger
interference-free operation of the transformer/reactor or other equipment and lead to
serious personal, property and/or environmental damage and the loss of any damages claims.
Unauthorized conversion and spare parts production

Conversion or modifications of the transformer/reactor are only permissible in coordination
with the manufacturer.
Original spare parts and accessories authorized by the production plant are required to
comply with the safety provisions. Use of any other parts may pose a safety risk and lead to
loss of damages claims.
Persons authorized to work at the transformer/reactor

Serious violation or device damage can be the consequence of non-observance of the safety
provisions. Therefore, only qualified personnel must work at the transformer/reactor or in its
vicinity, and only under strict observation of the warning notes, safety notices and
maintenance provisions. Correct application, proper installation and maintenance warrant
perfect operation of the transformer/reactor.
Qualified personnel are persons trained for transport, set-up, assembly, oil filling,
commissioning, operation and maintenance of the transformer/reactor and the connected
tasks and familiar with the resulting risks.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
3.1.2 Safety Symbols

The safety notes are classified by the following symbols pursuant to ANSI Z535.6:
Personal injury:
DANGER
DANGER! designates directly pending danger. If it is not avoided, death or serious injury
will be the consequence.
WARNING
WARNING! designates possibly pending danger. If it is not avoided, death or serious
injury may be the consequence.
CAUTION
CAUTION! designates possibly pending danger. If it is not avoided, light or minor injury
may be the consequence.
Product/Machine/Plant Damage:
ATTENTION
ATTENTION! designates a potentially harmful situation. If it is not avoided, the system or
something in its environment may be damaged.
General notes:
NOTE
General notes (no personal injury or product/machine/plant damage)
3.1.3 Transport
Only the designated transport facilities must be used for transport (lifting, pulling, turning)
or to set down the transformer/reactor.
Designated transport facilities can be found in the binding dimension drawing or the
operating instructions of the transformer/reactor.
The center of gravity of the transformer/reactor or attachment part must be verified before
lifting or moving it.
Precautions must be taken for transformers/reactors or heavy attachment parts to prevent

slipping or tilting.
Transport of the transformer/reactor must be performed by authorized transport companies.
3.1.4 Set-Up, Assembly and Oil Filling

The foundation's oil pit must be sized according to the total oil volume of the
transformer/reactor. This is the responsibility of the construction company or the overall
company. The national construction provisions and laws must be complied with.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
The oil filling procedure must be performed according to the indications and notes in these
operating provisions.
3.1.5 Operation, Inspection and Maintenance

WARNING
All applicable safety standards and provisions must be complied with under all
circumstances, in particular during inspection, commissioning and maintenance of
transformers.
Inspection of transformers/reactors and controlling of diverter switch is only permitted to
instructed and authorized specialists.
Due to the possible danger of explosion and danger of high voltage/current at the tank or
motor operation cabinet, no persons must stand near any live transformer/reactor when
inspections are performed.
While persons are standing close to a live transformer, e.g. during commissioning and
maintenance, no controlling operations must be performed at the diverter switch.
The transformer/reactor with the assigned and delivered equipment must only be inspected,
operated and serviced as follows:
According to the information and notes in these operating provisions (maintenance
according to the detailed information on recommended intervals).
Work processes must only be performed by qualified, trained and experienced
personnel.
Any action contrary to the above may lead to:

Endangering persons
Damage or outage of the transformer/reactor with associated equipment
Reduced service life of the transformer/reactor with associated equipment
Loss of warranty services
Note that power transformers are deemed passive equipment without irradiation danger
pursuant to the relevant EMC provisions.
CAUTION
Observe that some media may be hot (let them cool off).
3.1.5.1 Conduct during assembly and maintenance work at the electrical

systems
Observe safety distances pursuant to the applicable provisions.
In the scope of assembly or maintenance orders, always inform of the scope, switching
condition and special danger.
Work at live parts is generally prohibited at high-voltage systems.
Control operations in electrical systems are reserved for the relevant operating
personnel.
When working in operating sites with a fire or explosion risk, learn about the present
special provisions before taking up work and comply with them.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
The following five safety rules must be observed:

1. Power down
2. Secure against reactivation
3. Verify that the equipment is powered down
4. Ground and short-circuit
5. Cover or cordon off any adjacent live parts
3.1.5.2 Work inside the tank

There should not be any reason for climbing into the tank during operation or normal
maintenance cycles.
DANGER
The transformer was filled with gas for transport. Therefore, observe that the tank is
subject to an overpressure of approx. 0.3 bar when opening flanges or hand holes
If the tank interior is to be accessed, remove the gas by evacuation and replace it with
dried breathing air if the tank is filled with gas (e.g. nitrogen).
Internal inspection must only be performed in the presence of Siemens service staff or a
person authorized by Siemens.
In case of internal inspection, ensure that the air in the tank has an oxygen share
of > 20 %.
Harmlessness of the breathing air must be verified by appropriate measurements before
entering the tank.
Always observe the safety directives for work in containers.
3.1.6 Fire protection measures when working at oil transformers

In case of overheating of insulation media, e.g. transformer oil, oil vapors may result and
form an explosive mixture with air at a certain ratio, e.g. during subsequent welding of oily
or oil-filled containers. Gas also forms in case of electrical current through oil. These gases
are also flammable and form an explosive mixture with air.
Welding and soldering work with open fire and generation of electrical sparks by testing and
switching procedures in oil-filled or partially oil-filled or oily transformer tanks, conservator,
cable terminal boxes, therefore require special safety measures like filling with nitrogen or
application of vacuum, etc. Specialists of Siemens are to be requested for such work or
precise instructions are to be requested.
Fire prevention, alarm and initial measures are generally mandatory.
Specifically observe the following:

In case of fire, there is the danger of touching live parts of the system. Take special care.
Fire alarm and telecommunications centers must not be switched off.
Electrical machines, control rooms, transformer stations, control panels, control
cabinets, telecommunications frames and devices must be mainly protected from
extinguishing water.
Hand fire extinguishers must be approved for extinguishing fires in electrical systems.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
3.2 Environmental Protection
3.2.1 General
All possible and imaginable provisions must be taken to prevent environmental damage
pursuant to the nationally applicable laws.
Among others, this includes:

Leaking or improper disposal of substances
Impermissible generation of noise
Impairing communications systems by insufficient shielding of electrical
conductors/cables
3.2.2 Disposal
Disposal of the entire transformer/reactor or its parts by the operator commits the operator
to disposing of the parts/materials according to the national environmental laws.
We recommend charging specialized disposal companies with environmentally compatible

disposal of the transformer/reactor and its components.
The following sections list the most frequent components of the transformer/reactor that
require special provisions for disposal.
3.2.2.1 Insulating oil and oil-insulated components

Insulation oil for transformers/reactors is a mineral oil used for insulation and cooling. It is
filled into the tank, conservator, cooling system and diverter switch (if present) before
commissioning.
Like insulating oil, oil-insulated components of the transformer/reactor (e.g. oil-soaked
Nomex paper, oil-insulated transformer board components, oil-soaked insulating paper or
oil-insulated laminate wood components) are no hazardous substances in the delivered
condition. However, chemical oil composition may change during the transformer's service
life.
Insulating oil and oil-insulated components must be disposed of environmentally compatibly
pursuant to the national disposal provisions. For disposal notes, see the safety data-sheet of
the insulating oil (see chapter 3.2.3).
3.2.2.2 Condenser bushings

Depending on the basic type, bushings may contain materials like porcelain, copper,
aluminum, steel, resin-insulated paper, oil-insulated paper, epoxy resin and insulating oil.
Oil- or resin-insulated components are no hazardous substances in the delivered condition,

but the chemical oil or resin composition may change during the service life.
Condenser bushings and their components must be disposed of environmentally compatibly
pursuant to the national disposal provisions.
See operating instructions for bushings in chapter 9 "Technical Documentation of the Heavy
Part and Accessories".

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
3.2.2.3 Paint with thinner for outer corrosion protection/varnish impregnation

Paints and thinners must be disposed of environmentally compatibly pursuant to the local
disposal provisions. For disposal notes, see the safety data-sheet of the paints and thinners
(see chapter 3.2.3).
3.2.2.4 Desiccant beads

The following components contain desiccant beads (e.g. silica gel) as drying agents
• dehydrating breather
• various components (e.g. bushing pots) in the delivered condition
Desiccant beads must be disposed of environmentally compatibly pursuant to the national
disposal provisions.
For disposal notes, see the safety data-sheet of the desiccant beads (see chapter 3.2.3).
3.2.3 Safety Data-sheets

3.2.3.1 Insulating oil
/
3.2.3.2 Paints and thinners

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
4 Transport, Arrival Inspection and Storage

This chapter deals with transport, reloading and loading off of the transformer, transport
and arrival inspections and storage of the transformer/reactor (heavy part) and accessories.
4.1 General
The profile and weight limitations or the customer's request determine the mode of
transport for the transformer.
The different structural parts, like bushings, pipe lines, cooling devices, conservator, etc. are
marked and disassembled according to the transport conditions (see dimension drawing,
shipping parts list/packing list). The openings exposed by this are tightly closed with
transport lids.
NOTE
Transport lids are part of the scope of delivery. Unless other provisions apply expressly,
they are to be stored carefully.
For transport dimensions and detail weights and information on lifting bolts, pulling eyes
and lifting points, see the dimension drawing or loading plan.
We recommend using at least one shock recorder, depending on transport duration, for all
transport types described in the following.
4.2 Transport Preparations

Depending on whether the transformer is shipped with or without oil, different provisions
must be made.
4.2.1 Transport without oil or partially filled transformers

(with dry air or nitrogen)
NOTE
For safety data-sheets, see chapter 3.2.3
Transport of partially filled transformers/reactors

When transporting partially filled transformers/reactors, the insulating medium is lowered by
approx 100-200 mm from the upper edge of the cover depending on build, since
temperature increases lead to oil volume increase.
ATTENTION
Ensure that all insulation parts are completely covered in oil to prevent moisturizing or
destruction of the insulation parts. The tank space freed by this must be filled with dry
gas.
Transport of the transformer without oil

When transporting transformers/reactors without oil, several attachment parts are removed
after the oil is pumped off. They are closed off tightly like the transformer/reactor openings.
Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
ATTENTION
For specific parameters for vacuum, time and moisture, contact the manufacturer's plant.
Fill the transformer/reactor with dried gas for both transport types.
Use and characteristics of filling gases

Dried nitrogen with a purity of 99.996 % or dry air (EN 12021)
Overpressure (dry air/nitrogen): 0.3 bar at 20 °C
The dry air/nitrogen fill provides dry atmosphere in the transformer tank during transport
and assembly and thus maintains the electrical characteristics of insulation.
The dry air/nitrogen fill and overpressure prevent moist air from entering the active part. This
overpressure must be verified in the different transport interfaces and indicated to the
manufacturer plant in a timely manner.
Determination of the degree of moisture in the transformer

To determine the degree of moisture in the transformer/reactor during and after transport, it
can be equipped with a moisture indicator Fig. 4-1 or desiccant beads (silica gel pack). If no
moisture indicators are used, determine moisture with a moisture meter.
Moisture indicator
The moisture indicator function is based on a chemical color change that occurs when a
certain moisture is exceeded.
Fig. 4-1 Moisture indicator with comparison color
If the color of moisture indicator "A" is lighter than comparison field "B", the moisture
content is > 8 %. In this case, contact the manufacturer plant for further measures.
Desiccant beads
Desiccant beads (e.g. silica gel) have the function of absorbing and binding any occurring
moisture in the tank.
If moisture is absorbed, the color of the desiccant beads changes according to the colors
indicated in the material safety data sheet (see chapter 3.2.3).
The silica gel pack has the scripture “Attention Desiccant Box inside” in the marked position.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Dry air / nitrogen fill

The tank is filled with dry air / nitrogen via dry air/nitrogen bottles.
The equipment has at least one high-pressure dry air/nitrogen bottle connected to the tank.
NOTE
The number of bottles depends on the volume to be filled and the duration of transport.
Attachment of dry air / nitrogen bottles

The dry air/nitrogen bottles are attached to the tank with screw terminals (to be removed
before commissioning).
Every bottle is equipped with a high-pressure controller.
If there are two bottles, a 3-directional adapter is used for connecting the bottles and the
tank.
Operation of dry air/nitrogen bottles

The pressure in the full dry air/nitrogen bottle is approx. 150-200 bar and is reduced to
approx. 0.3 bar by the high-pressure controller.
Two pressure gauges are attached to each high-pressure controller. The high-pressure gauge
(0 to 300 bar) indicates the pressure in the bottle, the low-pressure gauge (-1.0 to +1.5 bar)
that in the tank.
The pressure gauge display at the high-pressure gauge should be regularly inspected to
warrant permanent presence of the overpressure in the tank.
NOTE
Dry air / nitrogen are automatically supplied to the tank if the overpressure in the tank
drops below 0.1 bar. An overpressure valve opens when the overpressure in the tank
exceeds 0.55 bar.
We recommend the following inspection of the pressure indication:

right after arrival at the transport interfaces and at the destination
at least once per week
24 hours after re-application of overpressure
ATTENTION
No parts of the dry air/nitrogen equipment must be removed, and the settings at the
high-pressure controllers must not be changed.
Ensure that no insulation oil enters the high-pressure controller.
Replacement of dry air / nitrogen bottles

The bottles need to be replaced when the pressure at the high-pressure manometer drops to
below 15 bar.
Procedure:
1. Close valves at all bottles
2. Close dry air/nitrogen inlet valve at the transformer tank
3. Disconnect hose from the bottle to be replaced
4. Replace bottle

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
5. Connect hose to new bottle

6. Open valves at the bottles (the high-pressure gauge should now display approx. 150 bar,
the low-pressure gauge 0.35 bar)
7. Open the dry air / nitrogen inlet valve at the transformer tank
Set-up for two bottles Set-up for on bottle
1 Low-pressure gauge
2 High-pressure gauge
3 3-directional adapter
4 Inlet valve
5 Tank
6 High-pressure controller
7 Dry air / nitrogen bottles
Fig. 4-2 Dry air / nitrogen equipment for one or two bottles
4.2.2 Transport with oil (completely assembled)

In case of transformers with complete oil filling and conservator, ensure that the
dehydrating breather works or that the connection piece at the conservator is open for small
transformers. In this case, the transformer's inclination must not exceed 10% at transport. In
doubt contact the manufacturer's plant.
4.3 Loading/unloading the heavy part

Lift the unit only at the intended lifting points/lifting eyes/lifting angles pursuant to the
loading/transport plan and/or dimension drawing.
Observe that the transformer/reactor must be lifted and put down evenly horizontally.
If the transformer is put down on rails or supports, proceed according to the dimension
drawing or contact the manufacturer's plant.
Charge certified transport companies with transport work.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
4.4 Installation on foundation
4.4.1 Requirements for transformer foundations

Foundations for oil-filled transformers shall be laid in accordance with relevant industrial
regulations, environmental guidelines and standards. The foundations shall be laid so that
the transformer function, such as gas flow to the Buchholz relay, is not impeded. Levelness
of the foundation is of fundamental importance for the following operational reasons:
Avoidance of unnecessary vibration (e.g. at the tank), which may result in excessive
noise and component stress.
Avoidance of excessive component stress, (e.g. at the on-load tap-changer).
Valid individual tolerance allowances can be taken from the different setup types
4.4.2 Foundation for setup of the transformers / reactors on wheels

1. Installation
The rails shall be leveled on the foundation and attached by appropriate means.
2. Height tolerance
Permissible height deviations (TH) between the different points apply in the loaded state. The
distances indicated refer to the center-to-center spacing between the wheels.
3. Wheel arrangement 1
Rail 1 Rail 2
• = reference points
Fig. 4-3 Wheel arrangement 1

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
4. Wheel arrangement 2
Rail 1 Rail 2 Rail 3 Rail 4
• = reference points
Fig. 4-4 Wheel arrangement 2
5. Rail groove dimensions for circle runs
Fig. 4-5 Rail-groove dimensions for circle runs

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
4.4.3 Flat foundation for the support of transformers/reactors

NOTE
Valid Tolerances ± 2 mm.
1. Arrangements on flat foundation with rails

Use of rails for transformer setup. (Siemens Power Transformers preferred solution):
1 Block foundation
2 Tank bottom outside contour of transformer
3 Foundation rail (total tolerance of rails to each other ± 2 mm)
4 Outside contour of separate positioned cooling system (total tolerance rail to foundation of cooling system
± 4 mm)
5 Un-stiffed tank bottom
6 Stiffed tank bottom
Fig. 4-6 Arrangements on flat foundation with rails
Fig. 4-7 Arrangements on flat foundation with rails - Intersection A - A
The rail facility displayed (Fig. 4-6 and Fig. 4-7) is suitable for transformers with flat tank
base plates or cross-braced base plates. Two foundation rails are sufficient for base plates
which are 1500 mm wide. The total tolerance between rails is ± 2 mm. The tolerance
between rails and the cooling system foundation is ± 4 mm.
Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
2. Assembly on flat foundation without rails

Requirements to the foundation of the transformer/reactor: The tolerance ±2 mm for the
standing area of the transformer and its components placed on the foundation (e.g. cooling
facility) with ±4 mm to the transformer standing area must be complied with. This may be
achieved, e.g., with grouting concrete.
1 Transformer
2 Cooling system
3 Adequate balance material for transformer arrangement: e.g. grouting concrete
4 Block foundation
Fig. 4-8 Arrangements on flat foundation without rails
3. Variant foundations
The requirements for the foundation as described in chapter 4.4.3, items 1 and 2, are valid
NOTE
The balance materials required to achieve the tolerances, e.g. shims, are not included in
the transformer manufacturer's delivery.
4.5 Transport of the Heavy Part, Accessories and Oil

Drums
4.5.1 Transport of the Heavy Part

Use suitable transport equipment for transporting (train, road, ship) transformers/reactors.
For safety devices and permissible loading dimensions, see the loading/transport plan.
To transport and secure the heavy part, attach it at the points indicated in the
loading/transport plan or dimension drawing with suitable attachment means.
The maximum permissible inclination must be coordinated with the manufacturer's plant in
advance.
We recommend using shock recorders to monitor the maximum permissible accelerations.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Road transport
At larger inclinations and less available space, we recommend using an SPMT (Self Propelled
Module Transporter).
When the center of gravity is located high, a special low-loader must be used to ensure
secure stance during the drive.
Train transport
When transporting the transformer/reactor with a train, ensure that the respective carriage is
attached close to the tractor unit if possible to keep the impact frequency as low as possible
during the ride.
Ship transport
The transformer must be placed in the middle area of the ship to prevent large accelerations
at strong waves.
4.5.2 Transport of Accessories

Observe the relevant packaging ordinances when transporting accessories. Generally, one
needs to differentiate between overseas packages and standard packages.
4.5.3 Transport of Oil Barrels

Oil barrels must be loaded to prevent damage to the barrels and in particular the fold seams
and locking mechanisms. The barrels should be transported sealed if possible.
ATTENTION
The barrels must not be put down hard on the folding edges or tossed off of higher
transport platforms even if foot mats are used.
The barrels must be loaded with the intended devices, e.g. forklift with barrel gripper.
4.6 Inspection during Transport and after Arrival at the

Plant
4.6.1 Inspection during Transport

4.6.1.1 Visual inspection for damage
The transformer/reactor must be inspected for transport damage right after arrival at the
destination site. Broken or loose attachments indicate impermissible strain. Contact the
manufacturer's plant in case of damage.
4.6.1.2 Dry air / nitrogen inspection

Verify the pressure in the tank.
If over- or under-pressure is determined in the tank at arrival, it can be assumed that
moisturizing did not occur during transport.
If no pressure difference is determined, further examinations must be performed and it must
be verified whether air has entered the tank and whether the active part has absorbed any

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
moisture. Inform the manufacturer's plant immediately for it to recommend or initiate

further measures.
4.6.1.3 Shock recorder inspection

We recommend installing a 3-directional shock recorder at the tank for transport.
The shock recorder is to be inspected for increased impact strain at the different transport
interfaces. If one of the following impact strains is exceeded, the active part of the
transformer/reactor must be inspected (see chapter 4.6.2.8).
The maximum shock recorder values depend on the specific design of the transformer.
vertical horizontal (transversal axis) horizontal (longitudinal axis)

max. 3 g max. 3 g max. 3 g
Tab. 4-1 Max. shock recorder values
After inspection at the destination site, the values recorded by the shock recorder must be
assessed and indicated to the manufacturer's plant, and the shock recorder/s are to be
returned to the manufacturer's plant.
4.6.2 Arrival inspection of the plant

After arrival at the plant, the following measures must be performed using the "arrival
inspection" check list (see chapter15) and documented.
4.6.2.1 Inspection of the included parts

The attachment parts included in the delivery (installed or included) must be inspected for
completeness pursuant to shipping parts list/packing list.
4.6.2.2 Determination of mechanic damage

Right after arrival of the devices at the assembly site, the complete shipment must be
examined for possible transport damage. Any damage must be documented and indicated to
the manufacturer's plant.
4.6.2.3 Moisture indicator/Desiccant Inspection

If the moisture indicator indicates moisture > 8 % or if the desiccant has discolored (see
product data-sheet), dew point measurement must be performed.
Dew point measurement

Dew point measurement must be performed when the temperature difference between the
insulation material and the environment is less than 3 K. The over-pressure in the
transformer should not exceed 0.35 bar at dew point measurement.
Depending on the weather conditions and solar irradiation, special assessment of the
measuring results may be required. The following chart (Fig. 4-9) shows the acceptable
range of the moisture ratio.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Points in this range are not permissible

Insulation temperature [°C]
Dew point [°C]
Fig. 4-9 Moisture ratio diagram
This diagram is applicable for pressures between 0 bar and 0.35 bar.
ATTENTION
If the active part was heated before dew point measurement, the measurement will
show less beneficial values than the actual dew point, because the active part
temperature is higher than the ambient temperature.
If the values indicated are too high, contact the manufacturer.
4.6.2.4 Visual inspection

See chapter 4.6.1.1
4.6.2.5 Dry air/nitrogen inspection

See chapter 4.6.1.2
4.6.2.6 Shock recorder test

See chapter 4.6.1.3
4.6.2.7 Insulation measurement (=Core or Rack Earthing Measurement)

The earth connections outside the tank are to be loosened and insulation impedance
measurement to be performed. Target value: 300 M
4.6.2.8 Internal inspection

Internal inspection of the transformer tank is only performed if the shock recorder record
exceeds the permissible values or if the core and rack earthing measurement undercuts the
target value of 300 M , as well as (in coordination with the customer), before long-term
storage of the transformer/reactor.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
DANGER
of > 20 %.
entering the tank.
If the transformer is opened empty for inspection, the opening times must be limited to a
minimum. During this time, the tank always has to have an overpressure (blowing in dry air).
For the maximum opening duration for the respective transformer, contact the
manufacturer's plant.
It is strictly recommend the following procedure for work in the tank:

1. Only perform assembly work under good environmental conditions (low humidity, sunny).
Do not perform any work in rain or high humidity (> 80%).
2. The area to be opened (max. 1 hand- or manhole) must be secured against entrance of
contamination, moisture or foreign objects.
3. If the moisture ratio in the active part is too high, keep the transformer/reactor filled with
dry air (dew point <-50 °C) for 24 h. Then perform dew point measurement (see chapter
4.6.2.3).
4. Provide a suitable container for deposit of attachment parts.
5. Any tools used inside the tank must be attached to a secured rope before commencing
work.
6. Draw up check list for all loose parts.
7. Work inside the tank.
8. Close the assembly opening with a new seal.
9. Compare remaining loose parts to the parts on the checklist.
10. After internal inspection of the transformer, verify the sealing condition.
ATTENTION
Until it is filled with oil, the transformer always has to be subject to overpressure, which
must be regularly verified and recorded.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
CAUTION
The transformer core always has to be earthed during assembly and operation.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
4.7 Earthing Diagrams for Transformers/Reactor Coils
Fig. 4-10 Example of an earthing diagram for transformers

NOTE
Collection-point earthing at the transformer, diagonal
Fig. 4-11 Example of an earthing diagram for transformers

NOTE
All bushings must be earthed suitably.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
4.8 Storage
Transformers/reactors that are not taken into operation immediately must be stored
according to one of the following conditions.
NOTE
Start of storage is the time after completion of the arrival inspection.
4.8.1 Preparation for Storage

The transformer/reactor can be stored with its accessories if the following conditions are met:
The deposit area must be designed according to the weight of the transformer/reactor.
Sufficient safety (oil tray) must be present at oil loss.
Monitoring and notification of gas loss must be warranted.
Access to the tank interior must be present for partially filled transformers to measure
the moisture content.
Entry of moisture into the tank interior/insulation oil must be prevented by timely
replacement of gas bottles or attachment and maintenance of dehydrating breathers.
To prevent corrosion damage in the accessories, place desiccants with them.
Corrosion protection of the transformer/reactor and accessories must be verified
regularly.
The accessories must be packed suitably for long-term storage.
WARNING
The transformer, bushings and steel frames for the cooling system must be earthed at
the intended earthing connections permanently and professionally.
4.8.2 Storage of the Heavy Part

The heavy part must be placed on a flat and level foundation with the respective permissible
weight load.
4.8.2.1 Storage of transformers/reactors without or partially filled with oil

NOTE
Start of storage is the time after completion of the arrival inspection.
Temporary storage < 3 months

If the transformer cannot be installed and filled with oil immediately, the heavy part, filled
with dry air (possibly also without automatic pressure controller), can be stored for up to 3
months.
For this type of storage, it must be ensured that the heavy part is always filled with dry air at
an overpressure of 0.1 and 0.3 bar. Use of an automatic pressure controller is recommended.
A pressure vacuum indicator must be installed in a place that can be easily viewed from the
ground.
The gas pressure in the transformer/reactor and bottle should be inspected and recorded
every day for the first five days. This should preferably be done at the same time of the day.
After this period, the frequency of recordings can be reduced to once per week if no obvious
leakages occur.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Measures Inspection
period
Sight inspection of the transformer and attachment parts for damage weekly
Corrosion protection inspection monthly
Oil analysis (recommendation, operator's own responsibility) as required
Checking for oil leakage weekly
Cleaning the transformer and its components (e.g. ventilator, cooler) (operator's own as required
responsibility)
Inspection of the dehydrating breather (oil sump and desiccant) weekly
Tab. 4-2 Measures for temporary storage < 3 months
Temporary storage 3-18 months

At a storage duration between approx. 3 and 18 months, empty or partially filled
transformers/reactors must be filled with oil up to a level of approx. 200 mm below the
cover. The remaining space is to be filled with dry air (overpressure). Use of an automatic
pressure controller and application of a humidity indicator is recommended (if not present
yet). A pressure vacuum indicator must be installed in a place that can be easily viewed from
the ground.
This procedure requires filling with new filters and new oil with a breakdown voltage > 60 kV
(IEC 60422) and a humidity < 10 ppm (IEC 60422).
Repeated evacuation is not required if the dew point is in the acceptance range of the
humidity ratio diagram (Fig. 4-9) and the oil is drained and treated again before actual
commissioning. For oil filling, see the instructions in chapter 5.3.
The desiccant used for the transport must be removed before evacuation/oil filling.
Measures Inspection
period
Sight inspection of the transformer and attachment parts for damage weekly
Control cabinet function Ventilator function (if attached) monthly
Corrosion protection inspection annually
Oil analysis (recommendation, operator's own responsibility) annually
Checking for oil leakage monthly
responsibility)
Inspection of the dehydrating breather (oil sump and desiccant) monthly
Inspection of the automatic pressure controller 1 with recording of pressure in the storage every two weeks
bottles and transformer
Tab. 4-3 Measures for temporary storage 3-18 months
1 When attaching the automatic pressure controller for long-term storage, install a pressure gauge
with an electrical contact device that emits a warning when the fill gas pressure in the tank drops
below 30 mbar or when the bottle pressure reaches < 15 bar.
Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Long-term storage > 18 months

For long-term storage as of approx. 18 months, the transformer/reactor coil must be
completely filled with oil (for oil filling, see chapter 5.3 oil filling).
Measures Inspection
period
Regular oil level inspection at the conservator monthly
Regular replacement of the silica gel fillings at the dehydrating breather as required
Control cabinet function Ventilator function (if attached) monthly
Regular pump run monthly
Switching through the tap changer / de-energized tap changer according to the tap changer according to
manufacturer's indications with insulation oil only manufacturer
Corrosion protection must be verified regularly and repaired if required annually
Regular oil samples for verification of the operational condition of stored transformers must be annually
taken
The transformer and its components (e.g. ventilator, cooler) should be cleaned according to as required
degree of contamination at the operator's own responsibility.
Tab. 4-4 Measures for long-term storage > 18 months
Assembly of the transformer with cooling system (if present)

The transformer must be assembled completely (incl. cooling system) according to the
manufacturer’s instructions, evacuated and filled with oil.
Assembly of the cooling system (separate from the transformer/reactor)

If the cooling system is set up separately from the transformers (e.g. for reasons of space),
the two radiator banks must be set up opposing and connected to each other via the lower
manifold line. A conservator with dehydrating breather dimensioned for the cooling system
is installed to one of the two cooling blocks. For more instructions, see operating
instructions of the manufacturer (set-up of cooling system for long-term storage).
4.8.2.2 Storage of oil-filled transformers/reactors

When storing oil-filled transformers/reactor coils, perform the following measures no matter
how long they are stored.
Measures Inspection
period
Oil level inspection at the conservator monthly
Replacement of desiccant in the dehydrating breather as required
Function of the control cabinet2 monthly
Ventilator function (if attached)2 monthly
Pump run2 monthly
Switching through the tap changer2 / de-energized tap changer according to the tap changer according to
manufacturer's indications with insulation oil only manufacturer
Corrosion protection inspection annually
Oil analysis (recommendation, operator's own responsibility) annually
responsibility)
2 not required in the first 3 months

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Tab. 4-5 Storage of oil-filled transformers/reactors
Assembly of the transformer with cooling system (if present)

The transformer must be assembled completely (incl. cooling system) according to the
manufacturer’s instructions, evacuated and filled with oil.
Assembly of the cooling system (separate from the transformer/reactor)

If the cooling system is set up separately from the transformers (e.g. for reasons of space),
the two radiator banks must be set up opposing and connected to each other via the lower
manifold line. A conservator with dehydrating breather dimensioned for the cooling system
is installed to one of the two cooling blocks. For more instructions, see operating
instructions of the manufacturer (set-up of cooling system for long-term storage).
4.8.3 Storage of the Accessories

4.8.3.1 General
Accessories must be professionally stored if they are not installed right after arrival at the
destination. The following general and special storage instructions of the manufacturer (see
chapter 9 “Technical Documentation of the Heavy Part and Accessories") must be observed.
Pursuant to Tab. 4-7 the heavy part and accessories are categorized in storage categories,
and the recommended inspection during storage (see Tab. 4-8) should be observed.
Categories Description
A Common interior storage: Protection from moisture and dust
B Storage outside: Protection from rain
C Storage outside: no protection required
Tab. 4-6 Storage categories
Parts Category
Heavy part C
Valves B
Bushing A
Bushing pots A
Conservator A
Pipelines and brackets A
Fans A
Oil pumps A
Seals A
Small accessories (protection devices, etc.) A
Tab. 4-7 Recommended storage categories
Parts Inspection Period

Diverter switch Switching through the complete control range 6 months
Fans Operation for at least one hour 6 months
Oil pumps Operation for at least one hour (built-on and oil filled) 6 months
Control cabinet Verification if heating is in operation (only for storage of more than three 3 months
months)
Motor drive Verification if heating is in operation (only for storage of more than three 3 months
months)
Tab. 4-8 Inspections during storage

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
4.8.3.2 Storage notes for accessories

ATTENTION
For recommendations on storage notes from the manufacturers, see chapter 9 "Technical
Documentation of the Heavy Part and Accessories". All parts/boxes with the designation
FRAGILE must be stored inside.
Bushings
Bushings must be transported in boxes. The lower part is welded into plastic and desiccant is
included.
Before storage, the lower part must be inspected for signs of moisture. If the plastic
packaging is damaged, it must be replaced with the desiccant. It is recommended that the
condenser bushings be stored in a dry and clean inner room, if possible in the original
transport boxes.
The front end of oil-filled bushings must be stored lifted at least at an angle of 20°.
The silver-plated surfaces of the bushings must be protected against environmental

influences.
For condenser bushings both the upper part and the lower part (transformer side) must be
protected appropriately in containers.
ATTENTION
If bushings are horizontally stored, they must be placed vertically at least for 12/ 24
hours before rated voltage/test voltage may be applied. At horizontal storage of one year
or more, vertical setup for one week is prescribed.
Small accessories
Boxes with seals, bushing connections, tape, paint material, sealing paste, protective devices,
etc. must be stored in a dry and clean inner room.
Cooling facility
Water cooling facilities must be protected from frost or completely emptied on the water
side, see cooling system description.
Fans
Fans must be stored in a dry, clean, dust- and vibration-protected place.
Motor drive for switch

The motor drive is delivered disassembled. It must be stored in a dry and clean place. To
avoid formation of condensate, the cabinet heating must be switched on if storage exceeds
3 months.
Pumps
Proper assembly of the connection plug and proper fit of the blind plugs must be verified for
pumps. The pump motors must be lifted from the floor and stored protected from weather.
Storage outside is possible for a duration of up to 3 months, then interior storage is required.
If the pumps are filled with oil for long-term storage, no periodic pump operation is required.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Control and switching cabinets

Control and switching cabinets must be stored in a dry inner room. Corrosion of relays and
other components may occur from condensation. To avoid formation of condensate, the
cabinet heatings must be switched on if storage exceeds 3 months.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
5 Assembly, evacuation and oil filling

The following explanations are guidelines for trained customer personnel. However, the
plant can only assume any warranty for proper assembly, evacuation and oil filling of the
transformer/reactor if the work is performed by or under instruction of a specialist sent by
the plant.
Siemens does not assume any responsibility for work not performed professionally or work
performed unsupervised by own staff.
The local and national safety provisions must be strictly observed (see chapter 3).
The unit was dried under high vacuum and heat in the plant and oil-impregnated under high
vacuum in a dedicated tank. The high quality of dielectric and mechanic hardness must be
retained during assembly on the plant.
The same standards and specifications as in the manufacturer's plant apply for evacuation
and oil filling of the transformer/reactor. When the transformer/reactor is taken into
operation, it must be in the same condition as during the acceptance test in the
manufacturer's plant.
Before evacuation and oil filling, ensure that all inspections at arrival/storage were
performed properly.
NOTE
If an active part must be inspected, this inspection should take place right before
evacuation and oil filling if possible.
DANGER
of > 20 %.
entering the tank.
Unrestricted © Siemens AG 2017 5–1

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
5.1 Assembly preparation
5.1.1 Assembly order

The assembly steps and their order must be planned beforehand to prepare for assembly.
The components to be installed must be provided at the site of assembly according to the
assembly order.
Check all necessary components for completeness and damage again for provision for
assembly and remove any defects. Re-order defective or missing components.
ATTENTION
To optimize the installation and commissioning times, choose the assembly order of the
components so that the opening time of the transformer/reactor is as low as possible.
The manufacturer's plant recommends the following assembly sequence:

Insulation resistance measurement
Noise muffler
Assembly of devices and accessories before evacuation and oil filling
Steel frame for cooling system and conservator
Cooling system and pipe lines with shut-off devices
Radiators/coolers (oil-air-coolers/oil-water-coolers)
Radiator frame/cooler frame
Pumps
Fans
Conservator with bracket and pipe lines with shut-off devices
Dehumidifier and pipe lines with shut-off devices
Buchholz relay/pressure surge relay
Safety relay for on-load tap-changer
Pressure relief valve
Turrets and penetrations
Evacuating the transformer/reactor
Filling the transformer/reactor with oil
Assembly of devices and accessories after/during evacuation and oil filling
Switch drive (motor-drive mechanism, angle gears, connection shafts)
Control cabinet
Control cabinets
Protective devices (oil temperature, winding temperature, resistance
thermometer, gas sensor)
Wiring
Three-phase grounding rail and support
Overvoltage discharge
Pipeline between the safety relay of the on-load tap-changer and conservator
Perform final inspections and checks (see chapter 1 Commissioning)

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
DANGER
The tank, steel frame for the separate conservator (if present) and separate cooling
system (if present) must be grounded permanently and professionally at the intended
ground connections (see chapter 4.7 Earthing Diagrams for Transformers/Reactor Coils).
5.1.2 Inspecting the seals

All seals are labeled according to the numbers in the dimension drawing and assigned to the
components accordingly. Before installation, the seals must be inspected for damage and
cleaned or replaced if necessary.
5.1.2.1 Tank-cover connection
1 Sealing bar (spacer bar)

2 Cover flange
3 Rubber seal (sealing cord - oval)
4 Tank flange
Fig. 5-1 Tank-cover connection

2 Cover flange
3 Tank flange
4 Rubber seal
5 Heat-resistant spacer - asbestos-free
Fig. 5-2 Tank-cover connection, welded

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
This sealing system is based on the use of rubber seals in furrows. It consists of an oil- and
heat-resistant synthetic rubber NBR (or equal).
5.1.2.2 Turrets, assembly and inspection openings
1 Seal in groove
Fig. 5-3 Turrets Fig. 5-4 Assembly and inspection openings
These sealing systems are based on the use of rubber seals in grooves. They consist of an oil-
and heat-resistant synthetic rubber NBR (or equal).
The seals can have a rectangular or round profile.
5.1.2.3 Pipeline flange connections
1 Flange
2 Blind flange
3 Flat seal (asbestos-free)
Fig. 5-5 Pipeline connections
This sealing system is based on the principle of level contact surfaces.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
5.1.3 Inspection of the pipelines and flanges

The pipelines must be inspected for infiltrated moisture and corrosion before setup and
flushed with insulation oil if required.
Associated pipelines are marked at the flanges by the same engraved figures.
1 Indices
Fig. 5-6 Identification of associated flanges
The flanges must be clean and oil-free (remove oil with solvent).
Sealing paste must be brushed on the flange side of each seal. The contacting sealing
surfaces are not treated.
Flange connections must be tightened evenly and crosswise. Any tension from this must be
removed by installing or removing seals.
If only one seal is used, only one side must be treated with sealing paste.
If any additional seals are inserted, sealing paste may be used to fasten the seals; however,
the compression force of the two outer seals will usually be sufficient to hold the additional
seal in place.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
5.1.4 Bolted joints and tightening torques
Fig. 5-7 Bolted joints

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Fig. 5-8 Tightening torques

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Tightening torques – special features
The following information on tightening torques are aligned with the materials used and
thus may deviate from the above information.
NOTE
Generally, the tolerances for torques may be -0 % / +10 %.
The torque indications for the threads only apply when lubricants like oil and grease for
screw material of stainless steel (A2-70 or higher quality) or steel (8.8 or higher quality)
are used.
Brackets and supports

If no explicit tightening torques are indicated on drawings or signs, the following values
apply for brackets and supports:
Thread Tightening torque in Nm

M8 (5/16") 12
M10 (3/8") 24
M12 (1/2") 41
M16 (5/8") 101
M20 (3/4") 196
M24 (1") 337
Tab. 5-1 Tightening torques for brackets and supports
Fig. 5-9 Brackets and supports
Radiators and shut-off flaps

The values below only apply for steel flanges, O-ring and centellen seals.
Thread Tightening torque Tightening torque

for half-nut (part 7) in Nm for nut (part 9) in Nm
M16 (5/8“) 85 71
Tab. 5-2 Tightening torques for radiators and shut-off flaps

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
1 Nut
2 Half-nut
Fig. 5-10 Radiators and shut-off flaps
Tank, cooler and pipeline connections

The values below only apply for steel flanges, o-ring and centellen seals.

M10 (3/8") 40
M12 (1/2") 55
M16 (5/8") 110
M20 (3/4") 150
Tab. 5-3 Tightening torques for pipeline connections
Fig. 5-11 Pipeline connections
Electrical connections
The values below apply for electrical connections at penetrations.
M10 (3/8") 20
M12 (1/2") 40
M16 (5/8") 80
Tab. 5-4 Tightening torques for electrical connections
NOTE
The tolerances for tightening torques here are –0 % / +20 %.
Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
5.2 Assembly
5.2.1 Insulation resistance measurement

Perform insulation resistance measurement at the earthing penetrations. The connection is
accessible either at the cover or the tank wall.
The recommended test voltage is 1kV. Values above 300 M are acceptable.
Check assembled components for tightness
Check screw connections for tightness
Examine flanges, blind flanges and shut-off devices for damage
5.2.2 Noise muffler

Insulation panels are installed at the tank to reduce the operating noise. These panels are
installed at the tank with rubber profiles.
5.2.3 Steel frame for cooling system and conservator

The transformer is equipped with a separate cooling plant conservator.
Attach steel frame to the foundation with adhesive anchor bolts. Level differences at the
foundation can be balanced out with boards.
Assemble all supports, brackets and cross bracings (see dimension drawing).
5.2.4 Radiators
Radiator frame
The transformer is equipped with two separate radiator banks. Height differences between
individual foundations can be balanced out with boards. Install all supports, brackets and
braces. Install the top and lower distributor lines. All parts must be dry and free of
condensation.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
1 Top collection pipe

2 Brackets
3 Radiators
4 Lower collection pipe
5 Cross brace
6 Frame
Fig. 5-12 Radiator bank
Radiators (directly attached)

Radiators must be assembled according to dimension drawing.
Remove blind flanges at radiator connections and radiator flaps only right before assembly.
It is recommended to place the radiators on the corresponding frames during preparation for
assembly.
Remove blind flanges from the radiator flaps at the distributor pipelines.
Clean seals and flanges and brush sealing paste on seals (see chapter 5.1.2).
Lift every radiator separately and place it correctly before the shut-off flaps.
Screw radiator to flaps crosswise and evenly.
Attach transverse bracings across all radiators.
ATTENTION
Loosen gland seal before opening or closing of the shut-off flap, then attach it again. In
the closed condition, the triangle at the flap points towards the flange marker; in the
open condition, the triangle tip is on the radiator side.
Overview
Detailed view
1 Vent
2 Oil drain
3 Brackets for fans
Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
4 Gland seal
Fig. 5-13 Radiators (Overview and detailed view)
5.2.5 Fans
Assemble fans according to dimension drawing and assembly instructions of the fan
manufacturer (see chapter 9).
5.2.6 Coolers and pumps

The cooling facility consists of oil/water/air coolers, oil pumps, water pumps, brackets,
pipeline system. Generally, all screws must be tightened manually first. After installation of
all components of the cooling system, the connections must be tightened with a torque
wrench.
Remove transport flanges from the coolers and check the cooler condition for dryness.
If there is any moisture or condensed water, flush cooler with pure and warm
transformer oil.
Install lower pipeline connections.
Install cooler brackets.
Install cooler according to dimension drawing.
Install lower cooler valves.
Install upper pipeline connections to the tank with the oil pumps.
Tighten screw connections of the pipeline, then screw cooler firmly to the brackets.
Install oil flow indicator.
Install water pipelines with check valves and water flow indicators.
NOTE
Also see assembly instructions of the cooler manufacturer in chapter 9.
5.2.7 Conservator and brackets

The conservator volume is designed based on the maximum oil expansion.
A Buchholz relay or several shut-off devices are installed in the connection line between the
cover and conservator.
ATTENTION
The shut-off devices must be open under all circumstances during operation.
When installing the Buchholz relay, observe that the arrow at the relay casing points
towards the conservator.
The conservator is usually equipped with a breathing pocket to prevent the oil from taking
up oxygen and to thus protect it from oxidation and moisture intake.
To protect the insulation oil from contamination by oil sludge from the conservator, the oil
line protrudes approx. 50 mm into it. The connection line for the air dehumidifier (breather)
ends right below the highest point of the conservator space.
A hand hole is intended for cleaning of the conservator space.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Install conservator brackets and place conservator according to dimension drawing.

Install conservator lines and breather lines, including Buchholz relay and safety relay of the
diverter switch according to dimension drawing (expansion line between conservator and
Buchholz relay must be installed after evacuation).
5.2.8 Turrets and penetrations

Remove transport lid and install bushing pot and penetrations according to instructions in
chapter 5.2.7 (also see dimension drawing and assembly instructions of the penetration
manufacturer in chapter 9).
5.2.8.1 Bushing pot – general

ATTENTION
If an assembly opening is opened, light overpressure of dry air must be applied to protect
the active part from moisture.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Remove transport lid from bushing pot.

Check pot (transformer, contamination, moisture, etc.) and clean the pot's inside.
Remove transport lid at the tank.
Remove desiccant below the transport lid.
Replace transport seal with a new one. Clean seal surface.
Check cable or connection lines within the tank.
Put pot on flange.
Evenly screw pot to flange.
Install earthing connection.
Only open penetration-side flange if the penetration is ready for installation.
5.2.9 Three-phase earthing rail

Install support for the three-phase earthing rail and the rail as indicated in the dimension
drawing. The lower rail end is attached to the provided earthing cam at the tank.
5.2.10 Overvoltage discharge

Install overvoltage discharge and associated components as follows:
Install brackets for discharge according to dimension drawing.
Install discharge.
Install tripping counter to tank wall with associated brackets.
Screw support to steel angles.
Install earthing cable/earthing rail and connect to the earthing connection of the
discharge and the tripping counter.
Earth tripping counter (earthing connection provided at the tank close to counter).
5.2.11 Pressure relief valve

Remove blind flange of the pressure relief valve at the transformer cover. Check seal and
sealing surface for cleanliness and install pressure relief valve (screw evenly and
diametrically to the flange).
1 Screw

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
2 Washer
3 Seal
4 Basic flange
Fig. 5-14 Pressure relief valve
5.2.12 Switch drive

Install switch drive according to dimension drawing.
The motor-drive mechanism assembly is disassembled for transport. The switches and drives
are locked in the same positions. After oil filling, the gears are installed again, the locks
removed and all shafts connected.
No part must be twisted during assembly!
Switch through to the end positions of either direction manually.
Also see assembly instructions of the switch manufacturer in chapter 9.
1 Angle gear
2 Bracket
3 Shaft
4 Switch connection
5 Screw connection
6 Joint
7 Motor drive
Fig. 5-15 Motor drive assembly
5.3 Inspection after assembly
5.3.1 Visual inspection

Correct position of all seals
Tight fit of all screws
Smooth running of fittings
Correct position of shut-off devices for the subsequent assembly process
Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Proper outer and inner paint
5.3.2 Electromechanic inspection

Mechanical and electrical function of the surveillance facilities
5.3.3 Inspection for leakages

Fill transformer with dry air (0.3 bar overpressure) and check for leakages

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
5.4 Evacuation and oil filling

5.4.1.1 Setup for evacuation and oil filling
Oil filling line 10 Safety relay

Transparent hose 11 Shut-off device, filling line
Vacuum line 12 Shut-off device, extraction line
Dry air line 13 Dry air bottle
1 Vent 14 On-load tap-changer (OLTC)
15 Oil filter facility
2 Valve for vacuum line
16 Oil filter connection, top
3 Main conservator chamber
17 Tank
4 Oil level indicator
18 Oil sample, bottom
5 Oil drain
6 Vacuum connection 19 Oil filter connection, bottom
7 Buchholz relay 20 Oil treatment facility
8 Slider 21 Oil tanker
22 Diverter switch conservator chamber
9 Dehydrating breather
Fig. 5-16 Schematic setup for evacuation and oil filling via transformer tank

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
5.4.2 Equipment for evacuation and oil filling

5.4.2.1 Equipment for Evacuation
Vacuum pump with air infiltration protection (final vacuum 0.05 mbar)
Vacuum meter/indicator
Vacuum hoses and lines
Shut-off devices
Suggested dimensions of the vacuum pumps and vacuum lines according to tank volume:
Tank volume Pump performance Vacuum line
< 50 m3 (6600 gal) 250 m3/h (1100 gal/min) 40mm (1 1/2”)
> 50 m3 (13200 gal) 500 m3/h (2200 gal/min) 50mm (2”)
> 100 m3 (26400 gal) 1000 m3/h (4400 gal/min) > 80mm (3”)
Tab. 5-5 Evacuation equipment
NOTE
The air infiltration protection prevents infiltration of moist air into the transformer tank
or insulation parts in case of failure or standstill of the vacuum pump. The evacuation
process can be assessed as not interrupted when the remaining pressure in the
transformer tank has not risen above 1 mbar. If the prescribed residual pressure is
reached again, at least 12 hours of evacuation time must follow.
5.4.2.2 Oil filling equipment

Oil treatment facility (the oil treatment facility is used to filter, degasify and dewater the
oil. Capacity: approx. 5 - 10 % of the total oil volume per hour)
Oil treatment tank (only when using oil barrels)
Oil test device
Oil hoses, oil lines and shut-off devices
Air drying facility/compressor/dry air
Suggested dimensions of the oil treatment pumps and oil lines according to tank volume:
Tank volume Performance of the oil treatment facility Oil line
< 50 m3 (6600 gal) 3000 l/h 25mm (1")
> 50 m3 (13200 gal) 5000 l/h 40mm (1 1/2 ")
> 100 m3 (26400 gal) 10000 l/h 50mm (2 ")
Tab. 5-6 Oil filling equipment
Recommendation:
The oil treatment facility should reach the following threshold values in a single run:
Breakdown voltage 60 kV
Oil gas content 3 Vol.-%
Oil temperature 40 °C
5.4.3 Insulating oil

For transformers and on-load tap-changers, the insulation and cooling liquid used usually is
mineral-oil-based transformer oil.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
The oil quality must meet the Siemens standards and customer specification.
New transformers must be filled with the oil delivered by the plant. If oil must be refilled, oil
of equal quality must be used (see oil product datasheet - mixing possibilities).
Refilling new oil on operating oil is possible if the operating oil has not aged too much. Aged
oils have a higher dissolving capacity than new oil. Therefore, it is recommended to
coordinate refilling with the manufacturer's plant.
ATTENTION
Synthetic insulation liquids (silicon and ester liquids) must not be mixed with mineral-oil-
based insulation oils.
5.4.3.1 Taking of oil samples

NOTE
We recommend sending the samples taken to the manufacturer's plant for examination.
Protocol for taking of oil samples, see chapter 15.
1 liter of the insulation medium each is needed for dielectrical-chemical oil examination and
for gas-chromatography oil examination.
NOTE
The sample containers should be clean 1-liter aluminum bottles with gas-tight plastic
screw closure and seal so that no air is taken in as the sample cools. Suitable sample
bottles are available from the manufacturer's plant.
ATTENTION
Only take the oil sample with glass bottles when the sample temperature at sampling is
guaranteed to be greater or the same as the storage or transport temperature.
Otherwise, coordinate with the examination lab.
Samples for gas analyses must be taken without interruption in the overflow procedure
only to prevent contact between the insulation medium and the atmosphere as much as
possible. In every case, notice the temperature inside the oil jet in the test protocol.
Sampling points
for gas analysis examinations: usually tank "top"
for other examinations: usually tank "bottom"

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Procedure when taking oil from the oil sampling valve

1. Screw a threaded connection piece with seal, hose attachment and oil-proof hose (30 - 50
cm long) onto the threaded piece of the oil sampling valve.
2. Open the oil sampling valve and let about two to three liters of oil (from the outlet
pipeline) flow into the oil collection vessel.
3. Push the hose into the oil sample bottle to the ground. First fill the bottle slowly from the
bottom, then let oil flow strongly until oil at a volume of 2 to 3 times the bottle content has
flowed over into an oil collection container.
4. Last, reduce the oil flow again and draw the bottle from the hose downwards with the oil
sampling valve still open. Close the bottle at once when it was drawn from the hose.
5. Then close the oil sampling valve again properly.
6. Dispose of discharged oil in the oil collection vessel properly.
Procedure when taking oil samples from the conservator of the diverter switch
1. Open the drain slide valve at the conservator diverter switch.
2. Work steps 1-6 from “Taking oil from the oil sampling valve”.
NOTE
Oil samples must only be taken with a suitable sampling valve in case of direct oil filling
to the transformer tank from oil barrels.
1 Transformer tank
2 Oil sampling valve
3 Hose
4 Oil sample bottle
5 Oil collection vessel
Fig. 5-17 Oil sampling with oil sample bottle and oil collection vessel

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
5.4.3.2 Oil measurements

Transformer oil and cellulose-insulation materials are - like all organic substances -
chemically changed in operation under the influence of temperature, oxygen, moisture and
catalytic metal transformer components. These procedures together are called aging and
influence the transformer's service life.
Regular inspections are required to ensure continuous readiness for operation of a

transformer over an extended period.
We recommend taking oil samples every 5 operating years or before any larger revisions and
to examine them for the following characteristics:
Oil examinations According to standard

Color number ISO 2049 / ASTM D1500
Appearance IEC 60422 / ASTM D1524
Neutralization value IEC 62021 / ASTM D974
Breakdown voltage IEC 60156 / ASTM D1816
Water content IEC 60814 / ASTM D1533
Diel. Dissipation factor at 50 Hz IEC 60247 / ASTM D924
Interfacial tension EN 14210 / ASTM D971
Dissolved Gas Analysis (DGA) IEC 60567 / ASTM 3612
Furan analysis IEC 61198 / ASTM D5837
Inhibitor content IEC 60666 / ASTM D2668
Corrosive sulfur IEC 62535 / ASTM D1275B
Corrosive sulfur DIN 51353
Passivator content IEC 60666
Tab. 5-7 Recommended oil examinations
5.4.4 Reference times for evacuation and waiting times

The following times for evacuation and waiting times are reference times. They may be
adjusted depending on transformer under certain conditions with the previous consent of
the manufacturer plant.
Highest voltage for Minimum evacuation Waiting Waiting time (cable terminal box)
operating equipment time time
> 60 h under oil and < 60 h under oil or
(Um)
<= 48 h outside of oil > 48 h outside of oil
x 72,5 kV 12 h 16 h 12 h 16
72,5 kV < x 123 kV 12 h 24 h 16 h 36
123 kV < x 245 kV 24 h 48 h 24 h 48
245 kV < x 550 kV 48 h 60 h 24 h 48
x > 550 kV 60 h 72 h 24 h 48
Tab. 5-8 Reference times for evacuation and waiting times
NOTE
The filling speed must be set so that the vacuum in the transformer tank is retained. If
the vacuum deteriorates by more than 1 mbar, the time is counted again from the
beginning.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
5.4.5 Evacuation and oil filling of empty transformers
Fig. 5-18 Flow chart for oil filling of empty transformers under full vacuum

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Notes
Oil filling transformer with compensator conservator.

The tank must be evacuated and filled with oil using the installation instruction of the
manufacturer.
Oil filling of separate oil compartments under vacuum

All separate oil compartments should be filled as well when the tank is being filled with oil, if
possible. For this purpose, the shut-off devices in the oil filling pipes must be open. If there is
no filling pipe available, oil is filled in through suitable connections.
Dehydrating breather
After oil filling is completed, the breathers have to be installed and the slide valves set to
their operating position.
Waiting period and venting

After breaking the vacuum, the transformer has to be vented. After this, a waiting time must
be complied with. If the transformer is equipped with oil circulating pumps, these should be
switched on for approx. 2 to 3 hours after venting. At the end of the waiting period, the
transformer has to be vented again.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
5.4.6 Evacuation and oil filling of partly filled transformers
Fig. 5-19 Flow chart for oil filling of partly filled transformers under full vacuum

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
5.4.7 Evacuation and oil filling of partly filled transformers

(at Um 123 kV and ON-cooling)
The tank is tightly closed (For shipment, the transformer was filled with dry purified gas
(nitrogen or air).) or – the tank breathes through the dehydrating breathers
Fig. 5-20 Flow chart for oil filling of partly filled transformers without vacuum

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
5.4.8 Evacuation and oil filling of cable terminal boxes 72.5 kV
Fig. 5-21 Flow chart for oil filling of cable terminal boxes

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Notes
Oil-filled cable terminal boxes are chambers attached to the transformer, in which the
electrical connection between the winding end lead and the cable to the switchboard or
overhead line is made. The oil in the cable terminal box is separated from the oil in the
transformer tank. This separation may either use drip-proof or vacuum-tight seals.
If it is drip-proof, all cable terminal boxes have to be connected to the transformer tank
before the vacuum is applied.
If it is vacuum-tight, the cable terminal boxes have to be treated like the transformer.
1 Separate chamber for oil-filled cable terminal box

2 Sealing of winding end lead between tank and cable terminal box.
3 Connection to winding
4 Connection to cable
5 Cable
Fig. 5-22 Principle sketch for drip-proof seal
1 Separate chamber for oil-filled cable terminal box

2 Sealing of winding end lead between tank and cable terminal box.
3 Connection to winding
4 Connection to cable
5 Cable
Fig. 5-23 Principle sketch for vacuum-tight seal

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
6 Commissioning
6 Commissioning
The relevant technical rules and accident prevention regulations (chapter 3) must be
complied with for commissioning, operation and maintenance.
6.1 General
It is recommended that transformers be commissioned by specialists in the manufacturer's
plant.
If commissioning is performed by external staff, proceed pursuant to the test reports for
electrical tests, mechanical tests and visual inspections (chapter 4.6). The individual
measures must be recorded on the commissioning protocol and submitted to the
manufacturer's plant in writing directly after completion of commissioning.
NOTE
No warranty can be assumed by Siemens for any damage resulting from improper
commissioning (pursuant to test reports).
6.2 Inspections before Commissioning

Before commissioning of the transformer/reactor, the following inspections must be
observed to prevent personal injury and damage to equipment and to ensure proper
operation of the transformer/reactor. The tests/inspections must be performed and
documented pursuant to the transformer/reactor-specific commissioning protocol.
DANGER
To avoid personal injury, observe the indicated warning notes before any operation of
the load control switch.
6.2.1 Overview of possible Inspections

The following list includes possible test and inspection points. Depending on type and build
of the transformer, these inspections are to be performed before commissioning.
NOTE
For the specific tests for the individual transformer/reactor, see the commissioning
protocol (see chapter 15).
Measurements at the transformer/reactor

Insulation impedance
Core insulation
Coil impedances
Circuit inspection
Magnetizing current (HV)
Transmission (with measuring bridge or voltmeter)
Transformer (transmission, terminal clamps)
Oil analysis (dielectric strength, gas content, loss factor, water content)

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
6 Commissioning
Inspection of bushings
Undamaged and clean, spark path set
Loss factor measurement
Output factor measurement
Monitoring system
Inspection of the on-load tap changer/de-energized tap changer

On-load tap changer
Motor drive
Lock switch - crank or motor drive
Limit switch
Counter for switch operations
Over-current relay
De-energized tap changer (end stop mechanic, lock electric)
Overpressure protection inspection
Tap guard
Inspection of the cooling facility (cooling system, radiators, fans)

Motor rated output/rated current
ACTUAL current intake
Motor protection switch
Rotating direction
Over-current relay
Cooler control
Fan control (with temperatures)
Inspection of the protection and monitoring facilities

Temperature
Thermal replica
Oil flow (transformer, tap changer)
Oil pressure (transformer, tap changer, cooler)
Oil level minimum - maximum contact inspected (transformer, tap changer in the conservator)
Air flow
Water flow
Water pressure
Gas meter
Buchholz (alarm contacts - triggering contacts)
Controller protection
Inspection of the protective facilities (plant protection/transformer protection)
Other Inspections
Earthings (shielding, star points, delta coil, etc.)
Earthing system (tank, cooling system, pipeline, bushings, conservator)
Venting (transformer, bushing, tap changer)
Checking for leakage (transformer, cooling system)
Putting locking elements into operation (transformer with bushing, cooling system)
Inspection of breather filling (transformer, tap changer, terminal boxes, cooling system)
Paint (corrosion protection)
Heating (control cabinet, motor drive)

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
6 Commissioning
Other Inspections
Wiring (secondary wiring terminals)
Signage
Minimum clearance to adjacent parts
Star point (type of operation)
Search for loose parts at the transformer/cooler
6.2.2 Inspection of Oil Properties

In addition to various mechanical and electrical inspections, the oil must be inspected as well.
This must be done within 4 weeks before commissioning.
Oil samples must be taken for this purpose, and they must have the following properties.
Characteristic Measurement Insulation level voltage (kV)

method
Breakdown voltage (kV) IEC 60156 2,5 x < 72,5 72,5 x 170 x > 170
mm >55 >60 >60
Water content (mg/kg) IEC 60814 20 <10 <10
Diel. dissipation factor at IEC 60247 Max. 0,015 Max. 0,015 Max. 0,010
50 Hz and 90°C
Total gas content (%) IEC 60567 Max. 3*
* not specified in IEC 60422
Tab. 6-1 Minimum requirements according to I IEC 60422 at different insulation level voltages at commissioning
Characteristic Measurement Insulation level voltage (kV)

method
Breakdown voltage (kV) ASTM D1816, 2 x 69 69 < x < 230 230 x 345 x > 345
mm 45 52 55 60
Water content (mg/kg) ASTM D1533 Max. 20 Max. 10 Max. 10 Max. 10
Diel. dissipation factor at ASTM D94 Max. 0,40 Max. 0,40 Max. 0,30 Max. 0,30
60 Hz and 100°C (%)
Total gas content (%) ASTM D2945 - - 0,5 or in 0,5 or in
agreement agreement
with with
manufacturer’s manufacturer’s
plant plant
Tab. 6-2 Minimum requirements according to IEEE C57.106 at different insulation level voltages at commissioning
ATTENTION
If the minimum/maximum values for the insulation medium are not complied with, the
insulation medium must be treated again (in the cycle).
To receive reference values for later comparison purposes, we recommend performing a gas
chromatography oil analysis before switching on the transformer.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
6 Commissioning
6.3 Commissioning
When all inspections have been performed satisfactorily, the transformer can be taken into
operation after a certain downtime after the last oil manipulation.
6.3.1 Waiting times

The following waiting times must be complied with:
kV (Um) Down time in hours

x < 72,5 16
72,5 < x 123 24
123 < x 245 48
245 < x 550 60
x > 550 72
Tab. 6-3 Min. waiting times
6.3.2 Commissioning steps

1. Transformer in idle operation
Application of the rated voltage to the transformer/reactor.
ATTENTION
Temperatures and the Buchholz relay must be monitored and inspected for vibration or
leakage during the one-hour idle operation. If the results are satisfactory, the
transformer can be loaded.
2. Loading the transformer/reactor

Transfer load to the OS/MS/US side and document
Inspect the motor drive and counter positions
Switch on-load tap changer to all positions under load
Document maximum activation
Check earth fault operation (if present)
ATTENTION
If the completely assembled transformer is not connected to the mains right after
completion of the inspections for commissioning, the control cabinet and motor drive
cabinet (if applicable) must be powered to warrant function of the thermostat-controlled
heating. This measure is required to prevent too low temperatures or condensation in
the cabinet, which may lead to damage to the devices.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
7 Operation
7 Operation
7.1 Type Designations, Measurements and Performance
7.1.1 Type designations

7.1.1.1 General
The following type designation format consisting of a combination of code letters and code
numbers is used by Siemens for transformers and reactors not falling into the category of
"small transformers".
The type designation is carried out using letters (A) and figures (N) in blocks according to the
following schema. Within blocks A and N places which are not required can be omitted
starting from the right-hand side. For the purposes of data processing the data has to be
entered with after-point alignment i.e. places which have been omitted remain empty.
Fig. 7-1 Type designation
Example for type designation:

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
7 Operation
Fig. 7-2: Example for type designation
7.1.1.2 Main rating

Key to the 1st character position (code letter): Type of transformer or reactor
Code letter Description

D Three-phase - reactors with iron limbs3
E Single-phase – power transformer
G Three-phase - reactors without iron limbs
H Single-phase - reactors without iron limbs
L Single-phase - reactors with iron limbs
M Three-phase - autotransformer
N Single-phase - autotransformer
T Three-phase – power transformer, neutral earthing transformer, earthing transformer
Z not defined; see plain text in inquiry, order etc.
Tab. 7-1 1st character position (code letter): Type of transformer or reactor
Key to the 2nd character position (code letter): Insulating material and cooling method
Cooling method to VDE 0532, Part

Code letter. Insulating material (=inner coolant)
2
A Silicone oil KNAN
B Silicone oil KNAF
F Mineral oil OFAF / ODAF
G Cast resin AN
H Air (thermal class B, F or H. See VDE 0532, Part 2, Table 3) AN
L Mineral oil ONAF
3 Also applies to a starting transformer with air gaps in the iron core
Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
7 Operation
M Installation under mineral oil ---

P Air (thermal class A or E. See VDE 0532, Part 2, Table 3) AN
Q Air (thermal class A or E. See VDE 0532, Part 2, Table 3) AF
R Mineral oil ODAF (radiator cooling)
S Mineral oil ONAN
T Mineral oil OFAN / ODAN
U Air (thermal class B, F or H. See VDE 0532, Part 2, Table 3) AF
W Mineral oil OFWF / ODWF
X Cast resin AF
Z not defined; see plaintext in inquiry, order etc.
Tab. 7-2 2nd character position (code letter): Insulating material and cooling method

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
7 Operation
Identification for cooling method:

Internal cooling External cooling
1stletter 2nd letter 3rd letter 4th letter
Cooling medium Circulation Cooling medium Circulation
A, O, K, L N, F, D A, W, I N, F
Tab. 7-3: Identification for cooling method
A Air
W Water
N Natural
F Forced (oil not directed)
D Forced-directed oil
O Mineral oil or synthetic insulating liquid with fire point < 300 °C
K Insulating liquid with fire point > 300 °C
L Insulating liquid with no measurable fire point
Key to the 3rd character position (code letter): Variability

A Voltage not variable
B Variable through de-energized tap changer and reconnect ability under or above the cover
Variable through phase-on-load tap changer, de-energized tap changer and reconnect ability under
C
or above the cover
Variable through neutral end tap changer, de-energized tap changer and reconnect ability under or
D
above the cover
E Reconnect able tappings on dry-type transformers
F Variable through phase-on-load tap changer and de-energized tap changer
G Variable through neutral-end tap changer and de-energized tap changer
H Plunger core, hydraulically actuated
K Reconnect able tappings inside or outside tank
L Variable through neutral-end tap changer and reconnect ability under or above the cover
M Variable through phase-on-load tap changer and reconnect ability under or above the cover
P Phase-on load tap changer
R Variable magnetic coupling
S Neutral-end-on-load tap changer
T Plunger core, mechanically actuated
U De-energized tap changer
V DC premagnetization
Z For data regarding variability, refer to the plaintext
Tab. 7-4 Key to the 3rd character position (code letter): Variability

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
7 Operation
Key to the 4th character position (code letter): Intended application

A Starting of electrical machines
B Mine (flameproof – and / or explosion-proof device)
E Neutral earthing transformer, earth-fault relay, earth-fault current-limiting
F Electrostatic filter
G Generator protection
H HVDC – converter installation
J Industry – rectifier station; direct current drive
K Short-circuit - test; short-circuit current-limiting
L Charging current - compensation
M Generator transformer (only in the case of SN 100 MVA)
System transformer (only in the case of SN 100 MVA) or normal use (in the case of SN < 100
N
MVA)4
P High-voltage test
R Ripple-control system, interphase transformer system
T Installation on traction vehicles
U Traction substation for contact wire supply
V Desalinization plants
W Electric furnace
X DC - smoothing
Z Not defined; see plain text in inquiry, order etc.
Tab. 7-5 Key to the 4th character position (code letter): Intended application
Key to the 5th and 6th character position (code number): Size (kVA rating for
transformers, kVAr rating for reactors)
5 th character position 6 th character position

Code number5 Power of ten Code number5 Multiplier (area)6
0 100 VA = 1 VA 0 1.00 (0.895 to 1.118)
1 101 VA = 10 VA 1 1.25 (1.119 to 1.414)
2 102 VA = 100 VA 2 1.60 (1.415 to 1.788)
3 103 VA = 1 kVA 3 2.00 (1.789 to 2.236)
4 104 VA = 10 kVA 4 2.50 (2.237 to 2.806)
5 105 VA = 100 kVA 5 3.15 (2.807 to 3.549)
6 106 VA = 1 MVA 6 4.00 (3.550 to 4.472)
7 107 VA = 10 MVA 7 5.00 (4.473 to 5.612)
8 108 VA = 100 MVA 8 6.30 (5.613 to 7.099)
4 can be omitted, if the 4th place is omitted

5 A tenth of the value of the number formed from both of the reference numbers is roughly the
common logarithm of the unit rating in VA (in case of transformers) or VAr (in case of reactors)
6 Standard number series R10 to DIN 323

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
7 Operation
9 109 VA = 1000 MVA 9 8.00 (7.100 to 8.949)

Tab. 7-6 Key to the 5th and 6th character position (code number): Size (kVA rating for transformers, kVAr rating for
reactors)
Examples for the coding and the sizes:

reference numbers 42: 16 kVA or kVAr
reference numbers 76: 40 MVA or MVAr
reference numbers 62: 1600 kVA or kVAr
reference numbers 80: 100 MVA or MVAr
5 th & 6th Type rating ST 5th & 6th Type rating ST

character position (kVA, kVAr) character position (kVA, kVAr)
35 3 71 12500
37 5 72 16000
40 10 73 20000
42 16 74 25000
43 20 75 31500
45 30 76 40000
47 50 77 50000
49 75 78 63000
50 100 79 80000
51 125 80 100000
52 160 81 125000
53 200 82 160000
54 250 83 200000
55 315 84 250000
56 400 85 315000
57 500 86 400000
58 630 87 500000
59 800 88 630000
60 1000 89 800000
61 1250 90 1000000
62 1600 91 1250000
63 2000 92 1600000
64 2500 93 2000000
65 3150 94 2500000
66 4000 95 3150000
67 5000 96 4000000
68 6300 97 5000000
69 8000 98 6300000
70 10000 99 8000000
Tab. 7-7 Examples for type rating S T

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
7 Operation
Key to the 7th and 8th character position (code number): Highest voltage for Equipment
Um (kV)
7th character position 8 th character position

Code number7 Power of ten Code number5 Multiplier (area)8
0 100 VA = 1 VA 0 1.00 (0.895 to 1.118)
1 101 VA = 10 VA 1 1.25 (1.119 to 1.414)
2 102 VA = 100 VA 2 1.60 (1.415 to 1.788)
3 103 VA = 1 kVA 3 2.00 (1.789 to 2.236)
4 104 VA = 10 kVA 4 2.50 (2.237 to 2.806)
5 105 VA = 100 kVA 5 3.15 (2.807 to 3.549)
6 106 VA = 1 MVA 6 4.00 (3.550 to 4.472)
7 5.00 (4.473 to 5.612)
8 6.30 (5.613 to 7.099)
9 8.00 (7.100 to 8.949)
7th & 8th Highest voltage for 7th & 8th Highest voltage for
character position equipment UM character position equipment UM
30 1.10 47 52
36 3.6 49 72.5
39 7.2 51 123
41 12 52 145
42 17.5 54 245
44 24 56 420
46 36 57 525
Tab. 7-8 Key to the 7th and 8th character position (code number): Highest voltage for Equipment U m (kV)
7 A tenth of the value of the number formed from both of the reference numbers is roughly the
common logarithm of the unit rating in VA (in case of transformers) or VAr (in case of reactors)
8 Standard number series R10 to DIN 323

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
7 Operation
7.2 Operation Behavior
7.2.1 Possibilities of parallel operation

Transformers are considered as operating in parallel if two voltage sides are connected in
parallel (VDE 0532).
Transformers to be connected in parallel must have the same phase displacement clock-hour
number irrespective of the connection. (A Yd5 transformer can for instance be paralleled
with Dy5.) Interconnect the terminals bearing identical markings.
Exception:
Transformers of clock-hour number 11 can be operated in parallel with transformers having
clock-hour number 5 provided that they are connected as shown in Tab. 7-9. The percent
impedance Uz of transformers to be connected in parallel should not deviate by more than
10 % from the mean value of the rated percent impedances of all units to be paralleled. No
additional measures such as the insertion of reactors to serve as additional inductances are
required in cases where the total load is such that the transformers having the lower
impedance voltage are never loaded with more than their rated currents. The smaller
transformer should preferably have the higher impedance voltage.
Transformers to be operated in parallel should preferably be equal in their rated voltage ratio
to within ± 0.5 %, or else be provided with voltage variability (on-load or off-circuit tap
changers). When power transformers with on-load tap changers are operated in parallel, the
requirement for uniform impedance voltage and voltage ratio cannot be met in all tap
changer positions. This problem can be solved by making the relative settings of the tap
changers dependent upon the load distribution. In spite of unequal impedance voltages and
equal voltage ratios of the transformers, the unit having the higher impedance voltage can,
by appropriate reduction of its voltage ratio, be caused to carry a load corresponding to its
rated power.
Required clock-hour Existing clock-hour Connect to conductors

number number HV side LV side
1L1, 1L2, 1L3 2L1, 2L2, 2L3
5 1U, 1V, 1W 2U, 2V, 2W
1U, 1W, 1V 2W, 2V, 2U
5 or 1W, 1V, 1U 2V, 2U, 2W
11
or 1V, 1U, 1W 2U, 2W, 2V
11 1U, 1V, 1W 2U, 2V, 2W
1U, 1W, 1V 2W, 2V, 2U
11 or 1W, 1V, 1U 2V, 2U, 2W
5
or 1V, 1U, 1W 2U, 2W, 2V
Tab. 7-9 Changing the clock-hour number by changing the transformer connection
Dangerously high circulating currents may occur when auto-transformers with on-load tap
changers are operated in parallel, particularly when using the tappings of low impedance
voltage. These currents must be suppressed by series-connected current-limiting reactors or
by parallel-connection by current dividers. Parallel operation of transformers whose rated
outputs are in a ratio of over 2:1 is not advisable owing to the possibly higher deviations of
the UX / UR ratios of the individual transformers. Larger deviations from the voltage ratio,
Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
7 Operation
impedance voltage and rated power ratio are permissible in cases where the transformers
will not be operated directly parallel on one busbar, but where parallel operation in a system
is involved.
7.2.2 Neutral-point load-carrying capacity

The neutral points of star/star-connected three-phase shell-type transformers, three-phase
five-limb transformers and three-phase transformer banks assembled from three single-
phase transformers should not be loaded unless a stabilizing winding is connected.
The neutral point on the high-voltage side of three-phase core-type transformers can be
loaded with 25 % of the rated current for the duration of 1.5 hours or with 20 % during max.
3 hours, provided that an arc-suppression coil is connected.
The low-voltage neutral point in four-conductor systems should not be loaded continuously
with more than 10 % rated current to maintain voltage symmetry (in lighting systems). The
neutral points of star/star-connected transformers with stabilizing windings for Sr / 3 can be
loaded with the full rated current, however not simultaneously. The neutral points of
star/delta or delta/star-connected transformers can be subjected to the full rated current.
The neutral point of the zigzag-connected winding of star/zigzag-connected transformers
can carry the rated current; the neutral of the star-connected winding can only be subjected
to the same loads as that of the star/star-connected transformer without stabilizing winding.
Earthing transformers (EdT) are often used in the following connection: zigzag/star plus
delta-connected stabilizing winding (for Sr / 3 of the Power winding) in star connection.
7.2.3 Unbalanced load

Unbalanced loads at liquid-filled transformers are permissible without time limitation
provided that the current in none of the phase conductors exceeds the rated value. This
means that 1.15 times the rated current is permissible in one of the Phase windings.
7.3 Load carrying capacity of oil-immersed transformers

A transformer continuously operated at rated power (S = Sn) under the conditions stipulated
in DIN VDE 0532 Part 1 and with a (weighted average) coolant temperature of 20 °C has a
normal life expectancy. In cases where the load S varies with time and/or the coolant
temperatures deviate from the specified values, it is possible to determine the permissible
transformer loads on the assumption of a normal use of life. In the case of oil-immersed
transformers below 100 MVA, DIN VDE 0536 specifies two different loads K1 and K2 as the
maximum permissible loads for a day to day life cycle (= 24 h). The current is limited to 1.5
times the rated current, and the hot-spot temperature of the winding must not exceed
140 °C. The oil temperature during an overload period is not a measure for the temperature
reached by the winding.
7.4 Permissible winding temperature rises

In accordance with DIN VDE 0532 Part 2, the following mean winding temperature rises,
determined by resistance measurement, are permissible in rated service:
7.4.1 Oil-immersed Transformers

Class A insulation
65 K for ON and OF cooling
70 K for OD cooling
Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
7 Operation
7.4.2 Dry-type transformers

Insulation class Permissible temperature rise in K
A 60
E 75
B 80
F 100
H 125 9, 150
Tab. 7-10 Permissible winding temperature rises over-excitation of transformers - over-excitation of transformers at dry-
type transformers
7.4.3 Over-excitation of transformers
U Voltage applied
f Frequency
Un Rated voltage of input side
fn Rated frequency
E Excitation
Fig. 7-3 Permissible short-time over-excitation of transformers
The maximum permissible over-excitation of a transformer depends on the maximum

permissible flux density (induction) in the iron core. An increase in induction causes an
increase in the no-load current and its harmonics as well as rising losses and consequently
rising thermal stress. Induction B is directly proportional to the applied voltage U and
inversely proportional to the frequency f:
U
B
f
In accordance with DIN VDE 0532 Part 1, the transformer is able to continuously carry its
rated currents under the following conditions:
At 105 % rated voltage and rated frequency or at applied rated voltage and a frequency
deviating by 2.5% from the rated frequency.
Fig. 7-3 shows the permissible duration of over-excitation of large transformers as a function
of the ratio
U fn
E
Un f
9Temperature rises exceeding 150 K may be agreed for certain insulants between the manufacturer
and the user.
Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
7 Operation
For frequency fluctuations not exceeding + 2.5 % it can safely be assumed that f fn.
In case of permanent over-excitation between 105 % and 110 %, the load current must be
reduced as shown in Fig. 7-4. Permanent over-excitation of 110 % is only permissible in the
no-load state of the transformer.
As far as unit transformers are concerned, this means that the generating sets must not be
started and stopped with the voltage regulator switched on and enabled. In manually
controlled plants the shunt-field rheostat setting should be reduced during shutdown. The
field-discharge switch can remain closed.
If transformers are coupled direct with generators and the load is suddenly thrown off, these
transformers can with-stand 1.4 times the rated voltage at their generator-side connections
for five seconds.
Under conditions of sudden load shedding, generator transformers with ratings up to 40
MVA and station service transformers connected to generators must be able to withstand
1.3 times rated voltage for five minute.
Fig. 7-4 Permissible long-time over-excitation between 100 % and 110 % (according to DIN VDE 0532, Part 1)
7.4.3.1 Overvoltage protection

Surge diverters or star-connected capacitors can be connected to the phase conductors of
the exposed side in order to protect the transformers against external over-voltages as may
be caused by switching operations, short-circuits, earth-faults and the effects of lightning.
If transformers, for instance for overhead power transmission lines, are likely to be subjected
to over-voltages but are not provided with overvoltage protectors, it must be checked with
the Sales Department whether such equipment should be installed.
Cables or loads connected directly to the low-voltage side of the transformers without
isolating points are usually sufficient to prevent, for instance, excessive over-voltages on the
low-voltage side in the event of high-voltage side earth-faults. The required capacitance
values can be looked up in the instruction manual of the transformer manufacturer or
obtained from the manufacturing plant.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
7 Operation
7.5 Troubleshooting
The following interferences are a general overview of possible interferences that may occur
at the transformer/reactor.
For detailed information, see the respective operating and assembly instructions for these
devices and components (see chapter 9).
Devices and Interference Possible cause Remedy

components
Buchholz relay Warning Triggered incorrectly Repeat test. Inspect contacts.
Oil loss Localize and remove oil loss

Bubbles after oil filling
Gas formation from Check if gas flammable. If not, vent.

internal defect Otherwise, gas formation measures
Take gas sample at Buchholz relay and
analyze gas
Triggered Oil loss Localize and remove oil loss
Very strong oil flow due to Take gas sample at Buchholz relay and
inner light arcs. analyze gas
Very strong gas formation Take gas sample at Buchholz relay and
due to internal defect analyze gas
(short-circuit in the core &
coil assembly)
Protective relay for Triggered Internal defect in the load Inspection of the load transfer switch
diverter switch transfer switch
Triggered incorrectly Inspect protective relay
Pressure relief valve Triggered Max. overpressure Inspection of the load transfer switch
for diverter switch exceeded or serious
internal defect Inspection of the shut-off elements
Closed shut-off element
towards the conservator
Pressure relief valve Triggered Closed shut-off element in Inspection of the pipelines and shut-off
for tank the conservator elements
Serious internal defect Inspection of core & coil assembly

Contact thermometer Warning when Overload Load reduction
for oil and coil 85/95°C is
temperatures exceeded Interference/defect of the Cooling system inspection
cooling system
Temperature monitor
Wrong temperature set Correct temperature settings
Resistor thermometer
Device defective Replace device
Indicator Triggers when Internal error Inspection of the core & coil assembly
thermometer 103/113°C is
exceeded Wrong temperature set Correct temperature settings
Thermal replica
Device defective Replace device

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
7 Operation

components
Oil level indicator for Warning when Malfunction of the Examined correctness of the
tank or diverter switch the minimum oil indicator display
level is undercut
not enough oil filled in refilling oil
Ambience temperature Ambience temperature

below the temperature measurement
range for the
design
Oil leakage Seal leakages

Oil level indicator for Warning when Malfunction of the Examined correctness of the
tank or diverter switch the maximum oil indicator display
level is exceeded
too much oil filled in Drain oil
Ambience temperature Ambience temperature measurement

below the temperature
range for the
design
Internal error (other Inspection of the core & coil assembly

protective or diverter switch
devices will trigger
at the same time)
Oil flow indicator Warning if oil Closed valve in pipe line Inspection of the pipelines and valves
flow is too low
Triggering of the motor
protection switch of the Inspection of the
oil pump motor protection switch
Water flow indicator Warning if water Closed valve in pipe line Inspection of the pipelines and valves
flow is too low
Triggering of the motor
protection switch of the Inspection of the
Water pump motor protection switch
Electronic breather Warning in case Heating outage Replace breather/repair heating
of device error
Breather with Desiccant beads Glass cylinder Replacement of glass cylinder and seals
desiccant beads discolor leaking/cracked
Desiccant beads Maintenance interval Replacement of desiccant beads

discolor from the exceeded
bottom Replacement of desiccant beads
High humidity
Desiccant beads Seal pipe lines, inspect breather seals,
discolor from the Humidity in the replace drying beads
top conservator, pipe lines
leaking, glass cylinder
leaking.
Protective spark path Flash-over Arcing horn bent. Check protective spark path distances
at bushings adjust if required.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
7 Operation

components
Terminal vanes at Discoloration of the Defective contacts Clean contact points
bushings connection parts Tighten screws.
Switching cabinet Electrical devices Humidity in the cabinet Increase cabinet heating
are not working too high. temperature
properly. Temperature in the Ventilate cabinet additionally.
cabinet too high.
Contacts corroded Seal cabinet door, install dust filter if
or contaminated. Water or dust in the required.
cabinet.
Motor drive for Drive cannot be No voltage at the motor Check supply line
diverter switch controlled by the protection switch
motor Motor protection switch Switch on motor protection switch
not activated
Motor protection Emergency stop button Reset emergency stop button.
switch triggers activated or caught.
during adjustment. Motor current too high Check if drive is hard to move with
due to overload or phase hand-crank. If there is any suspicion of
interruption. mechanical defect in the tap changer,
request plant installer.
Mechanical de- Cannot be operated Drive blocked Unblock drive, interior inspection of the
energized tap de-energized tap changer may be
changer required
Recommendation: Move de-energized
tap changer over all contacts repeatedly
every year.
Earth connection Earth connection Linkage to earth potential Replace present earth connection and
charred or too low set up additional earth connections.
separated
Impermissible current Remove current loops, make cross-
loops due to multiple section or present earth connections
earth connection. sufficiently large.
Air flow indicator Air flow missing or Protective grille icy or Clean protective grille, open frost flaps.
too low clogged.
Cooler clogged or badly Clean cooler

contaminated.
Fan motor interference Check current supply

(no or too low voltage, Repair fan
coil defective, bearing
damage).
Reverse rotating direction. Inspect
Wrong rotating direction. electrical connections and trigger
mechanisms.
Differential pressure Oil- or water Leakage in the oil/water Seal or repair cooler.
switch traces in the display circuit of the cooling
Oil-water component system.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
8 Maintenance and Inspection

Even and interference-free transformer operation mainly depends on regular and careful
monitoring and maintenance work.
Most of the maintenance work can be performed by operating personnel. Detailed notes on
performance of maintenance work can be taken from the different documents in the
transformer operating manual. For larger and more complicated sealing or assembly work
and load control switch revisions, we recommend to request special installers from the
Siemens manufacturer plant.
Maintenance and monitoring work must only be performed with the transformer/reactor
switched off and earthed.
If monitoring and maintenance work is performed by external staff, proceed pursuant to the
check list "maintenance work and electrical tests" (see chapter 15). The individual measures
must be recorded on the checklist and submitted to the manufacturer's plant in writing
directly after completion of the monitoring and maintenance work.
NOTE
No warranty can be assumed by Siemens for any damage resulting from improper
monitoring and maintenance.
8.1 Overview Monitoring and Maintenance Work

The following list includes possible monitoring and maintenance work. They may vary
depending on type and build of the transformer.
For the specific monitoring and maintenance work for the individual transformers, see the
check list "maintenance work and electrical tests" (see chapter 15).
NOTE
For the specific monitoring and maintenance work for the individual transformers, see
the check list "maintenance work and electrical tests" (see chapter 15).

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Checking for leaks and cleanliness

Transformer tank, cover, domes, Inspection of all flanges, seals and welds for oil leaks.
pipes Appearing leaks must be removed at once by tightening the screws,
replacing the respective seals or re-welding.
Re-welding must only be performed by experienced welders.
Cooling system with pipe In water cooling systems, the visible water surface in the oil sight pot
regularly needs to be checked for present traces of oil. If there are any traces
of oil, there is a suspected leak. In this case, the coolers must be removed
and overhauled. Then perform a tightness check pursuant to DIN 42 556!
Oil-water-coolers must be cleaned on the water side; in oil-air coolers, the
cooling ribs and protective screen must be cleaned.
Slide valves and fittings All slide valves and fittings must be checked for oil leaks. Leaks in the
stuffing box, if any, must be sealed by tightening the compression gland.
The stuffing box seal can be replaced when the slide valve is closed.
Bushings Bushings, bushing domes and pipes leading to the bushings must be
inspected for leaks. Depending on design and make, an oil level sight glass
may be attached to the bushing. The oil level in the sight glass must be
within the indicated tolerances. Refill oil at once in case of irregularities.
Water-cooled bushings are used for heavy-duty furnace transformers. The
insulation plate, insulation discs, seals and union nuts, as well as the water-
cooled copper bushings must be cleaned of dirt. The time of operation after
which the bushings must be cleaned cannot be indicated as a general value.
The cleaning intervals to be determined mainly depend on the local air
pollution. An average value is a cleaning interval of 6 months. Check the
pressure at the pressure gauge of HV bushings (if provided). It must be
within the thresholds of the pressure diagram. The bushing connections
must be checked for firm seat.
Cable box The cable box is usually connected to the main conservator. Non-stationary
transformers usually have a separate conservator. The oil levels in the
conservator or other vessels must be determined using the sight glasses or
oil level indicators and must correspond to the temperature marks on the
display devices according to the insulation oil temperature. If the oil level is
too low, the reason for the oil loss must be removed and dried new oil must
be filled in. The oil type of the refilling oil is to be taken from the oil test
certificate or an oil sign attached to the transformer in case of transformers
with inhibited oil filling. The cable box, including mounting frame and cable
sleeve, must be checked for leakage.
On-load tap changer Regrease coupling forks, coupling hubs and cardan joints with rubber
sleeves, where required. Check supply bearing for tightness and for interior
corrosion after removal of the cover. Check shut-off gear (if present) for
tightness and interior corrosion after removing the cover, and verify correct
position of the end stops. The flanges at the tap changer head and supply
bearing must be checked for oil-tightness.
Conservator with pipes (external) Check all sliders, flanges, sealing points and welding seams for tightness
against oil.
The dehumidifier must breathe correctly. If the desiccant (desiccant beads)
discolors in the glass cylinder from the top (for colors, see safety datasheet),
the pipelines, conservator or glass cylinder are not tight.
Conservator (internal) Whether inner cleaning is required can be seen by examination of an oil
sample from the oil sump of the conservator. Disassemble man-hole cover at
the front of the conservator. Clean interior of the conservator with cleaning
agent.
Oil level indicators The oil levels in the conservator or other containers must be determined
using the inspection glasses or oil level indicators and must correspond to
the temperature marks on the display devices according to the insulation oil
temperature. If the oil level is not sufficient, the reason for the oil loss must
be removed and dried new oil must be filled in. The oil type of the refilling
oil is to be taken from the oil test certificate or output sign.
When glass tubes are used as oil level indicator, clean them as follows:
Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Turn valve handle into shut-off position at the lower part. After turning out
of the oil drain screw, empty isolation liquid from the oil level tube into a
clean vessel. Remove upper part of the conservator, remove oil-level tube
and clean with new transformer oil. Do not use any aggressive cleaning
agents. Reassemble in reverse order.
Current transformer box Integrated current transformers either must be connected to measuring
instruments or short-circuited, e.g. in the transport condition. Every
converter secondary coil must be earthed at a clamp pursuant to the circuit
diagram. The preferred clamp for earthing is the clamp "k".
Monitoring devices The inspection glasses and contact rooms must be inspected for tightness
and freedom from corrosion. Vents and water drains must be cleaned.
Function tests
Dehydrating breather To prevent moisture from entering the conservator, the desiccant must be
replaced already if the layer of discolored active material at the top only has
the following thickness:
- approx. 3 cm for dehumidifier A DIN 42 567;
- approx. 7 cm for dehumidifier A DIN 42 562;
For this, see maintenance item "Conservator with pipelines (outside)".
Buchholz relay Mechanical operation of the warning and trigger float is to be performed
according to the Buchholz relay device description. The warning function
(gas alarm) is inspected effectively with the circuit breakers inserted.
When the warning triggers, the warning signal has to be received by the
control center, the circuit breakers must not trip. When testing the trigger
function, the circuit breakers must trigger or the generator separation must
become effective.
The respective messages in the control center must be verified.
The directional arrow points from the transformer/reactor to the
conservator.
Oil sludge formation

Strong aging of the oil can be recognized by dark discoloration. Such oils will
precipitate oil sludge. It collects at the bottom of the Buchholz relay and
impairs the function of the vane and the lower float for switch-off.
Connection space
The test and connection space must be inspected for condensate formation.
The venting openings of the connection space must be permeable.
Test facility
The Buchholz relay is equipped with a test device that permits separate
functional control of the two contact systems from the outside even if the
relay casing is completely filled with oil.
Warning: Push test button

The warning function (gas alarm) is inspected effectively with the circuit
breakers inserted. When the warning triggers, the warning signal has to be
received by the control center, the circuit breakers must not trip. Another
test option for the warning signal is slow pumping of air though the venting
valve.
Switch-off
Slowly turn test button to the stop in the direction of the arrow, then slowly
press it.
The switch-off test is performed effectively with the circuit breakers
inserted. When turning back the test button into the initial position (against
the direction of the arrow), the mechanism is unlocked again. The
respective messages in the control center must be verified.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Contacts
The protective gas tubes must be checked for correct position, correct
triggering and good contact transfer. We recommend replacing the contact
tubes after 10 years of operation.
See document "Two-float Buchholz relay“.
Diverter switch protection The load control switch protection in newer transformers are load control
switch protection relays, while older transformers have a blast protection.
The functional test of the protective devices must be performed according to
the device description. Performance switch tripping, generator de-excitation
and signaling in the control center when the load control switch protection
devices trigger must be inspected.
When the load control switch protection devices trigger, the transformer
must be switched off. Switching to warning is not permissible.
Check the load diverter switch protection relay

Push test button. The transformer circuit breakers must trigger. Then unlock
by pressing the button "operation" or turning the test button counter-
clockwise by about 90°.
The load control switch protection relay can only be reset at the device.
Test the blast protection

The destruction blade lever or plunger in the blast protection must be
manually lifted until the integrated snap switch triggers and the circuit
breakers in the transformer trigger. The snap switch remains in the lock
position. Then pull the snap switch head from the trigger position to the
operating position stop again. Check distance between destruction blade
and membrane. The distance at normal oil level in the conservator must be
about 5 mm at a membrane diameter of 490 mm and about 15 mm at a
membrane diameter of > 490 mm.
Oil level monitor transformer main The oil level monitor function must be tested by pressing the alarm contacts.
compartment Specifically watch out for swapped lines for max and min contacts.
Oil level monitor on-load tap The oil level monitor function must be tested by pressing the alarm contacts.
changer compartment Specifically watch out for swapped lines for max and min contacts.
Dial thermometers Adjustment with stem-type thermometer
Document the set temperature and indicate if the oil or coil temperature
was measured.
Coil temperature
The converter circuits of the thermal images must be closed and must not be
opened when the transformer is under voltage. The jumpers at the
converter must be open.
Function test
Adjustment of the dial thermometer is performed by heating the
disassembled temperature sensor in the oil or water bath. Temperature is
controlled by a rod thermometer.
Resistance thermometer The resistance thermometer must be checked for function. The impedance
at 0 °C = 100 .
Resistance increase = 0.38 /K. Resistance of the measuring line must be
observed.
Temperature monitor setting Record set temperature in °C. Triggering of the contact is audible by a
"Click".
Oil circulation pumps Before commencing any work at the oil circulation pumps, ensure that they
were switched off and secured against reactivation.
Maintenance is essentially limited to monitoring the bearings lubricated by
the transported liquid. If the operating conditions permit, remove the
bearing and clean the bearing as well as all flow paths at intervals of approx.
2 years or when there are any noticeable irregularities.
Fans Inspection

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Times indicated for required overhaul and maintenance work at fans can be
taken from the fan description in the operating manual or, for larger fan
types, the notice signs attached at the transformer close to the fan. In
particular, observe bearing lubrication and the terminal boxes being free of
condensate.
Cleaning
Clean the fan at intervals. Do not use a pressurized water jet!
If the temperature difference rises noticeably, cooler and protective grille
are contaminated and must be cleaned. In winter operation, observe ice
formation on the protective grille and open and arrest the frost flaps if
required.
Oil flow monitors The correct installation position of the oil flow monitors is visible by the cast-
in arrows. The contacts being established here is to be inspected at each oil
flow monitor by closing a corner valve with the pump running.
The function of other flow monitors can be inspected by closing a slide in
the main pipeline.
Air flow monitors Check contact of the air flow monitors. Contact can be achieved effectively
by covering the suction-side protective grille. Contaminated air flow
monitors must be cleaned.
Water flow monitors Check contact of the water flow monitors.
Leak monitors The leakage indicator function, in particular that of the floats as signaling
devices, must be verified by filling in spirit according to the device
description. Then ensure complete emptying and vaporizing of the test
liquid and attach the connection hoses between the cooler and leakage
indicator again.
Do not use water for testing due to danger of corrosion!
Fan and pump control Check that the control works according to the circuit diagram. Fans and
pumps must run perfectly.
Pressure relief device Check the pressure relief device for the transformer tank and, if present, for
the tap changer as well.
Test contacting the trigger elements remain in the trigger position. They
must be put in the operating position again after inspection at the device.
Cooling system The time of operation after which the coolers must be cleaned cannot be
indicated as a general value; the cleaning intervals to be determined mainly
depend on the local air and cooling water conditions. Cleaning of the cooler
is required at the latest when the oil temperature has a rising trend with the
transformer load and air or water entry temperature remaining the same.
Oil entry temperature / oil exit temperature

Read and record oil entry and exit temperature for each cooling circuit.
Monitor pressure on the oil and water sides of each cooling circuit. The oil
pressure must be larger than the water pressure at normal pipe coolers.
Water entry temperature / water exit temperature

Read and record cooling water entry and exit temperature for each cooling
circuit.
Current transformer Current transformer terminals
Integrated current transformers either must be connected to measuring
instruments or short-circuited, e.g. in the transport condition.
Current transformer earthing

Every converter secondary coil must be earthed at a clamp pursuant to the
circuit diagram. The preferred clamp for earthing is the clamp "K".
De-energized tap changer The tap changer must only be operated in the powered down condition of
the transformer. Otherwise, there is a danger of total damage!
For detailed instructions, see tap changer operating instructions (chapter 9).
Switching through all positions

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Over time, the copper contact parts may coat with a layer of foreign matter
that may increase the temperature at the contacts. Therefore, it is
recommended to go through the complete setting range several times with
the tap changer at occasional breaks in operation of the transformer - at
least once annually - to clean the contacts of the foreign matter layer that
occurred in the meantime.
Interlocks
If electrical locking mechanisms are present, check their function, i.e. even
trying to operate the tap changer must switch off the transformer.
The end positions are mechanically secured. When the end position of the
tap changer is reached, further adjustment is only possible in the reverse
direction.
Drive
Operating the tap changer must be easily possible mechanically with the
hand-crank or by motor operation.
Checking the control cubicles Heating, lighting
Heating and illumination (door contact) must be checked for proper
function. The heating temperature must securely prevent condensate
formation! The thermostat of the cabinet heating must be set to approx.
20 °C.
Tightness
Switching cabinets must be water- and dust-tight according to their
protection type. Door seals and lock must not be damaged. Check and clean
casing vents if required.
Contact functions
Proper contacting pursuant to the circuit diagram must be warranted.
Wiring, ducts
Cover ducts and lines must be free of damage, wiring must not have any
aging damage.
Tap changer
Tap changer revision depends on Tap changer revision depends on switching numbers or duration of use. For
switching numbers or duration of this information, see the operating instructions of the tap changer (chapter
use 9).
Motor drive Switching through all positions
If the tap changer is operated less than 3,000 times per year or not moved
across the whole setting range, the complete setting range must be gone
through about 10 times with the transformer powered down for cleaning
the contacts.
Contactor control
Must be verified for proper function according to the circuit diagram.
Stops, mechanical and electrical

Mechanical inspection is to be performed first for safety reasons. Electrically
control the tap changer to the second to last position and then go to the end
position by turning the hand crank. If the hand crank is then turned on for
about 2 ½ rotations, the mechanic end stop must catch. Pressing the push-
button in the same control direction - after removing the hand-crank - must
not cause the drive to start up. Proceed accordingly in the opposite
direction. After mechanical inspection of the end stops, perform electrical
inspection. For this, switch to the motor drive end position. If further
impulses are generated the drive must not start up again; it must only start
if impulses are given in counter-direction. This test also needs to be

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
performed for both end positions.
Tap-to-tap interlock
To test the step control, operate the toggle or push-button S1 or S2 during
the complete run-time of an adjustment process. After switching the load
control switch, the motor drive must switch off independently. Further
adjustment must only take place after another impulse is given.
If the overrun lock in the motor drive or control center is a time relay to
switch off the drive's motor protection switch after approx. 8 sec after run-
time of 1 stage is exceeded, its function must be tested as well.
Anti-corrosion coating
See chapter 8.3.
Miscellaneous
Inspect the door seal and locking mechanism for tightness or damage.
Clean vents if required.
Check heating function, thermostat setting (approx. 20 °C) if applicable or
hygrostat if present.
Check the lighting.
Check the contact tracks and position indicators, as well as firm seat of all
terminal clamps on terminal rails.
Clean the motor drive if required..
In case of stronger mechanical vibrations transferred to the drive casing
from outside, check the seat of all screws and tighten them if required.
Oil examination
Gas-analysis examination For measuring the breakdown voltage, verification of chemical and physical
Gas-chromatography examination characteristics of the insulating liquid, taking of oil samples from the
transformer is required. Sampling is performed before commissioning of the
transformer, after extended operating duration or in case of interference.
Oil examinations are performed for the following oil spaces:
- Transformer tank
- Conservator
- Tap selector compartment
- Bushing compartment
- Cable box
- Condenser bushing (only in special cases on instructions of the bushing
manufacturer)
Cable box
Entry of moisture into the cable Check moisture content of the cable boxes filling compound (UD).
box filling compound of
compound-filled or the oil of oil-
filled cable terminal boxes
Moisture collecting in air-filled Any collected condensation must be able to run off.
cable cover hoods
Miscellaneous
Corrosion protection Timely repair of the top coat of paint generally makes it possible to avoid
replacing the complete paint coat.
For performance, see "Repair of coatings and zinc covers“.
Spark gaps, setting according to The protective spark gaps must be set according to the indications of the
dimension drawing dimension drawing or the respective binding stipulations. Increased
distances must be considered according to the stipulations when setting up
the transformer in altitudes exceeding 1,000 m. When over-voltage
deflectors are attached, the distance of the arcing horns is generally
increased or they are completely removed.
Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Sound absorption Inspect the sealing strips for completeness. Entering moisture will lead to
corrosion at the transformer/reactor and the sound absorption walls.
Earth connections (protective To avoid current loops, the transformer tank and any cooling system must
earth) be earthed with a sufficient line cross-section. The earthing screw must be
inspected for firm seal and re-tightened if required.
Gas test device The bottles with the test liquids "silver nitrate solution" and "palladium
chloride solution" are marked with the best before date. Using the test liquid
after the best before date may lead to falsification of the analysis of gas
samples.
Instructions pursuant to gas test device description (chapter 9).
Electrical Tests
Electrical tests at transformers/reactors must be performed under consideration of relevant
safety provisions and assembly instructions applicable for them.
NOTE
Electrical tests are to be performed on demand but at least in a 5-year cycle.
Winding insulation resistance

Transformation measurement
No-load currents
Winding resistance
Dielectric dissipation factor at the According to device description based on the works test documents.
transformer / reactor
Dielectric dissipation factor at We recommend having these measurements performed by the transformer
condenser bushing or bushing manufacturer.
Electrical inspection of the For all electrical tests at accessories, ensure that the switching devices,
accessories accessories or monitoring devices in the measuring circuit are not
impermissibly strained and thus destroyed or damaged.
Insulation resistance of the wiring
Insulation resistance of the motors

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
8.2 Removing leaks and soldering copper lines

Repair work at live parts is generally prohibited at high-voltage systems. In exceptions,
leakage points in the danger area of live parts may be repaired if they are small, e.g. by
grouting, without powering down the transformer/reactor.
The decision must be made by construction management and should be confirmed in

writing due to the great risk.

1. Power down
8.2.1 Cleaning and marking of leaks

Localized leaks must be cleaned of oil and dirt with suitable cleaning agents. To mark the
leak, spray chalk spray on the cleaned area. This method can be generally used for
transformer tanks, pipe lines and compensation vessels.
8.2.2 Grouting
For small leaks in tank walls with a thickness of 8 mm, grouting may be sufficient. For this,
a die, mandrel or chisel is used to drive the material around the leak towards the hole as
evenly as possible.
ATTENTION
This way, the leak is only closed temporarily and must be welded as soon as possible.
Fig. 8-1 Grouting of leaks
8.2.3 Relieving pressure from the leak

Repair by cementing or welding must be prepared as follows:
Shut off or plug the supply lines (e.g. at the compensation container). Close any other
openings at the tank, tank cover and load control switch vessel. Then open the lowest
Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
sampling valve or drain cock and drain insulating oil into a bucket or tray. Draining of
insulating oil at the tank bottom leads to a vacuum in the tank. The vacuum is the largest
above the oil level and drops to zero towards the exit height. When the tank is closed
completely, approx. 0.3 % of the overall oil volume may flow out. If more insulating oil flows
out, there is a leak somewhere that must be removed. Since the pressure outside of the tank
is higher than on the inside, no insulation oil flows out at the leak. However, air may be
sucked in through the leak. For larger transformers (> 40 MVA) or larger leaks, application of
a vacuum pump is appropriate. However, ensure that the tank is vacuum resistant, or too
high a vacuum may lead to permanent tank deformation. Corrugated sheet tanks are not
vacuum resistant!
Harp or radiator tank

If the tank or conservator is vacuum-resistant can be seen in the output and circuit sign.
Transformer tanks and conservator 10 MVA are usually vacuum resistant. If the
conservator is vacuum resistant, the vacuum pump can be connected to the conservator at
the highest point, i.e. at the dehumidifier pipeline. Otherwise, the insulating oil must be
drained so that no insulating oil enters the vacuum pump (observe volume reduction by tank
deformation!). Loosen the pipe line between the transformer and conservator and install
reduction flange with connection piece for the vacuum pump. Connect the vacuum pump.
Keep the vacuum at a level that will not lead to air being sucked into the leak.
If a load control switch vessel is present, it must be evacuated as well for pressure
compensation. Install reduction flange and vacuum pump downstream of the load control
switch vessel in this case.
8.2.4 Fire-protection measures for welding

Oil vapors may result and form an explosive and flammable mixture with air at a certain ratio
in case of overheating of insulation oil, e.g. during subsequent welding of oily or oil-filled
containers. Welding and soldering work with open flames at oil-filled or partially oil-filled - or
oily - transformer tanks, conservator, etc. therefore requires special safety measures, e.g.
filling with nitrogen or creation of a vacuum.
8.2.5 Welding
Prepare repair work well so that the time the insulting oil is subject to higher heat
development remains short. Comply with fire protection measures as described. Provide two
or more fire extinguishers with suitable extinguishing agent against oil fire (fire class B)
according to transformer size.
If the weld point is above the oil level, flush the clearance with nitrogen and open it against
overpressure.
8.2.6 Welding staff

Welding work must only be performed by trained and currently practiced welders -
preferably from the manufacturer’s plant. Welder examinations, e.g. pursuant to
DIN EN 287-1, may be taken as prerequisite for performing repairs, but do not replace
special training. If problems are expected, request precise instructions for the respective
special case from the manufacturer’s plant. Welding work at material temperatures of less
than 5 °C must be coordinated with the manufacturer’s plant.
8.2.7 Precautions for repairs at oil transformers after internal

damage
Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
An electrical defect in the transformer will cause formation of flammable gases. They form
explosive gas mixes in connection with air. Smoking and handling of spark-generating tools
is therefore prohibited in the danger area. With the exception of taking of gas samples for
gas-chromatography examinations, measurements and tests at the transformer must only
be performed if it is ensured that all flammable gases have been removed by venting the
transformer or by flushing with oil or nitrogen.
In particular, no air but only nitrogen must be pressed in through the dehumidifier when
lowering the oil level after an electrical defect.
Before opening the transformer, remove nitrogen by evacuation and replace by dry
compressed air.
8.3 Corrosion protection - Repair of coatings and zinc

covers
Climatic influences and effects of chemically aggressive atmospheres usually cause slow but
continuous degradation in particular of the cover coating, so that it must be renewed every
5-10 years, or earlier at extreme strain.
The required repairs include cleaning of the coating surface and grinding off of the top layer,
repair of local damage and renewal of the top layer. If the coating films are strongly
hardened, apply an interim adhesive base before application of the cover coating that is
both well adhesive and has a good moisture resistance, because it is only painted over with
a single layer.
The colors used for the repair paint coats and paint repairs must be compatible with the old
coat of paint (see chapter 3.2.3 – safety data-sheets).
8.3.1 Surface preparation

Contamination of the paint surfaces must be removed. Oil-free and grease-free layers must
be removed with water, oils and solvents.
Tap off loosely adhesive layers, grind position to be repaired to the blank metal with sanding
paper and grind the edges to the remaining coating.
Then clean the repair place thoroughly of grinding residue.
8.3.2 Performance of paint work

The layers that were damaged or had to be removed at surface preparation must be
renewed. The repair and overhaul work for the coating must only be performed when the
weather is dry. The temperature must be at least 5 °C and surfaces wet from dew must not
be painted.
8.3.3 Application procedure

The coating can be repaired by painting or spraying. Painting usually can be performed at
the viscosity of the coating materials in their delivery condition, spraying requires an
addition of about 10 % thinner. Painting the top coat of paint must not lead to "patches".
Ensure that the top coat of paint is exactly flush with the visible edges of the areas to be
painted so that the repaired area is not obvious. Every layer must dry for 5 to 8 hours before
the next layer is applied.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
8.3.4 Coating structure of the transformer

The coating structure for transformers/reactors is defined pursuant to TUN 901240.
Coating structures (abbreviations): TUN 901240 chapter 3 (terms and definitions)
Layer thicknesses of individual layers: TUN 901240 chapter 5.3.5
Coating materials TUN 901240 chapter 5.3.1 (Appendix 1a – 1c)
Inner coating (oil-side) of transformers and accessories: TUN 901240 chapter 5.3.9
8.3.5 Performance of coating

Repair of micaceous iron ore coatings is difficult because the color brightness varies for each
application type due to the flake-like pigment. Applying the coating materials with a brush
additionally leads to slightly patchy surfaces. "Spraying" is a much more suitable application
type.
For 2K-coatings, the original diluents of the coating suppliers must be used.
8.3.6 Zinc coatings

The following measures must be taken when there is any mechanical damage to zinc
coatings:
Remove loosely adhesive zinc layer in the area of the damage. Grind damaged area with
sanding paper until it shows blank metal, and then thoroughly clean it from grinding
residue.
Repair the damaged point with zinc dust coating.
Zinc dust coating material

Binder basis: Epoxy resin
Pigment basis: Zinc dust
Two layers must be applied the minimum layer thickness must be 80 µm. After application of
the zinc dust coating, interim and top coating must be applied pursuant to instructions.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
9 Technical Documentation of the Heavy Part and Accessories
9 Technical Documentation of the Heavy Part and

Accessories
All part numbers indicated in these operating instructions (= position in the dimension
drawing) refer to the part numbers in the dimension drawing and numbering plan except
where indicated differently.
9.1 Iron Core

The iron core has an approximately circular cross-section in the leg-set and yoke and consists
of cold-rolled, high-alloy sheet with magnet pull direction. The sheets are applied with a
heat-resistant special insulation, cut diagonally without burrs and layered overlapping in the
edge area (step-lap layers). The leg-set sheets are bonded in the edge areas and pressed
with tape bindings. The yoke sheets are pressed by the pressing plates with glass-fiber
devices or yoke pressing bolts. Cooling gaps are integrated in the core and yoke in parallel to
the direction of the layer.
9.2 Coils
The coils are made of concentrically aligned coil groups and supported against the yokes.
The insulation of the twisted or massive conductors consists of oil-soaked paper with
electrical stability.
Paper insulation thickness is dimensioned according to the voltage load. Coils with parallel
conductors are twisted. Coils with a rated voltage of 110 kV or more are partially or
completely interleaved. The insulation between the coils and against the core or yoke
consists of cylinders and shaped parts made of transformer board.
The coils are equipped with capacity rings. In axial direction, the coils are clamped between
the press plates with supports made of insulating material; pressing is performed by internal
pull rods.
All control lines in the transformer are short-circuit proof and supported voltage-safely.
Short-circuit limitation reactor (SPECIAL CASE)
9.3 Tank and Cover

The tank (conventional build) is made of steel sheet and welded oil-tightly. Sheet
thicknesses and reinforcements are dimensioned for 100 % vacuum. All welding was
performed by qualified personnel. The cover is designed as a panel cover and screwed to the
tank with a rubber seal.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Tank-cover-connection welded

2 Cover flange
3 Tank flange
4 Rubber seal
5 Heat-resistant spacer - asbestos-free
Fig. 9-1 Tank-cover-connection
This sealing system is based on the use of rubber seals in furrows. It consists of an oil- and
heat-resistant synthetic rubber NBR (or equal).
CAUTION
If the cover screw is insulated, it must not be bridged by any additional conversions.

2 Cover flange
3 Rubber seal (sealing cord - oval)
4 Tank flange
Fig. 9-2 Tank-cover-connection (schematic diagram)
All tank or cover attachment parts are placed in the dimension drawing.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Transport options:
Work steps Reference points Position in the dimension drawing
Lifting with hydraulic lifters 4 Lifting points 100
Lifting with crane 4 Lifting eyes 100
Pulling longitudinally 4 Pull eyes 104
Pulling transversely 4 Pull eyes 104
Tab. 9-1 Transport options
9.4 Conservator
ATTENTION
The conservator is vacuum-proof
The conservator compartment volumes are designed based on maximum oil expansion.
The conservator can be structured in several compartments.

For transformers with on-load tap changer, at least two compartments are required at all
times, the main compartment and the on-load tap changer compartment.
The structure by main and on-load tap changer compartment prevents contamination of the
insulating oil by pollutants that may result from switching the on-load tap changer.
9.4.1 Main Compartment

A Buchholz relay is installed in the connection line between cover and conservator. Right
before and after the Buchholz relay, there are sliders that must be opened during operation.
The main compartment is equipped with a breathing pocket to prevent the oil from taking
up oxygen and to thus protect it from oxidation and moisture intake.
9.4.2 On-load Tap Changer Compartment

A protective relay is installed in the connection line between load control switch and
conservator compartment.
To protect the insulation oil against contamination by oil sludge from the conservator, the
oil line protrudes several centimeters into the conservator. The connection line for the
dehydrating breather ends right below the highest point of the conservator space.
Hand holes are intended for cleaning the conservator compartments.
All attachment parts are placed in the dimension drawing.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
9.5 Earthings
9.5.1 Core Earthing

The iron core is installed insulated in the tank and connected to the core earthing bushings
in one place with a copper rope. The earth connection is established outside the tank and
can be loosened for insulation impedance measurement.
1 Bushings I kV. 250 A

2 Earth terminal
3 Flexible conductor
4 Pressing plate
5 Shield
6 Cover
7 Earthing clip
8 Tank wall
Fig. 9-3 Example of core earthing
9.5.2 Tank Earthing

2 earthing connections pursuant to DIN 46011 each are present at each of the four tank
corners, close to the tank bottom.
9.5.3 Cooling System Earthing

2 earthing connections pursuant to DIN 46011 each are present at each support of the front
cooling system close to the bottom.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
9.6 On-load Tap Changer (OLTC)

Page / Version Date
Sheet No.
Position in the dimension 250
drawing:
Manufacturer: MR
Type: VM III 300Y-72,5/B-10 19 3WR
Position range: ± 10 %
Number of steps: ±8
Number of positions: 17
Operating instructions: Operating instructions for OLTC
Motor-Drive unit
drawing:
Manufacturer: MR
Type: ED100S
Operating instructions: Operating instructions for Motor-Drive unit
Protective relay
(OLTC OIL direction mornitoring)
drawing:
Manufacturer: MR
Type: RS2001
Operating instructions: Operating instructions for protective relay
Voltage regulator
Position in the dimension -
drawing:
Manufacturer: MR
Type: TAPCON 230 Pro
Operating instructions: Operating instructions for Voltage regulator
WARNING
On-load tap changers (OLTC) must only be operated by instructed and authorized
specialists.
A live transformer must never be switched directly from the motor operation cabinet of
the OLTC. The OLTC must only be operated via remote control from a secure control
center.
While persons are standing close to a live transformer, e.g. during commissioning and
maintenance, no controlling operations must be performed at the load control switch.
The transformer operator is asked to indicate any damage, injury or accidents in
connection with OLTC to Siemens manufacturer’s plant without delay.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
On-Load Tap-Changer
VACUTAP® VM®
Operating Instructions
4338368/00 EN
© All rights reserved by Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen
Dissemination and reproduction of this document and use and disclosure of its content are strictly prohibited
unless expressly permitted.
Infringements will result in liability for compensation. All rights reserved in the event of the granting of patents,
utility models or designs.
The product may have been altered since this document was published.
We reserve the right to change the technical data, design and scope of supply.
Generally the information provided and agreements made when processing the individual quotations and orders
are binding.
The original operating instructions were written in German.
Table of contents
Table of contents
1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 6
1.1 Validity................................................................................................................................................. 6
1.2 Manufacturer....................................................................................................................................... 6
1.3 Subject to change without notice......................................................................................................... 6
1.4 Completeness...................................................................................................................................... 7
1.5 Safekeeping......................................................................................................................................... 7
1.6 Notation conventions........................................................................................................................... 7
1.6.1 Symbols................................................................................................................................................................. 7
1.6.2 Hazard communication system............................................................................................................................. 8
1.6.3 Information system.............................................................................................................................................. 10
2 Safety................................................................................................................................. 11
2.1 General safety information................................................................................................................ 11
2.2 Appropriate use................................................................................................................................. 11
2.3 Inappropriate use............................................................................................................................... 12
2.4 Personnel qualification...................................................................................................................... 12
2.5 Operator's duty of care...................................................................................................................... 13
2.6 Personal protective equipment.......................................................................................................... 13
2.7 Protective devices............................................................................................................................. 14
2.7.1 Protective relay RS.............................................................................................................................................. 15
2.7.2 Pressure monitoring device................................................................................................................................. 15
2.7.3 Rupture disk ....................................................................................................................................................... 15
2.7.4 Pressure relief device MPreC®........................................................................................................................... 15
2.7.5 Tap-change supervisory control.......................................................................................................................... 15
2.7.6 Temperature monitoring...................................................................................................................................... 15
2.7.7 Protective devices in the motor-drive unit........................................................................................................... 16
3 Product description.......................................................................................................... 17
3.1 Scope of delivery............................................................................................................................... 17
3.2 On-load tap-changer.......................................................................................................................... 17
3.2.1 Function description............................................................................................................................................ 17
3.2.2 Setup/models...................................................................................................................................................... 18
3.2.3 Name plate.......................................................................................................................................................... 21
3.3 Drive shaft......................................................................................................................................... 22
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2015 4338368/00 EN VACUTAP® VM® 3

Table of contents
3.3.2 Setup/models of drive shaft................................................................................................................................. 22

3.4 RS protective relay............................................................................................................................ 25
3.4.2 Setup/models of protective relay......................................................................................................................... 25
3.5 Pressure monitoring device DW........................................................................................................ 27
3.5.2 Structure/versions of the pressure-operated relay.............................................................................................. 28
4 Commissioning transformer at installation site............................................................. 30

4.1 Checking motor-drive unit.................................................................................................................. 30
4.2 Checking protective relay.................................................................................................................. 31
4.2.1 Checking protective relay (RS 2001, 2001/V, 2001/H, 2001/E, 2001/5, 2001/R, 2003)...................................... 31
4.2.2 Checking protective relay (RS 2004)................................................................................................................... 31
4.3 Checking pressure monitoring device............................................................................................... 31
4.4 Filling the oil compartment of the on-load tap-changer with oil......................................................... 32
4.5 Commissioning the transformer......................................................................................................... 34
5 Operation........................................................................................................................... 36
5.1 Actuating motor-drive unit with hand crank....................................................................................... 36
5.2 Monitoring during operation............................................................................................................... 36
6 Fault elimination................................................................................................................ 38
6.1 Tripping of the protective relay and re-commissioning the transformer............................................. 40
6.1.1 Flap valve in IN SERVICE position..................................................................................................................... 40
6.1.2 Flap valve in OFF position................................................................................................................................... 40
6.1.3 Re-commissioning the transformer..................................................................................................................... 41
6.2 Tripping the pressure-operated relay and putting the transformer back into operation..................... 41
6.2.1 Sensor in the OPERATION position.................................................................................................................... 42
6.2.2 Sensor in the OFF position.................................................................................................................................. 42
6.2.3 Re-commissioning the transformer..................................................................................................................... 42
7 Maintenance...................................................................................................................... 43
7.1 Scope and execution......................................................................................................................... 43
7.2 On-load tap-changer maintenance intervals...................................................................................... 43
7.3 Oil change......................................................................................................................................... 44
7.3.1 Oil to use............................................................................................................................................................. 44
7.3.2 Performing oil change......................................................................................................................................... 45
7.4 Maintaining motor-drive unit.............................................................................................................. 45
4 VACUTAP® VM® 4338368/00 EN Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2015

Table of contents
8 Technical data................................................................................................................... 46
8.1 Technical data for protective relay..................................................................................................... 46
8.2 Special models of protective relay..................................................................................................... 47
8.2.1 Protective relay with CO change-over contact as tripping switch ....................................................................... 47
8.2.2 Protective relay with several dry-reed magnetic switches................................................................................... 47
8.3 Technical data for pressure monitoring device.................................................................................. 48
9 Appendix............................................................................................................................ 49
9.1 Limit values for dielectric strength and water content of on-load tap-changer oil.............................. 49
9.2 VACUTAP® VM® installation drawing of centrical drive (746230).................................................... 50
9.3 VACUTAP® VM 300 installation drawing of centrical drive (765192)............................................... 52
9.4 VACUTAP® VM® installation position of tap selector connection contacts (890477) ...................... 53
9.5 VACUTAP® VM® supporting flange, special design for bell-type tank installation for Vm up to
300 kV (896762)................................................................................................................................ 54
9.6 VACUTAP® VM® on-load tap-changer head, centrical drive (893899)............................................ 55
9.7 On-load tap-changer head with tap-change supervisory control (894109)........................................ 56
9.8 VACUTAP® VM® pipe connection Q with tap-change supervisory control (766161)....................... 57
9.9 Tracing template for on-load tap-changer head (890183)................................................................. 58
9.10 Socket wrench for kerosene drain plug (890182).............................................................................. 59
9.11 Screw tools for installation and maintenance (890478)..................................................................... 60
9.12 Bevel gear CD 6400, dimensional drawing (892916)........................................................................ 61
Glossary............................................................................................................................. 62

1 Introduction
1 Introduction
This technical file contains detailed descriptions for monitoring during opera-
tion, troubleshooting, and maintenance.
It also includes safety instructions and general information about the prod-
uct.
Information about installation can be found in the installation and commis-

sioning instructions.
This technical file is intended solely for specially trained and authorized per-
sonnel.
1.1 Validity
The document supplied with the product is always the valid version. This
technical file is configured for the specific order and applies to the following
products, the serial numbers of which can be found on the delivery docu-
ments:
▪ VACUTAP® VM® on-load tap-changer
▪ RS protective relay
▪ Pressure monitoring device DW 2000 (optional)
▪ Drive shaft
1.2 Manufacturer
The product is manufactured by:
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH
Falkensteinstraße 8
93059 Regensburg, Germany
Tel.: (+49) 9 41/40 90-0
Fax: (+49) 9 41/40 90-7001
E-mail: sales@reinhausen.com
Further information on the product and copies of this technical file are avail-
able from this address if required.
1.3 Subject to change without notice

The information contained in this technical file comprises the technical speci-
fications approved at the time of printing. Significant modifications will be in-
cluded in a new edition of the technical file.
The document number and version number of this technical file are shown in
the footer.

1 Introduction
1.4 Completeness
This technical file is incomplete without the supporting documentation.
The following documents apply:

▪ Unpacking instructions (included in the scope of delivery)
▪ Supplement (included in the scope of delivery)
▪ Routine test report (included in the scope of delivery)
▪ Connection diagrams (included in the scope of delivery)
▪ Dimensional drawings (included in the scope of delivery)
▪ Technical data - General section (available on request)
▪ Technical data - Product-specific section (available on request)
Also observe generally valid legislation, standards, and guidelines as well as

specifications on accident prevention and environmental protection in the re-
spective country of use.
1.5 Safekeeping
This technical file and all supporting documents must be kept ready at hand
and accessible for future use at all times.
1.6 Notation conventions

This section contains an overview of the symbols and textual emphasis
used.
1.6.1 Symbols
Symbol Meaning
Wrench size
Tightening torque
Number and type of fastening materials used
Fill with oil
Cut open, cut through
Clean

1 Introduction
Symbol Meaning
Visual inspection
Use your hand
Adapter ring
Apply a coat of paint
Use a file
Grease
Coupling bolt
Use a ruler
Use a saw
Hose clip
Wire eyelet, safety wire
Use a screwdriver
Table 1: Symbols
1.6.2 Hazard communication system

Warnings in this technical file are displayed as follows.
1.6.2.1 Warning relating to section
Warnings relating to sections refer to entire chapters or sections, sub-sec-

tions or several paragraphs within this technical file. Warnings relating to
sections use the following format:

1 Introduction
WARNING Type and source of danger

Consequences
► Action
► Action
1.6.2.2 Embedded warning information
Embedded warnings refer to a particular part within a section. These warn-

ings apply to smaller units of information than the warnings relating to sec-
tions. Embedded warnings use the following format:
DANGER! Instruction for avoiding a dangerous situation.
1.6.2.3 Signal words and pictograms
The following signal words are used:

Signal Meaning
word
DANGER Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in injury.
NOTICE Indicates measures to be taken to prevent damage to
property.
Table 2: Signal words in warning notices
Pictograms warn of dangers:

Pictogram Meaning
Warning of a danger point
Warning of dangerous electrical voltage
Warning of combustible substances

1 Introduction
Pictogram Meaning
Warning of danger of tipping
Table 3: Pictograms used in warning notices
1.6.3 Information system

Information is designed to simplify and improve understanding of particular
procedures. In this technical file it is laid out as follows:
Important information.

2 Safety
2 Safety
2.1 General safety information

This technical file contains detailed descriptions of the safe and proper oper-
ation of the product and monitoring during operation.
▪ Read this technical file through carefully to familiarize yourself with the
product.
▪ Particular attention should be paid to the information given in this chap-
ter.
2.2 Appropriate use

If used as intended and in compliance with the requirements and conditions
specified in this technical file as well as the warning notices in this technical
file and attached to the product, then the product does not present any haz-
ards to people, property or the environment. This applies throughout the
product's entire life, from delivery through installation and operation to disas-
sembly and disposal.
The operational quality assurance system ensures a consistently high quality

standard, particularly in regard to the observance of health and safety re-
quirements.
The following is considered appropriate use

▪ Only operate the product in accordance with this technical file and the
agreed delivery conditions and technical data
▪ Use the equipment and special tools supplied solely for the intended
purpose and in accordance with the specifications of this technical file
▪ Use the product only with the transformer specified in the order
▪ You will find the standard valid for the product and the year of issue on
the name plate
▪ The serial numbers of on-load tap-changers and on-load tap-changer
accessories (drive, drive shaft, bevel gear, protective relay etc.) must
match if the on-load tap-changers and on-load tap-changer accessories
are supplied as a set for one order.
The on-load tap-changer is not intended to be used with an oil filter unit.

2 Safety
DANGER Danger of death or severe injury and damage to property and

the environment!
Danger of death or severe injury and damage to property and the environ-
ment due to electrical voltage, falling and/or tipping parts as well as danger-
ous cramped conditions resulting from moving parts!
► Adherence to the following prerequisites and conditions is mandatory.
► Adhere to warning notices.
Since the on-load tap-changer was dimensioned as per IEC 60214-1, it can
switch currents of up to twice the value of the rated through current.
On-load tap-change operations are not to be performed during operating

conditions with higher currents.
Examples of such operating conditions are:

▪ Inrush current impulses when transformers are switched on
▪ Short circuit
The rated step voltage may be briefly exceeded by up to 10 % as long as the

rated through current is not exceeded. Such an operating condition can oc-
cur due to overexcitation of the transformer after load shedding, for example.
The on-load tap-changer can be operated in the temperature range of the

surrounding transformer oil of between -25 ° and +105 °C and with overload
up to +115 °C in accordance with IEC 60214-1.
2.3 Inappropriate use

Use is considered to be inappropriate if the product is used other than as de-
scribed in the Appropriate use section. Please also note the following:
▪ Risk of explosion and fire from highly flammable or explosive gases, va-
pors, or dusts. Do not operate product in areas at risk of explosion.
▪ Unauthorized or inappropriate changes to the product may lead to per-
sonal injury, material damage, and operational faults. Only modify prod-
uct following discussion with Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH.
2.4 Personnel qualification

The product is designed solely for use in electrical energy systems and facili-
ties operated by appropriately trained staff. This staff comprises people who
are familiar with the installation, assembly, commissioning and operation of
such products.

2 Safety
2.5 Operator's duty of care

To prevent accidents, disruptions and damage as well as unacceptable ad-
verse effects on the environment, those responsible for transport, installa-
tion, operation, maintenance and disposal of the product or parts of the prod-
uct must ensure the following:
▪ All warning and hazard notices are complied with.
▪ Personnel are instructed regularly in all relevant aspects of operational
safety, the operating instructions and particularly the safety instructions
contained therein.
▪ Regulations and operating instructions for safe working as well as the
relevant instructions for staff procedures in the case of accidents and
fires are kept on hand at all times and are displayed in the workplace
where applicable.
▪ The product is only used when in a sound operational condition and
safety equipment in particular is checked regularly for operational relia-
bility.
▪ Only replacement parts, lubricants and auxiliary materials which are au-
thorized by the manufacturer are used.
▪ The specified operating conditions and requirements of the installation
location are complied with.
▪ All necessary devices and personal protective equipment for the specific
activity are made available.
▪ The prescribed maintenance intervals and the relevant regulations are
complied with.
▪ Installation, electrical connection and commissioning of the product may
only be carried out by qualified and trained personnel in accordance
with this technical file.
▪ The operator must ensure appropriate use of the product.
2.6 Personal protective equipment

Personal protective equipment must be worn during work to minimize risks to
health.
▪ Always wear the personal protective equipment required for the job at
hand.
▪ Follow information about personal protective equipment provided in the
work area.

2 Safety
Always wear
Protective clothing
Close-fitting work clothing with a low
breaking strength, with tight sleeves and
with no protruding parts. It mainly serves
to protect the wearer against being caught
by moving machine parts.
Do not wear any rings, necklaces or other
jewelry.
Safety shoes
To protect against falling heavy objects
and slipping on slippery surfaces.
Table 4: Personal protective equipment to be worn at all times
Wear the following in spe- Special personal protective equipment

cial environments is needed in special environments.
The choice of equipment depends on
the circumstances.
Safety glasses
To protect the eyes from flying parts and
splashing liquids.
Hard hat
To protect from falling and flying parts and
materials.
Hearing protection
To protect from hearing damage.
Table 5: Personal protective equipment to be worn in special environments
2.7 Protective devices

The following protective devices for the product are included as standard in
the scope of delivery or are available as options.

2 Safety
2.7.1 Protective relay RS

The protective relay RS is an oil flow-controlled relay in accordance with IEC
60214-1. It is installed between the on-load tap-changer head and the oil
conservator of the on-load tap-changer.
It triggers when the specified oil flow between oil compartment of the on-load
tap-changer and oil conservator is exceeded.
2.7.2 Pressure monitoring device

The pressure monitoring device DW 2000 is installed on the outside of the
on-load tap-changer and is tripped by unacceptable static and dynamic pres-
sures in the on-load tap-changer oil vessel.
Additional use of a pressure-operated relay also requires installation of the

provided RS 2001 protective relay.
The features and characteristics of the pressure monitoring device comply

with the respective applicable version of IEC publication 60214-1.
2.7.3 Rupture disk

The rupture disk is a pressure relief device without signaling contact in ac-
cordance with IEC 60214-1 and is located in the on-load tap-changer head
cover.
The rupture disk responds to a defined overpressure in the oil compartment

of the on-load tap-changer.
2.7.4 Pressure relief device MPreC®

On request, in place of the rupture disk MR will supply a pre-fitted pressure
relief device MPreC® that responds to a defined overpressure in the oil com-
partment of the on-load tap-changer.
The on-load tap-changer therefore meets the requirements of IEC 60214-1

regarding pressure relief devices.
2.7.5 Tap-change supervisory control

The tap-change supervisory control monitors both the drive shaft between
on-load tap-changer(s) and motor-drive unit and the correct switching of the
diverter switch.
2.7.6 Temperature monitoring

The temperature monitoring device monitors the oil temperature in the oil
compartment of the on-load tap-changer.

2 Safety
2.7.7 Protective devices in the motor-drive unit

The following protective devices are fitted in the motor-drive unit:
▪ End stop device (mechanical and electric)
▪ Device protecting against unintentional passage
▪ Motor protection device
▪ Protection against accidental contact

3 Product description
This chapter contains an overview of the design and function of the product.
3.1 Scope of delivery

The product is packaged with protection against moisture and is usually de-
livered as follows:
▪ Oil compartment with on-load tap-changer head and built-in diverter
switch insert
▪ Selector
▪ Motor-drive unit
▪ Drive shaft with coupling parts and bevel gear
▪ Protective device
▪ Technical files
Please refer to the delivery slip for full details of scope of delivery.
Single-phase on-load tap-changers are also available as an on-load tap-

changer set with a common motor-drive unit.
Note the following information:

▪ Check the shipment for completeness on the basis of the shipping docu-
ments.
▪ Store the parts in a dry place until installation.
▪ The product must remain in its airtight, protective wrapping and may on-
ly be removed immediately before installation
You will find more information in the "Packaging, transport, and storage"
chapter.
3.2 On-load tap-changer
3.2.1 Function description

On-load tap-changers are used to adjust the transmission ratio of transform-
ers without interrupting the load flow. Fluctuations in voltage occurring in the
power transmission grid, for example, can therefore be compensated for. For
this purpose, on-load tap-changers are fitted in transformers and connected
to the active part of the transformer.
A motor-drive unit, which receives a control impulse (e.g. from a voltage reg-
ulator), changes the on-load tap-changer's operating position, as a result of
which the transmission ratio of the transformer is adapted to the operating
requirements.

Figure 1: System overview of on-load tap-changer transformer
1 Transformer tank 6 Gear unit

2 Motor-drive unit 7 On-load tap-changer
3 Vertical drive shaft 8 Protective relay
4 Bevel gear 9 Oil conservator
5 Horizontal drive shaft 10 Active part
3.2.2 Setup/models
The on-load tap-changer consists of the on-load tap-changer head, oil com-
partment with built-in diverter switch insert and the tap selector mounted be-
low (also available with change-over selector on request).
The design and designation of the most important on-load tap-changer com-
ponents is shown in the installation drawings in the appendix.
For the number of maximum operating positions of the on-load tap-changer,

refer to the Technical data.

Figure 2: VACUTAP® VM®
1 On-load tap-changer head 3 Tap selector

2 Oil compartment 4 Change-over selector

Figure 3: VACUTAP® VM 300
1 On-load tap-changer head 3 Change-over selector

2 Oil compartment 4 Tap selector
3.2.2.1 Pipe connections
The on-load tap-changer head features 4 pipe connections for different pur-
poses.
Depending on the order, some or all of these pipe connections are fitted with
pipe bends ex factory. All pipe bends can be freely swiveled once the pres-
sure ring is loosened.

Figure 4: Pipe connections with pipe bends
3.2.2.1.1 Pipe connection R
Pipe connection R is provided for the attachment of the protective relay and
the connection of the on-load tap-changer oil conservator and can be inter-
changed with pipe connection Q.
3.2.2.1.2 Pipe connection S
The pipe bend on pipe connection S is provided with a vent screw. Connect
pipe bend on a pipe that ends with a drain valve on the side of the transform-
er tank at operating height.
3.2.2.1.3 Pipe connection Q
Pipe connection Q is closed with a blank cover and is intended for the bush-
ing of the tap-change supervisory control supplied as an option or for con-
necting the oil filter unit.
The functions of the R and Q pipe connections can be interchanged.
3.2.2.1.4 Pipe connection E2
The pipe connection E2 is closed with a blank cover. It leads into the oil tank
of the transformer, directly under the on-load tap-changer head and can be
connected to a collective pipe for the Buchholz relay, if necessary.
3.2.3 Name plate

The name plate is on the on-load tap-changer head cover.

Figure 5: Position of name plate
3.3 Drive shaft

The drive shaft is the mechanical connection between motor-drive and on-
load tap-changer head / off-circuit tap-changer head.
The bevel gear changes the direction from vertical to horizontal (see drawing
892916).
Accordingly, the vertical drive shaft has to be mounted between drive and
bevel gear and the horizontal drive shaft between bevel gear and on-load
tap-changer or off-circuit tap-changer.
3.3.2 Setup/models of drive shaft

The drive shaft consists of a square tube and is coupled by two coupling
brackets and one coupling bolt at both ends to the drive / driven shaft end of
the device to be connected.

3.3.2.1 Drive shaft without cardan shaft, without insulator (= normal model)
Figure 6: Drive shaft without cardan shaft, without insulator (= normal model)
Configuration V 1 min Intermediate bearing

[mm] for [mm]
Middle of hand crank – middle 536 V 1 > 2,472
of bevel gear (maximum per-
missible axial offset 2°)
3.3.2.2 Drive shaft without cardan shaft, with insulator (= special model)
Figure 7: Drive shaft without cardan shaft, with insulator (= special model)

[mm] for [mm]
missible axial offset 2°)

3.3.2.3 Drive shaft with cardan shaft, without insulator (= special model)
Figure 8: Drive shaft with cardan shaft, without insulator (= special model)

[mm] for [mm]
missible axial offset alpha =
20°)
3.3.2.4 Drive shaft with cardan shaft, with insulator (= special model)
Figure 9: Drive shaft with cardan shaft, with insulator (= special model)

[mm] for [mm]
missible axial offset alpha =
20°)

3.4 RS protective relay

The protective relay is used to protect the on-load tap-changer and the
transformer when a malfunction occurs in the diverter switch oil compartment
or selector switch oil compartment. It is tripped when the specified speed of
oil flow from the on-load tap-changer head to the oil conservator is exceeded
due to a fault. The flowing oil actuates the flap valve which tips over into po-
sition OFF. The contact in the dry-reed magnetic switch is thereby actuated,
the circuit breakers are tripped, and the transformer is de-energized.
The protective relay is part of an oil-insulated on-load tap-changer and its

properties conform to IEC publication 60214-1 of the valid version. There-
fore, it is part of the scope of our delivery.
Diverter switch operations at rated switching capacity or at permissible over-

load will not cause the protective relay to trip.
The protective relay responds to oil flow, not to gas accumulated in the pro-
tective relay. It is not necessary to bleed the protective relay when filling the
transformer with oil. Gas accumulation in the protective relay is normal.
3.4.2 Setup/models of protective relay

Front view
Figure 10: RS 2001
1 Inspection window

Rear view
Figure 11: RS 2001
1 Dummy plug 3 Ventilation for terminal box

2 Identification plate
The protective relay RS 2001/R has an extra inspection window on the rear.
View from above
Figure 12: RS 2001
1 Gasket 7 Cable connection

2 Grounding cable 8 Protective cover
3 Terminal box cover 9 Dummy plug
4 OPERATION (reset) test but- 10 Connection terminals
ton
5 Slotted screw 11 Cylinder head screw for pro-
tective conductor connection
6 OFF (test tripping) test button

The protective relay RS 2003 and RS 2004 has a 1/2"-14NPT adapter in

place of the cable connection (position 7).
3.5 Pressure monitoring device DW

The DW 2000 pressure-operated relay protects the on-load tap-changer
from unacceptable pressure increases, contributing to the safety of the
transformer. The pressure-operated relay is installed on the outside of the
on-load tap-changer and is tripped by unacceptable static and dynamic pres-
sures in the on-load tap-changer oil vessel.
The pressure-operated relay works on the same principle as a barometric

corrugated tube with a counter-pressure spring and a mechanically linked
snap-action switch. The sensor on the snap-action switch snaps to the other
position by itself after tripping and has to be reset into the initial position by
hand.
The pressure increase activates the sensor on the snap-action switch that
flips into the OFF position. This triggers the circuit breaker and de-energizes
the transformer.
Low-energy interference does not cause the pressure-operated relay to trip

since the required tripping pressure is not reached. The tripping pressure is
set at the factory and prevented from being changed.
The pressure-operated relay responds faster than the RS 2001 protective re-
lay in relation to large pressure increases. The RS 2001 protective relay is
part of the default MR protection system that comes standard.
Additional use of a pressure-operated relay also requires installation of the

provided RS 2001 protective relay.
The features and characteristics of the pressure-operated relay comply with

the respective applicable version of IEC publication 60214-1.
Diverter switch operations at the rated switching capacity or permitted over-

load do not cause the pressure-operated relay to trip.
The pressure-operated relay responds to a pressure change and not to gas

accumulation under the pressure-operated relay. Gas accumulation under
the pressure-operated relay is normal.

3.5.2 Structure/versions of the pressure-operated relay

This chapter gives you an overview of the structure of the pressure-operated
relay.
The pressure-operated relay consists of a pressure measuring element and

an adjacent snap-action switch.
Figure 13: Snap-action switch and pressure measuring element
1 Snap-action switch 2 Pressure measuring element
The snap-action switch has a normally open switch and normally closed
switch with snap action.
During operation, the snap-action switch and pressure measuring element

are protected by a cover cap. Ventilation is provided on the top of the pres-
sure-operated relay.

Figure 14: Pressure-operated relay with cover cap and ventilation
1 Ventilation 2 Cover cap
There are two variants of the pressure-operated relay

▪ DW 2000 for vertical installation and fastening on the on-load tap-
changer head
▪ DW 2000 for horizontal installation and fastening on a pipe bend
The housing and the cover cap of the pressure-operated relay consist of
lightweight, corrosion-resistant metal.

4 Commissioning transformer at installation site

Before energizing the transformer, check that the motor-drive unit and pro-
tective relay are functioning correctly and fill the on-load tap-changer oil
compartment with new mineral insulating oil. Proceed as follows:
4.1 Checking motor-drive unit

Before commissioning the transformer, repeat the function tests on the mo-
tor-drive unit as described in the operating instructions "TAPMOTION® ED".
WARNING Danger of death or severe injury!

Danger of death or severe injury due to incorrect operation!
► Under no circumstances is the transformer to be commissioned if the
functions are not satisfied in accordance with the Function tests sec-
tion.
NOTICE Damage to the on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit!

Damage to on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit due to condensate in
the motor-drive unit!
► Always keep protective housing of the motor-drive unit tightly closed.
► If the standstill time before commissioning exceeds 8 weeks or opera-
tion is interrupted for longer than 2 weeks, the heater must be connect-
ed and turned on to prevent the condensation of moisture inside the
protective housing. If this is not possible (e.g. during transportation),
place a sufficient amount of dehydrating agent in the protective hous-
ing.

Damage to on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit due to incorrect use of
position transmitter equipment!
► Only circuits stated in the chapter Technical data for position transmitter
equipment of the operating instructions "TAPMOTION® ED" may be
connected to the position transmitter module connections.
► The switchover point of the position transmitter equipment in the motor-
drive unit is not the same as the switchover point of the diverter switch
operation. This depends on the type of diverter switch. This fact should
be noted when project planning the locking circuits between the motor-
drive unit and external equipment (e.g. transformer circuit breaker).
► For external monitoring, locking, and control purposes, it is not there-
fore the position transmitter equipment but the "Tap changer in opera-
tion" position transit contact shown in the connection diagram that
should be used.

4.2 Checking protective relay
4.2.1 Checking protective relay (RS 2001, 2001/V, 2001/H, 2001/E,

2001/5, 2001/R, 2003)
ü Check that the protective relay is functioning correctly before commis-
sioning the transformer:
1. Ground the transformer on the high-voltage and low-voltage sides. En-
sure that the working ground connection on the transformer is not re-
moved during testing.
2. Ensure that transformer remains de-energized during testing.
3. Deactivate the automatic fire extinguishing device.
4. Open terminal box of protective relay.
5. Press OFF test button.
6. Leave the transformer's danger zone.
7. Ensure that the transformer's circuit breaker cannot be closed.
ð Passive protection test
8. Press IN SERVICE test button.
10. Close the transformer's circuit breaker with isolating switches open and
the transformer grounded on all sides.
12. Ensure that the transformer's circuit breaker is open.
ð Active protection test.
13. Press IN SERVICE test button to reset the protective relay.
4.2.2 Checking protective relay (RS 2004)

ü Check that the protective relay is functioning correctly before commis-
sioning the transformer:
1. Ensure that the flap valve is in the IN SERVICE position.
ð Active protection test
4.3 Checking pressure monitoring device

ü Check that the pressure monitoring device is operating properly before
putting the transformer into operation:

1. Ground the transformer on the high-voltage and low-voltage sides. En-

sure that the working ground connection on the transformer is not re-
moved during testing.
2. Ensure that transformer remains de-energized during testing.
3. Deactivate the automatic fire extinguishing device.
4. Remove the cover cap.
5. Activate the sensor on the snap-action switch.
ð Sensor is in the OFF position.
7. Ensure that the transformer's circuit breaker cannot be closed.
ð Passive protection test
ð Sensor is in the OPERATION position
ð Sensor is in the OFF position.
ð Active protection test.
13. Activate the sensor on the snap-action switch to reset the pressure
monitoring device.
ð Sensor is in the OPERATION position
14. Secure the cover cap.
4.4 Filling the oil compartment of the on-load tap-changer with

oil

Danger of death or severe injury from explosive gases under the on-load
tap-changer head cover, in the pipework system, in the oil conservator or at
the dehydrating breather opening!
► Ensure that there are no naked flames, hot surfaces or sparks (for ex-
ample caused by static charging) in the immediate surroundings and
that none occur.

NOTICE Damage to the on-load tap-changer!

Damage to the on-load tap-changer by actuating the on-load tap-changer
without oil!
► Before actuating the on-load tap-changer for the first time, the tap se-
lector must be completely immersed in transformer oil and the oil com-
partment completely filled with oil.
► The on-load tap-changer can be operated in the temperature range of
the surrounding transformer oil of between -25 ° and +105 °C and with
overload up to +115 °C in accordance with IEC 60214-1.
1. Establish a connecting lead between the pipe connection E2 and one of

the pipe connections R, S or Q to ensure equal pressure during evacua-
tion in the oil compartment and transformer.
Figure 15: Connecting lead between E2 and Q.

2. Fill on-load tap-changer with new mineral insulating oil for transformers
in accordance with IEC 60296 using one of the two free pipe connec-
tions of the on-load tap-changer head.
Figure 16: Pipe connection S and R
3. Take oil sample from oil compartment.

4. Record temperature of oil sample just after sample is taken.
5. Determine dielectric strength and water content at a diverter switch oil
temperature of 20 °C ± 5 °C. The dielectric strength and water content
must comply with the limit values provided in the appendix [► 49].
6. Bleed the on-load tap-changer.
7. Carry out tap change operation tests.
4.5 Commissioning the transformer

1. Loop the signaling contact for falling below the minimum oil level in the
on-load tap-changer's oil conservator into the tripping circuit of the cir-
cuit breaker.
2. Loop protective relay and additional protective devices (e.g. pressure re-
lief device) into circuit breaker's tripping circuit.
3. Ensure that all stop-cocks between on-load tap-changer and oil conser-
vator of the on-load tap-changer are open.

4. NOTICE! Switch on transformer. Once the transformer has been

switched on, ensure that the inrush current impulse has fully subsided
before undertaking an on-load tap change operation. The inrush current
impulses are usually a multiple of the transformer rated current and can
overload the on-load tap-changer during the diverter switch operation.
ð After the transformer has been switched on and the inrush current im-
pulse has subsided, on-load tap-changer tap-change operations can be
performed both under no load and load conditions.
During all function checks and tests when commissioning, in addition to the
safety instructions in Chapter 2, also note the safety notice provided in the
chapter Electrical high voltage tests on the transformer.

5 Operation
5 Operation
5.1 Actuating motor-drive unit with hand crank

It is imperative that you observe the following information about actuating the
motor-drive unit with the hand crank.
▪ WARNING! Only actuate the motor-drive unit with the hand crank fit-
ted in the motor-drive unit. Otherwise, there is a risk of serious injury.
The safety switch in the hand crank disconnects the motor circuit at two
poles however, it does not disconnect the control circuit.
▪ Only actuate motor-drive unit with hand crank to center.
▪ NOTICE! Only actuate the motor-drive unit with the hand crank in an
emergency provided that the motor-drive unit has been correctly cen-
tered. Failure to do so may result in damage to the on-load tap-changer
and transformer. An emergency should be understood to be failure of
the motor-drive unit's voltage supply when there is an urgent need to
perform a tap change.
▪ NOTICE! It is essential to complete all started tap changes without
changing direction of rotation. The tap change is complete when the in-
dicator is in the mid-position of the area marked in gray on the tap-
change indicator. Failure to do so may result in damage to the on-load
tap-changer and transformer.
5.2 Monitoring during operation

tap-changer head cover, in the pipework system, in the oil conservator or at
the dehydrating breather opening!
that none occur.

Damage to the on-load tap-changer!
► Make sure that the contact that indicates that the oil has fallen below
the minimum oil level in the on-load tap-changer's oil conservator was
looped through to the tripping circuit of the circuit breaker and that the
circuit breaker will immediately de-energize the transformer when the
oil falls below this minimum oil level in the oil conservator.
► Make sure that the protective relay RS and additional protective devi-
ces (e.g. pressure relief device MPreC®) were looped through to the
tripping circuit of the circuit breaker and that the circuit breaker will im-
mediately de-energize the transformer when the protective relay or ad-
ditional protective devices have been tripped.

5 Operation
Monitoring the on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit is limited to occa-

sional visual checks of on-load tap-changer head, protective relay, and mo-
tor-drive unit. For efficiency reasons these visual checks can be combined
with the usual checks on the transformer.
Pay particular attention to the following:

▪ Oil impermeability at the sealing points of the on-load tap-changer head,
protective relay, and connected pipes
▪ Gaskets of protective housing of motor-drive unit
▪ Correct functioning of installed electrical heater in protective housing of
motor-drive unit
▪ Correction function of protective relay (see)
▪ Perfect condition of the silica gel breather for the on-load tap-changer oil
conservator
The insulating oils in the transformer, including the on-load tap-changer, are
to be monitored by the operator following the appropriate rules and regula-
tions.
The oil quality of the on-load tap-changer oil should be checked at regular
intervals:
▪ For on-load tap-changers used on the neutral point of windings (class 1
in accordance with IEC 60214-1): every 7 years
▪ For on-load tap-changers used at points other than the neutral point of
windings (class 2 in accordance with IEC 60214-1): every 2 years
To do so, proceed as follows:


6 Fault elimination
6 Fault elimination
tap-changer head cover!
that none occur.
► De-energize all auxiliary circuits (for example tap-change supervisory
control, pressure relief device, pressure-operated relays) before remov-
ing the on-load tap-changer head cover.
► Do not operate any electric devices during the work (for example risk of
sparks caused by impact wrench).
► Only use conductive and grounded hoses, pipes and pump equipment
that are approved for flammable liquids.
NOTICE Damage to the on-load tap-changer and transformer!

Tripping of the protective relay or other protective devices can indicate dam-
age on the on-load tap-changer and transformer! The transformer must not
be energized without first undertaking checks!
► Check on-load tap-changer and transformer when protective relay or
other protective devices have been tripped.
► Do not use the equipment again until you are sure there is no damage
to the on-load tap-changer or transformer.
The table below is intended to assist with detecting and, where possible,
remedying faults.
For more information, please consult the operating instructions for the RS
protective relay or the relevant protective device.
In the event of faults on the on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit, which
cannot be easily corrected on site, or if the RS protective relay or additional
protective devices have been tripped, please inform your authorized MR rep-
resentative, the transformer manufacturer or contact us directly at:

Technischer Service
Postfach 12 03 60
93025 Regensburg
Germany
Phone: +49 94140 90-0
Fax: +49 9 41 40 90-7001
E-mail: service@reinhausen.com
Internet: www.reinhausen.com
Error pattern Action
Tripping of protective relay (for example RS) See [► 40]

6 Fault elimination

Tripping of pressure relief device (for example Remove diverter switch insert following mainte-
MPreC®) nance manual for the relevant on-load tap-changer.
Depending on the cause of tripping, take measure-
ments/carry out checks on the transformer.
Tripping of pressure-operated relay (for example Remove diverter switch insert following mainte-
DW 2000) nance manual for the relevant on-load tap-changer.
Activation of tap-change supervisory control Remove diverter switch insert following mainte-
nance manual for the relevant on-load tap-changer.
Activation of rupture disk in on-load tap-changer Remove diverter switch insert following mainte-
head cover nance manual for the relevant on-load tap-changer.
Tripping of motor protective switch in motor-drive Request "Information sheet on motor protective
unit switch tripping" from MR, complete and return to
MR.
Tripping of signaling contact that indicates that the Check pipework system (pipes etc.) and on-load
oil has fallen below the minimum oil level in the on- tap-changer head for leaks. Check oil level and oil
load tap-changer oil conservator quality of diverter switch oil in accordance with op-
erating instructions for on-load tap-changer. If the
oil falls below the limit values, also contact MR.
On-load tap-changer not changing tap position Contact MR.
(sluggishness, Raise keys/Lower keys not working,
diverter switch action not audible)
No change in voltage on transformer despite Contact MR.
change in position on motor-drive unit
Tap position indicator on motor-drive unit and on- Contact MR.
load tap-changer different
Noises on drive shaft or motor-drive unit when Ensure proper mounting of the drive shaft in ac-
changing tap position cordance with its operating instructions. Check that
hose clips and protective covers are seated correct-
ly. Contact MR in the event of noise from the motor-
drive unit.
Red message on monitoring unit If possible read out database and send to MR along
with error code.
Warning or tripping of Buchholz relay on transform- Notify manufacturer of transformer.
er
Deviation from desired value when measuring Contact manufacturer of transformer and, if neces-
winding resistance of transformer sary, MR and provide measured values.
Deviation from desired value during dissolved gas Contact manufacturer of transformer and, if neces-
analysis (transformer oil) sary, MR and provide measured values.
Deviation from desired value during transformer ra- Contact manufacturer of transformer and, if neces-
tio test sary, MR and provide measured values.

6 Fault elimination

Deviation from limit value for diverter switch oil val- Carry out oil change, check oil conservator breather
ues of on-load tap-changer.
Table 6: Fault elimination
6.1 Tripping of the protective relay and re-commissioning the

transformer

Danger of death or severe injury if on-load tap-changer and transformer are
insufficiently tested!
► Be sure to check on-load tap-changer and transformer after the protec-
tive relay has been tripped. The diverter switch insert or selector switch
insert must be removed in order to do this.
► Only use the equipment again when you are sure there is no damage to
the on-load tap-changer or transformer.
When the circuit breakers have been tripped by the protective relay, proceed
as follows:
1. Establish time of tripping.
2. Determine operating position of on-load tap-changer.
3. As a precaution, block the motor-drive unit by tripping the motor protec-
tive switch to prevent the on-load tap-changer being actuated by remote
control.
4. Check on-load tap-changer head cover. If oil is leaking, shut the oil con-
servator stop valve immediately.
5. Check whether the flap valve of the protective relay is in the OFF or IN
SERVICE position.
6.1.1 Flap valve in IN SERVICE position

If the flap valve is in the IN SERVICE position, there may be a fault in the
tripping circuit. Check the tripping circuit. If the reason for the protective relay
tripping cannot be found, the diverter switch insert or selector switch insert
must be removed in accordance with the on-load tap-changer's operating in-
structions and checked [► 40].
6.1.2 Flap valve in OFF position

Note that protective relay RS 2004 features an automatic reset mechanism
which means that the flap valve does not remain in the OFF position after
tripping. If the protective relay RS 2004 has not tripped due to an error in
the tripping circuit, proceed as described below for RS 2004 too.
If the flap valve is in the OFF position, proceed as follows:

1. Ensure that the transformer is not started up under any circumstances.

6 Fault elimination
2. Remove and inspect diverter switch insert in accordance with corre-

sponding on-load tap-changer operating instructions.
3. Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen and inform them of the following:
▪ Serial number of protective relay and on-load tap-changer.
▪ What was the load of the transformer at the instant of tripping?
▪ Was the on-load tap-changer moved immediately before or during trip-
ping?
▪ Did any other protective devices of the transformer respond at the in-
stant of tripping?
▪ Were switching operations in the network performed at the instant of
tripping?
▪ Were overvoltages registered at the instant of tripping?
6.1.3 Re-commissioning the transformer

Once the reason for the protective relay tripping has been established and
remedied, you can re-commission the transformer:
1. Ensure that the flap valve is in the IN SERVICE position.
2. Commission the transformer.
6.2 Tripping the pressure-operated relay and putting the

transformer back into operation
WARNING Risk of severe injury or death!

Risk of severe injury or death if on-load tap-changer and transformer are in-
sufficiently tested!
► Check the on-load tap-changer and transformer when a pressure-oper-
ated relay has been tripped. The diverter switch insert or selector
switch insert must be removed in order to do this.
► Only use the equipment again when you are sure there is no damage to
the on-load tap-changer or transformer.
Proceed as follows if the circuit breaker is tripped by the pressure-operated

relay:
1. Establish time of tripping.
2. Determine operating position of on-load tap-changer.
3. As a precaution, block the motor-drive unit by tripping the motor protec-
tive switch to prevent the on-load tap-changer from being actuated by
remote control.
4. Check the on-load tap-changer head cover. If oil is leaking, shut the oil
conservator stop valve immediately.
5. Check whether the pressure-operated relay sensor is in the OFF posi-
tion or OPERATION position.

6 Fault elimination
6.2.1 Sensor in the OPERATION position

If the sensor is in the OPERATION position, there may be an error in the trip-
ping circuit. Check the tripping circuit in this case. If the cause for the pres-
sure-operated relay tripping cannot be ascertained this way, the diverter
switch insert or selector switch insert must be removed and checked in ac-
cordance with the corresponding operating instructions.
6.2.2 Sensor in the OFF position

Proceed as follows if the sensor is in the OFF position.
1. Ensure that the transformer is not started up under any circumstances.
2. Remove and inspect the diverter switch insert in accordance with corre-
sponding on-load tap-changer operating instructions.
3. Contact and inform Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen of the following:
▪ What was the load of the transformer at the instant of tripping?
▪ Was there a tap-change operation on the on-load tap-changer immedi-
ately before or during the tripping?
▪ Did any other protective devices of the transformer respond at the in-
stant of tripping?
▪ Were switching operations in the network being carried out at the instant
of tripping?
▪ Were overvoltages registered at the instant of tripping?
▪ How high is the static pressure on the pressure relief device (height dif-
ference between the oil level in the on-load tap-changer oil conservator
and the pressure relief device)?
6.2.3 Re-commissioning the transformer

You can put the transformer back into operation after the cause for tripping
the pressure-operated relay has been determined and resolved:
1. Ensure that the sensor on the snap-action switch is in the OPERATION
position.
2. Commission the transformer.

7 Maintenance
7 Maintenance
7.1 Scope and execution

The scope and execution of maintenance are determined by the mainte-
nance instructions for the corresponding on-load tap-changer. If the appro-
priate preparations are made, proper maintenance can be carried out within
one day per on-load tap-changer column.
We strongly recommend having maintenance carried out by our Technical

Service department. If this route is taken, in addition to the correct perform-
ance of all work, certain components will be upgraded to the latest state of
technology and manufacturing status.
If maintenance is not carried out by our Technical Service department,

please ensure that the personnel who carry out the maintenance are trained
by MR or are otherwise suitably qualified to carry out the work.
In such cases, we would ask you to forward to us a report on the mainte-

nance performed so we can update our maintenance files. For inquiries
about spare parts, please provide the serial number (see name plate on on-
load tap-changer head and motor-drive unit) and the number of tap-change
operations.
7.2 On-load tap-changer maintenance intervals
NOTICE Damage to on-load tap-changer and transformer!

Damage to on-load tap-changer and transformer from non-observance of
maintenance intervals and improper maintenance!
► Observe maintenance intervals.
► Ensure complete and proper maintenance.
Maintenance should be performed on the on-load tap-changer after every

300,000 switching operations. A label on the inside of the door of the ED
motor-drive unit clearly specifies the relevant maintenance interval. When
using the TAPGUARD® 260 device, the maintenance intervals stated on the
TAPGUARD® 260 device display apply. More information can be found in
the operating instructions for the TAPGUARD® 260.

7 Maintenance
Figure 17: Label showing maintenance intervals
The diverter switch insert must be replaced after 1.2 million switching opera-
tions.
After 1.2 million switching operations (motor-drive unit counter reading), the
selector requires maintenance work.
7.3 Oil change
7.3.1 Oil to use

Damage to the on-load tap-changer resulting from switching the on-load
tap-changer at impermissible oil temperatures!
► The on-load tap-changer can be operated in the temperature range of
the surrounding transformer oil of between -25 ° and +105 °C and with
overload up to +115 °C in accordance with IEC 60214-1.
When filling the oil compartment and its oil conservator, use only new miner-
al insulating oil for transformers in accordance with IEC 60296 (Specification
for unused mineral insulating oils for transformers and switchgear).
The dielectric strength and water content of the diverter switch oil must be
determined after filling with oil:

7 Maintenance

7.3.2 Performing oil change

Carry out the oil change in accordance with the maintenance instructions for
the corresponding on-load tap-changer (available on request).
7.4 Maintaining motor-drive unit

Danger of death or severe injury due to failure to observe the safety instruc-
tions!
► Perform control checks with the supply voltage connected.
► Note relevant safety instructions.
Regular maintenance is not required. We do however recommend that you

contact MR's Technical Service team after 600,000 tap-change operations.
Monitoring of the motor-drive unit is limited to occasional visual inspections.

For efficiency reasons these visual checks can be combined with the usual
checks on the transformer.

▪ Gaskets of protective housing of motor-drive unit
▪ Correct functioning of the installed electrical heater in the protective
housing of the motor-drive unit
When maintaining the on-load tap-changer, a function test should also be

carried out on the motor-drive unit.

8 Technical data
8 Technical data
An overview of all key technical data for the on-load tap-changer and motor-
drive unit exists in the form of separate documents, which are available on
request.
8.1 Technical data for protective relay
General technical data

Housing Outdoor model
Degree of protection IP 54
Relay actuation Flap valve with aperture
Weight About 3.5 kg
Oil flow speed of available types 0.65 m/s
when tripping (oil temperature 20 1.20 m/s
°C)
3.00 m/s
4.80 m/s
Table 7: General technical data
Tripping circuit
The protective relay can be supplied with either a normally open (NO) or a
normally closed (NC) dry-reed magnetic switch (see dimensional drawing
supplied).
Other contact combinations are available as special design [► 47].
Electrical data for normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) dry-reed
magnetic switch
AC switching capacity 1.2 VA…400 VA
DC switching capacity 1.2 W…250 W
Maximum admissible voltage 250 V
AC/DC 24 V
Minimum admissible voltage
AC/DC
Maximum switched current AC/DC 2A
Minimum switched current AC/DC 4.8 mA at 250 V

8 Technical data
Power frequency withstand voltage Between all voltage-carrying con-

test nections and the grounded parts: at
least 2500 V, 50 Hz, test duration 1
minute
Between open contacts: at least
2000 V, 50 Hz, test duration 1 mi-
nute
Table 8: Electrical data for normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC) dry-reed
magnetic switch
8.2 Special models of protective relay
8.2.1 Protective relay with CO change-over contact as tripping switch

The protective relay can be supplied with a dry-reed magnetic switch, CO
change-over (variant 3) (see dimensional drawing supplied).
Electrical data for CO change-over dry-reed magnetic switch

AC switching capacity 1.2 VA…200 VA
DC switching capacity 1.2 W…130 W
Maximum admissible voltage 250 V
AC/DC 24 V
Minimum admissible voltage
AC/DC
Maximum switched current AC/DC 1A
Minimum switched current AC/DC 4.8 mA at 250 V
Power frequency withstand voltage Between all voltage-carrying con-
test nections and the grounded parts: at
least 2500 V, 50 Hz, test duration 1
minute
Between open contacts: at least
1150 V, 50 Hz, test duration 1 mi-
nute
Table 9: Electrical data for CO change-over dry-reed magnetic switch
8.2.2 Protective relay with several dry-reed magnetic switches

The protective relay can be supplied with several independent dry-reed mag-
netic switches. These can be designed as normally open (NO) or normally
closed (NC) contacts and are electrically isolated (see dimensional drawing
supplied).
Electrical data for normally open (NO) and normally closed (NC) dry-reed
magnetic switch

8 Technical data
8.3 Technical data for pressure monitoring device
General technical data

Setup Outdoor model
Ambient temperature -40 °C…+80 °C (mechanical)
Cable connection M25x1.5
Degree of protection IP 55 in accordance with IEC 60529 (enclosed
device)
Relay actuation Corrugated tubing with counter-pressure
spring
Oil temperature -40 °C – +100 °C
Weight About 1.2 kg
Equipment For standard insulating fluids (IEC60296 and
IEC60422) and alternative insulating fluids
Sealing material VITON
(oil – air)
Permitted pressure 1 bar…6 bar, vacuum not permitted
range
(absolute pressure)
Upper switching pres- 3.8 ±0.2 bar (trip pressure)
sure
Lower switching pres- 2.8 ± 0.2 bar
sure
Snap-action switch
Connection terminals Line connection: 1 or 2 lines per terminal
(Ø 0.75…2.5 mm²)
Contacts 1xNO (normally open), 1xNC (normally
closed)
Utilization category IEC 60947-5-1:
AC 15: 230 V/1 A
DC 13: 60 V/0.5 A
Maximum continuous 10 A
current
Rated insulation voltage AC: 2.5 kV/min
Table 10: General technical data

9 Appendix
9 Appendix
9.1 Limit values for dielectric strength and water content of on-
load tap-changer oil
The following table provides the limit values for dielectric strength (measured
in accordance with IEC 60156) and water content (measured in accordance
with IEC 60814) of the on-load tap-changer oil for VACUTAP® on-load tap-
changers. The values have been established on the basis of IEC 60422.
Ud H2O
When commissioning the trans- > 60 kV/2.5 mm < 12 ppm
former for the first time
During operation > 30 kV/2.5 mm < 30 ppm
After maintenance > 50 kV/2.5 mm < 15 ppm
Table 11: Limit values for on-load tap-changer oil

9 Appendix
9.2 VACUTAP® VM® installation drawing of centrical drive

(746230)

9 Appendix
VACUTAP® VM® installation drawing of centrical drive (746230) –2–

9 Appendix
9.3 VACUTAP® VM 300 installation drawing of centrical drive

(765192)

9 Appendix
9.4 VACUTAP® VM® installation position of tap selector

connection contacts (890477)

9 Appendix
9.5 VACUTAP® VM® supporting flange, special design for bell-

type tank installation for Vm up to 300 kV (896762)

9 Appendix
9.6 VACUTAP® VM® on-load tap-changer head, centrical drive

(893899)

9 Appendix
9.7 On-load tap-changer head with tap-change supervisory

control (894109)

9 Appendix
9.8 VACUTAP® VM® pipe connection Q with tap-change

supervisory control (766161)

9 Appendix
9.9 Tracing template for on-load tap-changer head (890183)

9 Appendix
9.10 Socket wrench for kerosene drain plug (890182)

9 Appendix
9.11 Screw tools for installation and maintenance (890478)

9 Appendix
9.12 Bevel gear CD 6400, dimensional drawing (892916)

Glossary
Glossary
AC
Alternating current
CO
Change-Over contact
DC
Direct current
Dielectric strength
Material-specific property of isolators [kV/2.5
mm]; maximum electrical field strength without a
breakdown (arc)
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IP
Ingress protection
MR
NC
Normally Closed contact
NO
Normally Open contact

MR worldwide
Australia Malaysia
Reinhausen Australia Pty. Ltd. Reinhausen Asia-Pacific Sdn. Bhd
17/20-22 St Albans Road Level 11 Chulan Tower
Kingsgrove NSW 2208 No. 3 Jalan Conlay
Phone: +61 2 9502 2202 50450 Kuala Lumpur
Fax: +61 2 9502 2224 Phone: +60 3 2142 6481
E-Mail: sales@au.reinhausen.com Fax: +60 3 2142 6422
E-Mail: mr_rap@my.reinhausen.com
Brazil
MR do Brasil Indústria Mecánica Ltda. P.R.C. (China)
Av. Elias Yazbek, 465 MR China Ltd. (MRT)
CEP: 06803-000 开德贸易（上海）有限公司
Embu - São Paulo 中国上海浦东新区浦东南路 360 号
Phone: +55 11 4785 2150 新上海国际大厦 4 楼 E 座
Fax: +55 11 4785 2185 邮编： 200120
E-Mail: vendas@reinhausen.com.br 电话：＋ 86 21 61634588
传真：＋ 86 21 61634582
Canada 邮箱：mr-sales@cn.reinhausen.com
Reinhausen Canada Inc. mr-service@cn.reinhausen.com
3755, rue Java, Suite 180
Brossard, Québec J4Y 0E4 Russian Federation
Phone: +1 514 370 5377 OOO MR
Fax: +1 450 659 3092 Naberezhnaya Akademika Tupoleva
E-Mail: m.foata@ca.reinhausen.com 15, Bld. 2 ("Tupolev Plaza")
105005 Moscow
India Phone: +7 495 980 89 67
Easun-MR Tap Changers Ltd. Fax: +7 495 980 89 67
612, CTH Road E-Mail: mrr@reinhausen.ru
Tiruninravur, Chennai 602 024
Phone: +91 44 26300883 South Africa
Fax: +91 44 26390881 Reinhausen South Africa (Pty) Ltd.
E-Mail: easunmr@vsnl.com No. 15, Third Street, Booysens Reserve
Johannesburg
Indonesia Phone: +27 11 8352077
Pt. Reinhausen Indonesia Fax: +27 11 8353806
German Center, Suite 6310, E-Mail: support@za.reinhausen.com
Jl. Kapt. Subijanto Dj.
BSD City, Tangerang South Korea
Phone: +62 21 5315-3183 Reinhausen Korea Ltd.
Fax: +62 21 5315-3184 21st floor, Standard Chartered Bank Bldg.,
E-Mail: c.haering@id.reinhausen.com 47, Chongro, Chongro-gu,
Seoul 110-702
Iran Phone: +82 2 767 4909
Iran Transfo After Sales Services Co. Fax: +82 2 736 0049
Zanjan, Industrial Township No. 1 (Aliabad) E-Mail: you-mi.jang@kr.reinhausen.com
Corner of Morad Str.
Postal Code 4533144551 U.S.A.
E-Mail: itass@iran-transfo.com Reinhausen Manufacturing Inc.
2549 North 9th Avenue
Italy Humboldt, TN 38343
Reinhausen Italia S.r.l. Phone: +1 731 784 7681
Via Alserio, 16 Fax: +1 731 784 7682
20159 Milano E-Mail: sales@reinhausen.com
Phone: +39 02 6943471
Fax: +39 02 69434766 United Arab Emirates
E-Mail: sales@it.reinhausen.com Reinhausen Middle East FZE
Dubai Airport Freezone, Building Phase 6
Japan 3rd floor, Office No. 6EB, 341 Dubai
MR Japan Corporation Phone: +971 4 2368 451
German Industry Park Fax: +971 4 2368 225
1-18-2 Hakusan, Midori-ku Email: service@ae.reinhausen.com
Yokohama 226-0006
Phone: +81 45 929 5728
Fax: +81 45 929 5741
Luxembourg
Reinhausen Luxembourg S.A.
72, Rue de Prés
L-7333 Steinsel
Phone: +352 27 3347 1
Fax: +352 27 3347 99
E-Mail: sales@lu.reinhausen.com
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH +49 (0)941 4090-0 www.reinhausen.com

Falkensteinstrasse 8 +49(0)941 4090-7001
93059 Regensburg sales@reinhausen.com
4338368/00 EN ▪ 03/15 ▪
Motor-Drive Unit
TAPMOTION® ED
138/06
are binding.
Table of contents
Table of contents
1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................ 5
1.1 Validity ................................................................................................................................................ 5
1.2 Manufacturer ....................................................................................................................................... 5
1.3 Subject to change without notice ........................................................................................................ 5
1.4 Completeness ..................................................................................................................................... 5
1.5 Supporting documents ........................................................................................................................ 5
1.6 Safekeeping ........................................................................................................................................ 6
1.7 Notation conventions .......................................................................................................................... 6
1.7.1 Symbols ............................................................................................................................................................... 6
1.7.2 Hazard communication system ............................................................................................................................ 7
1.7.3 Information system ............................................................................................................................................... 8
2 Safety .................................................................................................................................. 9
2.1 General safety information .................................................................................................................. 9
2.2 Appropriate use ................................................................................................................................... 9
2.3 Inappropriate use ................................................................................................................................ 9
2.4 Personnel qualification ...................................................................................................................... 10
2.5 Operator's duty of care ..................................................................................................................... 10
2.6 Personal protective equipment ......................................................................................................... 10
2.7 Protective devices ............................................................................................................................. 11
3 Product description ......................................................................................................... 12

3.1 Function description .......................................................................................................................... 12
3.2 Type designation ............................................................................................................................... 12
3.3 Performance features ....................................................................................................................... 12
3.4 Scope of delivery .............................................................................................................................. 13
3.5 Attachment ........................................................................................................................................ 13
3.5.1 Name plate ......................................................................................................................................................... 14
3.5.2 Indication field .................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.5.3 Anti-condensation heater ................................................................................................................................... 15
3.5.4 Swing frame/terminal rail ................................................................................................................................... 15
3.5.5 Position transmitter equipment .......................................................................................................................... 16
3.5.6 Transmission gear cover plate ........................................................................................................................... 17
4 Packaging, transport and storage .................................................................................. 18

4.1 Packaging ......................................................................................................................................... 18
4.1.1 Purpose .............................................................................................................................................................. 18
4.1.2 Suitability ............................................................................................................................................................ 18
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2013 138/06 TAPMOTION® ED 3

Table of contents
4.1.3 Markings ............................................................................................................................................................ 18

4.2 Transportation, receipt and handling of shipments ........................................................................... 19
4.3 Storage of shipments ........................................................................................................................ 20
4.4 Unpacking shipments and checking for transportation damages ..................................................... 21
5 Drying transformer .......................................................................................................... 22

5.1 Drying transformer in autoclave ........................................................................................................ 22
5.2 Drying transformer in its own tank .................................................................................................... 22
6 Fitting motor-drive unit on transformer ......................................................................... 23

6.1 Fitting motor-drive unit on transformer .............................................................................................. 23
6.2 Mounting drive shafts and bevel gear ............................................................................................... 25
6.3 Coupling on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit .......................................................................... 25
6.4 Installing electrics for motor-drive unit .............................................................................................. 31
7 Performing tests .............................................................................................................. 33

7.1 Performing function tests .................................................................................................................. 33
7.1.1 Preparations ....................................................................................................................................................... 33
7.1.2 Checking field of rotation ................................................................................................................................... 33
7.1.3 Checking correct electric switch-off ................................................................................................................... 34
7.1.4 Checking mechanical and electric end stop of on-load tap-changer/off-circuit tap-changer and motor-drive unit
............................................................................................................................................................................ 34
7.2 Electrical high-voltage tests on the transformer ................................................................................ 35
7.3 Dielectric tests on transformer wiring ................................................................................................ 36
8 Transporting the transformer to the installation site ................................................... 37
9 Commissioning the transformer at the operating site ................................................. 38
10 Actuating motor-drive unit with hand crank ................................................................. 39
11 Maintenance ..................................................................................................................... 40
12 Special designs ................................................................................................................ 41
13 Technical data .................................................................................................................. 42

13.1 Technical data for TAPMOTION® ED .............................................................................................. 42
13.2 Technical data for position transmitter equipment ............................................................................ 42
14 Appendix ........................................................................................................................... 44
14.1 TAPMOTION® ED-L, protective housing (898802) .......................................................................... 44
14.2 TAPMOTION® ED-S, protective housing (898801) .......................................................................... 45
4 TAPMOTION® ED 138/06 Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH 2013

1 Introduction
1 Introduction
This technical file contains detailed descriptions on the safe and proper in-
stallation, connection, commissioning and monitoring of the product.
uct.
sonnel.
1.1 Validity
This technical file is valid for the TAPMOTION® ED product.
1.2 Manufacturer
Tel.: (+49) 9 41/40 90-0
Fax: (+49) 9 41/40 90-7001
Further information on the product and copies of this technical file are availa-
ble from this address if required.

the footer.
1.4 Completeness
1.5 Supporting documents

The following documents also apply in addition to this technical file:
▪ Connection diagrams
▪ Routine test report
▪ Supplement

1 Introduction
Also observe generally valid legislation, standards, guidelines and specifica-

tions on accident prevention and environmental protection in the respective
country of use.
1.6 Safekeeping

used.
1.7.1 Symbols
Symbol Definition
Wrench size
Tightening torque
Number and type of fastening materials used
Fill with oil
Cut open, cut through
Clean
Visual inspection
Use your hand
Adapter ring
Apply a coat of paint
Use a file

1 Introduction
Symbol Definition
Grease
Coupling bolt
Use a ruler
Use a saw
Hose clip
Table 1: Symbols

Warnings in this technical file use the following format:

Consequences
► Action
► Action

Signal Definition
word
result in minor or moderate injury.
property.

Pictogram Definition

1 Introduction
Pictogram Definition


2 Safety
2 Safety

The technical file contains detailed descriptions on the safe and proper in-
product.
ter.
2.2 Appropriate use

The product and associated equipment and special tools supplied with it
comply with the relevant legislation, regulations and standards, particularly
health and safety requirements, applicable at the time of delivery.
If used as intended and in compliance with the specified requirements and

conditions in this technical file as well as the warning notices in this technical
ards to people, property or the environment. This applies throughout the pro-
duct's entire life, from delivery through installation and operation to disas-

quirements.

▪ the product must be operated in accordance with this technical file and
the agreed delivery conditions and technical data
▪ the associated equipment and special tools supplied with it are used
solely for the intended purpose and in accordance with the specifica-
tions of this technical file
▪ the product must only be used with the on-load tap-changer/off-circuit
tap-changer specified in the order
▪ the serial number of the drive must match that of the on-load tap-chang-
er/off-circuit tap-changer.

scribed in the Appropriate use section.
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen does not accept liability for damage resulting

from unauthorized or inappropriate changes to the product. Inappropriate
changes to the product without consultation with Maschinenfabrik Reinhau-
sen can lead to personal injury, damage to property and operational disrup-
tion.

2 Safety

such products.

contained therein.
where applicable.
bility.
complied with.
2.6 Personal protective equipment

Personal protective equipment must be worn during work to minimize risks to
health.
▪ Always wear the personal protective equipment required for the job at
hand.
▪ Follow information about personal protective equipment provided in the
work area.

2 Safety
Always wear
Protective clothing
Close-fitting work clothing with a low
breaking strength, with tight sleeves and
with no protruding parts. It mainly serves
to protect the wearer against being caught
by moving machine parts.
Do not wear any rings, necklaces or other
jewelry.
Safety shoes
To protect against falling heavy objects
and slipping on slippery surfaces.
Table 4: Personal protective equipment to be worn at all times
Wear the following in spe- Special personal protective equipment

cial environments is needed in special environments.
The choice of equipment depends on
the circumstances.
Safety glasses
To protect the eyes from flying parts and
splashing liquids.
Hard hat
To protect from falling and flying parts and
materials.
Hearing protection
To protect from hearing damage.
Table 5: Personal protective equipment to be worn in special environments
2.7 Protective devices

The following protective devices are fitted in the drive:
▪ End stop device (mechanical and electric)
▪ Device protecting against unintentional passage
▪ Motor protection device
▪ Protection against accidental contact

3.1 Function description

The motor-drive unit works by adjusting the operating position of on-load
tap-changers and off-circuit tap-changers in regulating transformers to the
individual operating requirements.
The tap-change operation is activated by starting the motor-drive unit (a sin-

gle control impulse triggered, for example, by a regulator of the TAPCON®-
series). This operation is always completed regardless of any other control
pulses emitted during the tap-change operation. In the standard design, the
next tap-change operation can only proceed once all control devices have
reached their rest positions.
3.2 Type designation

The various basic designs of the TAPMOTION® ED are clearly identified by
explicit product definitions.
Type designa- Description Variants
tion
ED 100-ST Product designation Electric Drive
ED 100-ST Transmission gear de- 100 or 200 (depending on
sign the torque required)
ED 100-ST Protective housing de- S = small protective housing
sign L = large protective housing
ED 100-ST Special applications … = none
C = Plunger coil design
T = TAPCON® or TAP-
GUARD®
Table 6: Type designation
3.3 Performance features

The motor-drive unit is particularly characterized by the following properties:
▪ common swing frame concept for all on-load tap-changers
▪ reduced design work thanks to common fastening and output geometry
for all TAPMOTION® ED designs
▪ clear indication field which is easy to read
▪ modern terminal technology
▪ rapid replacement of the position transmitter modules since the func-
tions of the position transmitter board and position transmitter module
are separate

▪ quiet transmission gear with zero-maintenance belt-type transmission

gear
▪ panel heater as anti-condensation heater

The motor-drive unit is packaged with protection against moisture and is de-
livered as follows:
▪ Motor-drive unit
▪ Product documentation
Please note the following:

1. Check the shipment for completeness on the basis of the shipping docu-
ments.
2. Store the parts in a dry place until installation.
3. The product must remain in its airtight, protective wrapping and may on-
ly be removed immediately before installation.
3.5 Attachment
This chapter contains an overview of how to attach the motor-drive unit.
Components not described here in detail are described in the motor-drive

unit's technical data.

Figure 1: Motor-drive unit, open
1 Protective housing cover 9 S3 control switch

2 Viewing window for indication 10 Swing frame/anti-condensa-
field tion heater
3 Fixing lug 11 Indication field
4 Ground connection 12 Name plate
5 Output shaft 13 Motor protective switch Q1
6 Hand crank aperture with 14 Document pocket
hand crank safety switch
7 Hand lamp 15 Transmission gear cover plate
8 Hand crank
3.5.1 Name plate

The name plate can be found on the swing frame and contains the following
information:
Figure 2: Name plate

3.5.2 Indication field

A clear indication field is fitted in the motor-drive unit. Pointer and operations
counter are mechanically driven and indicate the tap-change operation se-
quence of the motor-drive unit. The reset-wheel on the operations counter is
lead-sealed at the factory.
Figure 3: Indication field
1 Tap position indicator 3 The tap-change indicator:

Shows the current position of
the control cam (33 tap-
change indicator sections per
operating position)
2 The two drag hands indicate 4 The mechanical operations
the regulating range currently counter shows the overall
used number of tap-change opera-
tions
3.5.3 Anti-condensation heater

The anti-condensation heater is designed as a panel heater which also acts
as the front cover of the swing frame.
The design of the motor-drive unit and panel heater ensures that air circu-
lates inside the motor-drive unit and therefore that there is a constant interior
temperature which is always higher than the outside temperature.
3.5.4 Swing frame/terminal rail

The swing frame protects all electrical and mechanical parts of the motor-
drive unit behind the frame against accidental contact.
The terminal rail behind the swing frame facilitates an easy electrical con-
nection of the motor-drive unit. The wiring is easily connected using vertically
arranged cap rails with the corresponding installed terminal bars.

Figure 4: Terminal rail
1 Swing frame 4 Cable duct

2 Position transmitter module 5 Terminal rail
3 Terminal bar X1 6 Opening for cable entry
(sealed by 3 base plates)
3.5.5 Position transmitter equipment

equipment [► 42] may be connected to the position transmitter mod-
ule connections.
drive unit is not the same as the switchover point of the diverter switch.
This depends on the type of diverter switch. This fact should be noted
when project planning the locking circuits between the motor-drive unit
and external equipment (e.g. transformer circuit breaker).
► For external monitoring, locking and control purposes, it is not therefore
the position transmitter equipment but the "Tap changer in operation"
position transit contact shown in the connection diagram that should be
used.
The position transmitter equipment is used to indicate the operating position

of the on-load tap-changer/off-circuit tap-changer when idle.
The remote display is available in various versions.
The position transmitter module for connection by the customer is located on

the terminal rail [► 15].

For more information about the position transmitter equipment, see Techni-
cal data for position transmitter equipment [► 42].
3.5.6 Transmission gear cover plate
WARNING Danger of death and severe injury from electrical voltage!

Danger of death and severe injury from electrical voltage if the transmission
gear cover plate is not fitted.
► Never start up motor-drive unit without transmission gear cover plate.
The touch-protected transmission gear cover plate features an opening for

the hand crank used in manual mode.
Transmission gear cover plate

4 Packaging, transport and storage
4.1 Packaging
4.1.1 Purpose
The packaging is designed to protect the packaged goods during transport,
loading and unloading as well as periods of storage in such a way that no
(detrimental) changes occur. The packaging must protect the goods against
permitted transport stresses such as vibration, knocks and moisture (rain,
snow, condensation).
The packaging also prevents the packaged goods from moving impermissi-
bly within the packaging. The packaged goods must be prepared for ship-
ment before actually being packed so that the goods can be transported
safely, economically and in accordance with regulations.
4.1.2 Suitability
The packaging is suitable for
▪ all common types of transportation
▪ stackability - 1000 kg/m2 top surface
The packaged goods are packed in a stable wooden crate. This crate en-
sures that the shipment is secure when in the intended transportation posi-
tion and that none of its parts touch the loading surface of the means of
transport or touch the ground after unloading.
The packaged goods are stabilized inside the crate to prevent impermissible
changes in position.
The sealed packaging surrounds the packaged goods on all sides with a PE
foil. The product is protected using desiccant. The PE foil is bonded after the
drying agent is added and any remaining air is extracted. This can be seen
on the form-fit of the PE foil.
4.1.3 Markings
The packaging bears a signature with instructions for safe transport and cor-
rect storage. The following symbols apply to the shipment (of non-hazardous
goods). Adherence to these symbols is mandatory.

Protect against mois- Top Fragile

ture
Table 7: Shipping pictograms
4.2 Transportation, receipt and handling of shipments
WARNING Danger of death and damage to property!

Danger of death and damage to property due to tipping or falling load!
► Only trained and appointed persons may select the sling gear and se-
cure the load.
► Do not walk under the hanging load.
► Use means of transport and lifting gear with a carrying capacity of >
500 kg.
In addition to oscillation stress and shock stress, jolts must also be expected
during transportation. In order to prevent possible damage, avoid dropping,
tipping, knocking over and colliding with the product.
If a box falls from a certain height (e.g. when slings tear) or experiences an
unbroken fall, damage must be expected regardless of the weight.
Every delivered shipment must be checked for the following by the recipient
before acceptance (acknowledgment of receipt):
▪ Completeness based on the delivery slip
▪ External damage of any type.
The checks must take place after unloading when the crate or transport con-
tainer can be accessed from all sides.
Visible damage If external transport damage is detected on receipt of the shipment, proceed
as follows:
▪ Immediately record the transport damage found in the shipping docu-
ments and have this countersigned by the carrier.
▪ In the event of severe damage, total loss or high damage costs, immedi-
ately notify the sales department at Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen and
the relevant insurance company.
▪ After identifying damage, do not modify the condition of the shipment
further and retain the packaging material until an inspection decision
has been made by the transport company or the insurance company.
▪ Record the details of the damage immediately onsite together with the
carrier involved. This is essential for any claim for damages!
▪ If possible, photograph damage to packaging and packaged goods. This
also applies to signs of corrosion on the packaged goods due to mois-
ture inside the packaging (rain, snow, condensation).
▪ Be absolutely sure to also check the sealed packaging.

NOTICE Damage to packaged goods!

Damage to packaged goods due to damaged sealed packaging!
► If the sealed packaging is damaged, do not under any circumstances
install or commission the packaged goods.
▪ Name the damaged parts.
Hidden damage When damages are not determined until unpacking after receipt of the ship-
ment (hidden damage), proceed as follows:
▪ Make the party responsible for the damage liable as soon as possible by
telephone and in writing, and prepare a damage report.
▪ Observe the time periods applicable to such actions in the respective
country. Inquire about these in good time.
With hidden damage, it is very hard to make the transportation company (or
other responsible party) liable. Any insurance claims for such damages can
only be successful if relevant provisions are expressly included in the insur-
ance terms and conditions.
4.3 Storage of shipments

Packaged goods with a functional sealed packaging can be stored outdoors
when the following conditions are complied with.
Selection and arrangement of the storage location should meet the following
requirements:
▪ Stored goods are protected against moisture (flooding, water from melt-
ing snow and ice), dirt, pests such as rats, mice, termites and so on, and
against unauthorized access.
▪ Store the crates on timber beams and planks as a protection against ris-
ing damp and for better ventilation.
▪ Carrying capacity of the substrate under the goods is sufficient.
▪ Entrance and exit paths are kept free.
Check stored goods at regular intervals. Also take appropriate action after
storms, heavy rain or snow and so on.
Protect the packaging foil from direct sunlight so that it does not disintegrate
under the influence of UV rays, which would cause the packaging to lose its
sealing function.
If installation of the product is delayed beyond the normal time frame, suita-
ble measures must be taken without delay. The following measures can be
used:
▪ Correctly regenerate the drying agent and restore the sealed packaging.
▪ Unpack the packed goods and store in suitable storage space (well ven-
tilated, as dust-free as possible, humidity < 50 % where possible).

4.4 Unpacking shipments and checking for transportation

damages
NOTICE Damage to property!
Damage to property due to ineffectively sealed packaging in locations with
an unsuitable climate!
► Leave the product in its sealed packaging until installation.
► Do not open the sealed packaging until just before installation.
▪ Wherever possible keep the crate packaged for transport to the place
where installation will take place.
▪ When unpacking, check the condition of the packaged goods.
▪ Check completeness based on the delivery slip.

5 Drying transformer
5 Drying transformer
5.1 Drying transformer in autoclave

Observe the following information when drying the transformer in a auto-
clave.
NOTICE Damage to drive and on-load tap-changer/off-circuit tap-chang-

er!
If the drive is dried in an autoclave, the drive and on-load tap-changer/off-
circuit tap-changer may be damaged.
► Do not dry drive in an autoclave.
5.2 Drying transformer in its own tank

If you dry the transformer in its own tank, the drive can remain attached to
the transformer during drying.

6 Fitting motor-drive unit on transformer
6.1 Fitting motor-drive unit on transformer

1. Fit 4 stud bolts (not supplied by MR) to transformer tank.
Figure 5: Stud bolt
2. NOTICE! Fit the drive vertically to the transformer tank so that its output
shaft is correctly aligned with the vertical shaft of the bevel gear. If this is
not done, the drive may be damaged.
The assembly holes for this purpose are on the outside of the protective
housing's mounting straps.
Figure 6: Fitting drive

3. NOTICE! Secure drive without warping or deforming. If this is not done,

the drive may be damaged.
Figure 7: Securing drive
4. Vibration dampers must be used on transformers where the motor-drive

unit is subject to vibration (MR special design).
5. Connect the grounding screw of the motor-drive unit to the transformer
tank.
Figure 8: Grounding screw

6. Connect main grounding conductor to grounding conductor terminal on

terminal bar X1 (minimum connection cross-section 2.5 mm2).
Figure 9: Main grounding conductor
6.2 Mounting drive shafts and bevel gear

The process of mounting the drive shafts and bevel gear is described in the
operating instructions for the drive shafts.
6.3 Coupling on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit

Danger of death or severe injury due to motor-drive unit starting up by acci-
dent and due to electric voltage!
► Before starting any coupling work make sure that the motor protective
switch is tripped.
► Carry out any adjustment work in manual mode only.
► When manually operating the motor-drive unit only use the hand crank
provided for this purpose.
► Note that the hand crank safety switch causes a 2-pole disconnection
of the motor circuit but that the control circuit is not interrupted.

Performing too many operations without oil will damage the on-load tap-
changer!
► Do not perform more than 250 tap-change operations on the on-load
tap-changer without oil before drying.
► Before first actuating the on-load tap-changer after drying the trans-
former, the tap selector must be completely immersed in transformer oil
and the oil compartment must be completely filled with oil.

1. NOTICE! Move on-load tap-changer/off-circuit tap-changer and the mo-

tor-drive unit into adjustment position before commencing any adjust-
ment work. Ensure that tap position indicators for the motor-drive unit
and on-load tap-changer/off-circuit tap-changer match. Otherwise dam-
age to the on-load tap-changer and transformer may result.
Figure 10: Adjustment position
2. Attach the hand crank in the motor-drive unit to the shaft end located in
the upper cover plate. This activates a hand crank safety switch which
disconnects the motor circuit at 2 poles.
Figure 11: Hand crank
3. Turn the hand crank clockwise until the diverter switch operation begins.
When turning the hand crank, observe the tap-change indicator which
mechanically reflects the progress of the tap-change operation.

One on-load tap-change operation is represented by one rotation of the tap-

change indicator. This indicator is divided into 33 tap-change indicator sec-
tions each of which corresponds to one hand crank revolution in the stand-
ard motor-drive unit design. The time of the switchover depends on the on-
load tap-changer/off-circuit tap-changer type, but is always 2 tap-change in-
dicator sections before the tap-change indicator gray field at the latest.
Figure 12: Turning the hand crank until the diverter switch operation begins
4. Once the diverter switch operation begins, turn the hand crank in the
same direction while counting the sections required for the pointer to
reach the mid-position of the area marked in gray on the tap-change in-
dicator. Note the determined value A and the direction of rotation (exam-
ple: A=2).
Figure 13: Counting the tap changes needed to reach the mid-position
5. If the determined value A is less than 8 tap-change indicator sections,

turn another 8-A tap-change indicator sections in the same direction (ex-
ample: 8-2=6) to complete the tap-change operation. Then turn in the
opposite direction until the pointer is in the mid-position of the area
marked in gray on the tap-change indicator.
Figure 14: Completing diverter switch operation

6. Turn the hand crank counter-clockwise until the diverter switch opera-
tion begins
Figure 15: Turning hand crank in the opposite direction
7. Once the diverter switch operation begins, turn the hand crank in the
same direction while counting the sections required for the pointer to
reach the mid-position of the area marked in gray on the tap-change in-
dicator. Note the determined value B and the direction of rotation (exam-
ple: B=5). If the values obtained for A and B are identical, the on-load
tap-changer and the motor-drive unit are correctly coupled.
The number of tap-change indicator sections from the beginning of the

diverter switch operation until the pointer reaches the mid-position of the
area marked in gray on the tap-change indicator should be the same in both
directions. A slight asymmetry of a maximum of 1 tap-change indicator sec-
tion is permissible.
Figure 16: Counting tap-change indicator sections needed to reach the mid-position

8. If the determined value B is less than 8 tap-change indicator sections,

turn another 8-B tap-change indicator sections in the same direction (ex-
ample: 8-5=3) to complete the tap-change operation. Then turn in the
opposite direction until the pointer is in the mid-position of the area
marked in gray on the tap-change indicator.
Figure 17: Completing diverter switch operation
9. If the values determined for A and B are different, establish correction

value C by halving the difference between A and B: C=|(A-B) x 0.5|
Example: C=|(2-5) x 0.5|=|-1.5|=1.5
Also take numbers after the decimal point into account.
10. If the correction value |C| is less than 0.5 tap-change indicator section,
no further actions are required. Refer to point 17 for how to proceed
next.
11. Use hand crank to perform one on-load tap-changing operation up to
the diverter switch action in the direction with the higher determined val-
ue A or B (example: counter-clockwise because B > A).

12. Uncouple the motor-drive unit and the vertical drive shaft by removing
the coupling brackets. After uncoupling, don't turn drive shaft any fur-
ther.
Figure 18: Uncoupling motor-drive unit and drive shaft
13. Operate the motor-drive unit using the hand crank in same direction,
continuing by C tap-change indicator sections on the tap-change indica-
tor (example: 1.5 tap-change indicator sections).
14. Couple motor-drive unit and on-load tap-changer by refitting the vertical
drive shaft (reverse order to that described under point 12, tightening
torque 9 Nm). Do not turn drive shaft and motor-drive unit any further.
DANGER Danger of death or severe injury and damage to property!

Danger of death and damage to property due to incomplete on-load tap-
changing operation!
► Always complete on-load tap-changing operation by continuing to turn
hand crank in the same direction until mid-position of area marked in
gray on the tap-change indicator is reached.
► If the on-load tap-changer is coupled correctly, the on-load tap-chang-
ing operation is always completed by continuing to turn hand crank in
the same direction until the mid-position is reached. There is no need to
calculate a correction value as in points 5 and 8.
15. Continue to turn in the same direction while counting the sections re-
quired for the pointer to reach the mid-position of the area marked in
gray on the tap-change indicator. Note the determined value A and the
direction of rotation. If the determined value A is less than 8 tap-change

indicator sections, turn another 8-A tap-change indicator sections in the

same direction to complete the tap-change operation. Then turn in the
opposite direction until the indicator is in mid-position of the area
marked in gray on the tap-change indicator. Check coupling again as
described.
16. The pointer of the tap-change indicator must be in mid-position of the
area marked in gray once the on-load tap-changing operation with the
hand crank is complete.
Figure 19: Indicator in mid-position
17. Once coupling is complete in both directions, check by undertaking sev-

eral on-load tap-changing operations and check that the on-load tap-
changer and motor-drive unit are in the same tap position.
6.4 Installing electrics for motor-drive unit

An energized transformer and energized on-load tap-changer components
could cause death or serious injuries when installing the electrics!
► Adherence to the following safety precautions is mandatory.
The drive may only be connected to circuits with an external isolating device
with all poles disconnected so the equipment can be fully de-energized if re-
quired (service, maintenance etc.).
Suitable equipment includes isolating devices in accordance with IEC

60947-1 and IEC60947-3 (e.g. non-automatic circuit-breaker). When stating
the circuit breaker type, note the properties of the relevant circuits (voltage,
maximum currents). The following should also be noted during installation:
▪ It must be easy for the operator to access the isolating device
▪ The isolating device must be labeled for the motor-drive unit and circuits
to be isolated
▪ The isolating device must not be part of the power line
▪ The isolating device must not interrupt the main grounding conductor
Unless otherwise specified, the connections for the supply current circuits
must have a conductor cross-section of at least 1.5 mm2.
Proceed as follows to electrically connect the motor-drive unit:

1. Switch off voltage supply.

2. Lock voltage supply to prevent unintentional restart.

3. Make sure everything is de-energized.
4. Visibly ground and short circuit motor-drive unit.
5. Cover or cordon off adjacent energized parts.
6. Connect motor-drive unit following connection diagrams provided in the
document pocket. Note the supply voltage stated in the connection dia-
gram.
Figure 20: Example: Standard terminal block X1

7 Performing tests
7 Performing tests
Please contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen if any aspect of the tests is not
clear.
7.1 Performing function tests
7.1.1 Preparations

Danger of death or severe injury due to electrical voltage!
► The relevant safety instructions must be observed.
► Ensure that the motor-drive unit is connected in accordance with the
connection diagrams provided.
► Provide protection against accidental contact before energizing the
drive. The transmission gear cover plate must be fitted and the motor
and swing frame closed.
► Ensure that the motor-drive unit and on-load tap-changer/off-circuit tap-
changer are correctly coupled and that they are in the same tap posi-
tion for each operating position.
NOTICE Damage to on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit!

Damage to on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit due to electrical volt-
age!
► The relevant safety instructions must be observed.
► Ensure that the motor-drive unit is connected in accordance with the
connection diagrams provided.
► Ensure that the motor-drive unit and on-load tap-changer/off-circuit tap-
changer are correctly coupled and that they are in the same tap posi-
tion for each operating position.
Only perform tap changes on the motor-drive unit with the hand crank if the
motor protective switch Q1 is tripped!
7.1.2 Checking field of rotation

Check the field of rotation when using a 3-phase motor.
► When checking the motor circuit voltage, make sure that voltage applied
to the connecting terminals has a clockwise phase sequence.

7 Performing tests
7.1.3 Checking correct electric switch-off

1. Check that the motor-drive unit switches off automatically after perform-
ing one operation of the on-load tap-changer/off-circuit tap-changer and
that the pointer of the tap-change indicator stops within the gray field.
2. Carry out this test in both directions.
7.1.4 Checking mechanical and electric end stop of on-load tap-

changer/off-circuit tap-changer and motor-drive unit
1. Press control switch S3 to switch motor-drive unit to last but one operat-
ing position.
Figure 21: S3 control switch
2. Trip motor protective switch Q1.

3. Using the hand crank, manually operate the motor-drive unit to its last
operating position. If the last operating position isn't reached, check cou-
pling between on-load tap-changer/off-circuit tap-changer and motor-
drive unit.
4. Continue turning motor-drive unit in the same direction with the hand
crank until the motor-drive unit is mechanically blocked.
5. Turn back motor-drive unit with hand crank to mid-position of tap-
change indicator.
6. Take off hand crank.
7. Engage motor protective switch Q1.
8. Check that the motor-drive unit does not continue to operate when the
S3 switch is turned further in the same direction as under point 1.
9. Perform check for both end positions.

7 Performing tests
7.2 Electrical high-voltage tests on the transformer

tap-changer head cover, in the pipework system, in the oil conservator, at
the dehydrating breather opening and from flying parts and hot oil splash-
ing!
that none occur.
► Only use conductive and grounded hoses, pipes and pump equipment
that are approved for flammable liquids.
► Use suitable personal protective equipment/clothing.
► Keep away from the danger area during the transformer test.
► Observe applicable fire protection regulations.
► Make sure that only trained technicians perform work on the transform-
er.
For this reason, it is essential that you ensure only trained, instructed expert
personnel who are familiar with and comply with the pertinent safety and
technical regulations, who are aware of the potential risks, and who consis-
tently use the occupational safety equipment provided to prevent injury and
property damage are assigned to perform such a transformer test.
Note the following points for the electrical high-voltage tests on the trans-
former:
▪ Ensure that the ground connections on the motor-drive protective hous-
ing and motor-drive protective housing fastening are free of paint.
▪ Only perform high voltage test if motor-drive unit door is closed.
▪ Disconnect external connections to electronic components in the motor-
drive unit to prevent damage from overvoltage.
▪ When connecting the motor-drive unit's supply voltage, only use the
holes in the protective housing base intended for lead insertion.
▪ Guide all ground connecting leads to one central connection point (es-
tablishment of suitable reference ground).
▪ Disconnect all electronic components before the high voltage test. Be-
fore a wiring dielectric test, remove all devices with a withstand voltage
of < 1000 V.
▪ Leads used for testing must be removed before the high voltage test, as
these function as antennas.
▪ Wherever possible, route the measurement and data leads separately
from the energy cables.
If you have any questions about possible sources of danger, consult the
manufacturer before starting to test the transformer.

7 Performing tests
The electrical tests required for transformer acceptance may only be under-
taken once the aforementioned work is complete.
7.3 Dielectric tests on transformer wiring

Note the following points for dielectric tests on the transformer wiring:
The motor-drive unit is put through dielectric tests before delivery.

► Before the dielectric test for the transformer wiring, disconnect drive
from the section to be tested to rule out increased component loading
for those components fitted in the motor-drive unit.

8 Transporting the transformer to the installation site
8 Transporting the transformer to the installation

site
If you have to remove the motor-drive unit to transport the transformer, pro-
ceed as follows:
1. Ensure that the drive and the on-load tap-changer/off-circuit tap-changer
are in the adjustment position.
2. Remove the drive.
3. Do not actuate the drive while the on-load tap-changer/off-circuit tap-
changer is not coupled.
4. Do not actuate an on-load tap-changer/off-circuit tap-changer which is
not coupled.
5. Transport the drive to the installation site in the MR delivery packaging.
6. Fit drive to transformer at the operating site.

9 Commissioning the transformer at the operating site
9 Commissioning the transformer at the operating

site
Before commissioning the transformer, repeat the function tests.

Danger of death or severe injury due to incorrect operation!
► Under no circumstances is the transformer to be commissioned if the
functions are not satisfied in accordance with the Function tests sec-
tion.

Damage to on-load tap-changer and motor-drive unit due to condensate in
the motor-drive unit!
► Always keep protective housing of the motor-drive unit tightly closed.
► If the standstill time before commissioning exceeds 8 weeks or opera-
tion is interrupted for longer than 2 weeks, the heater must be connect-
ed and turned on to prevent the condensation of moisture inside the
protective housing. If this is not possible (e.g. during transportation),
place a sufficient amount of dehydrating agent in the protective hous-
ing.

equipment [► 42] may be connected to the position transmitter mod-
ule connections.
drive unit is not the same as the switchover point of the diverter switch.
This depends on the type of diverter switch. This fact should be noted
when project planning the locking circuits between the motor-drive unit
and external equipment (e.g. transformer circuit breaker).
► For external monitoring, locking and control purposes, it is not therefore
the position transmitter equipment but the "Tap changer in operation"
position transit contact shown in the connection diagram that should be
used.

10 Actuating motor-drive unit with hand crank
10 Actuating motor-drive unit with hand crank

It is imperative that you observe the following information about actuating the
motor-drive unit with the hand crank.
▪ WARNING! Only actuate the motor-drive unit with the hand crank
fitted in the motor-drive unit. Otherwise, there is a risk of serious injury.
The safety switch in the hand crank disconnects the motor circuit at two
poles however, it does not disconnect the control circuit.
▪ Only actuate motor-drive unit with hand crank to center [► 25].
▪ NOTICE! Only actuate the motor-drive unit with the hand crank in an
emergency provided that the motor-drive unit has been correctly cen-
tered. Failure to do so may result in damage to the on-load tap-changer
and transformer. An emergency should be understood to be failure of
the motor-drive unit's voltage supply when there is an urgent need to
perform a tap change.
▪ NOTICE! It is essential to complete all started tap changes without
changing direction of rotation. The tap change is complete when the in-
dicator is in the mid-position of the area marked in gray on the tap-
change indicator. Failure to do so may result in damage to the on-load
tap-changer and transformer.

11 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
Danger of death or severe injury due to failure to observe the safety instruc-
tions!
► Perform control checks with the supply voltage connected.
► Note relevant safety instructions.
Regular maintenance is not required. We do however recommend that you

contact MR's Technical Service team after 600,000 tap-change operations.
Monitoring of the motor-drive unit is limited to occasional visual inspections.

For efficiency reasons these visual checks can be combined with the usual
checks on the transformer.

▪ Gaskets of the protective housing of the motor-drive unit
▪ Correct functioning of the installed electrical heater in the protective
housing of the motor-drive unit
When maintaining the on-load tap-changer, a function test should also be

carried out on the motor-drive unit.

12 Special designs
12 Special designs
The standard design of the motor-drive unit can be modified to accommo-
date specific operating requirements.
Feature Special equipment in motor-
drive unit
VACUTAP® VT Recovery time delay (60 s)
On-load tap-changer with change- Star-delta monitoring
over selector for star-delta change-
over operation
Furnace and electrolysis operation Additional input terminals for “oper-
ation without step-by step switch”
Thermostat for on-load tap-chang- Temperature monitoring with break
ers contact for the control circuit
Higher maximum number of operat- Control gear + on-load tap-change
ing positions position indicator for 70 operating
positions
Control gear + on-load tap-change
position indicator for 105 operating
positions
Special on-load tap-changer ar- Control gear for ABC arrangement
rangement: ABC arrangement
Temperature range < -30 °C Externally-located control elements
Main switch for disconnecting all
circuits except the heating circuit
Thermostatically-controlled addi-
tional heater
Temperature monitoring depending
on oil used
Table 8: Special designs

13 Technical data
13 Technical data
13.1 Technical data for TAPMOTION® ED

The technical data is relevant to the standard design and may vary depend-
ing on the design delivered. Subject to change without prior notice.
Motor-drive unit ED 100-S/L ED 200-S/L
Motor power 0.75 kW 2.0 kW 2.2 kW
Voltage 3 AC/N 230/400 V
Current approx. 1.9 A approx. 5.2 approx. 6.2 A
A
Frequency 50 Hz
Synchronous speed 1500 rpm
Rotations of the drive shaft per tap-change operation 16.5
Duration of the tap-change operation approx. 5.4 s
Rated torque on the drive shaft 45 Nm 90 Nm 125 Nm
Rotations of the hand crank per tap-change operation 33 54
Maximum number of operating positions 35
Heater voltage and control AC 230 V
Power input of the control circuit (control / operation) 100 VA/25 VA
Heating power 50 W for ED 100/200 S
60 W for ED 100/200 L
Temperature range (ambient temperature) -25 °C to +50 °C
Protection from foreign objects and water IP 66 in accordance with DIN EN 60529
Test voltage to ground 2 kV/60 s
Weight maximum 130 kg
Table 9: Technical data for TAPMOTION® ED
13.2 Technical data for position transmitter equipment
Resistance-type position transmitter module
Standard resistance: 10.0 Ω (0.6 W, +/-1 %) per tap position
The number of desired operating positions determines the number of loaded

resistors.
The decisive power loss of the position transmitter module is 0.6 W because
in the worst-case scenario only one resistor is energized. The supply voltage
should not exceed DC 220 V. If your setup is more demanding, please con-
tact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen.
Position transmitter module with N/O contact range (break-before-make

contact)
AC: 250 V, 0.5 A (resistive loading)

13 Technical data
DC: 220 V, 0.2 A (resistive loading)
Minimum voltage level for signal and data processing: 24 V
Position transmitter module with N/O contact range, (make-before-

break-type)
AC, DC: 250 V, 0.02 A (resistive loading)
AC, DC: 24 V, 0.20 A (resistive loading)
Position transmitter module with N/O contact range, 10 A (make-before-

break-type) for controlling current matching transformer in industrial
applications.
AC, DC: 250 V, 10 A (resistive loading)
Position transmitter module, diode matrix
DC: 220 V, 0.2 A (resistive loading)

14 Appendix
14 Appendix
14.1 TAPMOTION® ED-L, protective housing (898802)

14 Appendix
14.2 TAPMOTION® ED-S, protective housing (898801)

MR worldwide
Australia Malaysia
Fax: +61 2 9502 2224 Phone: +60 3 2142 6481
Brazil
Fax: +55 11 4785 2185 邮编： 200120
传真：＋ 86 21 61634582
Phone: +1 514 370 5377 OOO MR
105005 Moscow
India Phone: +7 495 980 89 67
Johannesburg
Seoul 110-702
Iran Phone: +82 2 767 4909
Via Alserio, 16 Fax: +1 731 784 7682
Phone: +39 02 6943471
Yokohama 226-0006
Phone: +81 45 929 5728
Fax: +81 45 929 5741
Luxembourg
72, Rue de Prés
L-7333 Steinsel
Phone: +352 27 3347 1
Fax: +352 27 3347 99

138/06 ▪ 05/13 ▪ F0047005

Voltage Regulator
TAPCON® 230 pro
3550953/00 EN
are binding.
Table of contents
Table of contents
1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 8
1.1 Manufacturer ....................................................................................................................................... 8
1.2 Subject to change without notice ......................................................................................................... 8
1.3 Completeness...................................................................................................................................... 8
1.4 Safekeeping......................................................................................................................................... 8
1.5 Notation conventions ........................................................................................................................... 8
1.5.1 Hazard communication system ............................................................................................................................. 9
1.5.2 Information system .............................................................................................................................................. 10
1.5.3 Instruction system ............................................................................................................................................... 10
1.5.4 Typographic conventions .................................................................................................................................... 11
2 Safety ................................................................................................................................. 12
2.1 General safety information ................................................................................................................ 12
2.2 Appropriate use ................................................................................................................................. 12
2.3 Inappropriate use............................................................................................................................... 12
2.4 Personnel qualification ...................................................................................................................... 13
2.5 Operator's duty of care ...................................................................................................................... 13
3 Product description .......................................................................................................... 14

3.1 Scope of delivery ............................................................................................................................... 14
3.2 Function description of the voltage regulation ................................................................................... 15
3.3 Performance features ........................................................................................................................ 16
3.4 Operating modes ............................................................................................................................... 17
3.5 Hardware ........................................................................................................................................... 19
3.5.1 Name plate .......................................................................................................................................................... 20
3.5.2 Operating controls ............................................................................................................................................... 20
3.5.3 Display elements ................................................................................................................................................. 22
3.5.4 Serial interface .................................................................................................................................................... 24
3.5.5 Modules ............................................................................................................................................................... 24
4 Packaging, transport and storage ................................................................................... 27

4.1 Packaging .......................................................................................................................................... 27
4.1.1 Purpose ............................................................................................................................................................... 27
4.1.2 Suitability, structure and production ................................................................................................................... 27
4.1.3 Markings .............................................................................................................................................................. 27
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen 2014 3550953/00 EN TAPCON® 230 pro 3

Table of contents
4.2 Transportation, receipt and handling of shipments............................................................................ 27

4.3 Storage of shipments......................................................................................................................... 28
5 Mounting ............................................................................................................................ 30
5.1 Preparation ........................................................................................................................................ 30
5.2 Mounting device ................................................................................................................................ 30
5.2.1 Flush panel mounting .......................................................................................................................................... 32
5.2.2 Wall mounting with mounting brackets ................................................................................................................ 33
5.2.3 Cap rail mounting ................................................................................................................................................ 34
5.2.4 Wall mounting...................................................................................................................................................... 35
5.2.5 Removing the door .............................................................................................................................................. 36
5.3 Connecting device ............................................................................................................................. 37
5.3.1 Cable recommendation ....................................................................................................................................... 38
5.3.2 Information about laying fiber-optic cable............................................................................................................ 38
5.3.3 Electromagnetic compatibility .............................................................................................................................. 39
5.3.4 Connecting cables to the system periphery ........................................................................................................ 44
5.3.5 Supplying the voltage regulator using auxiliary voltage ...................................................................................... 44
5.3.6 Wiring device ....................................................................................................................................................... 45
5.3.7 Checking functional reliability .............................................................................................................................. 45
6 Commissioning ................................................................................................................. 47
6.1 Setting the display contrast ............................................................................................................... 47
6.2 Setting parameters ............................................................................................................................ 47
6.2.1 Setting the language ........................................................................................................................................... 48
6.2.2 Setting further parameters................................................................................................................................... 48
6.3 Function tests .................................................................................................................................... 49
6.3.1 Checking control functions .................................................................................................................................. 50
6.3.2 Checking additional functions.............................................................................................................................. 51
6.3.3 Checking parallel operation ................................................................................................................................. 54
7 Functions and settings..................................................................................................... 59

7.1 Key lock ............................................................................................................................................. 59
7.2 General .............................................................................................................................................. 59
7.2.1 Setting device ID ................................................................................................................................................. 59
7.2.2 Setting the baud rate ........................................................................................................................................... 60
7.2.3 Setting the switching pulse time .......................................................................................................................... 60
7.2.4 Setting operations counter .................................................................................................................................. 62
7.2.5 Dimming display .................................................................................................................................................. 63
4 TAPCON® 230 pro 3550953/00 EN Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen 2014

Table of contents
7.2.6 Activating/deactivating the automatic key lock .................................................................................................... 63

7.2.7 "Function monitoring" message for monitoring messages <30 V........................................................................ 64
7.2.8 Setting motor runtime monitoring ........................................................................................................................ 65
7.2.9 Activate manual mode/auto mode ....................................................................................................................... 67
7.2.10 Activating Local/Remote...................................................................................................................................... 67
7.3 NORMset ........................................................................................................................................... 68
7.4 Control parameters ............................................................................................................................ 70
7.4.1 Setting desired value 1...3 ................................................................................................................................... 72
7.4.2 Selecting a desired value .................................................................................................................................... 73
7.4.3 Bandwidth............................................................................................................................................................ 73
7.4.4 Setting delay time T1........................................................................................................................................... 75
7.4.5 Setting control response T1 ................................................................................................................................ 76
7.4.6 Setting delay time T2........................................................................................................................................... 76
7.5 Limit values........................................................................................................................................ 77
7.5.1 Setting undervoltage monitoring U< .................................................................................................................... 78
7.5.2 Setting overvoltage monitoring U> ...................................................................................................................... 80
7.5.3 Setting overcurrent monitoring I> ........................................................................................................................ 82
7.5.4 Set undercurrent monitoring I<............................................................................................................................ 83
7.5.5 Activate/deactivate active power monitoring ....................................................................................................... 84
7.5.6 Permitted tap positions ........................................................................................................................................ 84
7.6 Compensation ................................................................................................................................... 86
7.6.1 Line drop compensation ...................................................................................................................................... 86
7.6.2 Z compensation ................................................................................................................................................... 89
7.7 Transformer data ............................................................................................................................... 91
7.7.1 Setting the primary transformer voltage .............................................................................................................. 92
7.7.2 Setting the secondary transformer voltage.......................................................................................................... 93
7.7.3 Setting primary transformer current..................................................................................................................... 93
7.7.4 Setting the current transformer connection ......................................................................................................... 94
7.7.5 Setting the phase difference for the current transformer/voltage transformer..................................................... 94
7.8 Parallel operation............................................................................................................................... 98
7.8.1 Assigning CAN bus address................................................................................................................................ 98
7.8.2 Selecting parallel operation method .................................................................................................................... 99
7.8.3 Assigning a parallel operation group ................................................................................................................. 103
7.8.4 Activating/deactivating blocking in simplex mode ............................................................................................. 104
7.8.5 Setting delay time for parallel operation error messages .................................................................................. 104
7.8.6 Configuring the maximum permitted tap difference........................................................................................... 104
7.8.7 Activating/deactivating follower tapping without measured voltage .................................................................. 105

Table of contents
7.8.8 Activating/deactivating parallel operation .......................................................................................................... 105

7.9 Tap position capture ........................................................................................................................ 106
7.9.1 Digital tap position capture ................................................................................................................................ 106
7.9.2 Analog tap position capture ............................................................................................................................... 107
7.10 Setting the desired voltage level remotely....................................................................................... 109
7.10.1 Activate/deactivate setting the desired voltage level remotely. ......................................................................... 110
7.10.2 Setting lower limit value for the desired value ................................................................................................... 110
7.10.3 Setting upper limit value for the desired value .................................................................................................. 111
7.11 Configurable inputs and outputs...................................................................................................... 112
7.11.1 Linking inputs with functions.............................................................................................................................. 112
7.11.2 Linking outputs with functions ........................................................................................................................... 114
7.12 LED selection .................................................................................................................................. 116
7.13 Information about device ................................................................................................................. 118
7.13.1 Displaying info screen ....................................................................................................................................... 118
7.13.2 Displaying measured values ............................................................................................................................. 119
7.13.3 Display calculated values .................................................................................................................................. 120
7.13.4 Carrying out LED test ........................................................................................................................................ 120
7.13.5 Displaying status of the MIO card ..................................................................................................................... 121
7.13.6 Displaying status of the PIO card ...................................................................................................................... 122
7.13.7 Displaying parallel operation ............................................................................................................................. 122
7.13.8 Displaying data on CAN bus ............................................................................................................................. 123
7.13.9 Peak memory .................................................................................................................................................... 123
7.13.10 Resetting parameters ........................................................................................................................................ 124
7.13.11 Displaying memory overview............................................................................................................................. 125
7.13.12 Displaying event overview ................................................................................................................................. 125
8 Fault elimination.............................................................................................................. 126

8.1 No regulation in AUTO mode .......................................................................................................... 126
8.2 Unexplained tap change .................................................................................................................. 126
8.3 Man-machine interface .................................................................................................................... 127
8.4 Incorrect measured values .............................................................................................................. 127
8.5 Parallel operation faults ................................................................................................................... 128
8.6 Tap position capture incorrect ......................................................................................................... 128
8.7 Customized GPIs/GPOs .................................................................................................................. 129
8.8 General faults .................................................................................................................................. 129
8.9 Other faults ...................................................................................................................................... 130

Table of contents
9 Messages ......................................................................................................................... 131
10 Disposal ........................................................................................................................... 134
11 Overview of parameters ................................................................................................. 135
12 Technical data ................................................................................................................. 139

12.1 Display elements ............................................................................................................................. 139
12.2 Electrical data .................................................................................................................................. 139
12.3 Dimensions and weight ................................................................................................................... 139
12.4 Ambient conditions .......................................................................................................................... 141
12.5 Electrical safety ............................................................................................................................... 141
12.6 Electromagnetic compatibility .......................................................................................................... 141
12.7 Environmental durability tests.......................................................................................................... 142
12.8 Mechanical stability ......................................................................................................................... 142
Glossary........................................................................................................................... 143
List of key words............................................................................................................. 144

1 Introduction
1 Introduction
This technical file contains detailed descriptions on the safe and proper in-
uct.
sonnel.
1.1 Manufacturer
Tel.: (+49) 9 41/40 90-0
Fax: (+49) 9 41/40 90-7001
Further information on the product and copies of this technical file are avail-
able from this address if required.

the footer.
1.3 Completeness
1.4 Safekeeping

used.

1 Introduction

Warnings in this technical file are displayed as follows.
1.5.1.1 Warning relating to section
Warnings relating to sections refer to entire chapters or sections, sub-sec-

tions or several paragraphs within this technical file. Warnings relating to
sections use the following format:

Consequences
► Action
► Action
1.5.1.2 Embedded warning
Embedded warnings refer to a particular part within a section. These warn-

ings apply to smaller units of information than the warnings relating to sec-
tions. Embedded warnings use the following format:
DANGER! Instruction for avoiding a dangerous situation.
1.5.1.3 Signal words and pictograms

Signal Meaning
word
result in injury.
property.

Pictogram Meaning

1 Introduction
Pictogram Meaning

1.5.3 Instruction system

This technical file contains single-step and multi-step instructions.
Single-step instructions
Instructions which consist of only a single process step are structured as fol-
lows:
Aim of action
ü Requirements (optional).
► Step 1 of 1.
ð Result of step (optional).
ð Result of action (optional).
Multi-step instructions
Instructions which consist of several process steps are structured as follows:
Aim of action
ü Requirements (optional).

1 Introduction
1. Step 1.
2. Step 2.
ð Result of action (optional).
1.5.4 Typographic conventions

The following typographic conventions are used in this technical file:
Typographic Purpose Example
convention
UPPERCASE Operating controls, ON/OFF
switches
[Brackets] PC keyboard [Ctrl] + [Alt]
Bold Software operating con- Press Continue button
trols
…>…>… Menu paths Parameter > Control pa-
rameter
Italics System messages, error Function monitoring alarm
messages, signals triggered
[► Number of Cross reference [► 41].
pages].
Table 3: Typographic conventions

2 Safety
2 Safety

The technical file contains detailed descriptions on the safe and proper in-
product.
ter.
2.2 Appropriate use

The product and associated equipment and special tools supplied with it
comply with the relevant legislation, regulations and standards, particularly
health and safety requirements, applicable at the time of delivery.
If used as intended and in compliance with the specified requirements and

conditions in this technical file as well as the warning notices in this technical
ards to people, property or the environment. This applies throughout the
product's entire life, from delivery through installation and operation to disas-

quirements.

▪ The product must be operated in accordance with this technical file and
the agreed delivery conditions and technical data
▪ The equipment and special tools supplied must be used solely for the in-
tended purpose and in accordance with the specifications of this techni-
cal file

scribed in the Appropriate use section.
Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen GmbH does not accept liability for damage re-
sulting from unauthorized or inappropriate changes to the product. Inappro-
priate changes to the product without consultation with Maschinenfabrik
Reinhausen GmbH can lead to personal injury, damage to property and op-
erational disruption.

2 Safety

such products.

contained therein.
where applicable.
bility.
complied with.


The following items are included in the delivery:
▪ Voltage regulator TAPCON® 230
▪ Folder with all device documentation
▪ Quick reference guide (in the inside door of the device)
▪ MR-Suite CD (contains the TAPCON®-trol program)
▪ Door key
▪ 3mm Allen key
▪ 2 countersunk head screws
▪ Control panel bracket pre-mounted on device's housing
Figure 1: Control panel bracket
▪ Mounting bracket for wall mounting
Figure 2: Mounting bracket
▪ Covering strip for door
Figure 3: Covering strip
Optional:
▪ Cap rail clip

Figure 4: Cap rail clip

▪ Check the shipment for completeness on the basis of the shipping docu-
ments.
▪ Store the parts in a dry place until installation.
3.2 Function description of the voltage regulation

The TAPCON® serves to keep constant the output voltage of a transformer
with an on-load tap-changer.
The TAPCON® compares the transformer's measured voltage (Vactual) with a

defined reference voltage (Vdesired). The difference between Vactual and Vdesired
is the control deviation (dV).
The TAPCON® parameters can be optimally adjusted to the line voltage re-
sponse to achieve a balanced control response with a small number of tap-
change operations.
The following diagram shows an overview of voltage regulation.

Summer Winter
Regulation section
Regulating transformer
Automatic voltage regulator Load profile of grid

TAPCON® 230
Measurement Control variable for

transformer line voltage
Inputs
digital and analog
Automatic voltage regulator

TAPCON® 230
Station control system
for example for parallel operation of up to 16 transformers
Remote communication and control room
Figure 5: Overview of voltage regulation
3.3 Performance features

The TAPCON® is responsible for controlling tapped transformers.
Apart from control tasks, the TAPCON® provides additional functions such
as:
▪ Integrated protective functions:
– Undervoltage blocking and overvoltage blocking
– Overvoltage detection with high-speed return
▪ Compensation for voltage drops on the line (line drop compensation)
▪ Compensation for voltage fluctuations in the meshed grid (Z compensa-
tion)

▪ Digital inputs and outputs can be individually programmed on-site by the

user
▪ Additional indicators using LEDs outside the display for freely selectable
functions
▪ Display of all measured values such as voltage, current, active power,
apparent power or reactive power, power factor (cos φ)
▪ Selection of 3 different desired values
▪ When ordering you can choose between tap position capture:
– using analog signal 4…20 mA
– using analog signal via resistor contact series
– using digital signal via BCD code
▪ Additional digital inputs and outputs which can be freely parameterized
by the customer
▪ Parallel operation of up to 16 transformers in 2 groups using the follow-
ing methods:
– Master/Follower
– Circulating reactive current minimization
3.4 Operating modes

The device can be operated in the following operating modes:
Auto mode (AUTO)
In auto mode, the voltage is automatically controlled in accordance with the

set parameters. You cannot change further device settings in auto mode.
There is no active management by a higher level control system in this oper-
ating mode.
Manual mode (MANUAL)
In manual mode, there is no automatic control. The motor-drive unit can be

controlled via the device's operating panel. You can change the device set-
tings.
Local mode (LOCAL)
There is no active management by a superordinate control system in this op-

erating mode.
Remote mode (REMOTE)
In remote mode, you can perform commands using an external control level.
In this case, manual operation of the , , and keys is disa-
bled.

+ LOCAL + RE- + LOCAL + RE-

MOTE MOTE
Automatic regulation Yes Yes No No
Tap-change operation using oper- No No Yes No
ating controls
Tap-change operation using in- No No No Yes
puts
Table 4: Overview of operating modes

3.5 Hardware
Figure 6: Hardware
1 Operating panel with display 3 Door

and LEDs
2 Door lock 4 Metric cable glands

3.5.1 Name plate

The name plate is on the outside of the device:
Figure 7: Name plate
3.5.2 Operating controls

The device has 15 pushbuttons. The illustration below is an overview of all
the device's operating controls .

Figure 8: Operating controls
RAISE key: Sends control command for raise tap-change to the

motor-drive unit in manual mode.
LOWER key: Sends control command for lower tap-change to the
motor-drive unit in manual mode.
REMOTE key: Activate/deactivate "Remote" operating mode.
When you deactivate this operating mode, the "Local" operating
mode is automatically activated.
MANUAL key: Activate "Manual mode" operating mode.
AUTO key: Activate "Auto mode" operating mode.
PREV key: Change measured value display and switch to previ-

ous parameters.
NEXT key: Change measured value display and switch to next
parameters.
ENTER key: Confirm selection and save modified parameters.
ESC key: Escape current menu and select previous menu levels.
MENU key: Select main menu.
F1 to F5 function keys: Select functions displayed on the screen.

3.5.3 Display elements

The device has a graphics display and 15 LEDs , which indicate the various
operating statuses or events.
Figure 9: Indicator elements
1 Operating status LED, green 9 LED 3, function can be freely

assigned, yellow/green
2 Overcurrent blocking LED, red 10 LED 4, function can be freely
assigned, yellow/red
3 Undervoltage blocking LED, 11 Graphics display
red
4 Overvoltage blocking LED, 12 Auto operating mode active
red LED
5 Parallel operation active LED, 13 Manual operating mode active
green LED
6 NORMset active LED , green 14 Remote operating mode ac-
tive LED
7 LED 1, function can be freely 15 Lower tap-change active LED
assigned, yellow
8 LED 2, function can be freely 16 Raise tap-change active LED
assigned, yellow

Display
Figure 10: Display
1 Status line 6 Bandwidth (upper and lower

limit)
2 Measured voltage UAct 7 Time bar for delay time T1
3 Reference voltage URef 8 Highlighting for measured
voltage UAct
4 Other measured values (use 9 Highlighting for reference volt-
age URef
or to switch between
them)
5 Tap position n-1; n; n+1 10 Remaining delay time T1
Other measured values In auto mode and manual mode the measured value display can be set
using the or keys. The following measured values can be dis-
played:
Unit Measured value
dU Control deviation
I Current
S Apparent power
P Active power
Q Reactive power
Phase Phase angle

Unit Measured value

Cos Active factor: Cosine φ [phi] (output factor)
Table 5: Measured value display
Status line Current messages and events are displayed in the status line . You can
find more information about messages and events in the Messages chapter.
3.5.4 Serial interface

The parameters for the device can be set using a PC. The COM 1 (RS232)
serial interface on the front panel is provided for this purpose. You can use
the connection cable supplied to establish a connection to your PC via the
RS232 or USB port (using the optional USB adapter).
TAPCON®-trol software is needed for parameterization via the serial inter-

face. The software and the related operating instructions are contained on
the CD provided.
Figure 11: Device connection to a PC
3.5.5 Modules
The device has integrated modules:
▪ MIO card
▪ PIO card
Carry out wiring in accordance with the supplied connection diagram. The
relevant cards are described in the following sections.

3.5.5.1 MIO card
Figure 12: MIO card
1 Relay outputs (terminal X4) 4 Current transformer connec-

tion (terminal X1)
2 Signal inputs (terminal X4) 5 Voltage transformer connec-
tion and network connection
(terminal X2)
3 Relay outputs (terminal X3) 6 CAN bus connection

3.5.5.2 PIO card
Figure 13: PIO card
1 Signal inputs and auxiliary 4 Relay outputs (terminal X5)

voltage generation (terminal
X6)
2 Analog input (terminal X7) 5 Relay outputs (terminal X5)
3 Digital tap position inputs (ter-
minal X6)

4.1 Packaging
4.1.1 Purpose
The packaging is designed to protect the packaged goods during transport,
loading and unloading as well as periods of storage in such a way that no
(detrimental) changes occur. The packaging must protect the goods against
permitted transport stresses such as vibration, knocks and moisture (rain,
snow, condensation).
The packaging also prevents the packaged goods from moving impermissi-
bly within the packaging. The packaged goods must be prepared for ship-
ment before actually being packed so that the goods can be transported
safely, economically and in accordance with regulations.
4.1.2 Suitability, structure and production

The goods are packaged in a sturdy cardboard box. This ensures that the
shipment is secure when in the intended transportation position and that
none of its parts touch the loading surface of the means of transport or touch
the ground after unloading.
The box is designed for a maximum load of 10 kg.
Inlays inside the box stabilize the goods, preventing impermissible changes
of position, and protect them from vibration.
4.1.3 Markings
The packaging bears a signature with instructions for safe transport and cor-
rect storage. The following symbols apply to the shipment of non-hazardous
goods. Adherence to these symbols is mandatory.
Protect Top Fragile Attach lifting Center of

against gear here mass
moisture
Table 6: Shipping pictograms
4.2 Transportation, receipt and handling of shipments

In addition to oscillation stress and shock stress, jolts must also be expected
during transportation. In order to prevent possible damage, avoid dropping,
tipping, knocking over and colliding with the product.

If a crate tips over, falls from a certain height (e.g. when slings tear) or expe-
riences an unbroken fall, damage must be expected regardless of the
weight.
Every delivered shipment must be checked for the following by the recipient
before acceptance (acknowledgment of receipt):
▪ Completeness based on the delivery slip
▪ External damage of any type.
The checks must take place after unloading when the crate or transport con-
tainer can be accessed from all sides.
Visible damage If external transport damage is detected on receipt of the shipment, proceed
as follows:
▪ Immediately record the transport damage found in the shipping docu-
ments and have this countersigned by the carrier.
▪ In the event of severe damage, total loss or high damage costs, immedi-
ately notify the sales department at Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen and
the relevant insurance company.
▪ After identifying damage, do not modify the condition of the shipment
further and retain the packaging material until an inspection decision
has been made by the transport company or the insurance company.
▪ Record the details of the damage immediately onsite together with the
carrier involved. This is essential for any claim for damages!
▪ If possible, photograph damage to packaging and packaged goods. This
also applies to signs of corrosion on the packaged goods due to mois-
ture inside the packaging (rain, snow, condensation).
▪ Be absolutely sure to also check the sealed packaging.
Hidden damage When damages are not determined until unpacking after receipt of the ship-
ment (hidden damage), proceed as follows:
▪ Make the party responsible for the damage liable as soon as possible by
telephone and in writing, and prepare a damage report.
▪ Observe the time periods applicable to such actions in the respective
country. Inquire about these in good time.
With hidden damage, it is very hard to make the transportation company (or
other responsible party) liable. Any insurance claims for such damages can
only be successful if relevant provisions are expressly included in the insur-
ance terms and conditions.
4.3 Storage of shipments

When selecting and setting up the storage location, ensure the following:
▪ Protect stored goods against moisture (flooding, water from melting
snow and ice), dirt, pests such as rats, mice, termites and so on, and
against unauthorized access.

▪ Store the crates on timber beams and planks as a protection against ris-
ing damp and for better ventilation.
▪ Ensure sufficient carrying capacity of the ground.
▪ Keep entrance paths free.
▪ Check stored goods at regular intervals. Also take appropriate action af-
ter storms, heavy rain or snow and so on.

5 Mounting
5 Mounting
This chapter describes how to correctly mount and connect the device. Note
the connection diagrams provided.
WARNING Electric shock

Risk of fatal injury due to electrical voltage.
► De-energize the device and system peripherals and lock them to pre-
vent them from being switched back on.
► Do so by short-circuiting the current transformer; do not idle the current
transformer.
NOTICE Electrostatic discharge

Damage to the device due to electrostatic discharge.
► Take precautionary measures to prevent the build-up of electrostatic
charges on work surfaces and personnel.
5.1 Preparation
The following tools are needed for mounting:
▪ Provided 3mm Allen key (included in delivery)
▪ Small screwdriver for connecting the signal lines and supply lines
Other tools may be needed depending on installation location.
5.2 Mounting device

You can mount the device in the following installation versions:
▪ Flush panel mounting
▪ Wall mounting
▪ Wall mounting with mounting brackets
▪ Rail mounting (optional)

5 Mounting
Preparing for mounting
Before commencing mounting, the two mounting brackets back on the rear
of the device must be removed and the cable gland plate taken off. To do so,
proceed as follows:
1. Loosen the 4 Allen screws with attached Allen key to remove the mount-
ing brackets.
Figure 14: Loosen mounting bracket
2. Loosen the 4 Allen screws with attached Allen key to remove the cable
gland plate.
Figure 15: Loosen cable gland plate
ð The mounting brackets and the cable gland plate are removed.
The relevant installation versions are described in the following sections.

5 Mounting
5.2.1 Flush panel mounting

For flush panel mounting , the device is inserted through a cutout in the con-
trol panel and fixed to the control panel or control cabinet from behind using
the mounting brackets. The diagram below shows the dimensions required
for the control panel cutout.
Figure 16: Dimensions for the cutout
A wall thickness of 2...5 mm (0.08...0.2 in) is needed for secure device fix-
ing.
To mount the device in the control panel or control cabinet, proceed as fol-
lows:
1. Close the device's door.
2. Insert the device through the cutout in the control panel or control cabi-
net .
3. Screw both fixing brackets to the rear of the device with 2 hexagon
socket screws each .

5 Mounting
Figure 17: Flush panel mounting
ð The device is mounted and can be wired up .
Proceed with wiring as shown in the connection diagram and as described in

the Connecting device [► 37] section.
5.2.2 Wall mounting with mounting brackets

As an alternative to mounting the device directly on the wall, it can be fixed
to the wall using the mounting brackets supplied.
Drill 4 holes, each 5.5 mm (0.22 in) in diameter, in the wall as shown in the
drilling template below.
Figure 18: Bores for wall mounting with mounting brackets
To mount the device using the mounting brackets, proceed as follows:

1. Lay the device carefully on the door.
2. Screw the mounting brackets supplied to the back of the device using
the hexagon socket screws .
3. Fix the device on the wall using 4 screws (maximum diameter of 5 mm/
0.22 in) .

5 Mounting
The screws for fixing to the wall are not included in the scope of supply. The
screw length required depends on the wall thickness.
Figure 19: Wall mounting with mounting brackets

5.2.3 Cap rail mounting

Alternatively, the device can be fitted with a cap rail clip (aluminum extrusion
with central integrated wire spring). This enables you to mount the device on
a cap rail (in accordance with EN 50022).
When attaching the cap rail, sufficient space for the device must be planned
for. At least 5 cm (1.97 in) of space must be provided above and at least
35 cm (13.78 in) below the fixing bolts of the cap rail for the device housing.
To mount the device using the cap rail, proceed as follows:

1. Lay the device carefully on the door.
2. Screw the cap rail clip into the two top holes on the rear with the M5
hexagon socket countersunk head screws provided .
3. Suspend the cap rail clip in the cap rail and push the underside carefully
towards the wall until the clip can be heard to click into place .

5 Mounting
Figure 20: Cap rail mounting

5.2.4 Wall mounting

For wall mounting, , the device is fixed directly to the wall. Drill 4 holes, each
5.5 mm in diameter, in the wall as shown in the drilling template below.
Figure 21: Drilling template for wall mounting
To mount the device directly on the wall, proceed as follows:

ü Close the device's door.
► Fix the device on the wall from behind using 4 screws (M5) .
The screws for wall mounting are not included in the scope of supply. The
screw length required depends on the wall thickness.

5 Mounting
Figure 22: Wall mounting

the Connecting device section.
5.2.5 Removing the door

When the door is fitted, the device satisfies protection category IP54. The
door may be removed if the device is used solely in a dry atmosphere pro-
tected from environmental influences. The device then satisfies protection
category IP21.
Proceed as follows to remove the door:

1. Loosen the grounding strap on the door using an open-end wrench.
Figure 23: Remove door

5 Mounting
2. Unscrew the fixing bolt using a slotted screwdriver and lift the door
out of the upper mounting .
Figure 24: Lift door from the suspension mount
3. Hook the cover strip in the upper and lower suspension mount
and fasten it with the provided raised countersunk head screws.
Figure 25: Fasten covering strip
ð The door is removed and the exposed attachment points for the door
are covered.
5.3 Connecting device

The following section describes how to make the electrical connection to the
device.
WARNING Electric shock

Danger of death due to connection mistakes
► Ground device using the grounding screw on the housing.
► Pay attention to the phase difference of the secondary terminals for the
current transformer and voltage transformer.
► Connect the output relays correctly to the motor-drive unit.

5 Mounting
5.3.1 Cable recommendation

Please note the following recommendation from Maschinenfabrik Reinhau-
sen when wiring the device.
Excessive electrical power can prevent the relay contacts from breaking the
contact current. In control circuits operated with alternating current, take into
account the effect of the line capacitance of long control lines on the func-
tion of the relay contacts.
Cable Terminal Cable type Wire cross- Max. length Max. permissi-
section ble torque
Analog input X7 shielded 1.5 mm² 400 m -
(< 25 Ω/km)
Signal inputs X4 Shielded 1.5 mm² - 0.6 Nm
RS232 SUB-D - Shielded 0.25 mm² 25 m -
RS485 - shielded 0.75 mm² 1000 m -
(< 50 Ω/km)
Ethernet RJ45 - min. CAT5 - - -
Relay outputs* X3 Unshielded 1.5 mm² - 0.6 Nm
Relay outputs* X4 Unshielded 1.5 mm² - 0.6 Nm
optional
Current measure- X1:5/6/9 Unshielded 4 mm² - 1.5 Nm
ment
Relay outputs X5 Unshielded 1.5 mm² - 0.6 Nm
Signal inputs X6 Unshielded 1.5 mm² - 0.6 Nm
Digital tap posi- X6 Shielded 1.5 mm² - 0.6 Nm
tion inputs
Auxiliary voltage X6 Unshielded 1.5 mm² - 0.6 Nm
Power supply X2:3/4 Unshielded 1.5 mm² - 0.6 Nm
CAN bus - Shielded 1.0 mm² 2000 m -
Table 7: Cable recommendation for connection cable
*) Note the line capacitance, see note above.
Cable clips X1 to X4 are on the MIO card of the device. Cable clips X5 to X7
are on the PIO card of the device.
5.3.2 Information about laying fiber-optic cable

To ensure the smooth transfer of data via the fiber-optic cable, you must en-
sure that mechanical loads are avoided when laying the fiber-optic cable and
later on during operation.

5 Mounting

▪ Radii must not fall below the minimum permissible bend radii (do not
bend fiber-optic cable).
▪ The fiber-optic cables must not be over-stretched or crushed. Observe
the permissible load values.
▪ The fiber-optic cables must not be twisted.
▪ Be aware of sharp edges which could damage the fiber-optic cable's
coating when laying or could place mechanical loading on the coating
later on.
▪ Provide a sufficient cable reserve near distributor cabinets for example.
Lay the reserve such that the fiber-optic cable is neither bent nor twisted
when tightened.
5.3.3 Electromagnetic compatibility

The device has been developed in accordance with applicable EMC stan-
dards. The following points must be noted in order to maintain the EMC
standards.
5.3.3.1 Wiring requirement of installation site
Note the following when selecting the installation site:

▪ The system's overvoltage protection must be effective.
▪ The system's ground connection must comply with all technical regula-
tions.
▪ Separate system parts must be joined by a potential equalization.
▪ The device and its wiring must be at least 10 m away from circuit-break-
ers, load disconnectors and busbars.
5.3.3.2 Wiring requirement of operating site
Note the following when wiring the operating site:

▪ The connection cables must be laid in metallic cable ducts with a ground
connection.
▪ Do not route lines which cause interference (for example power lines)
and lines susceptible to interference (for example signal lines) in the
same cable duct.
▪ Maintain a gap of at least 100 mm between lines causing interference
and those susceptible to interference.

5 Mounting
Figure 26: Recommended wiring
1 Cable duct for lines causing 3 Cable duct for lines suscepti-
interference ble to interference
2 Interference-causing line (e.g. 4 Line susceptible to interfer-
power line) ence (e.g. signal line)
▪ Short-circuit and ground reserve lines.
▪ The device must never be connected using multi-pin collective cables.
▪ Signal lines must be routed in a shielded cable.
▪ The individual conductors (outgoing conductors/return conductors) in
the cable core must be twisted in pairs.
▪ The shield must be fully (360º) connected to the device or a nearby
ground rail.
Using "pigtails" may limit the effectiveness of the shielding. Connect close-
fitting shield to cover all areas.

5 Mounting
Figure 27: Recommended connection of the shielding
1 Connection of the shielding 2 Shielding connection covering

using a "pigtail" all areas
5.3.3.3 Wiring requirement in control cabinet
Note the following when wiring the control cabinet:

▪ The control cabinet for fitting the device must be prepared in accord-
ance with EMC requirements:
– Functional division of control cabinet (physical separation)
– Constant potential equalization (all metal parts are joined)
– Line routing in accordance with EMC requirements (separation of
lines which cause interference and those susceptible to interfer-
ence)
– Optimum shielding (metal housing)
– Overvoltage protection (lightning protection)
– Collective grounding (main grounding rail)
– Cable bushings in accordance with EMC requirements
– Any contactor coils present must be interconnected
▪ The device's connection cables must be laid in close contact with the
grounded metal housing or in metallic cable ducts with a ground con-
nection.
▪ Signal lines and power lines/switching lines must be laid in separate ca-
ble ducts.
▪ The device must be grounded at the screw provided using a ground
strap (cross-section min. 8 mm²).

5 Mounting
Figure 28: Ground strap connection
Ground connection for wiring inside the device
The diagram below shows the ground connection for wiring inside the de-
vice.
Figure 29: Grounding inside the device
5.3.3.4 Information about shielding the CAN bus
In order for the CAN bus to operate faultlessly, you have to connect the
shielding using one of the following variants. If neither connection variant is
possible, we would recommend using fiber optic cables. Fiber optic cables
decouple the voltage regulators and are not sensitive to electromagnetic in-
terferences (surge and burst).

5 Mounting
NOTICE Damage to the device

If the CAN bus cable's shielding is connected to devices with different po-
tential, current may flow over the shielding. This current may damage the
communication cards.
► Connect the devices to a potential compensation rail to compensate for
potential
► Ensure that the CAN bus cable's shielding is only connected to one de-
vice if both devices have different potentials.
Variant 1: The connected devices share the same potential
If the devices to be connected share the same potential, proceed as follows:

1. Connect all devices to a potential compensation rail to compensate for
the potential.
2. Connect CAN bus cable's shielding to all connected devices.
Variant 2: The connected devices have different potential
Note that the shielding is less effective with this variant.
If the devices to be connected have different potential, proceed as follows:

► Connect CAN bus cable's shielding to just one device.
Figure 30: Securing the shielding
1 Securing the CAN bus cable's shielding

5 Mounting
5.3.4 Connecting cables to the system periphery

To obtain a better overview when connecting cables, only use as many
leads as necessary.
To connect cables to the system periphery, proceed as follows:

ü Use only the specified cables for wiring. Note the cable recommendation
[► 38].
► Connect the lines to be wired to the device to the system periphery as
shown in the connection diagrams supplied.
5.3.5 Supplying the voltage regulator using auxiliary voltage

The device is normally supplied by the voltage transformer. If the voltage
transformer does not provide the supply voltage and power (see "Technical
Data") needed for operation, the device must be supplied via a 88...265V
AC/DC, 50...60Hz auxiliary supply .
Proceed as follows to supply the device with auxiliary voltage:

1. NOTICE! Voltage transformer damage Connecting an auxiliary voltage
when bridges are present between the X2:1/3 and X2:2/4 terminals can
result in voltage transformer damage. Remove the bridges between the
terminals X2:1/3 and X2:2/4.
2. Connect the voltage transformer to terminals X2:1 and X2:2.
3. Connect the auxiliary voltage using the following terminals: X2:3 and
X2:4.
Figure 31: Voltage transformer and auxiliary supply connections

5 Mounting
5.3.6 Wiring device

To obtain a better overview when connecting cables, only use as many
leads as necessary.
To wire the device, proceed as follows:

ü Use only the specified cables for wiring. Note the cable recommendation
[► 38].
ü Wire the lines to the system periphery [► 44].
1. Remove 4 hexagon socket screws from cover plate and take off cover
plate.
2. Disconnect the connectors required.
3. Remove 4 hexagon socket screws from the cable gland plate and take
off the cable gland plate.
4. Remove dummy plug from required cable glands in order to guide ca-
bles through.
Unnecessary cable glands must be sealed with dummy plugs to guarantee

the IP54 protection category.
5. Strip insulation from lines and leads.

6. Crimp stranded wires with core cable ends.
7. Guide cables through the cable gland
8. Guide leads into corresponding connector terminals.
9. Fasten screws for the corresponding terminals using a screwdriver.
10. Guide the cable gland plate into the device opening provided for this
purpose.
11. Plug connectors into the correct slots.
12. Secure cable gland plate to device housing with 4 hexagon socket
screws.
5.3.7 Checking functional reliability

To ensure that the device is wired correctly, check its functional reliability.
NOTICE Damage to device and system periphery

An incorrectly connected device can lead to damages in the device and sys-
tem periphery.
► Check the entire configuration before commissioning.
► Prior to commissioning, be sure to check the actual voltage and operat-
ing voltage.

5 Mounting
Check the following:

▪ Once you have connected the device to the grid, the screen displays the
MR logo and then the operating screen.
▪ The green Operating display LED top left on the device's front panel
lights up.
The device is fully mounted and can be configured. The actions required for
this are described in the following chapter.

6 Commissioning
6 Commissioning
You need to set several parameters and perform function tests before com-
missioning the device. These are described in the following sections.
NOTICE Damage to device and system periphery

An incorrectly connected device can lead to damages in the device and sys-
tem periphery.
► Check the entire configuration before commissioning.
► Prior to commissioning, be sure to check the actual voltage and operat-
ing voltage.
We recommend using a device for industrial instrumentation to record the

actual transformer voltage value in order to evaluate how the device is func-
tioning.
6.1 Setting the display contrast

You can adjust the contrast in the display with the help of an adjustment
screw on the front of the device. To adjust the contrast, proceed as follows:
► Use a screwdriver to turn the adjustment screw on the front until the
contrast is adjusted to the desired setting.
Figure 32: Setting the display contrast
6.2 Setting parameters

To commission the device, you must set the following parameters. For more
detailed information about the parameters, refer to the respective sections.

6 Commissioning
6.2.1 Setting the language

You can use this parameter to set the display language for the device. The
following languages are available:
English Italian
German Portuguese
French Russian
Spanish
To set the language, proceed as follows:
1. > Configuration > General.

ð Language
2. Press or to select the required language.
3. Press .
ð The language is set.
6.2.2 Setting further parameters

Set further parameters to commission the device. More detailed information
about each of the parameters can be found in the Functions and settings
[► 59] chapter.
Setting transformer data
Set the transformer data and phase difference of the current transformer and
voltage transformer:
1. Set primary transformer voltage [► 92].
2. Set secondary transformer voltage [► 93].
3. Set primary transformer current [► 93].
4. Select current transformer connection [► 94].
5. Select transformer circuit [► 94].
Setting NORMset
If you want to quickly start up voltage regulation, you can activate NORMset
mode. If you want to set the parameters yourself, continue with the sections
below.
► Activate NORMset and set the relevant parameters [► 68].
Setting control parameters
Set the following control parameters:

1. Set desired value 1 [► 72].
2. Set the bandwidth [► 74].
3. Set delay time T1 [► 75].

6 Commissioning
Setting line drop compensation (optional)
If you need line drop compensation, you must set all important parameters
for this:
1. Select LDC compensation method [► 86].
2. Set line data for the ohmic voltage drop Ur [► 88].
3. Set line data for the inductive voltage drop Ux [► 89].
Setting parallel operation (optional)
If you need parallel operation, you must set all important parameters for this:
1. Set parallel operation method to circulating reactive current method
[► 99].
2. Assign CAN bus address [► 98].
3. Set circulating reactive current sensitivity [► 100].
4. Set circulating reactive current blocking [► 100].
Setting tap position capture via analog input (optional)
If you want to capture the tap position via the analog input, you must set the
parameters required for this:
► Capture tap positions via analog input (PIO card terminal strip X7)
[► 107].
All parameters relevant to commissioning are entered. Continue with the

function tests.
Setting the desired voltage level remotely
If you would like to set the desired voltage level remotely, you must config-
ure the necessary parameters:
► Activate "Set the desired voltage level remotely" and set the relevant pa-
rameters [► 109].
6.3 Function tests

Before switching from manual mode to auto mode, Maschinenfabrik Rein-
hausen recommends carrying out function tests. These function tests are de-
scribed in the following sections. Note the following points for all function
tests:
▪ You must ensure that the REMOTE mode is disabled before you can
control the on-load tap-changer manually in manual mode.
▪ You can only activate the on-load tap-changer manually in manual
mode using the and keys.

6 Commissioning
▪ During the function test, you must set the most important parameters.
Details on the parameters listed can be found in the Functions and set-
tings [► 59] chapter.
6.3.1 Checking control functions

This section describes how you can check the device's control functions:
ü Supply voltage must be present.
1. Press to select manual mode.

2. Set transmission ratio for voltage transformer, current transformer and
measuring arrangement.
3. Measure actual voltage and compare with the measured value dis-
played on the device's main screen.
4. Press key several times to display the operating values for current,
power and phase angle and compare them with values of the operating
measuring instruments.
5. Control the on-load tap-changer manually with the or keys until

the measured voltage (Vactual) reaches the desired voltage (Vdesired) set in
the next stage.
6. Set desired value 1 to the value you want.
7. Set bandwidth in relation to step voltage [► 73].
8. Set delay time T1 to 20 seconds [► 75].
9. Set control response T1 to linear [► 76].
10. Press to raise the on-load tap-changer 1 step.
11. Press to select auto mode.

ð After 20 seconds, the device returns the on-load tap-changer to the
original operating position.
13. Press to lower the on-load tap-changer 1 step.

ð After 20 seconds, the device returns the on-load tap-changer to the
original operating position.

16. Set delay time T2 to 10 seconds [► 76].
17. Activate delay time T2.
18. Press twice to raise the on-load tap-changer 2 steps.

6 Commissioning

ð After 20 seconds, the device lowers the on-load tap-changer one
step and after another 10 seconds another step.

21. Set delay time T1 [► 75] and delay time T2 [► 76] to the desired
value.
We recommend a temporary setting of 100 seconds for delay time T1 when

commissioning the transformer. Depending on the operating conditions, you
can also specify the delay time following a longer observation period. In this
regard, it is useful to register how the actual voltage progresses and the
number of tap-change operations per day.
6.3.2 Checking additional functions

This section describes how you can check the following additional functions:
▪ Undervoltage blocking
▪ Overvoltage blocking
▪ Activation of desired values 2 and 3
▪ Line drop compensation
▪ Z compensation
Proceed as follows:
Checking undervoltage blocking U<

2. Set undervoltage U < [%] to 85 %.
3. Set the U< blocking parameter to On [► 79].
4. Set desired value 1 such that the measured voltage Uactual is below the
undervoltage U< [%] limit value.
Measured voltage = 100 V

Desired value 1 = Set to 120 V (greater than 100 V/0.85 = 117 V).
ð The Undervoltage U< LED will light up.

ð After around 10 seconds the Undervoltage message appears in the
display and the relevant signaling relay is activated. Contact X4:1/3
closes and contact X4:2/3 opens.

ð The device blocks and does not issue any control commands.

6 Commissioning
7. Reset the operating values for desired value 1 and undervoltage U<
[%] to the desired operating values.
ð The function test for undervoltage blocking is complete.
Checking overvoltage blocking U>

2. Set overvoltage U> [%] to 115 %.
3. Set the absolute limit values parameter to Off.
4. Set desired value 1 such that the measured voltage Uactual is above
the overvoltage U> [%] limit value.
Measured voltage = 100 V

Desired value 1 = Set to 85 V (less than 100 V/1.15 = 87 V).
ð The Overvoltage U> LED will light up.

ð The Overvoltage message appears in the display and the relevant
signaling relay is activated. Contact X4:1/3 closes and contact
X4:2/3 opens.

ð The LOWER output relay emits a control command every 1.5 sec-
onds.

7. Reset the operating values for desired value 1 and overvoltage U>
[%] to the desired operating values.
ð The function test for overvoltage blocking is complete.
Checking desired value 2 and desired value 3

3. Apply voltage L+ to terminal X4:17 desired value 2 (see connection dia-
gram).
4. Press until the main screen is displayed.

ð Desired value 2 is shown on the main screen.
6. Apply voltage L+ to terminal desired value 3 (see connection diagram).

ð Desired value 3 is shown on the main screen.
ð The function test for desired value 2 and desired value 3 is complete.

6 Commissioning
Checking line drop compensation
If you want to use line drop compensation, you need to run this function test.
A load current of ≥ 10 % of the nominal transformer current is needed for the
following function tests. Before the function test, ensure that all parameters
for line drop compensation and for Z compensation are set to 0.

2. Set the compensation method parameter to LDC.
4. If necessary, press until the control deviation dU is shown.

ð The measured voltage must be within the bandwidth.
5. Set line drop compensation Ur parameter to 20.0 V.
ð The control deviation dU must be negative.
6. Set line drop compensation Ux parameter to -20.0 V.

ð The control deviation dU must be positive.
If the control deviation appears in the opposite direction, change the polarity
of the current transformer.
9. Set the line drop compensation Ur and line drop compensation Ux

parameters to the desired operating values.
ð The function test for line drop compensation is complete.
Checking Z compensation
If you want to use Z compensation, you need to run this function test. A load
current of ≥ 10 % of the nominal transformer current is needed for the follow-
ing function test .

2. Set all parameters for line drop compensation and Z compensation to 0.
3. Set the compensation method parameter to Z.

ð The measured voltage must be within the bandwidth.
6. Set the Z compensation parameter to 15.0 V.

6 Commissioning

ð The control deviation dU must be negative.
If the control deviation appears in the opposite direction, change the polarity
of the current transformer.
9. Set the Z compensation and Z compensation limit value parameters

to the desired operating values.
ð The function test for Z compensation is complete.
6.3.3 Checking parallel operation

This section describes how you can run the function test for parallel opera-
tion.
Requirements To obtain perfect functioning in parallel operation, the voltage regulator must
be commissioned in simplex mode. Make sure that the conditions below
have been fulfilled.
▪ All devices are set to the same operating parameters for desired value,
circulating reactive current sensitivity and delay time T1.
▪ The circulating reactive current sensitivity on all devices must be set to
0 %.
▪ The circulating reactive current blocking parameter must be set to
20 %.
▪ You must undertake all settings in manual mode.
▪ Each device needs an individual address on the CAN bus.
6.3.3.1 Checking circulating reactive current sensitivity
This section describes how to run the function test for circulating reactive
current sensitivity.
1. Adjust both transformers in simplex mode to the same actual voltage by
means of the on-load tap-changer.
ð When both devices are in a state of equilibrium, then the value of
the control deviation dV [%] is smaller than the set bandwidth. You
can see this in the main screen if the mark for the measured volt-
age Uactual is within the bandwidth.
2. Connect the transformers in parallel and enable the parallel control.
ð The two devices must still be in a state of equilibrium.
ð The Parallel operation LED on the front panel is illuminated.
3. On one of the two transformers, raise the tap position of the on-load tap-
changer by one setting; on the second transformer, lower the tap posi-
tion of the on-load tap-changer by one setting.
ð The two devices must still be in a state of equilibrium.

6 Commissioning
4. Adjust the circulating reactive current sensitivity until the result dis-
played exceeds the set value for the bandwidth by approx. 0.2 % to
0.3 %.
ð The value for the result changes in the help text in the last line of
the display.
5. Set the value given in the previous step for all devices in parallel opera-
tion.
6. Press to select auto mode for both devices.

ð The devices return the on-load tap-changer units to the original tap
positions.
ð The function test for circulating reactive current sensitivity is complete.
If the earlier tap positions are not reached, increase the value of the circulat-
ing reactive current sensitivity [► 100] parameter.
If one of the two on-load tap-changer units switches one or more tap posi-
tions higher and the other switches the same amount lower, you need to re-
duce the value of the circulating reactive current sensitivity [► 100] parame-
ter.
After you have set the circulating reactive current sensitivity parameter,
continue with the circulating reactive current blocking function test described
in the next section.
6.3.3.2 Checking circulating reactive current blocking
This section describes how to run the function test for circulating reactive
current blocking.
1. Press on one device to select manual mode.

2. Using manual control, adjust the relevant motor-drive unit upwards by
the maximum permitted tap difference in operating positions between
the parallel operating transformers (for example by 1 - 2 steps).
When setting the circulating reactive current blocking in the following proc-
ess step, wait approx. 2 - 3 seconds between the individual steps.
3. Set the parallel operation method parameter to circulating reactive

current.
4. The circulating reactive current blocking parameter should be re-
duced [► 100] from the set value of 20 % in steps of 1 % until the Par-
allel operation error: circulating reactive current limit exceeded is dis-
played.
ð The Parallel operation LED lights up when the circulating reactive
current blocking limit is reached.
ð Any further regulation is blocked.

6 Commissioning
5. After the set delay time for the parallel operation error message (time
can be adjusted [► 104]), the signaling relay X5:12 (default setting) is
activated.
6. Increase the circulating reactive current blocking parameter again
until the message Parallel operation error: circulating reactive current
limit exceeded disappears.

ð The motor-drive unit automatically returns to the original operating
position.
8. Set the value determined for the circulating reactive current blocking
on the devices in parallel operation as well.
If one or all devices indicate Parallel operation error: circulating reactive cur-
rent limit exceeded although the control inputs are correctly connected for
all the devices, then all the devices block.
This could be due to various causes. Further information is given in the
chapter Troubleshooting [► 126].
ð The function test for circulating reactive current blocking is complete.
6.3.3.3 Checking tap synchronization method
This section describes how to run the function test for tap synchronization
(master/follower). If instances arise where a follower switches in the opposite
direction to the master step change, then the setting for the tapping direction
parameter on the follower must be changed from Default to Swapped.
NOTICE Damage resulting from formation of circulating reactive current

If the parameters are not set correctly, damage may result from the forma-
tion of circulating reactive current and the resulting overload of transmission
lines and transformers.
► Check transformer type plate.
► Set device parameters in accordance with transformer configuration.
Before starting the function test, you must carry out the following steps:
1. Assign the master function to one device.
2. Assign the follower function to the other devices.

6 Commissioning
3. Compare the tap position displays of devices / . All devices must

display the same tap position; if not, switch them into the same one.
Figure 33: Comparing tap positions
1 Master 3 Tap position display

2 Follower
To perform the function test, proceed as follows:
1. Press on the follower to select manual mode.

2. If necessary, set the follower tapping direction.
3. Press on the master to select manual mode.
4. Press or on the master to manually change the tap position.
5. Press on the follower to select auto mode.

ð The follower follows the master's control command.
6. Press on the master to select auto mode.
7. Press on the follower to select manual mode.
8. Press or on the follower to manually change the tap position.

ð After expiry of the set delay time for parallel operation errors
[► 104], the Tap difference to follower error message is displayed
in the main screen on the master.

6 Commissioning
9. Press several times on the follower to manually increase the tap

position by the number of permitted steps (maximum permitted tap dif-
ference) and then one more step.
ð After expiry of the set delay time for parallel operation errors, the
following error messages are displayed on the master: Parallel op-
eration error: tap difference to follower
ð After expiry of the set delay time for parallel operation errors, the
following error messages are displayed on the follower: Parallel op-
eration error: permitted tap difference to master exceeded.
10. Press on the follower to select auto mode.

ð There is no response. All devices remain blocked.
11. Press on the master and follower to select manual mode.
12. Press or on the master and follower to manually set the de-
sired step.
Because in parallel operation the tap positions of the transformers which are
running in parallel are compared following the Automatic tap synchroniza-
tion method, it is absolutely essential that these transformers have the
same position designation and that the Raise and Lower signals produce
the same voltage change in all transformers.
ð The function tests for the tap synchronization method are complete.
Installation and commissioning of the device is complete.

7 Functions and settings

This chapter describes all the functions and setting options for the device.
7.1 Key lock

The device is equipped with a key lock to prevent unintentional operation.
You can only set or change the parameters when the key lock is deactivated
in manual mode.
Activating key lock
To activate the key lock, proceed as follows:
► Press and at the same time.

ð A confirmation appears in the display for a brief period. The key lock is
activated. Parameters can no longer be entered.
Deactivating key lock
To deactivate the key lock, proceed as follows:
► Press and at the same time.

ð The key lock is deactivated. Parameters can be entered.
7.2 General
You can undertake general settings on the device in the General menu item.
You can set the following general parameters:
▪ Language [► 48]
▪ Regulator ID
▪ Baud rate (COM1 setting)
▪ Raise/Lower pulse duration
▪ Operations counter
▪ Display dimming
▪ Key lock
▪ Function monitoring
▪ Motor runtime
▪ Manual mode/auto mode
▪ Local/Remote
7.2.1 Setting device ID

You can use the device ID parameter to assign a 4-digit ID to the device.
This ID is used to uniquely identify the device in the TAPCON®-trol software.
To set the device ID, proceed as follows:

1. > Configuration > General > Press until the desired

parameter is displayed.
ð Regulator ID.
2. Press to change the first digit.

ð If you wish to enter a multi-digit sequence, proceed to step 3. If you
do not wish to enter additional digits, proceed to step 7.
3. Press (digit > 9) until another digit position appears.
4. If necessary, press in order to highlight the digit position.

ð The required digit is highlighted and can be changed.
5. Press or to change the digit.

6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 until all required digits have been entered.
7. Press .
ð The device ID is set.
7.2.2 Setting the baud rate

You can use this parameter to set the COM1 interface's baud rate. You can
select the following options:
▪ 9.6 kilobaud
▪ 19.2 kilobaud
▪ 38.4 kilobaud
▪ 57.6 kilobaud
To set the baud rate, proceed as follows:

ð Baud rate.
2. Press or to select the required baud rate.
3. Press .
ð The baud rate is set.
7.2.3 Setting the switching pulse time

You can use this parameter to set the duration of the switching pulse for the
motor-drive unit.
If you set the switching pulse time to 0 s, the motor-drive unit is activated
with a continuous signal. The signal then remains active for as long as the
or keys are pressed.

Switching pulse in normal If you set the switching pulse time to 1.5 seconds for example, after the set
mode delay time T1 or delay time T2 there will be a switching pulse of 1.5 sec-
onds .
The waiting time between 2 consecutive switching pulses corresponds to the

set delay time T1 or delay time T2 .
Figure 35: Switching pulse time in normal mode
1 Set delay time T1 or T2 2 Set switching pulse time (for

example 1.5 seconds)
If the motor-drive unit does not start with the factory setting (1.5 seconds),
you need to extend the raise switching pulse time / lower switching pulse
time.
Switching pulse for rapid If you set the raise switching pulse time or lower switching pulse time to
return control 1.5 seconds, for example , the next earliest switching pulse occurs in rapid
return control mode 1.5 seconds after the previous switching pulse
ended.

Figure 36: Switching pulse in rapid return control mode
1 Start of first raise switching 3 Earliest time for the next raise
pulse/lower switching pulse switching pulse/lower switch-
ing pulse (for example
1.5 seconds)
2 Set switching pulse time (for
example 1.5 seconds)
To set the pulse duration, proceed as follows:

ð R/L pulse duration.
2. Press or to select the pulse duration you want.
3. Press .
ð The R/L pulse duration is now set.
7.2.4 Setting operations counter

The device's operations counter is automatically increased with every tap-
change operation. You can use this parameter to set the number of tap-
change operations for comparing with the operations counter of the motor-
drive unit, for example.
To ensure correct operation counter function, the Motor running signal of the
motor-drive unit must be connected with a configurable input (GPI 1...6) and
then the Motor running function assigned to this input.
To set the operations counter, proceed as follows:


ð Operations counter.
2. Press to highlight a digit.

ð The desired position is highlighted and the value can be changed.
3. Press to increase the value or to reduce it.
4. Press .
ð The operations counter is set.
7.2.5 Dimming display

You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate automatic display dim-
ming. You can select the following options:
▪ On: The display is automatically dimmed if no key is pressed for 15 mi-
nutes. The display returns to full brightness by pressing any key.
▪ Off: Automatic display dimming is deactivated.
Activating this function extends the display's service life.
To activate/deactivate automatic display dimming, proceed as follows:
1. Press > Configuration > General > until the desired

ð Display off.
2. Press or to activate/deactivate automatic dimming.
3. Press .
ð Automatic dimming is set.
7.2.6 Activating/deactivating the automatic key lock

Activating this function automatically activates the key lock if no keys are
pressed for 15 minutes. You can also lock the keys manually. This function
can be deactivated as well.
To set the automatic key lock, proceed as follows:


ð Key lock
2. Press or to select On or Off.
3. Press .
ð Automatic key lock is set.
7.2.7 "Function monitoring" message for monitoring messages <30 V

By default, the Function monitoring message is activated for measured vol-
tages. This message is issued as soon as the measured voltage is under
30 V for longer than the set signaling delay time.
Switched-off transformer You can suppress the message with this parameter to prevent the message
from being continuously issued when a transformer is shut off.
The device behaves as follows:

Parameter Function
On The Function monitoring message is issued after
the configured delay time if the measured voltage is
less than 30 V.
Off The Function monitoring message is suppressed if
the measured voltage is less than 30 V.
Table 8: Settings
Activate/deactivate To activate/deactivate function monitoring, proceed as follows:

message
ð Function monitoring
2. Press or to select On or Off.
3. Press .
ð The Function monitoring message for is activated/deactivated for meas-
ured voltages <30 V.
Setting delay time You can configure the delay time after which the Function monitoring mes-
sage is to be issued. If you select 0, function monitoring is deactivated.
To set the delay time for the Function monitoring message, proceed as fol-
lows:


ð Delay function monitoring
3. Press .
ð The delay time for the Function monitoring message is set.
7.2.8 Setting motor runtime monitoring

You can use this motor runtime parameter to set the motor runtime. The mo-
tor-drive unit's runtime can also be monitored by the device. This function is
used to identify motor-drive unit malfunctions during the tap-change opera-
tion and to trigger any actions needed.
Behavior The motor-drive unit issues the Motor-drive unit running signal during the
tap-change operation. This signal is present until the tap-change operation is
complete. The device compares the duration of this signal with the set motor
runtime. If the set motor runtime is exceeded, the device triggers the follow-
ing actions:
1. Motor runtime monitoring message is issued
2. Continuous signal via output relay Motor-drive unit runtime exceeded
(optional)
3. Pulse signal via Trigger motor protective switch output relay (optional)
Parameterizing control To use runtime monitoring, you need to correctly wire the corresponding
input control input and parameterize to Motor running. The motor runtime must al-
so be set.
Wiring control input/output If you want to monitor the motor runtime, the device and motor-drive unit
relay must be connected and parameterized as shown below.

Figure 38: Wiring for motor runtime monitoring
1 Motor running control input 3 Motor protective switch trip-

I/O ped GPO output relay (option-
al)
2 Motor protective switch trig- 4 Motor runtime exceeded GPO
gered control input I/O (op- output relay (optional)
tional)
If you want to use the output relay, the feedback from the motor-drive unit
Motor protective switch triggered must be wired to a control input and para-
meterized. This message resets the Motor runtime exceeded output relay
when the motor protective switch is switched back on and activates the Mo-
tor protective switch triggered message.
If the runtime monitoring is set to "0.0 s", this equates to it being switched
off.
To set the motor runtime, proceed as follows:


ð Motor runtime.
2. Press to highlight the position.

4. Press .
ð The motor runtime is set.
7.2.9 Activate manual mode/auto mode

This parameter can be used to activate the Manual or Automatic operation
modes. This parameter has the same functions as the and keys.
Parameter Function
Manual Device is no longer controlling automatically.
You can set or change parameters manually.
You can control the motor-drive unit using
the control panel.
Auto The device is controlling the voltage auto-
matically.
You cannot set or change any parameters.
You cannot control the motor-drive unit using
the control panel.
Table 9: Adjustable parameters
To select the operating mode, proceed as follows:

ð Manual/Automatic
2. Press or to select the operating mode you want.
3. Press .
ð The operating mode is set.
7.2.10 Activating Local/Remote

This parameter can be used to activate the Local or Remote operation
modes. This parameter has the same functions as the keys.

Parameter Function
Local You can operate the device using the control
panel.
Remote You can operate the device using an external
control level.
Manual operation is disabled.
Table 10: Adjustable parameters
To activate Manual or Automatic operating mode, proceed as follows:

2. Local/Remote
3. Press or to select the operating mode you want.
4. Press .
ð The operating mode is set.
7.3 NORMset
NORMset mode is used for quickly starting voltage regulation. In NORMset
mode, the bandwidth and delay time parameters are automatically adapted
to the requirements of the grid.
To start NORMset mode, you must set the following parameters:

▪ Normset activation
▪ Desired value 1
▪ Primary voltage
▪ Secondary voltage
Line drop compensation cannot be performed in NORMset mode.
Set the following parameters to operate the device in NORMset mode.
Activating/deactivating NORMset
You can use this parameter to activate NORMset mode.
A manual tap-change operation is required to activate NORMset. This is

how the voltage regulator determines the bandwidth required.
If the transformer is switched off, another manual tap-change operation is
required.
To activate/deactivate NORMset mode, proceed as follows:

1. > NORMset
ð NORMset activation.
2. Press or to activate NORMset by selecting On or to deactivate

NORMset by selecting Off.
3. Press .
ð NORMset is activated/deactivated.
Setting the primary voltage
With this parameter, you can set the voltage transformer's primary voltage.
To set the primary voltage, proceed as follows:
1. > NORMset > Press until the desired parameter is dis-

played.
ð Primary voltage.
3. Press .
ð The primary voltage is set.
Setting the secondary voltage
With this parameter, you can set the voltage transformer's secondary volt-
age.
To set the secondary voltage, proceed as follows:

played.
ð Secondary voltage.
3. Press .
ð The secondary voltage is set.
Setting desired value 1
With this parameter, you can set the desired value for automatic voltage reg-
ulation. You can enter the desired value in V or in kV. If you enter the de-
sired value in V, the value relates to the voltage transformer's secondary
voltage. If you set the desired value in kV, the value relates to the voltage
transformer's primary voltage.
Settings in kV are only possible if you have previously entered the parame-
ters for primary and secondary voltage.

To set the desired value, proceed as follows:

played.
ð Desired value 1.
3. Press .
ð The desired value is set.
7.4 Control parameters

All of the required for the regulation function are described in this section.
For voltage regulation, you can set the following parameters:
▪ Desired values 1…3
▪ Bandwidth
▪ Delay time T1
▪ Control response T1
▪ Delay time T2
For voltage regulation, you can set delay time T1 and also delay time T2.
The following sections describe how the regulation function responds in both
cases:
Response only to delay time T1
If the measured voltage Vactual is within the set bandwidth , no control

commands are issued to the motor-drive unit for the tap-change operation.
Control commands will also not be issued to the motor-drive unit if within the
set delay time T1 the measured voltage returns to the tolerance band-
width . However, if the measured voltage deviates from the set bandwidth
for a long period , a tap-change command occurs after the set delay
time T1. The on-load tap-changer carries out a tap-change in a positive or
negative direction to return to the tolerance bandwidth.

Figure 39: Response of the regulation function with delay time T1
1 + B %: Upper limit 4 Set delay time T1

2 Vdesired: Desired value 5 Vactual: Measured voltage
3 - B %: Lower limit 6 B%: Tolerance bandwidth
A Vactual is outside the band- B Vactual is within the bandwidth
width. Delay time T1 starts. before delay time T1 is com-
plete.
C Vactual is outside the band- D Vactual is still outside the band-
width. Delay time T1 starts. width when delay time T1 is
complete. Tap-change opera-
tion is initiated.
Response with delay times T1 and T2
Delay time T2 can be used to correct major control deviations more quickly.
Ensure that you set a lower value for delay time T2 than delay time T1.
If the measured voltage Vactual deviates from the set bandwidth for a long
period , a control impulse is output to the motor-drive unit after the set de-
lay time T1 . If the measured voltage Vactual is still outside the bandwidth,
delay time T2 starts once delay time T1 is complete. Once delay time T2
is complete, a control impulse is again output to the motor-drive unit for the
tap change to return to the tolerance bandwidth.

Figure 40: Response of the regulation function with delay times T1 and T2
1 + B %: Upper limit 4 Set delay times T1 and T2.

2 Vdesired: Desired value 5 Vactual: Measured voltage
3 - B %: Lower limit 6 B%: Tolerance bandwidth
A Vactual is outside the band- B Delay time T1 complete. Tap
width. Delay time T1 starts. change triggered.
C Delay time T2 complete. Tap
change triggered.
The following sections describe how to set the relevant control parameters.
7.4.1 Setting desired value 1...3

You can use this parameter to set up to 3 desired voltage values URef. The
desired voltage value is specified as a fixed value. The desired value 1 is the
default desired value. Desired values 2 and 3 are activated if there is a con-
tinuous signal at factory-preset control inputs X4:17 or X4:18 provided you
have programmed these previously. If there is a signal at several control in-
puts at the same time, desired value 2 is activated.
Options for setting the The device provides the following ways of changing the desired voltage val-
desired values ue during operation:
▪ Using the control parameters menu item via the operating screen
▪ Using binary inputs
▪ Using control system protocols if a communication card is ready for op-
eration

Reference of kV and V for Desired values set in kV refer to the primary voltage of the voltage trans-
voltage transformer former. Desired values set in V refer to the secondary voltage of the voltage
transformer. The transformer data must be entered correctly for this display.
To set the desired value, proceed as follows:
1. > Control parameter > voltage regulator > Press until

the desired parameter is displayed.
2. If you have already entered the transformer data, press to select

the unit you want: "V" or "kV".

5. Press .
ð The desired value is set.
7.4.2 Selecting a desired value

You can use this parameter to select the active desired value 1, 2 or 3.
If you select the desired value using appropriately configured GPIs, this pa-
rameter's setting is ignored. Refer to the Configuration [► 112] section for
more information about GPI configuration.
Proceed as follows to select a desired value:
1. > Control parameter > Voltage regulation > Press

until the desired parameter is displayed.
ð Desired value selection
2. Press or to select an active desired value.
3. Press .
ð The selected desired value is active.
7.4.3 Bandwidth
You can use this parameter to set the maximum permissible deviation in
measured voltage UAct. The deviation relates to the activated desired value.
The following sections describe how you determine and set the bandwidth
required.
7.4.3.1 Determining bandwidth
In order to set the correct value, the transformer's step voltage and nominal
voltage must be known.

Too small/large a You have to set the bandwidth in such a way that the output voltage of the
bandwidth transformer (VAct) returns to within the specified tolerance bandwidth after the
tap change. If too small a bandwidth is defined, the output voltage exceeds
the bandwidth selected and the device immediately issues a tap-change
command in the opposite direction. If a very large bandwidth is selected, this
results in a major control deviation.
The following value is recommended for the bandwidth setting:
Figure 42: Recommended bandwidth
Un-1 Step voltage of tap position n-1

Un Step voltage of tap position n
Unom Nominal voltage
The following transformer values are used to determine the recommended

bandwidth:
Nominal voltage Unom = 11,000 V
Step voltage in tap position 4 UStep4 = 11,275 V
Step voltage in tap position 5 UStep5 = 11,000 V
The following section describes how you can set the bandwidth.
7.4.3.2 Setting the bandwidth
To enter the determined bandwidth, proceed as follows:
1. > Parameter > Control parameter > Press until the

desired parameter is displayed.


4. Press .
ð The bandwidth is set.
7.4.3.3 Visual display
The deviation from the set bandwidth is shown visually in the device's dis-
play. The measured voltage highlighting shows whether the measured
voltage is above, within or below the set bandwidth . Progress of delay
time T1 is indicated by the gradual filling of the time bar . The seconds
display above this indicates the remaining delay time T1.
Figure 43: Visual display of deviation from desired value
1 Bandwidth (upper and lower 4 Desired voltage value URef

limit)
2 Time bar for delay time T1 5 Remaining delay time T1
3 Measured voltage UAct
7.4.4 Setting delay time T1

Use this parameter to set delay time T1. This function delays the issuing of a
tap-change command for a defined period. This prevents unnecessary tap-
change operations if the tolerance bandwidth is exited.
To set the delay time T1, proceed as follows:


3. Press to increase the time or to reduce it.
4. Press .
ð The delay time T1 is set.

7.4.5 Setting control response T1

The control response T1 can be set to linear or integral.
Linear control response T1 With linear control response, the device responds with a constant delay time
regardless of the control deviation.
Integral control response With integral control response, the device responds with a variable delay
T1 time depending on the control deviation. The greater the control deviation
(ΔV) in relation to the set bandwidth (B), the shorter the delay time. The de-
lay time can therefore be reduced down to 1 second. This means that the
device responds faster to large voltage changes in the grid. Regulation accu-
racy improves as a result but the frequency of tap-changes increases too.
Figure 44: Diagram showing integral control response
ΔV/B Control deviation "ΔV" as % of desired value as ratio to the set

bandwidth "B" as % of desired value
1 "Delay time T1" parameter
To set the control response T1, proceed as follows:

2. Press or to set the response you want.
3. Press .
ð The control response T1 is set.
7.4.6 Setting delay time T2

With this parameter, you can set delay time T2. Delay time T2 is used to
compensate for large control deviations faster.

The delay time T2 only takes effect if more than one tap-change operation is
required to return the voltage to within the set bandwidth. The first output
pulse occurs after the set delay time T1. After the set tap-change delay time
T2 has elapsed, additional pulses occur in order to correct the existing con-
trol deviation.
The following requirements must be noted to set delay time T2:

▪ The delay time T2 must be greater than the switching pulse time.
▪ The delay time T2 must be greater than the maximum operating time of
the motor-drive unit.
▪ The delay time T2 must be less than the value set for delay time T1.
To set the delay time T2, proceed as follows:
1. > Parameter > Control parameter > Press until the de-
sired parameter is displayed.
ð Delay time T2.
3. Press .
ð The delay time T2 is set.
Activating/deactivating delay time T2
To activate/deactivate delay time T2 , proceed as follows:

ð T2 activation.
2. Press or to activate/deactivate T2.
3. Press .
ð The delay time T2 is activated/deactivated.
7.5 Limit values

In the Limit values menu item, you can set all the parameters needed for lim-
it value monitoring as relative or absolute values. You can set three limit val-
ues:
▪ Undervoltage V<
▪ Overvoltage V>
▪ Overcurrent I>
Limit value monitoring is used to reduce damage to the system periphery.

The following sections describe how you can set the parameters.

7.5.1 Setting undervoltage monitoring U<

You can use these parameters to set the limit values for an undervoltage.
Undervoltage monitoring prevents tap-change operations if there is a power
cut.
Behavior If the measured voltage Uactual falls below the set limit value , the red
LED U< lights up . The switching pulses to the motor-drive unit are blocked
at the same time provided you have activated the blocking undervoltage U<
parameter. Once the set signaling delay time [► 79] has passed, the
signaling relay activates (contact X4:1/3 closes and X4:2/3 opens). The Un-
dervoltage U< message appears in the display. The message is reset as
soon as the measured voltage Uactual again exceeds the limit value for under-
voltage . If the measured voltage Uactual falls below 30 V (for example
when the transformer is switched off), the Undervoltage message is also dis-
played. You can however suppress [► 80] this message.
Figure 45: Response to value falling below limit value
1 + B %: Upper limit 7 Uactual: Measured voltage

2 Udesired: Desired value A Value falls below limit value
3 - B %: Lower limit B Undervoltage U< message is
displayed
4 Set limit value for undervolt- C Voltage falls below 30 V
age U<
5 Limit value for suppressing D Voltage exceeds 30 V again
alarms below 30 V
6 Set signaling delay time for E Value exceeds limit value
limit value for undervoltage
U<

Setting undervoltage monitoring U< in %
Use the parameter to set the limit value as a relative value.
To set the limit value for undervoltage U< as %, proceed as follows:
1. > Control parameter > Limit values > Press until the
ð U< Undervoltage (%)
3. Press .
ð The limit value for undervoltage U< is set.
Setting signaling delay for undervoltage U<
You can use this parameter to set the delay time after which the Undervolt-
age relay is to activate and the event message appear on the display. This
can be used to prevent messages from being issued when the value briefly
falls below the limit value. The undervoltage LED always lights up immedi-
ately regardless.
To set the delay time for this message, proceed as follows:
ð U< Delay

4. Press .
ð The signaling delay time for undervoltage U< is set.
Activating/deactivating undervoltage blocking
You can use this parameter to set how the device behaves if the voltage falls
below the undervoltage limit. You can select the following options:
Setting Function
On Automatic regulation is blocked.
Off Automatic regulation remains active.
Table 11: Behavior
To activate/deactivate the undervoltage blocking, proceed as follows:

ð U< blocking.
2. Press for On setting or for Off setting.
3. Press .
ð Undervoltage blocking is activated/deactivated.
Activating/deactivating message for voltages below 30 V
You can use this parameter to set whether the Undervoltage message is to
be suppressed at a measured value of less than 30 V. This setting is used to
ensure that no event message appears when the transformer is switched off.
You can select the following options:
Setting Function
On The Undervoltage message is also displayed
when the measured value is less than 30 V.
Off The Undervoltage message is no longer dis-
played when the measured value is less than
30 V.
Table 12: Response
To activate/deactivate the message, proceed as follows:
ð U< also under 30 V.
2. Press for On setting or for Off setting.
3. Press .
ð The message is activated/deactivated.
7.5.2 Setting overvoltage monitoring U>

You can use these parameters to set the limit values for overvoltage moni-
toring. This overvoltage monitoring triggers tap-change operations to return
to the desired operating status. If the operating status can no longer be cor-
rected, a message is triggered by the Function monitoring relay.
Response to high-speed If the measured voltage Vactual exceeds the set limit value , the red LED V>
return and associated signaling relay activate (contact X4:1/3 opens and X4:2/3
closes). The Overvoltage V> message appears in the display. At the same
time, the high-speed return function is activated without delay time T1. Once
the set switching pulse time has passed, the tap position is lowered by
activating the motor-drive unit until the measured voltage Vactual again falls
below the limit value . The Overvoltage V> message is reset.

Figure 46: Response to limit value being exceeded
1 Set limit value for overvoltage 6 Vactual: Measured voltage

V>
2 + B %: Upper limit A Value exceeds limit value
3 Vdesired: Desired value B Value falls below limit value
4 - B %: Lower limit C High-speed return is started
(lower tap-change)
5 Set switching pulse time
Response to overvoltage If you activated the overvoltage blocking, all switching pulses to the motor-
blocking drive unit are blocked when a limit value is exceeded. At the same time, the
red LED U> lights up and the Overvoltage U> message is displayed. As
soon as the measured voltage Uactual has again fallen below the limit value,
blocking and the message are reset.
The following sections describe how you can set the parameters for the
overvoltage U> limit value.
Setting overvoltage U> as %
The limit value is entered as a relative value (%) of the set desired value. To
set the limit value, proceed as follows:

ð U> Overvoltage (%)
3. Press .
ð The limit value is set.
Activating overvoltage blocking/high-speed return
You can use this parameter to set how the device responds to overvoltage.
The following settings are possible:
Setting Behavior
On During overvoltage, the device blocks all switch
pulses to the motor-drive unit.
Off In the event of overvoltage, a high-speed return
is undertaken until the value again falls below the
limit value.
Table 13: Possible settings
To set the device's response to overvoltage, proceed as follows:
ð Overvolt. blocking U>.
2. Press or to set the option you want.
3. Press .
ð The response is set.
7.5.3 Setting overcurrent monitoring I>

You can use this parameter to set the limit value for overcurrent to prevent
tap-change operations in the event of excess load currents.
If the measured current exceeds the set limit value, the red LED I> lights up.
The Overcurrent message appears in the display. The device's output pulses
are blocked at the same time.
Setting overcurrent I> as %
To set the limit value I> overcurrent for overcurrent blocking, proceed as fol-
lows:

ð I> Overcurrent
3. Press .
Activating/deactivating overcurrent monitoring
To activate/deactivate overcurrent monitoring, proceed as follows:
ð Blocking Overcurrent I>
2. Press or to activate (On)/deactivate (Off) overcurrent monitor-

ing.
3. Press .
ð Overcurrent monitoring is activated/deactivated.
7.5.4 Set undercurrent monitoring I<

These parameters are used to set undercurrent monitoring. As soon as the
measured current falls below the set limit value, control is blocked.
Setting undercurrent I<
To set the limit value for undercurrent monitoring, proceed as follows:
ð Undercurrent I< [%]
3. Press .
ð The I< undercurrent limit value is set.
Activating/deactivating I< undercurrent blocking
To activate/deactivate undercurrent monitoring, proceed as follows:

ð Blocking undercurrent I>.
2. Press or to activate (ON)/deactivate (OFF) undercurrent block-

ing.
3. Press .
ð The I< undercurrent blocking is activated/deactivated.
7.5.5 Activate/deactivate active power monitoring

This parameter can be used to set active power monitoring. If blocking is ac-
tivated, the control is blocked if a negative active power flow is detected.
However, this is only possible if the current transformer connection is con-
nected and correctly set. When regulator blocking is deactivated, then the
sign of the active power does not affect the regulation.
To activate/deactivate regulator blocking, proceed as follows:
1. > control parameter > Compensation > Press until

the desired parameter is displayed.
ð Neg. active power block.
2. Press or to select the option you want.
3. Press .
ð Blocking the regulator with negative active power is activated/deactivat-
ed.
7.5.6 Permitted tap positions

You can use the parameters described below to restrict the permissible
range of tap positions in auto mode. If you activate this function, the device
does not switch to tap positions outside the set limits in auto mode.
In manual mode, for manual tap changes on the motor-drive unit or for re-
mote tap changes via a SCADA system, monitoring of the step limits is not
active. This may result in the set limits being exceeded.
When switching from manual to auto mode, the tap changer should be with-
in the permitted tap positions.
7.5.6.1 Setting the lowest tap position blocking limit
You can define a lower tap position blocking limit to limit the number of tap
positions available in operation. When the tap position defined as lower tap
position blocking limit is reached, tap position blocking is activated. This pre-
vents any further tap change downwards.
To define the lower tap position blocking limit, proceed as follows:

1. > Configuration > Continue > Continue > Tap

position > Press until the desired parameter is displayed.
ð Lowest tap position

4. Press .
ð The lower tap position blocking limit is defined.
7.5.6.2 Setting highest tap position blocking limit
You can define an upper tap position blocking limit to limit the number of tap
positions available in operation. When the tap position defined as the upper
tap position blocking limit is reached, tap position blocking is activated. This
prevents any further tap change upwards.
To define the upper tap position blocking limit, proceed as follows:

ð Highest tap position

4. Press .
ð The upper blocking limit is defined.
7.5.6.3 Setting the tap position blocking mode
You can set the tap position blocking mode in relation to the upper and lower
tap position blocking limits:
Setting Behavior
Off The tap position blocking mode is deactivated
Directional During raise and lower tap changes, the device
blocks as soon as the defined upper/lower tap
position limit is reached or exceeded. Further
tap changes are prevented.

Setting Behavior
Non-directional The device blocks in both directions as soon as
the defined lower/upper tap position limit is
reached or exceeded. Further tap changes are
prevented.
Table 14: Tap position blocking mode
To set the tap position blocking mode, proceed as follows:
ü Press to select manual mode.
ü Press to change back manually into the defined tap position limits.

ð Tap pos. blocking mode
3. Press .
ð The tap position blocking mode is set.
7.6 Compensation
You can use the compensation function to compensate for the load-depend-
ent voltage drop between the transformer and consumer. The device pro-
vides 2 methods of compensation for this purpose:
▪ Line drop compensation
▪ Z compensation
Line drop compensation Z compensation
More accurate compensation Can only be used with minor
changes in the phase angle φ
Full knowledge of the line data Is not dependent on phase angle φ
needed
More parameters needed for con- Is simple to set
figuration
- Can be used with meshed net-
works
Table 15: Comparison of methods of compensation
7.6.1 Line drop compensation

Line drop compensation (LDC) requires exact line data. Line voltage drops
can be compensated very accurately using LDC.

To set line drop compensation correctly, you need to calculate the ohmic
and inductive voltage drop in V with reference to the secondary side of the
voltage transformer. You also need to correctly set the transformer circuit
used.
Figure 49: Line drop compensation equivalent circuit
Figure 50: Illustration showing line drop compensation
You can calculate the ohmic and inductive voltage drop using the following
formulas. This voltage drop calculation relates to the relativized voltage on
the secondary side of the voltage transformer.
Formula for calculating the ohmic voltage drop:
Formula for calculating the inductive voltage drop:
Ur Ohmic line parameter in Ω/km

Ux Inductive line parameter in Ω/km

IN Nominal current (amps) of selected current trans-

former connection on device:1 A; 5 A
kCT Current transformer ratio
kVT Voltage transformer ratio
r Ohmic line parameter in Ω/km per phase
x Inductive line parameter in Ω/km per phase
L Length of line in km
K Nominal current factor
Selecting the line drop compensation
To select the line drop compensation, proceed as follows:
► > Control parameter > Compensation method.

ð Compensation method.
ð Press or until the LDC option is displayed.
1. Press .
2. The line drop compensation is selected.
The following sections describe how you can set the parameters for the
ohmic and inductive voltage drop.
7.6.1.1 Setting the ohmic voltage drop Ur
You can use this parameter to set the ohmic voltage drop.
If you do not want to use line drop compensation, you have to set the value
0.0 V.
To set the ohmic voltage drop Ur, proceed as follows:

ü Select the LDC compensation method.
1. > Parameter > Compensation > Press until the de-

ð Ur line drop compensation.

4. Press .
ð The ohmic voltage drop Ur is set.

7.6.1.2 Setting the inductive voltage drop Ux
You can use this parameter to set the inductive voltage drop. The compen-
sation effect can be rotated by 180° in the display using a plus or minus sign.
If you do not want to use line drop compensation, you have to set the value
0.0 V.
To set the inductive voltage drop Ux, proceed as follows:

ü Select the LDC compensation method.

ð Ux line drop compensation.

4. Press .
ð The inductive voltage drop Ux is set.
7.6.2 Z compensation
To keep the voltage constant for the consumer, you can use Z compensation
to activate a current-dependent increase in voltage. Z compensation is not
dependent on the phase angle φ and should only be used for small changes
in phase angle.
You can also define a limit value to avoid excess voltage on the transformer.
Figure 52: Z compensation

To use Z compensation, you need to calculate the increase in voltage (ΔU)

taking the current into account. Use the following formula for this purpose:
∆U Voltage increase I Load current in A

UTr Transformer voltage with IN Nominal current of current
current I transformer connection in A
(1 A; 5 A )
ULoad Voltage on line end with kCT Current transformer ratio
current I and on-load tap-
changer in same operating
position
Sample calculation: UTr = 100.1 V, ULoad = 100.0 V, IN = 5 A kCT = 200 A/5 A,

I = 100 A
Produces a voltage increase ∆U of 0.2%
The following sections describe how you can set the parameters you need
for Z compensation.
Select Z compensation
To select the line drop compensation, proceed as follows:
► > Control parameter > Compensation method.

ð Compensation method.
ð Press or until the Z option is displayed.
1. Press .
2. The Z compensation is selected.
The following sections describe how you can set the required parameters for
Z compensation.
7.6.2.1 Setting Z compensation
This parameter sets the voltage increase ∆V previously calculated.
If you do not want to use Z compensation, you have to set the value 0.0 %.
To set the current dependent voltage increase, proceed as follows:

ü Select Z compensation.

ð Z compensation.
3. Press .
ð The current-dependent voltage increase is set.
7.6.2.2 Setting the Z compensation limit value
You can use this parameter to define the maximum permissible voltage in-
crease to avoid excess voltage on the transformer.
If you do not want to use a limit value, you have to set the value 0.0 %.
To set the limit value for the current-dependent voltage increase, proceed as
follows:
ü Select Z compensation.
ü Set the "Z compensation" parameter

ð Z comp. limit value.
3. Press .
7.7 Transformer data

The transformation ratios and measuring set-up for the voltage and current
transformers used can be set with the following parameters. The device
uses this information to calculate the corresponding measured values on the
primary side of the current transformer (and therefore the transformer) from
the recorded measured values. These are then displayed.
The following parameters are available for this purpose:

▪ Primary voltage
▪ Secondary voltage
▪ Primary current
▪ Secondary current (current transformer connection)
▪ Transformer circuit

The measured values displayed for the device are influenced by the settings
for the above parameters. Note the table below.
Parameter set Measured value display
Primary Secon- Primary Trans- Voltage (main Current Current (info
voltage dary current former screen) (main screen) screen)
voltage connec-
tion
- Yes - - Secondary volt- - Secondary cur-
age [V] rent [% of con-
nection]
Yes Yes - - Primary voltage - Secondary cur-
[kV] rent [% of con-
nection]
Yes Yes Yes - Primary voltage Primary cur- Secondary cur-
[kV] rent [A] rent [% of con-
nection]
Yes Yes - Yes Primary voltage - Secondary cur-
[kV] rent [A]
Yes Yes Yes Yes Primary voltage Primary cur- Secondary cur-
[kV] rent [A] rent [A]
Table 16: Influence of transformer data on measured value display
7.7.1 Setting the primary transformer voltage

This parameter can be used to set the primary transformer voltage in kV.
When you are setting the primary transformer voltage, the device shows the
primary voltage rather than the secondary voltage in the main screen and
you can also set the control parameters in kV.
If a setting of 0 kV is chosen, no primary transformer voltage is displayed.
To set the primary transformer voltage, proceed as follows:
1. > Configuration > Transformer data.

ð Primary voltage.
2. Press to highlight the decimal place.

ð The decimal place is defined and the value can be changed.

5. Press .
ð The primary transformer voltage is set.

7.7.2 Setting the secondary transformer voltage

This parameter can be used to set the secondary transformer voltage in V.
To set the secondary transformer voltage, proceed as follows:
1. > Configuration > Transformer data > Press until the

ð Secondary voltage.

4. Press .
ð The secondary transformer voltage is set.
7.7.3 Setting primary transformer current

This parameter can be used to set the primary transformer current.
▪ When you are setting the primary transformer current, the measured
value is displayed in the main screen.
▪ If you set a value of 0, no measured value is displayed in the main
screen.
Setting parameter Current feed Display

Primary current Secondary cur- Power connection Info screen Main screen
rent Primary/secon-
dary current
No parameteriza- Unknown 1A 100 % 0A
tion
No parameteriza- 1A 1A 1A 0A
tion
50 A Unknown 1A 100 % (of primary 50 A (of primary
current) current)
50 A 1A 1A 1 A (of secondary 50 A (of primary
current) current)
Table 17: Example of unit displayed: %/A
To set the primary transformer current, proceed as follows:


ð Primary current.

4. Press .
ð The primary transformer current is set.
7.7.4 Setting the current transformer connection

This parameter can be used to set the current transformer connection. This
setting is needed for the device to display the correct secondary current in
the info screen.
If you select the "Unknown" option, the percentage of current (with reference
to the current transformer connection used) is displayed in the info screen.
▪ 1A
▪ 5A
To set the current transformer connection, proceed as follows:

ð Current transformer connection.
2. Press or to select a current transformer connection.
3. Press .
ð The current transformer connection is set.
7.7.5 Setting the phase difference for the current transformer/voltage

transformer
You can use this parameter to set the phase difference of the current trans-
former and voltage transformer. You can set the common transformer cir-
cuits as follows:
Setting Measurement meth- Phase difference
od
0 1PH 1 phase 0°
0 3PHN 3 phase 0°
0 3PH 3 phase 0°
90 3PH 3 phase 90°
30 3PH 3 phase 30°

Setting Measurement meth- Phase difference

od
-30 3PH 3 phase -30°
Table 18: Set values for transformer circuit
Note the following sample circuits to select the correct transformer circuit.
Circuit A: 1-phase measurement in 1-phase grid
TAPCON® 230
Figure 54: Phase difference 0 1PH
▪ The voltage transformer VT is connected to the outer conductor and

neutral conductor.
▪ The current transformer CT is looped into the outer conductor.
▪ The voltage VL1 and current IL1 are in phase.
▪ The voltage drop on an outer conductor is determined by the current IL1.
Circuit B: 1-phase measurement in 3-phase grid
TAPCON® 230
Figure 55: Phase difference 0 3PHN
▪ The voltage transformer VT is connected to the outer conductors L1 and

the neutral conductor.
▪ The current transformer CT is looped into the outer conductor L1.
▪ The voltage V and current I are in phase.

Circuit C:
TAPCON® 230
Figure 56: Phase difference 0 3PHN

L2.
▪ The current transformer CT1 is looped into the outer conductor L1 and
CT2 into the outer conductor L2.
▪ The current transformers CT1 and CT2 are connected crosswise in par-
allel (total current = IL1 + IL2).
▪ The total current IL1 + IL2 and voltage VL1-VL2 are in phase.
▪ The voltage drop on an outer conductor is determined by the current:
(IL1 + IL2) / √3.
Circuit D
TAPCON® 230

L2.
▪ The current IL3 is ahead of voltage VL1-VL2 by 90°.

Circuit E
TAPCON® 230

L2.
▪ The current IL2 is ahead of voltage VL2-VL1 by 30°.
Circuit F
TAPCON® 230
Figure 59: Phase difference -30 3PH

L2.
▪ The current IL1 lags behind VL1-VL2 by 30°. This corresponds to a phase
shift of -30°.
To set the phase difference for the transformer circuit, proceed as follows:


ð Transformer circuit.
2. Press or to select the required phase difference.
3. Press .
ð The phase difference is set.
7.8 Parallel operation

In theParallel operation menu item, you can set the parameters needed for
parallel transformer operation. Parallel transformer operation is used to in-
crease the throughput capacity or short-circuit capacity in one place.
Conditions for parallel Compliance with the following general conditions is required for operating
operation transformers in parallel:
▪ Identical rated voltage
▪ Transformer power ratio (< 3 : 1)
▪ Maximum deviation of short-circuit voltages (UK) for transformers con-
nected in parallel < 10 %
▪ Same number of switching groups
You can control up to 16 transformers connected in parallel in one or 2

groups without detecting the system topology. Information is swapped be-
tween the voltage regulators operating in parallel using the CAN bus. Paral-
lel operation is activated using one of 2 status inputs or the control system.
Parallel control can take one of two forms:

▪ Parallel operation following the "Circulating reactive current minimiza-
tion" principle
▪ Parallel operation following the "Tap synchronization" (master/follower)
principle
The following sections describe how you can set the parameters. When acti-
vating parallel operation, make sure you have configured the following pa-
rameters:
▪ CAN bus address
▪ Assigning a parallel operation group
7.8.1 Assigning CAN bus address

You can use this parameter to assign a CAN bus address to the device. So
that all devices can communicate using the CAN bus, each device requires a
unique identifier. Addresses can be set from 1 to 16. If the value is set to 0,
then no communication takes place.
To enter the CAN bus address, proceed as follows:

1. > Configuration > Parallel operation > Press until the

ð CAN address.
3. Press .
ð The CAN bus address is saved.
7.8.2 Selecting parallel operation method

You can use this parameter to select a parallel operation method. Two differ-
ent methods can be assigned to the device.
▪ Circulating reactive current minimization
▪ Tap synchronization (master/follower)
You must select the same parallel operation method for all voltage regula-
tors operating in parallel.
The following sections describe how you can set the parameters for a paral-
lel operation method.
7.8.2.1 Setting circulating reactive current method
When the circulating reactive current parallel operation method is select-

ed, then parallel operation is carried out using the circulating reactive current
minimization method. The circulating reactive current is calculated from the
transformer currents and their phase angles. A voltage proportional to the
circulating reactive current is added to the independently operating voltage
regulators as a correction for the measurement voltage. This voltage correc-
tion can be reduced or increased using the circulating reactive current sensi-
tivity setting.
The circulating reactive current method is suited to transformers connected

in parallel with a similar nominal output and short-circuit voltage VK and to
vector groups with the same and different step voltages. This does not re-
quire any information about the tap position.
To set the circulating reactive current parallel operation method, proceed

as follows:

1. > Configuration > Parallel operation.

ð Parallel operation method.
2. Press or until circulating reactive current appears in the dis-

play.
3. Press .
ð The parallel operation method is set.
When using the circulating reactive current parallel operation method, you
have to set the parameters for the circulating reactive current sensitivity
and circulating reactive current blocking.
Setting circulating reactive current sensitivity
The circulating reactive current sensitivity is a measure of its effect on the

behavior of the voltage regulator. At a setting of 0 % no effect is present.
With circulating reactive current relating to the rated current of the current
transformer, if you set the value to 10 % for example, this would cause the
voltage in the voltage regulator to be corrected by 10 %. This correction to
the voltage can be increased or decreased with this setting to attain the opti-
mum value.
As soon as you change the circulating reactive current sensitivity value, the
value for the result changes in the help text in the display.
To set the circulating reactive current sensitivity, proceed as follows:

ð Circulating reactive current sensitivity.
3. If necessary, press to highlight the decimal place.

ð The decimal place is now highlighted and the value can be
changed.
4. Press .
ð The circulating reactive current sensitivity is set.
Setting circulating reactive current blocking
You can use this parameter to set the limit value for the maximum permissi-
ble circulating reactive current. If, during parallel operation, the circulating re-
active current exceeds the set limit value, then the following event is activat-
ed:
▪ Parallel operation error
All devices operating in parallel are blocked. Depending on the set delay
time for the parallel operation error message, the signaling relay Parallel op-
eration error is activated.

To set the blocking limit for the maximum permitted circulating reactive cur-
rent, proceed as follows:
1. > Configuration > Parallel operation > Press until the de-
ð Circulating reactive current blocking.
3. Press .
ð The blocking limit for the maximum permitted circulating reactive current
is set.
7.8.2.2 Setting tap synchronization
With the tap synchronization method, you need to designate one voltage
regulator as the master and all others as followers. The master handles volt-
age regulation and transmits its current tap positions to all followers via the
CAN bus. The followers compare the tap position received with their own tap
position. If the set permissible tap difference between the tap position re-
ceived and their own position is exceeded, the followers switch to the tap po-
sition received from the master. This ensures that the transformers operating
in parallel are always in the same tap position.
For the tap synchronization method, you can select the following options:
Option Description
Master The voltage regulator is designated as the master.
Follower The voltage regulator is designated as the follower.
Sync.auto Automatic assignment of master or follower.
If no master is detected, the voltage regulator with the
lowest CAN bus address is automatically designated
as the master. All other voltage regulators are desig-
nated as followers.
Table 19: Tap synchronization method
In order to use the sync.auto option, an individual CAN bus address must
be assigned to each voltage regulator. Up to 16 CAN participants are sup-
ported.
To set the tap synchronization method, proceed as follows:

ð Parallel operation method.
2. Press or until the desired parameter is displayed.
3. Press .
ð The tap synchronization method is set.

7.8.2.2.1 Setting the follower tapping direction
With this parameter, you can set how the follower behaves in the event of a
raise or lower tap change.
As in "Tap synchronization (master/follower)" parallel operation the tap posi-

tions of the transformers which are running in parallel are compared, it is ab-
solutely essential that these transformers have the same position designa-
tion. Ensure that all higher tap change operations or lower tap change oper-
ations produce the same voltage change in all transformers.
You can select the following options:

Option Description
Standard Follower sends a raise tap change
dV>0 = tapping direction toward command to increase the voltage.
position 1 Follower sends a raise tap change
command to increase the voltage.
Follower sends a lower tap change
command to reduce the voltage. Fol-
lower sends a lower tap change
command to reduce the voltage.
Swapped Follower sends a raise tap change
dV>0 = tapping direction toward command to increase the voltage.
position n Follower sends a lower tap change
command to reduce the voltage.
Follower sends a lower tap change
command to reduce the voltage. Fol-
lower sends a raise tap change com-
mand to reduce the voltage.
Table 20: Device behavior
Please note whether the voltage regulator is defined as master or follower

when setting the tapping direction. The tapping direction can only be swap-
ped for a follower.
To select the tapping direction, proceed as follows:

ð Follower tapping direction.
2. Press or to select the required tapping direction.
3. Press .
ð The tapping direction is selected.

7.8.2.2.2 Setting the master/follower circulating reactive current blocking limit
This monitoring function is available in the "Master/follower tap synchroniza-

tion" parallel operation mode in conjunction with a current measurement.
The device is blocked as soon as the circulating reactive current reaches the
blocking limit.
To activate/deactivate the circulating reactive current blocking limit, proceed

as follows:

ð Master/follower current blocking.
2. Press or to activate blocking by selecting Blocking or to deac-

tivate blocking by selecting Off.
3. Press .
ð The blocking is activated.
7.8.3 Assigning a parallel operation group

You can use this parameter to assign a transformer group to the device. You
can create a total of 2 groups. The parallel operation group can be selected
only if you have not programmed an allocation using a GPI control input.
The following groupings are possible:

Parameter Function
None Device not assigned to any parallel operation
group
Group 1 Device assigned to parallel operation group 1
Group 2 Device assigned to parallel operation group 2
Group 1 and group 2 Device assigned to parallel operation groups 1
and 2
Table 21: Parallel operation groups
To assign the device to a parallel operation group, proceed as follows:

ð Parallel operation group.
2. Press or until the desired setting is displayed.
3. Press .
ð The device is assigned to a parallel operation group.

7.8.4 Activating/deactivating blocking in simplex mode

With this parameter, you can configure if you want to prevent one single de-
vice handling regulation. This function is activated if only this one device is
recognized in the parallel operation group using the CAN bus.
To activate/deactivate the Simplex mode blocking function, proceed as fol-

lows:
To activate/deactivate the simplex mode blocking function, proceed as fol-

lows:
ü Make sure that the device is assigned to a parallel operation group.

ð Simplex mode blocking.
2. Press or to activate blocking by selecting On or to deactivate

blocking by selecting Off.
3. Press .
ð Blocking in simplex mode is activated.
7.8.5 Setting delay time for parallel operation error messages

You can use this parameter to set the delay time for a parallel operation er-
ror message so that brief fault messages are not received if the motor-drive
units involved in the parallel operation have different runtimes. Once the set
delay time has elapsed, the event is issued at the output relay. Automatic
regulation is blocked and the on-load tap-changers can only be adjusted in
manual mode.
To set the delay time for the parallel operation error message, proceed as
follows:

ð Error message.
3. Press .
ð The delay time for the parallel operation error message is set.
7.8.6 Configuring the maximum permitted tap difference

With this parameter, you can configure on the follower the maximum permit-
ted tap difference between the follower and master.
In the tap synchronization parallel operation method, the tap positions of

all transformers connected in parallel must be identical. Provided the tap dif-
ference is not greater than the maximum tap difference, the follower follows

the master. If the tap difference is greater than the maximum tap position de-
viation, the follower and master block regulation immediately. After the set
delay time for parallel operation error messages, the follower triggers the
Parallel operation error message.
To set the maximum permitted tap difference, proceed as follows:

ð Max. tap difference.
3. Press .
ð The maximum permitted tap difference is configured.
7.8.7 Activating/deactivating follower tapping without measured

voltage
If the followerdoes not have its own voltage measurement or an existing volt-
age measurement has no function, this function can be used to define
whether the device should block or should continue to carry out the master’s
control commands.
Setting Function
On Follower also taps without measured voltage
Off Follower only taps with measured voltage
Table 22: Device behavior
To activate/deactivate this function, proceed as follows:

ð Follower tapping without Umeas.
2. Press or to activate the function by selecting On or to deacti-

vate the function by selecting Off.
3. Press .
ð The function is set.
7.8.8 Activating/deactivating parallel operation

This parameter can be used to activate or deactivate parallel operation.
When activating parallel operation, make sure you have configured the fol-
lowing parameters:
▪ CAN bus address
▪ Assigning a parallel operation group
To deactivate parallel operation, proceed as follows:

1. > Configuration > Parallel operation.

ð Parallel operation activation
2. Press or to activate parallel operation by selecting On or deac-

tivate parallel operation by selecting Off.
3. Press .
ð Parallel operation is deactivated.
7.9 Tap position capture

The current tap position of the on-load- tap-changer is transferred from the
motor-drive unit to the device. In accordance with your order, the tap position
is transferred in one of the following ways:
▪ Digital signal
– BCD
– DUAL
– GRAY
▪ Analog signal
– Injected current (0/4...20 mA)
– Resistor contact series (200...2000 ohms)
– N/O contact series
The following sections describe how you can set the required parameters for
tap position capture. Additional parameters for the tap position limit values
can be found in the section titled "Permitted tap positions" [► 84].
7.9.1 Digital tap position capture

There is the option of transferring the tap position as a digital signal from the
motor-drive unit to the device.
▪ BCD
▪ Binary code
▪ Gray code
To select the digital tap position capture, proceed as follows:

position
ð Tap pos. capture
2. Press or to set the desired option (Binary/BCD/Gray).
3. Press .
ð The digital tap position capture is set.
No further settings are necessary.

7.9.2 Analog tap position capture

If the current tap position of the on-load tap-changer is captured using an an-
alog signal, then the analog input (terminal strip X7) must be adapted to the
signal of the tap position transmitter.
The analog input (terminal strip X7) can be used either for the input of the
tap position or for setting the desired voltage level remotely.
You can use the following tap position transmitters:

PIO card (Terminal strip X7)
Resistor contact series 200...2,000 ohms
Injected current 0/4...20 mA
Table 23: Analog tap position capture
Adjustment to the existing tap position transmitter must be carried out during
commissioning.
To select an analog position capture, proceed as follows:

position
ð Tap pos. capture
3. Press .
ð The tap position capture is set.
No further settings are necessary.
7.9.2.1 Setting lower limit value
These parameters can be used to set the lower value for the tap position. To
do this, you must set the lower value of the signal range and the linked low-
est tap position.
You can undertake the settings for each input on the analog input card.
For example: To capture a tap position range of 1...19 via input 1 as

4...20 mA, you must set 20% for the "Analog value [%] Tap pos. min" pa-
rameter and 1.0 for the "Lowest tap position" parameter.
Setting lower limit value of input signal [%]
To configure the analog input, you must state the lower limit value of the in-
put signal. Use the following settings depending on your analog signal:

Analog signal Setting

Injected current: 0...20 mA 0 % (= 0 mA)
Injected current: 4...20 mA 20 % (= 4 mA)
Resistor contact series always 20 %
Table 24: Parameter settings
To assign the minimum tap position to the analog value, proceed as follows:

ð Analog Val. [%] Tap pos. min.

4. Press .
ð The analog value for the minimum tap positions is assigned.
Setting lower value of input signal
To configure the analog input, an absolute value must be assigned to the

lower value of the applied signal.
To set the lowest tap position, proceed as follows:

ð Lowest tap position
3. Press .
ð The lowest tap position is set.
7.9.2.2 Setting upper limit value
These parameters can be used to set the upper value for the tap position. To
do this, you must set the upper value of the signal range and linked highest
tap position.
You can undertake the settings for each input on the analog input card.
For example: To capture a tap position range of 1...19 via input 1 as

4...20 mA, you must set 100% for the "Analog value [%] Tap pos. max" pa-
rameter and 19.0 for the "Highest tap position" parameter.

Setting upper limit value of input signal [%]
To configure the analog input, you must state the upper limit value for the in-
put signal. Use the following settings depending on your analog signal:
Analog signal Setting
Injected current: 0/4...20 mA 100 % (= 20 mA)
Resistor contact series always 100 %
Table 25: Parameter settings
To assign the maximum tap position to the analog value, proceed as follows:

ð Analog Val. [%] Tap pos. max.

4. Press .
ð The analog value for the maximum tap position is assigned.
Setting upper value of input signal
To configure the analog input, an absolute value must be assigned to the up-
per value of the applied signal.
To set the highest tap position, proceed as follows:

ð Highest tap position
3. Press .
ð The highest tap position is set.
7.10 Setting the desired voltage level remotely

The analog input can also be used to change the desired voltage value re-
motely. This requires the analog input (terminal strip X7) to be adapted to
the voltage level transmitter signal.
The analog input (terminal strip X7) can be used either for the input of the
tap position or for setting the desired voltage level remotely.

The following options are available for setting the desired voltage level re-
motely:
Analog setting of desired voltage level remotely

▪ Injected current: 0/4...20 mA
▪ Resistor contact series (200...2000 ohms)
7.10.1 Activate/deactivate setting the desired voltage level remotely.

You can use this parameter to activate or deactivate setting the desired volt-
age level remotely.
To activate/deactivate setting the desired voltage level remotely, proceed as

follows:
1. > Configuration > Continue > Continue > Set desired

voltage level remotely > Press until the desired parameter is dis-
played.
ð Setting the desired voltage level remotely
2. Press or to activate setting the desired voltage level remotely

(On) or deactivate it by pressing (Off).
3. Press .
ð Setting the desired voltage level remotely is activated/deactivated.
7.10.2 Setting lower limit value for the desired value

To configure the analog input, state the analog value for the minimum de-
sired value.
If you are using a desired value transmitter with a resistor contact series, se-
lect 20%.
If you are using a desired value transmitter with injected current as the trans-
mitter signal, either select 0% (for 0 mA) or 20% (for 4 mA).
Desired value Current Value
Minimum desired val- 0 mA 0% (of analog input
ue 90 V signal range)
4 mA 20% (of analog input
signal range)
Table 26: Examples of configuration for the analog input (desired value transmitter
with injected current)
To set the analog value for the minimum desired value, proceed as follows:

1. > Configuration > Continue > Continue > Remote

Volt. Level Setting > Press until the desired parameter appears.
ð Analog value % desired value min.

4. Press .
ð The analog value for the minimum desired value is set.
To configure the analog input, the minimum desired value must be assigned
to the minimum analog value.
To set the minimum desired value, proceed as follows:

Volt. Level Setting > Press until the desired parameter is displayed.
ð Minimum desired value
3. Press .
ð The minimum desired value is set.
7.10.3 Setting upper limit value for the desired value

To configure the analog input, state the analog value for the maximum de-
sired value.
If you are using a desired value transmitter with a resistor contact series, se-
lect 100%.
If you are using a desired value transmitter with injected current as the trans-
mitter signal, select 100% (for 20 mA).
Desired value Current Value
Maximum desired val- 20 mA 100% (of analog input
ue 110 V signal range)
Table 27: Example of configuration for the analog input (desired value transmitter
with injected current)
To set the analog value for the maximum desired value, proceed as follows:


ð Analog value % desired value max

4. Press .
ð The analog value for the maximum desired value is set.
To configure the analog input, the maximum desired value must be assigned
to the maximum analog value.
To set the maximum desired value, proceed as follows:

ð Maximum desired value
3. Press .
ð The maximum desired value is set.
7.11 Configurable inputs and outputs

You can individually configure the digital inputs (GPI ) and outputs (GPO ).
The following digital inputs and outputs are available:

▪ 8 digital inputs (GPI1...8)
▪ 7 digital outputs (GPO1...7)
7.11.1 Linking inputs with functions

You can activate the inputs as follows :
▪ Statically using signal statuses
– The input signal must be continually present (status: high level).
▪ Dynamically using pulses
– A pulse (rising edge) is needed at the input. The input signal must
change its status from "Low" to "High". If you are using a pulsed in-
put, you can trigger the assigned function at the same time as the
keys connected to the inputs also using the control system.

You can recognize pulsed inputs from the preceding "P:". The note "Warn-
ing: P = pulsed inputs" is displayed on the screen.
You can assign one of the following functions to each of the digital inputs
(GPI 1...8):
Function Description
Off No function selected
Master/Follower Define master/follower mode.
Signal on: Master mode active
Signal off: Follower mode active.
Remote/Loc. Define remote/local mode.
Signal on: "Remote" operating
mode active.
Signal off: "Local" operating mode
active.
Blocking Block automatic regulation.
Quick Tap Activating quick reset (deactivating
delay time T1/T2)
MPS triggered Input for MPS triggered feedback.
Motor running Input for Motor running feedback.
Desired value 2 Activate desired value 2
Desired value 3 Activate desired value 3
Remote VL Activate setting the desired voltage
level remotely.
ParGroup1 Assign parallel operation group 1
ParGroup2 Assign parallel operation group 2
Blk U raise Block tap-change operations
(raise).
Blk U lower Block tap-change operations (low-
er).
P: Par. on Activate parallel operation.
P: S. mode Deactivate parallel operation (inde-
P: Master pendent).
P: Follower Define master parallel mode.

Define follower parallel mode.
P: Syn. auto. Define "Automatic tap synchroniza-
tion" parallel mode.
P: Cir. curr. Define circulating reactive current
mode.
P: DV 1 Activate desired value 1


Table 28: Functions for digital inputs (GPI 1...8)
If you assign the same functionality to two inputs, the device produces an
event message [► 131]. This also applies if you assign the same function-
ality via a static input and via a pulsed input.
Other examples of double assignment of functions are (n, m = 1...8):

▪ GPI n = master/follower and GPI m = P: Follower
▪ GPI n = master/follower and GPI m = P: Master
To assign a function to a digital input or to deactivate it, proceed as follows:
1. > Configuration > Continue > User In/Outputs (Press

for further GPIs).
ð GPI
2. Press or until the desired function is displayed.
3. Press .
Functions can be assigned to all other GPIs as described above. You can
select the GPIs as follows:
GPI
Press
GPI1 – X4:13 -
GPI2 – X4:14 1x
GPI3 – X4:15 2x
GPI4 – X4:16 3x
GPI5 – X4:17 4x
GPI6 – X4:18 5x
GPI7 – X6:1 6x
GPI8 – X6:2 7x
Table 29: Configurable GPIs
Also refer to
2 Messages [► 131]
7.11.2 Linking outputs with functions

You can assign one of the following functions to the digital outputs (GPO
1...7):

Function Description
Off No function selected
Master Assign master
Follower Assign follower
ParState Assign parallel operation status
ParError Assign parallel operation error
Local/Rem. Message: Local control/remote
control
Undervoltage Message: Undervoltage blocking
Overvoltage Message: Overvoltage blocking
Undercurrent Message: Undercurrent blocking
Overcurrent Message: Overcurrent blocking
Desired value 1 Message: Desired value 1
MPS triggered Message: Motor protective switch
was triggered
Motor runtime > Message: Motor runtime exceeded
Motor running Message: Motor running"
Bandwidth < Message: Value fallen below band-
width
Bandwidth > Message: Bandwidth exceeded
GPI 1 Message: GPI 1 active
Event Message : Event active
BCD +/- Tap position in BCD code, prefix.
The relay is triggered if the pro-
ceeding sign is negative.
BCD 1 Tap position in BCD code, position
with value of 1.
with value of 2.
with value of 4.
with value of 8.


with value of 10.
with value of 20.
with value of 40.
Simplex mode Message: Parallel operation deacti-
vated, independent
Table 30: Functions for digital outputs (GPO 1...7)
If the device cannot determine the tap position, ? is displayed in the tap po-
sition display. The relays of all outputs with BCD functionality (NC) are
switched off.
To assign a function to a digital output or to deactivate it, proceed as follows:
1. > Configuration > Continue > User In/Outputs > Press

until the desired parameter is displayed.
ð GPO.
2. Press or until the desired function is displayed.
3. Press .
Functions can be assigned to all other GPOs as described above. You can
select the GPOs as follows:
GPO
Press
GPO1 – X4:9 8x
GPO2 – X4:12 9x
GPO3 – X5:9 10x
GPO4 – X5:12 11x
GPO5 – X5:18 12x
GPO6 – X5:21 13x
GPO7 – X5:24 14x
Table 31: Configurable GPOs
7.12 LED selection

You can use this parameter to assign functions to the 4 free LEDs which
light up when an event occurs. You can use labeling strips to label them.

Depending on your device configuration, the following parameters can be

used by MR for special functions. In this case, these parameters are pre-as-
signed. You may not be able to view or freely assign these parameters.
Functions available for An overview of all possible functions which you can assign to the LEDs is
LEDs provided in the table below.
Functions Function description
available
Off LED deactivated
GPI x There is a signal at control input GPI x (e.g. GPI 1)
GPO x The signaling relay at the GPO x (e.g. GPO 1) output
has activated
Undercurrent Undercurrent present
Par. error Parallel operation error present
MPS triggered Motor protective switch triggered
Blocking Regulation is blocked
Circ. reactive Circulating reactive current parallel operation method is
current activated
Master Device in parallel operation activated as master
Follower Device in parallel operation activated as follower
Bandwidth < Value is below bandwidth
Bandwidth > Value is above bandwidth
Desired val- Desired value 1 activated
ue 1
ue 2
ue 3
Function moni- Function monitoring message active
toring
Remote Remote mode activated
Local Local mode activated
Auto Auto mode activated
Manual Manual mode activated
Event Event active
Table 32: Functions available for LEDs
Assigning function
To assign a function to an LED, proceed as follows:

1. > Continue > LED selection > Press until the desired
2. Press or to select the option you want.
3. Press .
ð The function is assigned.
All additional LEDs can be assigned as described previously. The LEDs

available can be called up as follows:
LED (parameter) Characteristics
Press
LED 1 Single-colored -
LED 2 Single-colored 1x
LED 3 yellow Two-colored 2x
LED 3 green Two-colored 3x
LED 4 rot Two-colored 4x
LED 4 yellow Two-colored 5x
Table 33: Configurable LEDs
7.13 Information about device

You can view general information about the voltage regulator in this display.
You can call up the following information:
▪ Measured values
▪ Calculated values
▪ Functional reliability of the LEDs (LED test)
▪ MIO card digital inputs
▪ MIO card digital outputs
▪ PIO card digital inputs
▪ PIO card digital outputs
▪ PIO card analog input
▪ Parallel operation
▪ Data on CAN bus
▪ Peak memory
▪ Default parameter
▪ Memory overview
▪ Event overview
7.13.1 Displaying info screen

The info screen displays the following information:

Figure 65: Info screen
1 Type designation 4 Additional cards

2 Software version 5 RAM memory
3 Serial number
To display the info screen, proceed as follows:
► > Info.
ð Info.
7.13.2 Displaying measured values

The current measured values are shown in this display. The following meas-
ured values can be displayed:
Figure 66: Measured values
1 Voltage U in V or kV 4 Measurement performance

PMeas in % or MW
2 Current I in % or A 5 Frequency f in Hz
3 Phase angle from U to I in de-
grees

The values on the right in rows , and are only displayed if the trans-
former data has been entered previously. In row , the value actually meas-
ured can be seen on the left and the value converted to the transformer cir-
cuit is on the right.
To display the measured values, proceed as follows:
► > Info > Press until the desired display appears.

ð Measured values.
7.13.3 Display calculated values

Calculated values are shown on this screen . The following values can be
displayed:
Figure 67: Calculated values
1 I active (active share) in % 4 Reactive power Q in Mvar

2 I reactive (reactive share) in 5 Operation counter
%
3 Apparent power S in MVA 6 Output factor cos ϕ
The values in the rows on the right are only displayed if the transformer data
has been entered previously.
To display the calculated values, proceed as follows:

ð Calculated values
7.13.4 Carrying out LED test

You can check whether the LEDs are functioning properly. To do this, press
the relevant function key to illuminate an LED:
Key LED no.
LED 1...LED 5
...
LED 6...LED 9
+ ... +

Key LED no.

All LEDs
Table 34: Arrangement of keys for the LED test
This function will only test the functional reliability of the respective LED.
The function of the device linked to the LED is not tested.
To carry out the LED test, proceed as follows:
1. > Info > Press until the desired display appears.

ð LED test.
2. To carry out the function test, press the function key for the LED you
want to test.
7.13.5 Displaying status of the MIO card

The status of the digital inputs and outputs are shown in this display.
Digital inputs
The status of the optocoupler inputs is shown in the "MIO card digital inputs"
display. As soon as a continuous signal is present at the input, status 1 is
displayed. 0 indicates no signal at the input.
Proceed as follows to display the status:

ð MIO card digital inputs
Digital outputs
The status of the relays is shown in the "MIO card digital outputs" display As
soon as a relay has activated, status 1 is displayed. If status 0 is displayed,
the relay has not activated.
Proceed as follows to display the status:

ð MIO card digital outputs

7.13.6 Displaying status of the PIO card

Information about the digital inputs, outputs and the analog input is shown in
this display.
Digital inputs
The statuses of the optocoupler inputs are shown in this display. As soon as
a continuous signal is present at the input, status 1 is displayed. 0 indicates
no signal at the input.
To display the "PIO card digital inputs" screen, proceed as follows:

ð PIO card digital inputs
Digital outputs
The statuses of the relays are shown in this display. As soon as a relay has
activated, status 1 is displayed. If status 0 is displayed, the relay hasn't acti-
vated.
To display the "PIO card digital outputs" screen, proceed as follows:

ð PIO card digital outputs
Analog input
Information relating to the analog input is shown in this display.
If Not yet calibrated! is displayed, you need to calibrate the analog input in
order to use it to capture the tap position or set the desired voltage level re-
motely.
To display information about the analog input, proceed as follows:

ð PIO X7 analog input
7.13.7 Displaying parallel operation

This display indicates the control number for parallel operation (= CAN bus
address) and the number of devices which are currently operating in parallel.

To display data for parallel operation, proceed as follows:

ð Parallel operation.
7.13.8 Displaying data on CAN bus

The CAN bus data of the connected devices is shown in this display.
Figure 68: CAN bus data
1 CAN bus address of device 4 Reactive current in %

2 Actual voltage (UAct) in V 5 Tap position
3 Active current in %
To display information about data on the CAN bus, proceed as follows:

ð Data on CAN bus.
7.13.9 Peak memory

This display indicates whether the parameter sets are all correctly stored af-
ter restarting the device or after transferring a parameter set. The minimum
and maximum voltage measured since the last reset and the minimum and
maximum on-load tap-changer tap positions are shown here. All values re-
corded are stored with a time and date.
The minimum and maximum values continue to be stored in an internal

fixed value memory even in the event of power failure.

Figure 69: Peak memory
1 Maximum measured voltage 5 Minimum on-load tap-changer

U tap position
2 Maximum measured current I 6 Minimum measured power
factor cos φ
3 Maximum measured power 7 Minimum measured current I
factor cos φ
4 Maximum on-load tap-chang- 8 Minimum measured voltage U
er tap position
To display data stored in the peak memory, proceed as follows:

ð Peak memory.
Resetting peak memory
To reset the peak memory, proceed as follows:

ð Peak memory.
2. Press and at the same time.

ð The peak memory is reset.
7.13.10 Resetting parameters

With this display you can reset your settings to the factory settings .
Resetting the parameters to the factory settings permanently deletes your

parameters.
To reset all parameters, proceed as follows:


ð Default parameter
2. Press and at the same time.

ð "Default parameter active" is displayed.
ð All parameters have been reset to the factory settings.
7.13.11 Displaying memory overview

The memory overview can be used to display various database entries with
the relevant number of data records. The information is not relevant for oper-
ation. It is only needed for service checks. The following information is dis-
played:
▪ Parameter file
▪ Event data bits
▪ Flash file
▪ Events
To display the database entries, proceed as follows:

ð Memory overview
2. Press or to select an entry.

ð The relevant number of data records is displayed.
7.13.12 Displaying event overview

This display can be used to display the number of current red and yellow
events. The events are marked as follows:
Yellow Corresponds to an advance warning or status information.
Red Automatic regulation can block.
Table 35: Coding of events
A list with all events can be found in the Messages [► 131] section.
To view the event overview, proceed as follows:

ð Event overview.

8 Fault elimination
8 Fault elimination
This chapter describes how to eliminate simple operating faults.
8.1 No regulation in AUTO mode

Characteristics/detail Cause Remedy
Device control commands LOCAL/REMOTE switch in Check operating mode. Correct if neces-
have no effect. motor-drive unit switched to sary.
RAISE/LOWER LEDs light LOCAL.
up periodically No connection Check wiring as per connection diagram.
Blocking Reverse power lock active. Check parameters.
Correct if necessary.
Negative power flow Check current transformer polarity.
Function assigned to several Check parameterization of GPIs.
GPIs. Correct if necessary.
One of the GPIs is parame- Check parameterization and status in "In-
terized with "Blocking" and fo" menu.
has an appropriate input sig- Correct if necessary.
nal.
NORMset active Carry out manual tap-change operation
with or keys.
Undercurrent blocking active Check parameters.
Blocking Undervoltage blocking active Check parameters.
U< LED illuminated Correct if necessary.
Blocking Overvoltage blocking active Check parameters.
U> LED illuminated Correct if necessary.
Blocking Overcurrent blocking active Check parameters.
I> LED illuminated Correct if necessary.
Bandwidth set too high - Determine the recommended bandwidth
Table 36: No regulation in AUTO mode
8.2 Unexplained tap change

Compensation activated Setting: Check parameters.
▪ Line drop compensation Correct if necessary.
▪ Z compensation
Table 37: Unexplained tap change

8 Fault elimination
8.3 Man-machine interface

Keys REMOTE operating mode
Press to activate LOCAL mode.
▪ MANUAL/AUTO operat- active and LED in key il-
ing mode cannot be luminated.
changed
Keys Parameter error Reset parameters to factory settings.
▪ LEDs in keys and

not illuminated.
Display Contrast incorrectly set. Set contrast [► 47].
▪ No display. Voltage supply interrupted. Check voltage supply.
Fuse faulty. Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen.
LEDs Customized LED parameteri- Check parameters.
▪ Freely configurable LED zation.
lights up
LEDs Input signal not constant. Check input signal.
▪ LED flashing
COM1 Different baud rates set. Check baud rate set on device and PC.
▪ Cannot be connected to
PC using TAPCON®-
trol.
Table 38: Man-machine interface
8.4 Incorrect measured values

Measured voltage Connection has no contact in Check wiring and plug terminal.
▪ No measured value. the plug terminal.
Insulation trapped
Wire not inserted far enough.
Circuit breaker tripped. Check fuse.
Measured voltage Voltage drop on measuring Check measured voltage at plug terminal
▪ Measured value too low. lead. X2:1/X2:2.
Measured voltage Possible sources of fault: Check measured voltage at plug terminal
▪ Measured value fluctu- ▪ Leads laid in parallel. X2:1/X2:2.
ates. Increase distance from source of interfer-
▪ Tap-change operations.
ence.
Install filter if necessary.
Measured current Line to current transformer Check wiring.
▪ No measured value. interrupted.
Short-circuiting jumper in Remove short-circuiting jumper.
current transformer not re-
moved.

8 Fault elimination

Measured current Transmission ratio not cor- Correct parameterization.
▪ Measured value too rectly parameterized.
high. Incorrect input connected. Remove short-circuiting jumper.
▪ Measured value too low.
Phase angle Fault in external transformer Check transformer circuit.
▪ V/I. circuit.
Transformer circuit incorrect- Compare with system connection dia-
ly parameterized. gram.
Correct parameters.
Compare measurement values on info
screen.
Transpose current transformer connec-
tion.
Check polarity of transformer circuit.
Check circuit.
Check measurement points.
Table 39: Incorrect measured values
8.5 Parallel operation faults

Parallel operation cannot be "Parallel operation method" Set parallel operation method parameters.
activated. parameter deactivated.
▪ LED not lit up. CAN bus address of device Set CAN bus address (anything but 0).
set to "0".
Problem with CAN bus. Device incorrectly connected Check connections.
▪ Device not listed. (plug twisted, offset). Connect as shown in connection diagram.
Devices have the same CAN Set different CAN bus addresses.
bus addresses.
Table 40: Parallel operation faults
8.6 Tap position capture incorrect

Step display incorrect. Incorrect wiring. Check wiring.
▪ Plus or minus sign incor- Connect as shown in connection diagram.
rect Minimum value of analog in- Check parameters.
put signal not correctly para- Set "Analog Val. [%] Tap Pos. Min." pa-
meterized. rameter.

8 Fault elimination

Step display incorrect. Interference. Shield the line.
▪ Display fluctuates. Increase distance from source of interfer-
ence.
Lay interference lines separately.
Route signal in separate lines (filter,
shielded lines).
No step display. No measurement signal. Connect signal as shown in connection di-
▪ "-" is displayed. No L- for digital input. agram.
Check wiring.
Display MIO card status.
Display PIO card status.
Connect as shown in connection diagram.
No step display. Bit combination (code) im- Check wiring.
▪ "?" is displayed. permissible. MIO card status.
"Motor running" signal pres- Check signal sequence
ent. Display MIO card status.
Table 41: Tap position capture
8.7 Customized GPIs/GPOs

Function expected from the Parameterization has been Check active parameters
factory setting does not take overwritten manually or via
place TAPCON®-trol.
Signal discontinuous. Intermittent DC voltage. Check source of DC voltage.
Check signal transmitter.
Check wiring.
No signal Supply voltage too low Reset parameters to factory settings.
Info screens "Bandwidth!,
"Delay time T1", "Control re-
sponse T1", "Delay time T2"
display 0.
Table 42: Fault elimination: GPIs and GPOs
8.8 General faults

No function No power supply Check the power supply
▪ Operating status LED Fuse tripped Contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen
does not illuminate GmbH
Relays chatter Supply voltage too low Check the supply voltage

8 Fault elimination

High EMC load Use shielded cables or external filters
Poor grounding Check the functional ground
Table 43: General faults
8.9 Other faults

If you cannot resolve a problem, please contact Maschinenfabrik Reinhau-
sen. Please have the following data on hand:
▪ Serial number
– Name plate (Outer right side when viewed from the front [► 20])
– Info screen ( > Info)
Please provide answers to the following questions:

▪ Has a firmware update been carried out?
▪ Has there previously been a problem with this device?
▪ Have you previously contacted Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen about this
issue? If yes, then who was the contact?

9 Messages
9 Messages
No. Event (yel- Event message Remark
low/red)
3 Red Undervoltage Message is displayed in the event of undervoltage.
Set the Undervoltage U< [► 78] parameter.
4 Red Overvoltage Message is displayed in the event of overvoltage.
Set the Overvoltage U> [► 80] parameter.
5 Red Overcurrent Message is displayed in the event of overcurrent.
Set the Overcurrent I> [► 82] parameter.
6 Red Parallel operation error: Dif- Message is displayed if different parallel operation
ferent parallel operation methods are set for 2 or more devices in the same
methods parallel operation group. Set the Parallel operation
method parameter.
7 Yellow Motor protection device Triggered by the motor protective switch input.
9 Yellow Undercurrent Message is displayed in the event of undercurrent.
Set the Undercurrent I< [► 83] parameter.
11 Red Error when setting user in- At least 2 user inputs are parameterized to the
puts (duplicate assignment) same function. Message is displayed after the 2nd
parameter has been confirmed with .
12 Yellow Function monitoring (voltage Message is displayed if the voltage has not been
not adjusted within set time) adjusted within the set time (presetting: 15 mi-
nutes).
13 Yellow Motor-drive unit runtime Message is displayed if the set motor runtime is ex-
monitoring ceeded. Setting motor runtime monitoring [► 65]
parameters.
14 Red Analog input value too high. Message is displayed when the maximum permissi-
Check your connection to ble current of 20 mA is exceeded for connection
terminal X7! X7.
15 Yellow Negative analog input value Message is displayed in the event of reverse polari-
Check your connection to ty or if X7 connection is incorrectly connected.
terminal X7!
16 Red Parameter reloaded! Confirm Message is displayed if the current set of parame-
with F3 & Enter ters is corrupt or damaged and the system has
therefore switched to the standard set of parame-
ters.
17 Yellow Check sliding contact. Message is displayed if the resistor contact series
is incorrectly connected or has a loose contact.
18 Yellow No other CAN bus partici- Message is displayed if parallel operation has been
pants present set but there is not a device in the same parallel op-
eration group or the CAN bus is actually interrupt-
ed.
19 Red Parallel operation error: Cir- Message is displayed if the parallel operation meth-
culating reactive current od is using circulating reactive current or master/
blocking limit exceeded follower and the blocking limit is activated. The cir-
culating reactive current limit must also be exceed-
ed.

9 Messages

low/red)
20 Red Parallel operation error: Inva- Message is displayed if a tap position on a parallel
lid tap position present on voltage regulator is invalid.
parallel regulators
21 Red Parallel operation error: Tap Message is displayed on master if a follower still
difference to follower has the same tap position as the master after the
set delay time. Set delay time T1. [► 75] parame-
ter.
22 Red Parallel operation error: Per- Message is displayed on follower if a follower is still
mitted tap difference to mas- not within the permitted tap difference to the mas-
ter exceeded ter's tap position after the set delay time.
23 Red Parallel operation error: Message is displayed if several regulators in a par-
Number of masters on CAN allel operation group have been set as the master.
bus >1
24 Red Parallel operation error: No Message is displayed if no device has been set as
master present or master tap the master or the master is reporting an invalid tap
position invalid position.
25 Red Parallel operation error: CAN Message is displayed if the set CAN address is al-
bus address selected already ready in use.
in use
26 Red Parallel operation error: Cir- Message is displayed if the current measurement
culating reactive current in- for at least one device is invalid and the circulating
valid reactive current to be calculated is therefore invalid
when the "Circulating reactive current" parallel op-
eration method is active.
27 Red Parallel operation error: Message is displayed if blocking is initiated by an-
Blocking initiated by other other device.
regulator
28 Red Parallel operation error: No Message is displayed if there are no more devices
other regulators in parallel in the parallel operation group.
operation group
30 Red Blocking: Signal at blocking Message is displayed if there is a signal at the set
user input "Automatic regulation blocked" (blocking) user in-
put.
31 Red Blocking: Negative active Message is displayed if the active power is nega-
power tive and blocking is activated for negative active
power.
32 Red Blocking: User input Message is displayed if there is a signal at the set
Lower tap-change blocking "Raise pulse blocked" (Blk U raise) user input.
33 Red Blocking: Signal at block Message is displayed if there is a signal at the set
raise user input "Lower pulse blocked" user input.
34 Red Blocking: Lower blocked be- Message is displayed if lower is blocked because
cause tap position limit the corresponding tap position limit has been
reached or exceeded reached or exceeded.
35 Red Blocking: Raise blocked be- Message is displayed if raise is blocked because
cause tap position limit the corresponding tap position limit has been
reached or exceeded reached or exceeded.

9 Messages

low/red)
36 Yellow Tap position limit reached or Message is displayed if the set tap position limit
exceeded has been reached or exceeded.
37 Yellow Negative active power Message is displayed if the active power is nega-
tive.
38 Yellow No connection to communi- Message is displayed if communication to the com-
cation interface card munication interface card IEC 61850 card is not
possible.
Table 44: Event message

10 Disposal
10 Disposal
The device was produced in accordance with European Community Direc-
tive 2011/65/EC (RoHS) and must be disposed of accordingly. If the device
is not operated within the European Union, the national disposal require-
ments applicable in the country of use should be observed.

11 Overview of parameters
This section contains an overview of the relevant menus and parameters.
Parameter Setting range Factory setting Current setting
NORMset
Normset activation On/Off Off
Desired value 1 49...140 V 100 V
Primary voltage 0...9999 kV 0 kV
Secondary voltage 57...123 V 100 V
Control parameters > Voltage regulation
Desired value 1 49...140 V 100.0 V
Desired value 2 49...140 V 100.0 V
Desired value 3 49...140 V 100.0%
Desired value selection Desired value 1; De- Desired value 1
sired value 2; Desired
value 3
Bandwidth 0.5...9% 2.00%
Delay time T1 0...600 s 40 s
Control response T1 T1 linear/T1 integral T1 linear
Activation T2 T2 on/T2 off T2 off
Delay time T2 1...10 s 10.0 s
Control parameters > Limit values
Undervoltage U< [%] 60...100% 90%
Delay time U< 0...20 s 10.0 s
Undervolt. blocking U< On/Off On
U< below 30 V On/Off Off
Overvoltage U> [%] 100...140% 110%
Overvolt. blocking U> On/Off Off
Overcurrent I> [%] 50...210% 110%
Overcurr. blocking I>. On/Off On
Undercurrent I< [%] 0...210% 0%
Undercurr. blocking I< On/Off Off
Neg. active power block. On/Off Off
Control parameters > Compensation
Compensation method LDC/Z LDC
Line drop compensation Ur -25...25 V 0.0 V
Line drop compensation Ux -25...25 V 0.0 V
Z compensation 0...15% 0.0%
Z comp. limit value 0...15% 0.0%
Configuration > Transformer data
Primary voltage 0...9999 kV 0 kV
Secondary voltage 57...123 V 100.0 V


Primary current 0...10000 A 0a
Current transformer connec- Unknown; 1 A; 5 A Unknown
tion
Transformer circuit See [► 94] 0 1PH
Display kV / V kV/V V
Display %/A %/A %
Configuration > General
Language See [► 48] German
Regulator ID - 0000
Baud rate 9.6 kilobaud; 19.2 kilo- 57.6 kilobaud
baud; 38.4 kilobaud;
57.6 kilobaud
R/L pulse duration 0...10 s 1.5 s
Operations counter 0...99999999 0
Display dimming On/Off On
Key lock On/Off On
Function monitoring On/Off Off
Delay function monitoring 0...120 min 15 min
Motor runtime 0...30 s 0.0 s
Manual/Automatic Manual/Auto Manual
Local/Remote Local/Remote Local
Configuration > Parallel operation
Parallel operation activation On/Off On
Parallel operation method Circulating reactive Circulating reactive
current; Master; Fol- current
lower; Auto synchroni-
zation
Parallel operation group None; Group 1; None
Group 2; Group 1 and
Group 2
CAN address 0...16 0
Simplex mode blocking. On/Off On
Circulating reactive current 0...100% 0.0%
sensitivity
Circulating reactive current 0.5...40% 20.0%
blocking
Master/follower current Blocking/Off Blocking
blocking
Parallel error delay 1...999 s 10 s
Follower tapping direction Standard/Swapped Standard
Max. tap difference 1...4 1
Follower tapping without On/Off Off
Umeas


Configuration > User In/Outputs
GPI 1 – X4:13 See [► 112] Off
GPI 2 – X4:14 Off
GPI 3 – X4:15 Off
GPI 4 – X4:16 Quick Tap
GPI 5 – X4:17 Desired value 2
GPI 6 – X4:18 Desired value 3
GPI 7 – X6:1 ParGroup1
GPI 8 – X6:2 ParGroup2
GPO 1 – X4:9 Off
GPO 2 – X4:12 Off
GPO 3 – X5:9 ParState
GPO 4 – X5:12 ParError
GPO 5 – X5:18 Undervoltage
GPO 6 – X5:21 Overvoltage
GPO 7 – X5:24 Overcurrent
Configuration > LED selection
LED1 See [► 116] GPI 1
LED2 GPI 2
LED 3 yellow Off
LED 3 green Off
LED 4 yellow Off
LED 4 red Off
Configuration - Tap position options
Tap pos. capture See [► 106] Off
Analog Val. [%] Tap pos. min 0...100% 0.0%
Analog Val. [%] Tap pos. 0...100% 100.0%
max.
Lowest tap position -40...40 0
Highest tap position -40...40 19
Lower tap position blocking -128...128 0
Upper tap position blocking -128...128 40
Tap position limits blocking Off; Directional; Non- Off
behavior directional
Configuration > Remote Volt. Level Setting.
Setting the desired voltage Off; 0/4...20 mA; po- Off
level remotely tentiometer series
Analog value desired value 0...100% 0.0 5
min
Analog value desired value 0...100% 100.0%
max


Minimum desired value 0...140 V 80.0 V
Maximum desired value 0...140 V 140.0 V
Info
Info
Measured values
Calculated values
LED test
MIO card digital inputs
MIO card digital outputs
PIO card digital inputs
PIO card digital outputs
PIO X7 analog input
Parallel operation
Data on CAN bus
Peak memory
Default parameter
Memory overview
Event memory
Table 45: Overview of parameters

12 Technical data
12 Technical data
12.1 Display elements

Display LCD, monochrome, graphics-capa-
ble
128 x 128 pixels
LEDs 15 LEDs for operation display and
messages of which 4 LEDs are
freely programmable (2x yellow, 1x
yellow/green, 1x yellow/red)
Table 46: Display elements
12.2 Electrical data

Power supply 110 (-20%)...350 VDC
88...265 VAC
Power consumption 12.5 VA
Table 47: Electrical data
12.3 Dimensions and weight

Housing (W x H x D) 198 x 310 x 135.5 mm
Door (W x H) 244 x 342 mm
Weight 6.8 kg
Table 48: Dimensions and weight

12 Technical data
Figure 72: Front view and side view
Figure 73: View from above with installed door

12 Technical data
Figure 74: View from below without door
12.4 Ambient conditions

Operating temperature -25°C...+70°C
Storage temperature -40°C...+85°C
Table 49: Ambient conditions
12.5 Electrical safety

EN 61010-1 Safety requirements for electrical
measurement and control and reg-
ulation equipment and laboratory
instruments
IEC 61131-2 Dielectric test with operating fre-
quency
350 V AC...5870 V AC (depending
on the operating voltage of the
power circuit)
IEC 60255 Dielectric test with impulse voltage
5 kV, 1.2/50 μs
VDE 0435 Short-time current and long-term
load capacity of current transformer
inputs
▪ 100 x ln/1 s
▪ 2 x In/ continuous
Table 50: Electrical safety
12.6 Electromagnetic compatibility

IEC 61000-4-2 Electrostatic discharges (ESD)
8 kV/15 kV
IEC 61000-4-3 Electromagnetic fields (HF) 20 V/m
80...3000 MHz

12 Technical data
IEC 61000-4-4 Fast transients (burst) 6.5 kV

IEC 61000-4-5 Surge transient immunity 2 kV (out-
er conductor/outer conductor), 4 kV
(outer conductor/ground)
IEC 61000-4-6 HF interference immunity (lines)
10 V, 150 kHz...80 MHz
IEC 61000-4-8 Power frequency magnetic field im-
munity 1000 A/m
IEC 61000-6-2 Immunity requirements for industri-
al environments
IEC 61000-6-4 Emission standard for industrial en-
vironments
Table 51: Electromagnetic compatibility
12.7 Environmental durability tests

DIN EN 60529 Determination of protection class
for "protection against contact, in-
gress of foreign objects and water
for electrical equipment" Level IP54
IEC 60068-2-1 Dry cold - 25 °C / 16 hours
IEC 60068-2-2 Dry heat + 70 °C / 16 hours
IEC 60068-2-3 Constant moist heat + 40 °C /
93% / 21 days
IEC 60068-2-30 Cyclic moist heat (12 + 12 hours)
+ 55 °C / 93% and + 25 °C / 95% /
6 cycles
Table 52: Environmental durability tests
12.8 Mechanical stability

IEC 60068-2-31 Drop and topple, unpacked 100
mm fall height
IEC 60068-2-32 Free fall, unpacked 250 mm fall
height
IEC 255-21-1 Class 1 Bounce test
IEC 255-21-2 Class 1 Shock and bump test
IEC 255-21-3 Class 1 Seismic test
Table 53: Mechanical stability

Glossary
Glossary
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility
GPI
General Purpose Input
GPO
General Purpose Output
LDC
Line drop compensation
LED
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
MR
Abbreviation for "Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen
GmbH"
R/L
Raise/lower

List of key words
List of key words

A E I
Analog value [%] Tap pos. max Electromagnetic compatibility 39 Indicator elements
108 Indicator elements 22
Analog value [%] Tap pos. min LED 22
107
F Info 118
Auxiliary supply 44 Factory setting 124, 135 Information 118
Fiber-optic cable
Information about laying 38
B flush panel mounting 32 K
Bandwidth 73 Follower Key lock 59
Calculation 74 without measured voltage 105 automatic 63
Visual display 75 Follower tapping direction 102
Baud rate 60 Follower tapping without Umeas
105
L
Function monitoring Language 48
C Delay time 64 LED selection 116
Cable recommendation 38 Suppress message 64 Limit value
Calculated values 120 Function test Limit value monitoring 77
CAN bus 98 Additional functions 51 Overvoltage V> 80
Data 123 Circulating reactive current Undervoltage U< 78
Cap rail clip 34 blocking 55 Line drop compensation
Circulating reactive current 99 Circulating reactive current Inductive voltage drop 89
Blocking 100 sensitivity 54 Ohmic voltage drop 88
Master/Follower current block- Control functions 50 Line drop compensation 86
ing 103 Desired value 2 52 Lowest tap position 107
Sensitivity 100 Desired value 3 52 lowest tap position blocking limit
COM1 setting 60 Line drop compensation 53 84
Compensation 86 Overvoltage U> 52
Z compensation 89 Parallel operation 54
Connection 37 Tap synchronization 56
M
Contrast 47 Undervoltage U< 51 Measured values 119
Control parameter Z compensation 53 Memory overview 125
Desired value 72 Function tests 49 Motor runtime 65
control parameters 70 LDC 53 Output relay 65
Control response T1 76
G N
D GPI 112 Neg. active power flow 84
Delay time T1 75 NORMset 68
Delay time T2 76
Activating 77 H
Deactivating 77 Highest tap position 108
Delivery 14 highest tap position blocking limit
Desired value 69 85
Desired value 72 High-speed return 80, 82
Device ID 59
Display contrast 47
Display dimming 63

List of key words
O T
Operating controls 20 Tap difference
Operating mode follower 104
Auto mode 17 master 104
Local mode 17 Tap pos. blocking mode 85
Manual mode 17 Tap position blocking mode 85
Remote mode 17 tap position blocking unit
operation mode highest 85
Local 67 lowest 84
Manual 67 tap position capture
Remote 67 analog 107
Operations counter 62 Digital 106
Overcurrent blocking 82 Tapping direction 102
overcurrent I> 82 Throughput capacity 98
relative 82 Transformer
Overview of parameters 135 Primary current 93
Overvoltage U> Transformer data 91
Relative 81 Current transformer connection
Overvoltage V> 80 94
Primary voltage 92
Secondary voltage 93
P Transformer circuit 94
Parallel operation 98
Activate 105
CAN bus 98 U
Circulating reactive current 99 Undercurrent I< 83
Deactivate 105 undervoltage 79
Parallel operation error mes- Undervoltage monitoring
sage 104 relative 79
parallel operation group 103
Parallel operation method 99
tap difference 104
V
Parameter V< also below 30 V 80
Bandwidth 73 V< blocking 79
High-speed return 82 V< delay 79
Overcurrent blocking 82
Peak memory 123
Phase difference 94
W
Primary voltage 69 Wall mounting 33, 35
Wiring 45
R
Raise/Lower pulse duration 60
Z
Regulator ID 59 Z compensation 89
Reset parameters 124 Activate 90
Limit value 91
S
Secondary voltage 69
Short-circuit capacity 98
Simplex mode blocking 104

MR worldwide
Australia Malaysia
Fax: +61 2 9502 2224 Phone: +60 3 2142 6481
Brazil
Fax: +55 11 4785 2185 邮编： 200120
传真：＋ 86 21 61634582
Phone: +1 514 370 5377 OOO MR
105005 Moscow
India Phone: +7 495 980 89 67
Johannesburg
Seoul 110-702
Iran Phone: +82 2 767 4909
Via Alserio, 16 Fax: +1 731 784 7682
Phone: +39 02 6943471
Yokohama 226-0006
Phone: +81 45 929 5728
Fax: +81 45 929 5741
Luxembourg
72, Rue de Prés
L-7333 Steinsel
Phone: +352 27 3347 1
Fax: +352 27 3347 99

3550953/00 EN ▪ 02/14 ▪
9.7 Control Cabinet (ELECTRICAL MONITORING)

Page / Version Date
Sheet No.
drawing:
Manufacturer: Northeast power transmitting and
transforming equipment group company
Type: V 04 17 778-01
The control cabinet is installed vibration-protected at the tank and contains the following
equipment:
1. Voltage supply
2. Cooling control
3. Terminal blocks and cable screws
4. Warning and trigger contacts
Heating elements, lighting and sockets for 230V, 1-phase are installed.
The cabinet is of protection class IP 55.
DANGER
1. Power down
ATTENTION
If the control cabinet is out of operation or stored for any extended period, the provisions
pursuant to chapter 4.8.3, long-term storage for accessories, must be observed.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
9.8 Bushings
Page / Version Date
Sheet No.
Bushing type EPOXY RESIN IMPREGNATED PAPER
CONDENSER TRANSFORMER BUSHING
Designation (U,.V, W): HV-A,B,C
drawing:
Manufacturer: Trench High voltage products Ltd.,shenyang
Type: ETA-170/630-4
Operating instructions: Operating instruction for Epoxy Resin
Impregnated paper condenser transformer /Air
bushing
Bushing type Oil immersed transformer bushing

Designation (U,.V, W): LV-a,b,c
drawing:
Manufacturer: Nanjingzhida
Type: BFW-40.5/1250-4M
Operating instructions: Operation instruction for oil impregnated
flange tye transformer bushing

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
9.9 Current transformer

Page / Version Date
Sheet No.
Position in the dimension /
drawing:
Manufacturer: Nanjingzhida
Type: LR
Operation instruction Operation instruction for bushing current
transformer
ATTENTION
If measuring or protective devices are not connected, the secondary clamps of the
transformer must be short-circuited and earthed.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Bushing Current Transformer
Operation Instruction

Nanjing Zhida Electric Co.,Ltd

Tel: 025-85565389 Fax: 85575112
1. General Information
1.1 Our product is bushing type current transformer.Current transformers are used
extensively for measuring current and monitoring the operation of the power grid.
1.2 Explanation of type
L R (B) -( )
Voltage rating(Kv)
B:protective use;without:measuring use
Bushing type
Current transformer
2. Technical data and specifications
2.1 Rated primary current scope
50，75，100，125，150，200，250，300，400，500，600，750，800，1000，
1200，1250，1500，1600，2000，2400，2500，3000，3500，4000，5000，6000，
7000，8000，9000，10000，12000，15000，20000A etc.
2.2 Rated secondary current: 1A, 5A etc
2.3 Error limit of measuring current transformer
2.3.1 For current transformer of Class 0.2~Class1.0, when the rated secondary
burden is of any value among 25%~100% burden rating, the current error and
phase error at rated frequency 50Hz can’t exceed the referred values in Table 1.
Table 1
Current error ±% Phase error ±%
Accuracy （at following rated current percent values）（at following rated current percent values）
5 20 100 120 5 20 100 120
0.2 0.75 0.35 0.2 0.2 30 15 10 10
0.5 1.5 0.75 0.5 0.5 90 45 30 30
1 3.0 1.5 1.0 1.0 180 90 60 60
2.3.2 For current transformer of Class 0.2S~Class0.5S, when the rated secondary
burden is of any value among 25%~100% burden rating, the current error and
phase error at rated frequency 50Hz can’t exceed the referred values in Table 2.
Table 2
Current error ±% Phase error ±%
Accuracy （at following rated current percent values） (at following rated current percent values)
1 5 20 100 120 1 5 20 100 120
0.2S 0.75 0.35 0.2 0.2 0.2 30 15 10 10 10
0.5S 1.5 0.75 0.5 0.5 0.5 90 45 30 30 30
2.3.3 For current transformer of Class 3.0~Class 5.0, when the rated secondary
burden is of any value among 50%~100% burden rating, the current error at rated
frequency 50Hz can’t exceed the referred values in Table 3.
Table 3
Current error ±%
Accuracy (at following rated current percent values)
50 120
3 3 3
5 5 5
Note: No requirement is specified on the phase error at Class 3 and Class 5.
2.4 Error limit of protective current transformer
Current error, phase error and composite error at rated frequency 50Hz and rated
burden can’t exceed the referred values in Table 4.
Table 4
Current error ±% Phase error composite error %
Accuracy （at rated primary （at rated primary current）（at rated primary
current） ±（’） ±（crad） current）
5P 1 60 1.8 5
10P 3 — — 10
2.5 Rated frequency withstand voltage: 3kV, 1 min.
3. Operation Instruction
3.1 Bushing type current transformer is consisted of ring core, magnet wire and
other insulation materials. The secondary windings can be single ratio or multi ratios.
3.2 Bushing type current transformer is used to assemble in transformer turrets.
3.3 When the nameplate is upward, the tope part is P1.Polarity: Subtractive.
3.4.The bushing type current transformer should not open circuit when operating
and you shuold put the terminal to short circuit or else it will cause high voltage.
4. Cautions
4.1 Handle with care to avoid striking in transportation and assembly process.Protect
against rain and moisture.
4.2 Storage at dry house to avoid moisture and corrosion.
9.10 Cooling Control

Page / Version Date
Sheet No.
Radiators
drawing:
Manufacturer: Shenyang tiantong
Type: PC2100-19/520
Assembly and operating Directions for finned radiator for
instructions: transformer
WARNING
Before connection or manipulation at the contacts (terminals), verify voltage freeness on
all sides and all pins

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
9.11 Buchholz Relay (OIL MONITORING)

Page / Version Date
Sheet No.
drawing:
Manufacturer: EMB
Type: BF80/10/8
Operating instructions: Operating instructions for
Transformer protection Relay
Gas Sampler
drawing:
Manufacturer: EMB
Type: ZG 1.2.
Operating instructions: Operating instructions for Gas
Sampler
ATTENTION
For the contact types of the protective and monitoring devices, please see the circuit
diagram.
WARNING
For inspection of the Buchholz relay, you may require access to areas of the transformer
that pose a danger of falling (use of ladders or other aids).
Such work must only be performed by accordingly trained persons.
Before connection or manipulation at the contacts, verify voltage freeness on all sides
and all pins.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Elektromotoren und
Gerätebau Barleben GmbH
Transformer Protection Relays

(Buchholz Principle)
Elektromotoren und Gerätebau Barleben GmbH
Table of contents
page
Company history 4
1 Preface 5
2 Design features 6
3 Function 8
3.1 Gas accumulation 8
3.2 Insulating liquid loss 9
3.3 Insulating liquid flow 9
4 Tests 10
5 Type list of single-float Buchholz relays 11

5.1 Single-float Buchholz relays with threaded connection 11
5.2 Single-float Buchholz relays with flanged connection 11
5.3 Single-float Buchholz relays with flat flanged connection 12
6 Switching system design options for single-float Buchholz relays 13
7 Type list of double-float Buchholz relays 14

7.1 Double-float Buchholz relays with threaded connection 14
7.2 Double-float Buchholz relays with flanged connection (round) 15
7.3 Double-float Buchholz relays with flat flanged connection (round) 17
7.4 Double-float Buchholz relays with flanged connection (square) 18
7.5 Double-float Buchholz relays with geometrical flange dimensions
according to Chinese norm 18
according to former French norm 19
according to former British standard 20
8 Switching system design options for double-float Buchholz relays 21
2
page
9 Technical data 26
10 Options/Special designs 27
10.1 Explanations to code 17 A 29
10.2 Explanations to codes 23 and 24 29
10.3 Explanations to code 32 30
11 Explanations to code 60 - Buchholz relay NM series 31

11.1 Design features of Buchholz relay NM series 31
11.2 Extra function of Buchholz relay NM series 31
11.3 Analogue measuring unit - Analogue measurement of gas volume 32
12 Ordering data/Type code 33

12.1 Single-float Buchholz relays 33
12.2 Double-float Buchholz relays 34
12.3 Ordering example 35
13 Additional devices for Buchholz relays 36

13.1 Gas sampling device ZG 1.2. 36
13.2 Other additional devices for Buchholz relays 39
14 Other protection devices 41
15 Breathing Buffer Box 43
3
Company history
Since its foundation the company has passed through an eventful history with regard to ownership,
affiliation and change of name associated with such development.
1863 Foundation of the company as sugar factory

1921 Development of Buchholz relay by Max Buchholz
1943 Branch of SIEMENS Magdeburg
1948 VEB Elektromotorenwerk Barleben; VEM
(state-owned firm)
1951 VEB Starkstromanlagenbau Magdeburg
(state-owned firm)
1951 Start of manufacture of Buchholz relays in Barleben
1965 Start of manufacture of monitoring relays for tap changers in Barleben
1970 VEB Elektrotechnik und Gerätebau Magdeburg; EGEM
(state-owned firm)
1980 VEB Kombinat Elektromaschinenbau Dresden
VEB Elektromotorenwerk Barleben; VEM; ELMO
(state-owned firm)
1990 VEM Antriebstechnik AG Dresden
Elektromotorenwerk Barleben GmbH; VEM; ELMO
(public limited company)
1993 Elektromotoren und Gerätebau Barleben GmbH; EMB
(privately owned company)
2005 Start of manufacture of Buchholz relays NM series
2009 New premises in Barleben
Figure 1 - EMB company building
4
1 Preface
More than 1.5 million relays
have been sold worldwide in 60 years!
The Buchholz relay was developed in 1921 by Max Buchholz, Oberrat (senior councillor) at Preu-
ßische Elektrizitäts-A.G. (Prussian electricity company) in Kassel. Since that time it has been an
important protection and monitoring device for insulating liquid filled transformers with conservator
and choke coils. It also allows separate monitoring of oil-filled bushings or cable terminal boxes. It is
mounted in the cooling cycle of the device to be protected and responds to faults such as gas gene-
ration, loss of as well as high flow rates of the insulating liquid.
For transformers with hermetical closure by means of a hydro-type compensator (rubber sack) in the
conservator, the Buchholz relay can be used also a monitoring device (air cell failure relay) of the
hydro-type compensator.
The Buchholz relay is suitable for open-air as well as indoor installations.
The type diversity of the Buchholz relay is tailored to norms and standards as well as to special
customer demands. The type of relay to be used depends on the nominal rating and construction
features of the device to be protected. Our range of products permits optimum adaptation to actual
requirements.
Elektromotoren und Gerätebau GmbH (EMB GmbH) provides more than 60 years experience in pro-
ducing Buchholz relays and other protective devices for liquid-cooled and liquid-insulated devices. It
ranks today among the most distinguished manufacturers of this type of equipment.
EMB Buchholz relays are in compliance with DIN EN 50216-2 and are known for their easy operati-
on, high reliability and extremely long life.
Our staff of highly qualified engineers and experienced skilled workers do their best to guarantee
top-quality high-precision products. The casings are machined on modern CNC-controlled machi-
nes. All products are subjected to final inspection when all functions are checked using special test
equipment.
Profound experience and expertise in this special area are a sound basis for high product quality.
Extensive references from reputed transformer manufacturers as well as other users are proof of the
high qualitative level of the products.
EMB has been certified according to: DIN EN ISO 9001/2008, AEO F, Known Consignor (Airfreight
Security) and EAC. Further certifications have been awarded by well-known independent test labo-
ratories such as TÜVRheinland and TZO.
Figure 2 - Certificates
5
2 Design features
Casing
The casing is made of weather-resistant cast aluminium alloy provided with a paint coat. It is sup-
plied either with flanged (Fig. 3/ Number 1) or screwed connection (Fig. 4/1). The different casing
designs available are shown in Section 5 for single-float Buchholz relays and Section 7 for double-
float Buchholz relays, others are available on request.
To check the switching system for proper function, the casing is provided with sightglasses (Fig. 4/2).
The sightglasses provided with scales permit reading of collected gas volume.
The relays can be provided with hinged lids (Fig. 3/2) to protect the sightglasses.
Figure 3 - Casing with flanged connection
Figure 4 - Casing with threaded connection
6
Cover
The cover is made of weather-resistant cast aluminium alloy provided with a paint coat.
The upper section of the cover accommodates the terminal box (Fig. 5 and 6/1). In front of the termi-
nal box are arranged the bleeding valve (Fig. 5 and 6/2) and the test key covered by a cap nut (Fig.
5 and 6/3) as well as a plate (Fig. 5 and 6/4) with instructions for actuating the test key. The terminal
box accommodates the earth terminal (Fig. 5 and 6/5) and bushings (Fig. 5 and 6/6) for the termi-
nals provided in the base of the cover. The number of these bushings determines the design of the
switching systems in terms of type and quantity of the magnet contact tubes.
The terminal box is sealed by an cap (Fig. 5 and 6/7) so that it is safe to touch and protected against
pollution. If the cap is opened the graphic symbol and the connection diagram (Fig. 5 and 6/8) are
shown. The cable can be inserted through the cable gland (Fig. 5 and 6/9).
5
9
6
1
3
2
Figure 5 - Cover with cap removed, Buchholz relay Figure 6 - Cover with cap removed, Buchholz relay
with five magnet contact tubes with up to four magnet contact tubes
7
3 Function
The Buchholz relay is installed in the pipe between the tank of the device to be protected (trans-
former, reactor) and the conservator. During normal operation it is filled completely with insulating
liquid.
Due to buoyancy the float of the single-float relay and both floats of the double-float relay are at their
top position.
The upper and lower switching systems form a functional unit in the single-float Buchholz relay so
that in the event of a fault the transformer is immediately disconnected from the power system.
In the following the function of a Buchholz relay is explained using the example of a double-float
Buchholz relay. If a fault occurs inside the transformer, the Buchholz relay responds as follows:
3.1 Gas accumulation (Figure 7)
Fault: Free gas is available in the insulating liquid.
Response: The gas in the liquid moves upwards, accumulates in the Buchholz relay and displaces
the insulating liquid level. As the liquid level falls, the upper float moves downwards.
The moving float actuates a switch contact (magnet contact tube). An alarm signal is tripped.
The lower float is not affected as from a certain gas volume the gas flows through a piping to the
conservator.
Gas
Gas
Oil
Öl
Figure 7 - Gas accumulation
8
3.2 Insulating liquid loss (Figure 8)
Fault: Insulating liquid loss due to leakage.
Response: As the liquid level falls the top float moves downwards. An alarm is tripped. If the liquid
loss continues, conservator and piping as well as the Buchholz relay will be emptied.
As the liquid level falls, the lower float moves downwards. The moving float actuates a switch contact
so that the transformer is disconnected.
Air
Luft
Oil
Öl
Figure 8 - Insulating liquid loss
3.3 Insulating liquid flow (Figure 9)
Fault: A spontaneous incident generates a pressure wave moving in the direction of the conservator.
Response: The liquid flow reaches the damper arranged in the liquid flow. If the flow rate exceeds
the operating value of the damper, the latter moves in flow direction.
Due to this movement a switch contact is actuated so that the transformer is disconnected.
After release of the pressure wave the lower switching system returns to its starting position.
Buchholz relays manufactured by EMB are equipped with a damper held by a permanent magnet.
Oil
Öl
Figure 9 - Insulating liquid flow
9
4 Tests
Each Buchholz relay is provided with a works-number that is specified on
the test certificate and the name plate. The tests carried out on the Buch-
holz relay are recorded in the test certificate.
- Dielectric strength test

- Leakage test
- Functional test
- Flow test.
Buchholz relays are delivered in cardboard boxes.

For each relay delivered the following documents
in the language agreed are provided:
- Operating instructions
- Test certificate.
Note: Flange gaskets are not included in the scope of delivery!
The name plate covers the following information:
date of manufacture
Type (week/year)
type code
works-no. switching IP code

6 digits element
S = normally-open
Ö = normally-closed
W = change-over
Figure 10 - Functional and leakage test Figure 11 - Flow test
10
5 Type list of single-float Buchholz relays
5.1 Single-float Buchholz relays with threaded connection
Pipe Weight
Type Flange dimensions Device dimensions Suited for
diameter without
Internal description Type of connection (mm) (mm) transformer
DN (mm) packing
DIN description ratings of
d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 f l h1 h2 (kg)
01 Threaded
(AG 25) connection 25 - - - - 16 185 170 62 3,1 ≤1600 KVA
(CG 25) G 1½ “
Figure 12 - Dimensional drawing, type 01
5.2 Single-float Buchholz relays with flanged connection

Pipe
Flange dimensions Device dimensions Weight
Type diameter Suited for
(mm) (mm) without
Internal description Type of connection DN (mm) transformer
packing
d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 f l h1 h2 (kg)
02
Flange
(AF 25/6) 4-hole 25 100 75 60 12 12 185 195 62 3,6 ≤1600 KVA
(-)
03
Flange
(AF 25/10) 4-hole 25 115 85 68 14 16 200 205 62 4,0 ≤1600 KVA
(-)
25
Flange
(AF 25) 4-hole 25 100 75 - 12 15 160 195 62 3,3 ≤1600 KVA
(-)
Figure 13 - Dimensional drawing, type 02, 03
11
5.3 Single-float Buchholz relays with flat flanged connection
Pipe
(mm) (mm) without
packing
d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 f l h1 h2 (kg)
30
Flange
(AF 25/10 G) 4-hole 25 115 85 - 14 16 200 205 62 4 ≤1600 KVA
(-)
170
80
h1
h2
R8
0
d5
f d1
l
d3
d2
12
6 Switching system design options for single-float Buchholz relays
Magnet contact tubes are used as switching elements. These are normally-open (NO), normally-
closed (NC) and change-over (CO) contacts. The magnet contact tube design can be derived from
the last digit of the type code. For coding, see Ordering data/Type code under Section 12.1.
...1 ...2 ...3 ...4 ...5 ...6

1 NO and
1 NO 1 NC 2 NO 2 NC 1 CO
1 NC
13 11 13 23 11 21 13 11 1
14 12 14 24 12 22 14 12 2 4
...7 ...8 ...9

2 CO 1 NO and 1 CO 1 NC and 1 CO
21 11 23 11 21 11
22 24 12 14 24 12 14 22 12 14
Explanation of symbols: Example: coding „ ... 6 “

Magnet contact tube(s) design
1
Graphic symbol with terminal marking

1 CO
2 4
Connection diagram in terminal box
The inner side of the cap accommodates a plate with the graphic symbol and the connection
diagram. The schemes show the switching systems in their neutral position. The neutral po-
sition is the operating condition when the Buchholz relay is filled with insulating liquid up the
required level and the device to be protected operates without any fault.
13
7 Type list of double-float Buchholz relays

7.1 Double-float Buchholz relays with threaded connection
Pipe
(mm) (mm) without
packing
d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 f l h1 h2 (kg)
04 Threaded
(BG 25) connection 25 - - - - 16 185 235 90 4,2 ≤5000 KVA
(DG 25) G 1½ “
21 Threaded
(BG 25 S) connection 25 - - - - 16 185 235 90 3,6 ≤5000 KVA
(-) G 1½ “
14
7.2 Double-float Buchholz relays with flanged connection (round)
Pipe
(mm) (mm) without
packing
d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 f l h1 h2 (kg)
05
Flange
(BF 25/6) 4-hole 25 100 75 60 12 12 185 235 90 4,4 ≤5000 KVA
(-)
06
Flange
(BF 25/10) 4-hole 25 115 85 68 14 18 200 235 90 4,8 ≤5000 KVA
(DR 25)
07
Flange ≥5000 KVA
(BF 50/6) 4-hole 50 140 110 90 14 12 185 235 80 4,6
≤10000 KVA
(-)
08
Flange ≥5000 KVA
(BF 50/10) 4-hole 50 165 125 102 18 16 195 250 80 5,9
≤10000 KVA
(DR 50)
09
Flange
(BF 80/10) 4-hole 80 200 160 138 18 15 195 265 80 6,2 ≥10000 KVA
(-)
24
Flange
(BF 80/6) 4-hole 80 190 150 130 18 15 195 260 80 6,0 ≥10000 KVA
(-)
Figure 18 - Dimensional drawing, type 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 24
15
Pipe Weight
diameter without
DN (mm) packing
d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 f l h1 h2 (kg)
23
Flange
(BF 25/10 S) 4-hole 25 115 85 68 14 18 200 235 90 4,4 ≤5000 KVA
(-)
Pipe Weight
diameter without
DN (mm) packing
d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 f l h1 h2 (kg)
26
Flange 18
(BF80/10/8) 8-hole 80 200 160 138
M16
15 195 265 80 6,2 ≥10000 KVA
(DR 80)
16
7.3 Double-float Buchholz relays with flat flanged connection (round)
Pipe
(mm) (mm) without
packing
d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 f l h1 h2 (kg)
28
Flange
(BF 80/10 G) 4-hole 80 200 160 - 18 18 195 265 80 6,2 ≤10000 KVA
(-)
31
Flange
(BF 25/10 G) 4-hole 25 115 85 - 14 20 200 235 90 4,8 ≤5000 KVA
(DR 25)
170
80
h1
d5
h2
R1
43
f d1
l d3
d2
Pipe
(mm) (mm) without
packing
d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 f l h1 h2 (kg)
27
Flange
(BF 80/10/8 G) 8-hole 80 200 160 - 18 18 195 265 80 6,2 ≤10000 KVA
(DR 80
170
80
M16
d5
h1
R
h2
14
3
f d1
l d3
d2
17
7.4 Double-float Buchholz relays with flanged connection (square)

Pipe Weight
diameter without
DN (mm) packing
d1 b d3 d4 d5 f l h1 h2 (kg)
10 Flange
(BF 80/Q) square 80 125 132 - 18 20 200 235 80 5,0 ≥10000 KVA
(DQ 80) 4-hole
170
80
250
300
h1
350
h2
3
cm
d3 R1
43
b
d5
d1
f
l
b

according to Chinese norm
Suitable for connection to Chinese butterfly valves (square flange). Other types on request.
Pipe Weight
diameter without
DN (mm) packing
d1 b d3 d4 d5 f l h1 h2 (kg)
62 Flange
≥5000 KVA
(BC 50) square 50 125 125 - 14 15 185 230 80 5,0
≤10000 KVA
(QJ 50) 4-hole
63 Flange
(BC 80) square 80 160 160 - 18 15 185 245 80 5,0 ≥10000 KVA
(QJ 80) 4-hole
170
80
250
300
350
h1
h2
R1
cm
3 43
d3
b
d5
f
d1
l
b

18
according to former French norm
Pipe Weight
Flange dimensions Device dimensions Suited for
Type diameter without
Type of connection (mm) (mm) transformer
Internal description DN (mm) packing
ratings of
d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 f l h1 h2 (kg)
41 Flange
(NF 25) 4-hole 25 115 85 - 14 8 240 235 90 4,2 ≤5000 KVA
42 Flange ≥5000 KVA

(NF 50) 4-hole 50 165 125 - 18 15 240 250 80 5,1
≤10000 KVA
43 Flange
(NF 80) 4-hole 80 200 160 - 18 15 240 265 80 5,5 ≥10000 KVA
Figure 25 - Dimensional drawing, type 41, 42, 43
19

according to former British standard
Pipe Weight
Flange dimensions Device dimensions Suited for
Type diameter without
Type of connection (mm, in) (mm) transformer
Internal description DN (mm) packing
ratings of
d1 b/d2 d3 d4 d5 f l h1 h2 (kg)
Flange
51 76 72 - M10 - 127 235 90
(BS 25)
square 25 2,99 2,83 - M10 - 5 9,25 3,54
3,7 ≤ 5000 KVA
4-hole
Flange
52 140 110 - 12 12 185 235 80 ≥5000 KVA
(BS 50)
round 50 5,51 4,33 - 0,47 0,47 7,28 9,25 3,15
4,8
≤10000 KVA
6-hole
Flange
53 160 130 - 12 13 185 240 80
(BS 80)
round 80 6,30 5,12 - 0,47 0,51 7,28 9,45 3,15
5,0 ≥10000 KVA
6-hole
150
80
250
300
h1
350
h2
90
3
°
cm
d5
b
d1
l d3
b
170
80
250
300
350
h1
h2
R1
cm
3
43
d5
f d1
l d3
d2
20
8 Switching system design options for double-float Buchholz relays
Magnet contact tubes are used as switching elements. These are normally-open (NO), normally-
closed (NC) and change-over (CO) contacts. The magnet contact tube design can be derived from
the last two digits of the type code. For coding, see Ordering data/Type code under Section 12.2.
...11 BS 25...11 ...12 ...13 ...14

Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm
1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO
13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14
Disconnection Disconnection Disconnectiong Disconnection Disconnection

1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 2 NO 2 NC
23 23 11 23 33 11 21
24 24 12 24 34 12 22
...15 ...16 ...17 ...19 ...21

1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NO 1 NC
13 23 13 13 11
14 24 14 14 12
Disconnection Disconnection Disconnection Disconnection Disconnection

1 NO and
1 CO 2 CO 3 NO 1 NO
1 NC
23 11 11 13
21 31 23 33 43
22 24 32 34 24 34 44
24 12 12 14 14
21
...22 ...23 ...24 ...25 ...26

1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC 1 NC
11 11 11 11 21
12 12 12 12 22

1 NO and
1 NC 2 NO 2 NC 1 CO
1 NC
21 13 23 21 31 13 21 11
22 14 24 22 32 14 22 12 14
...27 ...31 ...32 ...33 ...34

1 NC 1 CO 1 CO 1 CO 1 CO
11 21 21 21 21
12 22 24 22 24 22 24 22 24

2 CO 1 NO 1 NC 2 NO 2 NC
13 11 33 43 31 41
21 31
22 24 32 34
14 12 34 44 32 42
22
...35 ...36 ... 37 ...41 ...42
1 CO 1 CO 1 CO 2 NO 2 NO
21 21 21 13 23 13 23
22 24 22 24 22 24 14 24 14 24

1 NO and
1 CO 2 CO 1 NO 1 NC
1 NC
13 11 11 33 11
14 12 12 14 34 12
14 13 34 33
...43 ...44 ...45 ...46 ...49

13 23 13 23 13 23 23 33 13 23
14 24 14 24 14 24 24 34 14 24

1 NO and
2 NO 2 NC 1 CO 3 NO
1 NC
33 43 11 21 33 11 11
12 22 34 12 12 14
34 44
23
...51 ...52 ...53 ...54 ...55

1 NC and 1 NC and 1 NC and 1 NC and 1 NC and
11 13 11 13 11 13 11 13 11 13
12 14 12 14 12 14 12 14 12 14

1 NC and
1 NO 1 NC 2 NO 2 NC
1 NO
23 21 23 33 21 31 21 23
24 22 24 34 22 32 22 24
...56 ...77
Alarm Alarm
1 NC and
2 CO
1 NO
21 23
22 24
Disconnection Disconnection
1 CO 2 CO
11
12 14
24
Explanation of symbols: Example: coding „ ...1 2 “
Magnet contact tube(s) design
Upper switching system - Alarm
Lower switching system - Disconnection
13
Alarm
1 NO
14
Graphic symbol with terminal marking
11
Disconnection
1 NC
12
Connection diagram in terminal box
The inner side of the cap accommodates a plate with the graphic symbol and the connection
diagram. The schemes show the switching systems in their neutral position. The neutral po-
sition is the operating condition when the Buchholz relay is filled with insulating liquid up the
required level and the device to be protected operates without any fault.
25
9 Technical data
The technical data listed in table named below are applicable to all Buchholz relays in standard ver-
sion manufactured by EMB. EMB Buchholz relays are in compliance with DIN EN 50216-2.
Parameter Data Notes
Voltage AC 5 V - max. 250 V
DC 5 V - max. 250 V
Current AC 0.01 A - max. 6 A Cos φ > 0,5
DC 0.01 A - max. 6 A L/R < 40 ms
Switching capacity AC max. 1500 VA
DC max. 1250 W
Dielectric strength AC 2500 V Between electric circuit and earth
AC 2000 V (normally-open contact, Between open contacts
normally-closed contact)
AC 1000 V (change-over contact)
Temperature range:
- Ambient temperature - 40 °C to + 55 °C Climatic testing acc. to
- 40 °F to + 131 °F DIN EN 60068-2-78: 2002-09
- Operating range
* Temperature of the insulating liquid - 40 °C to + 115 °C Others on request
- 40 °F to + 239 °F
Till + 135 °C requires type code 21
* Viscosity of the insulating liquid 1 mm2/s to 1100 mm2/s

Insulating liquid Mineral oil Others on request
Resistance against vibration Vibration: 2-200 Hz, 1 g Acc. to class 4M6 following
Shock: 25 g, 6 ms DIN EN 60721-3-4
Resistance to pressure 0.25 MPa
Resistance to vacuum < 2.5 kPa
Insensitivity to magnetic fields 25 mT Static magnetic field of any
direction and polarity
Switching system:
- Number of switching contacts 1 More on request
- Switching element Magnet contact tube
- Damper Held by magnets
Response time of damper < 0.1 s

Response of switching system in
case of:
- Gas accumulation 200 cm3 to 300 cm3 Others on request
- Insulating liquid flow

Pipe diameter DN of Min. 0.65 to max. 3.00 m/s For possible data see Ordering
25 mm, 50 mm or 80 mm ± 15% data/Type code under Section 12
on pages 28 and 29.
Others on request
Cable gland M20x1.5; M25x1.5 Others on request
Nominal installation position 0° to 5° Ascending towards conservator
IP code IP 56 Others on request
Casing colour Two-component texture paint On polyurethane basis
Options available are specified in tables of Section 10. These special designs are coded using the
respective code when ordering Buchholz relays.
More options on request available.
26
10 Options/Special designs
Cable gland *
Explanation Code
M20x1,5: 1 cable gland and 1 dummy plug 1
M25x1,5: 1 cable gland and 1 dummy plug 2
M20x1,5: 2 cable glands 3
M20x1,5: 2 cable glands plus 1 additional dummy plug 3B
M25x1,5: 2 cable glands 4
M25x1,5: 2 cable glands plus 1 additional dummy plug 4B
M20x1,5: 1 Harting connector and 1 dummy plug 5
1/2“ NPT: 1 cable gland and 1 dummy plug 6
1/2“ NPT: 2 cable glands 7
Cable gland: Special request 9
Buchholz relay NM series
Buchholz relay with analogue measurement of the gas volume
(only double-float Buchholz relays, Note: Explanations to code 60) 60
Casing colour *
Casing colour RAL 9006 (white-aluminium) 40
Casing colour RAL 7001 (silver-grey) 41
Casing colour RAL 7012 (basalt-grey) 42
Casing colour RAL 7022 (umber-grey) 43
Casing colour RAL 7033 (cement-grey) 44
Casing colour RAL 7038 (agate-grey) 45
Casing colour RAL 7035 (light-grey) 46
Casing colour RAL 7016 (anthracite-grey) 47
Casing colour RAL 9002 (grey-white) 48
Casing colour RAL 7032 (siliceous-grey) 49
Climate-proof version/IP code
Climate-proof version for extreme frigid open-air conditions below - 40 °C 34
Climate-proof version for Offshore 36
Climate-proof version for aggressive industrial atmosphere 36B
IP code 66 39
Insulating liquid
Insulating liquid silicone oil 20
Insulating liquid based on ester 21
Casing
Metal plate 15
With oil drain plug (only double-float Buchholz relays) 28
With premounted Harting connector
(The option is indicated by a letter after the code.
For further information, please ask for special reference material.) 59
* Mandatory order data, for other mandatory data see Section 12.
27
Switching system
Upper switching system equipped with two magnet contact tubes 35
Lower switching system equipped with two magnet contact tubes 25
Upper and lower switching system each equipped with two magnet contact tubes 33
Lower switching system equipped with three magnet contact tubes 99
Upper switching system equipped with two magnet contact tubes,
Lower switching system equipped with three magnet contact tubes 55
Two-level gas alarm system (Note: Explanations to code 17A) 17A
Testing of the switching systems by means of compressed-air and test key
(only double-float Buchholz relays, Note: Explanations to code 32) 32
Damper held in response position (only double-float Buchholz relays,
Note: Explanations to codes 23 and 24) 23
Special design approved by RWE, Germany (only double-float Buchholz relays,
Note: Explanations to codes 23 and 24) 24
Special design approved by E.ON, Germany (only double-float Buchholz relays,
Note: Explanations to codes 23 and 24) 24B
Solid floats (Insulating liquid flow max. 1,50 m/s ± 15%) 16
Alarm for gas accumulation between 250 and 300 cm³ 18
Special request
Special request (on special agreement with customer) 29
For engineering reasons the following special designs cannot be combined in the same device:
Code combination Code combination Code combination

60 - 32 32 - 17A 35 - 23, 24, 24B
60 - 34 32 - 23, 24, 24B
32 - 55 55 - 23, 24, 24B
32 - 99
99 - 23, 24, 24B
28
10.1 Explanations to code 17 A
Gases formed in the transformer rise to the conservator. In this way gases are collected in the Buch-
holz relay. When a certain volume is reached, the gases generate an alarm signal.
With the two-level alarm system the initial alarm signal is generated at a gas volume of 100-200 cm³,
and the second alarm signal at a gas volume of 250-300 cm³. This special design allows a gas sam-
ple to be taken for fault analysis already when the initial warning signal is received.
10.2 Explanations to codes 23 and 24
Buchholz relays with the feature „damper held in response position“ are designed such that the dam-
per after it was operated due to an unacceptable high flow rate of the insulating liquid is locked in its
position and, hence is kept in this position even after the flow rate has been reduced. This means
that the signal generated is maintained.
The damper has to be unlocked manually by turning the test key anticlockwise. When unlocking
the damper, also check the insulating liquid level in the Buchholz relay. Bleed the Buchholz relay, if
required.
29
10.3 Explanations to code 32
For Buchholz relays provided additionally with an air nipple (code 32), the mechanical function of
the two switching systems can be tested by means of test key (Fig. 28/1), and the upper switching
system (alarm) can be tested by pumping in air via the bleeding valve (Fig. 28/2) using a suitable test
pump. Additionally, the switching systems can be tested pneumatically. To this end, air is supplied
via an air supply nipple (Fig. 28/3) provided with a check valve. Perform the test while the Buchholz
relay is filled with insulating liquid up to the required level.
Pneumatic test of the upper switching system (alarm) using compressed air:
Air is introduced slowly into the Buchholz relay through the air supply nipple and the pipe air until
the alarm contact is made when the upper float is lowered.
Pneumatic test of the lower switching system (disconnection) using compressed air:
Through the air supply nipple and the pipe air is applied suddenly to the damper. When the damper
responds the disconnection contact is made.
After any test using air, bleed the Buchholz relay through the bleeding valve.
This special design of EMB GmbH combines the requirement of functional testing using compressed
air according to the former British standard B.E.B.S. T2 of 1966 and of functional testing using the
test key according to the former German norm DIN 42566.
2 3 1
Figure 28 - Cover with additional air supply nipple
30
11 Explanations to code 60 - Buchholz relay NM series
11.1 Design features of Buchholz relay NM series
The principal construction of the Buchholz relay with floats and damper as well as their electro-
mechanical functions have been maintained.
The Buchholz relay of series NM is equipped additionally with a capacitive sensor. The sensor is
installed in the cover of the Buchholz relay. The cap of the terminal box accommodates the electronic
amplifier of the measuring unit. Sensor and amplifier are connected by a shielded cable in three-wire
technology with a cable connector. This cable is used for the supply voltage and the output signal.
Figure 29 shows the arrangement of the measuring unit using the example of a Buchholz relay
BF 80/10/8. Apart from the dust hood and the cap of the terminal box which are higher by approx.
40mm, the installation dimensions of the relay have not been changed. Hence, relays with analogue
measuring units can be installed in existing systems.
170
109
M16
80
291
R1
34
18
138
200
15 80
195
160
Figure 29 - Dimensional drawing Buchholz relay NM series type 26 (BF 80/10/8)
11.2 Extra function of Buchholz relay NM series
The standard Buchholz relay detects undissolved gases in the insulating liquid and indicates their
presence when a specified threshold is exceeded, meaning that up to a certain gas volume, no sig-
nal is generated. Neither is it possible to gather information about the length of time it takes for gas
to accumulate.
The process of the generation of unsolved gases in the insulating liquid over time is a very important
criterion for the evaluation of the fault as the quantity and composition of the fault gases depend on
the kind and quantity of the energy of the underlying fault. Spontaneous and energy-rich faults cause
large gas quantities within a short period of time, whilst small volumes of gas are generated in the
case of minor and insidious faults.
The Buchholz relay of NM series allows continuous and analogue gas volume measurement so that
gases which have accumulated in the relay are detected at an early stage, information about the
generation of the gases obtained and the conditions provided for the analysis of the fault at an early
stage.
31
The extra function of the NM series relays is ensured by a capacitive sensor and the appropriate
electronic components. Supply voltage of this assembly is DC 24 V. This voltage must be made
available by the user. The output signal of the measuring unit is a standard current signal of
DC 4 to 20 mA. It depends on the user how and in what form this signal is processed.
Extra function
Standard function
of the Buchholz
of the Buchholz relay
relay NM series
DC 5 V - max. 250 V
DC 24 V DC 0,01 A - max. 6 A
DC 4 - 20 mA
Monitoring- Conversion and Disconnection Alarm

system processing
Figure 30 - Extra function of Buchholz relay NM series
11.3 Analogue measuring unit - Analogue measurement of gas volume
The measured value is based on capacitance variation of the sensor caused by variation of the in-
sulating liquid level in the Buchholz relay.
Analogue measurement of the gas volume is possible between 50 cm3 and 300 cm3. Lower gas vo-
lumes cannot be measured reliably because of high inaccuracies. Measurements beyond this range
are not necessary as in this case the upper switching system will respond. Besides, the construction
of the Buchholz relay (larger gas volumes escape towards the conservator) does not allow such
measurements. The operating point of the upper switching system (upper float) is a gas volume
between 200 and 300 cm3.
Fault: Free gas is available in the insulating liquid.
Response: The gas in the liquid moves upwards, accumulates in the Buchholz relay and displaces
the insulating liquid. This decreases the level of insulating liquid. Liquid level changes lead to varia-
tion of the capacity of the sensor. This change is converted into an analogue current signal.
It should be noted that for design reasons the current value of the sensor remains relatively constant
up to a gas volume of approx. 50 cm3. The function equation will provide the actual volume only when
the current signal becomes smaller and, hence the calculated volume noticeably larger.
32
12 Ordering data/Type code
For placing orders, please, use the following key:
12.1 Single-float Buchholz relays
XX X. XX. XX. XX 0 X
Type
(see Section 5)
Options/Special designs
(see Section 10) ascending sequence
Damper setting (m/s)
01 = 0,65 ± 15%
02 = 1,00 ± 15%
03 = 1,50 ± 15%
0 = not occupied
Contact setting of
switching system
Legend:
1 = one NO contact NO = normally-open contact
2 = one NC contact NC = normally-closed contact
3 = two NO contacts CO = change-over contact
4 = two NC contacts
5 = one NO and one NC contact
6 = one CO contact
7 = two CO contacts For switching system design options for
8 = one NO and one CO contact single-float Buchholz relays see Section 6.
9 = one NC and one CO contact
33
12.2 Double-float Buchholz relays
XX X. XX. XX. XX X X
Type
(see Section 7)
Options/Special designs
(see Section 10) ascending sequence
Damper setting (m/s)

01 = 0,65 ± 15% 11 = 1,20 ± 15%
02 = 1,00 ± 15% 13 = 1,30 ± 15%
03 = 1,50 ± 15% 14 = 1,40 ± 15%
04 = 2,00 ± 15% 15 = 1,80 ± 15%
05 = 2,50 ± 15%
06 = 3,00 ± 15% 08 = 5,00 ± 15%
Contact setting of
upper switching system
(Alarm)
1 = one NO contact
2 = one NC contact
3 = one CO contact
4 = two NO contacts
5 = one NC and one NO contact
7 = two CO contacts
Contact setting of
lower switching system
Legend:
(Disconnection)
NO = normally-open contact
1 = one NO contact NC = normally-closed contact
2 = one NC contact CO = change-over contact
3 = two NO contacts
4 = two NC contacts
5 = one NO and one NC contact
6 = one CO contact
7 = two CO contacts For switching system design options for
9 = three NO contacts double-float Buchholz relays see Section 8.
34
12.3 Ordering example
You need a double-float Buchholz relay of type 10 (BF 80/Q) with one cable gland of M20 x 1.5 and
one dummy plug. The damper should respond at a insulating liquid flow of 1.50 m/s. The upper swit-
ching system should be equipped with one switching element (magnet contact tube) and the lower
with two switching elements (magnet contact tubes). The upper switching element should be desig-
ned as one normally open contact, and the lower as two normally open contacts. The device should
be delivered in colour RAL 7033 and should have one oil drain plug. Based on the data on page 28
the relay ordered has the following
Type code: 10-1.25.28.44.-0313
Explanation: 10 = Double-float Buchholz relay type 10 (BF 80/Q)

1= M20x1,5: 1 cable gland and 1 dummy plug
25 = Lower switching system equipped with 2 magnet contact tubes
28 = With oil drain plug
44 = Casing colour RAL 7033 (cement-grey)
03 = Damper setting: 1.50 m/s ± 15 %
1= Contact setting of upper switching system: 1 NO
3= Contact setting of lower switching system: 2 NO
35
13 Additional devices for Buchholz relays

13.1 Gas sampling device ZG 1.2.
The gas sampling device is mounted on the transformer and connected to the Buchholz relay by
means of a pipe. It allows sampling of the relay gas at normal operating level and will be delivered
with sightglass cover.
The length of the pipe can be selected by the customer (see technical data of gas sampling device
ZG 1.2).
The device can be delivered with a lockable box.
Figure 31 - Gas sampling device ZG 1.2. Figure 32 - Gas sampling device ZG 1.2.
in lockable box
Figure 33 - Pipe of gas sampling device ZG 1.2. Figure 34 - Sightglass cover for
gas sampling device ZG 1.2.
36
Technical data of gas sampling device ZG 1.2.:
Parameter Data Notes

Gas outlet opening G 1/8“ Others on request
Oil outlet opening G 1/8“ Others on request
Temperature range:
- Ambient temperature - 40 °C to + 55 °C
- 40 °F to + 131 °F
- Operating range
* Temperature of the insulating liquid - 40 °C to + 115 °C Others on request
- 40 °F to + 239 °F
* Viscosity of the insulating liquid 1 mm2/s to 1100 mm2/s

Weight without piping 2,2 kg
Dimensions of pipe Ø 6x1 copper
Length of pipe max. 25 m As requested by customer
Casing colour Two-component texture paint On polyurethane basis
Figure 35 - Dimensional drawing, type ZG 1.2.
37
Special designs of gas sampling device ZG 1.2.:
Casing colour
Explanation Code
Casing colour RAL 9006 (white-aluminium) 40
Casing colour RAL 7001 (silver-grey) 41
Casing colour RAL 7012 (basalt-grey) 42
Casing colour RAL 7022 (umber-grey) 43
Casing colour RAL 7033 (cement-grey) 44
Casing colour RAL 7038 (agate-grey) 45
Casing colour RAL 7035 (light-grey) 46
Casing colour RAL 7016 (anthracite-grey) 47
Casing colour RAL 9002 (grey-white) 48
Casing colour RAL 7032 (siliceous-grey) 49
Climate-proof version
Climate-proof version for extreme frigid open-air conditions below - 40 °C 34
Climate-proof version for Offshore 36
Climate-proof version for aggressive industrial atmosphere 36
Insulating liquid
Insulating liquid silicone oil 20
Insulating liquid based on ester 21
Special request
Special request (on special agreement with customer) 29
Box
Without box 0
With box 1
Ordering data/Type code of gas sampling device ZG 1.2.
90 XX. XX. X XX,XXm
Type for ZG 1.2.
Special designs (see above)
0 = Without box
1 = With box
Length of pipe in meters

Ordering example of gas sampling device ZG 1.2.:
Type code: 90-34.44.-0-10,50m
Explanation: 90 = Gas sampling device ZG 1.2.

34 = Climate-proof version for extreme frigid open-air conditions below - 40 °C
44 = Casing colour RAL 7033 (cement-grey)
0 = Without box
10,50m = Length of pipe 10,50 m
38
13.2 Other additional devices for Buchholz relays
Buchholz gas sampler BGS
The Buchholz gas sampler provides a safe method of taking and trans-
porting gas samples from the Buchholz relay or the gas sampling de-
vice. Its capacity is 100 ml.
Buchholz gas tester BGT 3
The Buchholz gas tester is used to measure the hydrogen concentrati-

on of the Buchholz gases. The measurement can be performed directly
where the sample is taken.
The Buchholz gas sampler BGS as a component of the Buchholz gas

tester BGT is included in the scope of supply.
Gas testing device ZG 3.1.
The gas testing device is used to test the gas accumulated in the Buch-
holz relay. It can be installed either directly on the bleeding valve of the
Buchholz relay or on the gas outlet tap of the gas sampling device. The
Buchholz gas flows through two different chemical solutions and its
colour reactions indicate the nature of the fault.
Use of the gas testing device is no substitute for a gas chromatographic

analysis.
Gas testing device ZG 3.2.
EMB’s ZG 3.2. gas tester serves to test the gases in the gas sampling
device ZG 1.2. or the Buchholz relay for the presence of carbon mono-
xide and hydrogen. The gases are analysed qualitatively.
The ZG 3.2. gas tester can be combined with EMB‘s Buchholz gas
sampler BGS. When using the BGS and introducing the defined gas
volume (100 ml), the residual gas volume in the Buchholz relay or in
the gas sampling device can be used for further analytical purposes.
For further information on the additional devices, please ask for special reference material.
39
Reflux lock ZG 4.1.
The device prevents insulating liquid from flowing into the gas testing
device. The device is installed between the Buchholz relay or gas sam-
pling device and the gas testing device.
Test pump ZG 5.1. and ZG 5.2.
The test pump checks the functioning of the upper switching system
(alarm) of the Buchholz relay by pumping in air. The test can be perfor-
med directly on the Buchholz relay. For that purpose, the test pump is
connected to the bleeding valve of the Buchholz relay. When the test is
performed via the gas sampling device, the test pump is connected to
the gas outlet tap of the gas sampling device.
- ZG 5.1. manually operated

- ZG 5.2. pedal-operated
Oil sampling device ZG 6.1.
The oil sampling device is connected to the Buchholz relay via a pipe
and is used to take oil samples from the Buchholz relay (suitable for
use with Buchholz relays with an oil drain plug). The pipe is supplied to
the customer’s specifications.
40
14 Other protection devices
Monitoring relay for tap changers
Type 12 (ÜRF 25/10)

Type 15 (ÜRF 25)
Type 16 (ÜRF 25/10-26)
The monitoring relay for tap changers, also known as the protection
relay for tap changers or oil flow relay, is a monitoring device for in-
sulating liquid-filled tap changers with conservator. It protects the tap
changer and the transformer from damage. The monitoring relay re-
sponds to excessive oil flow in the direction of the conservator and
generates a signal disconnecting the tap changer and the transformer
immediately from voltage supply.
Pipe diameter DN: 25 mm (1“)

Type of connection: flanged
Buchholz Relay Type 22 (BB 25)

for use in rail vehicles

Type of connection: threaded
Other types of Buchholz Relays

for use in rail vehicles
Type 04 (BG 25)
Type 21 (BG 25 S)
Type 06 (BF 25/10)
Type 08 (BF 50/10) et.al.
41
Monitoring device for hydro-type compensator

(„air cell failure relay“)
Type 80 (CF 38)
This device monitors the hydro-type compensator (air sack) in the

expansion vessel.
Single-float Buchholz relays manufactured by EMB GmbH are also

used as air cell failure relays (see Section 5 and 6).
Pipe diameter DN: 38 mm

Type of connection: flanged
Oil Flow Indicator
Type 13 (SG 25)

Type 11 (SF 25)
Type 14 (SF 25/10)
The oil flow indicator is a protective relay monitoring the circulating

oil lubrication or cooling on machines and transformers. It indicates
faults in the circulating oil system and/or shuts the equipment down
to avoid damage.
The oil flow indicator operates at a very low service pressure and
can therefore be installed even in oil return pipes where the oil flow is
caused by the oil pipe gradient.

Type of connection: flanged or threaded
42
15 Breathing Buffer Box
Breathing buffer box G3B

to extend the life of transformers
Ageing of the transformer’s insulation system is accelerated by oxy-

gen dissolved in oil. With open-type transformers oxygen consumed
is replenished from the atmosphere. This longtime effect has negative
implications.
The breathing buffer box (G3B) inserted in the transformer’s brea-

thing line upstream of the dessicant layer is deemed to solve this
problem. This ensures hermetical sealing of the tr
43
Elektromotoren und
Gerätebau Barleben GmbH
Hamburg
EMB GmbH
Otto-von-Guericke-Allee 12
D-39179 Barleben | Germany Hannover
Barleben Berlin
Magdeburg
Phone: +49 39203 790

Fax: +49 39203 5330 Köln Leipzig
Email: info@emb-online.de
Frankfurt
Website: www.emb-online.de
www.buchholzrelay.com
München
Due to technical improvement of our products, the information contained in this catalogue is subject to change without notice. We would
like to apologize for printing errors which have not been found despite intensive proof-ready. We assume no liability for such errors. Thank
you for your understanding.
Edition: Catalogue Buchholz relays KA 01/02/15/02 English

9.12 Contact Indicator Thermometer (OIL TEMPERATURE

INDICATOR)
Page / Version Date
Sheet No.
Oil thermometer
drawing:
Manufacturer: M essko
Type: MT –ST 160F 4/8m
Operating instructions: Opertating instructions for oil
thermometer
Dimension drawing:
Oil temperature transmitter
drawing:
Type: Combi well-pt100
Operating instructions: Opertating instructions for oil
temperature transmitter
Dimension drawing:
Winding thermometer
drawing:
Type: MT –ST W160F/2 4/8m
Operating instructions: Opertating instructions for winding
thermometer
Dimension drawing:
Winding temperature transmitter
drawing:
Type: ZT-F2.1-1*pt100
Operating instructions: Opertating instructions for Winding
temperature transmitter
Dimension drawing:
ATTENTION
diagram.
WARNING
all sides and all pins.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
BA 2046 Zeigerthermometer/Pointer Thermometer/
www.messko.com
Termómetro de aguja/Thermomètre à cadran
Betriebsanleitung/Operating Instructions/Instructions d’opération/Instrucciones de Operación
BA2046/00/07: deutsch Trasy-Serie: MT-ST160F

english Trasy-Series: MT-STW160F2
français Serie Trasy: MT-STW160F2
español Série Trasy : MT-ST160F
Messko
Inhaltsverzeichnis/Contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis Contents
1 Sicherheit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 1 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
1.1 Sicherheitshinweise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.2 Specified application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Hinweise für den Betrieb des Geräts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.3 Important notes on equipment operation . . . . . . . . . 3
2 Produktbeschreibung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 2 Product specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

2.1 MT-ST160F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.1 MT-ST160F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2 MT-STW160F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.2 MT-STW160F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3 Montage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
3.1 Montage des Geräts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.1 Mounting the device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.2 Kapillarleitung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.2 Capillary tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.3 Temperaturfühler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.3 Temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.4 Tretschutz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.4 Kick protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.5 Schleppzeiger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.5 Maximum pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 Elektrischer Anschluss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 4 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

4.1 Anschluss der Mikroschalter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4.1 Connecting the microswitches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.2 Verstellen und Prüfen der Mikroschalter . . . . . . . . . . 7 4.2 Checking and adjusting the microswitches . . . . . . . . 7
5 Anzeigekontrolle und Nachjustierung . . . . . . . . . . .8 5 Indication control and readjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .8
6 Wartung. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 6 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
7 Technische Daten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 7 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
8 Anhang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 8 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

8.1 Anbauzeichnung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8.1 Installation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
8.2 Kabelverschraubung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8.2 Cable gland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
HINWEIS Note
Die in dieser Betriebsanleitung enthaltenen Angaben The data contained herein may differ in details to the
können von dem gelieferten Gerät abweichen. equipment delivered.
Änderungen bleiben vorbehalten. Subject to change without prior notice.
Für zukünftige Verwendung aufbewahren! Please keep this manual for future reference!
2 BA 2046/00/07
Messko
Table des matières Índice de contenidos

1 Sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 Seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Consignes de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.1 Instrucciones de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Utilisation conforme à l’affectation prévue . . . . . . . 3 1.2 Empleo conforme a lo prescrito. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Remarques concernant le fonctionnement de l’appareil 1.3 Instrucciones para el servicio del equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 Description du produit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2 Descripción del producto. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.1 MT-ST160F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.1 MT-ST160F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2 MT-STW160F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.2 MT-STW160F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3 Montaje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1 Installation de l’appareil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.1 Montaje del aparato . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.2 Capillaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.2 Tubo capilar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.3 Sonde de température . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.3 Sonda térmica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.4 Protection anti-heurts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.4 Estribo de protección . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.5 Aiguille entraînée . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.5 Aguja de arrastre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 Branchement électrique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4 Conexión eléctrica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.1 Raccordement des microrupteurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4.1 Conexión de los microinterruptores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.2 Contrôle et ajustement des microrupteurs . . . . . . . . . 7 4.2 Ajuste y comprobación de los microinterruptores . . . . . 7
5 Contrôle d’affichage et réajustement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5 Control de indicación y reajuste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
6 Entretien. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6 Mantenimiento . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
7 Caractéristiques techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 7 Características técnicas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
8 Appendice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8 Anexo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
8.1 Schéma de montage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8.1 Plano de acoplamiento . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
8.2 Passe-câble à vis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8.2 Racor para cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
INDICATION ¡ADVERTENCIA!
Les informations contenues dans les présentes instruc- Las indicaciones contenidas en el presente manual de
tions de service peuvent différer en certains détails de servicio pueden diferir del aparato suministrado.
l‘appareil fourni. Sous réserve de modifications.
Reservado el derecho a realizar modificaciones.
Conserver soigneusement ce document pour toute utilisation ¡Guardar para uso posterior!
BA 2046/00/07 3
1 Sicherheit
2 Produktbeschreibung
1 Sicherheit Bei der elektrischen Installation sind die nationalen Vor-

schriften zu beachten. Um einen störungsfreien Betrieb zu
1.1 Sicherheitshinweise
gewährleisten, ist der Schutzleiter unbedingt anzuschließen.
Alle Personen, die mit der Montage, Inbetriebnahme, Bedie-
nung, Wartung und Instandhaltung des Geräts zu tun haben,
müssen
ACHTUNG
Einbau, elektrischer Anschluss, Inbetriebnahme und War-
- fachlich ausreichend qualifiziert sein und
tung des Geräts dürfen ausschließlich von qualifiziertem,
- diese Betriebsanleitung genau beachten. ausgebildetem Personal gemäß dieser Betriebsanleitung
Bei Fehlbedienung oder Missbrauch drohen Gefahren für durchgeführt werden.
- Leib und Leben, Der Betreiber hat für die bestimmungsgemäße Verwen-
dung des Geräts Sorge zu tragen.
- das Gerät und andere Sachwerte des Betreibers und
Eigenmächtig und unsachgemäß durchgeführte Arbeiten
- die effiziente Funktionsweise des Geräts bei Ein- und Umbau, elektrischem Anschluss, Inbetrieb-
In dieser Betriebsanleitung werden drei Arten von Sicher- nahme und Wartung – ohne Rücksprache mit Messko –
heitshinweisen verwendet, um wichtige Informationen sind aus Sicherheitsgründen verboten!
hervorzuheben.
WARNUNG
WARNUNG Beachten sie unbedingt die nationalen
weist auf besondere Gefahren für Leib und Leben hin. Brandschutzvorschriften.
Ein Nichtbeachten dieser Hinweise kann zu schwersten
Verletzungen oder Tod führen.
Zeigerthermometer werden zur Temperaturanzeige an Trans-
ACHTUNG formatoren, Drosselspulen oder ähnlichen Geräten eingesetzt.
weist auf Gefahren für das Gerät oder andere Sachwerte
Sie bestehen grundsätzlich aus einem Temperaturfühler, der
des Betreibers hin. Ferner können Gefahren für Leib und
durch eine Kapillarleitung mit dem Messwerk verbunden ist.
Leben nicht ausgeschlossen werden.
An dem Messwerk ist ein Zeiger angebracht, der über eine
Drehbewegung den Temperaturwert auf einer Skala anzeigt.
Das Messsystem, bestehend aus Fühler, Kapillarleitung und
HINWEIS Messwerk, ist mit einer Flüssigkeit gefüllt.
weist auf wichtige Informationen zu einer konkreten
Thematik hin. ACHTUNG
1.2 Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung Messgeräte sind empfindlich. Alle Teile vor Fall, Schlag
oder Stoß schützen.
Das Zeigerthermometer dient der Temperaturmessung an
Leistungstransformatoren, Drosselspulen oder ähnlichen Die Kapillarleitung darf nicht gekürzt werden, das Mess-
Geräten. system steht unter Druck und wird dadurch zerstört.
Vor Inbetriebnahme des Geräts sind die auf dem Typenschild Die in dem Messsystem verwendete Flüssigkeit ist
und in der Betriebsanleitung angegebenen Grenzwerte in der gesundheitsschädlich.
Anwendung zu beachten und unbedingt einzuhalten.
2.1 MT-ST160F
Zeigerthermometer mit verstellbaren Mikroschaltern zur An-
1.3 Hinweise für den Betrieb des Geräts zeige der Öltemperatur. Die angezeigte Temperatur entspricht
der Öltemperatur am Fühler des Gerätes. Das mechanische
Die nationalen Unfallverhütungsvorschriften hat der Anwen-
Messsystem funktioniert selbstständig und energieunabhängig.
der unbedingt einzuhalten.
Gemäß der Applikation, kann der Fühler in den Zusatzgerä-
Es wird besonders darauf hingewiesen, dass das Arbeiten an
ten Einbauhülse und Kombihülse montiert werden. Weitere
aktiven, d.h. berührungsgefährlichen Teilen nur zulässig ist,
Informationen für das Zusatzgerät Kombihülse finden sie in
wenn diese Teile spannungsfrei sind oder gegen direktes
der Betriebsanleitung BA2032.
Berühren geschützt sind.
4 BA 2046/00/07
3 Montage Messko
4 Elektrischer Anschluss
2.2 MT-STW160F2 3.4 Tretschutz (Bild 2/1) optional

Zeigerthermometer mit verstellbaren Mikroschaltern zur Falls gewünscht, Tretschutz auf die Verschraubung der
Anzeige der Wicklungstemperatur (thermisches Abbild). Der Schutzhülse (Bild 2/2) aufsetzen und die Kapillarleitung
Temperatursprung zwischen Kühlflüssigkeit (Öl) und Wicklung innerhalb des Tretschutzes verlegen. Ziehen Sie die Befesti-
hängt u.a. vom Strom in der Wicklung ab. Der Wandler-Se- gungsschraube (Bild 2/4) des Tretschutzes an einer Schlüssel-
kundärstrom ist dem Strom in der Wicklung des Transfor- fläche der Verschraubung der Schutzhülse an.
mators verhältnisgleich. Der Wandler-Sekundärstrom speist
einen Heizwiderstand im Zusatzgerät ZT-F2 das dadurch eine
der Transformatorbelastung entsprechende Anzeigeerhöhung
der tatsächlich gemessenen Öltemperatur (Sprungtemperatur)
bewirkt.
Weitere Informationen für das Zusatzgerät ZT-F2 finden Sie
in der Betriebsanleitung BA2033.
3 Montage
ACHTUNG
Die in dieser Montage- und Betriebsanleitung vorge-
schriebenen Betriebs- und Montagebedingungen müssen
strikt eingehalten werden.
3.1 Montage des Geräts

Bild 1
Das Zeigerthermometer wird mit der Befestigungsplatte (Bild
1/11) am Trafo montiert. Der Abstand der Befestigungslöcher 3.5 Schleppzeiger (Bild 1/9)
beträgt 140mm, der Lochdurchmesser 9mm. Die Einbaulage
muss senkrecht sein. Der Einbauort ist so zu wählen, dass weder Der Schleppzeiger wird vom Zeiger betätigt und kennzeichnet
Vibrationen noch Netzschwingungen auftreten. dessen Maximalausschlag. Die Rückstellung des Schleppzei-
Die Einbaulage muss senkrecht sein. gers erfolgt über den Knopf (Bild 1/10).
3.2 Kapillarleitung (Bild 1/12)

Rollen Sie die Kapillarleitung knick- und verwindungsfrei
aus. Das Zeigerthermometer darf nicht an der Kapillarleitung
WARNUNG
getragen werden! Verlegen und fixieren Sie die Kapillarleitung,
überschüssige Kapillarleitung aufwickeln und im Bereich nicht Elektrische, lebensgefährliche Spannung!
zu hoher Temperaturen (max. 60° C) befestigen. Minimaler Vor dem Öffnen des Gerätes müssen alle Anschlussleitungen
Biegeradius 10mm. Minimaler Aufwickeldurchmesser 80mm stromlos sein.
(siehe Bild 1).
3.3 Temperaturfühler (Bild 1/13) Zum Anschließen der elektrischen Leitungen, Einstellen und
Trafo-Thermometertasche (z.B. nach EN 50216-4 vormals Prüfen der Mikroschalter muss das Gerät geöffnet werden.
42554 oder ähnlich) zu 2/3 mit Öl oder Wärmeleitpaste füllen Hierzu den Bajonettverschlussring bis zum Anschlag gegen
und die Einbauhülse (Bild 2/2) einschrauben. Die Kapillarleitung den Uhrzeigersinn drehen und abheben.
mit dem Temperaturfühler bis zum Anschlag in die Einbauhülse Beim Verschliessen des Geräts ist auf die richtige Stellung des
einschieben und Kabelverschraubung M16 festschrauben. Schleppzeigers (Bild 1/9) zu achten. Dieser muss rechts vom
Wird das Thermometer mit einer Kombihülse oder einem Zeiger (Bild 1/4) stehen. Den Bajonettverschlussring wieder
Trafo-Temperaturgeber ZT-F2 eingesetzt, siehe hierzu BA2032 aufsetzen und bis zum Anschlag im Uhrzeigersinn drehen.
(Kombihülse) bzw. BA 2033 (ZT-F2). 4.1 Anschluss der Mikroschalter (Bild 3)
Zum Anschließen klappen Sie die Abdeckblende (Bild 1/2)
hoch. Entfernen Sie jeweils den Mantel der Anschlusslei-
tungen auf einer Länge von ca. 160mm und die Isolierung der
BA 2046/00/07 5
5 Anzeigekontrolle und Nachjustierung
benötigten Litzen auf einer Länge von ca. 6mm. Montieren

Sie die beiliegenden Kabelverschraubungen mit den An-
schlusskabeln entsprechend der Zeichnung im Anhang
(Bild 8). Achten Sie darauf, dass die Kabelverschraubungen
die Kabel flüssigkeitsdicht umschliessen. Schließen Sie die
einzelnen Litzen entsprechend dem auf der Abdeckblende
aufgedruckten Anschlussschema (Bild 3/3) an der Klemmleiste
(Bild 3/1) an.
Bild 3
4
1. Tretschutz
2. Schutzhülse
3. Temperaturfühler
4. Befestigungsschraube
Bild 2
4.2 Verstellen und Prüfen der Mikroschalter (Bild 4)

Zum Verstellen eines Mikroschalters, schieben Sie diesen von
Hand in die gewünschte Position.
ACHTUNG Bild 4
Die Mikroschalter dürfen nicht an den farbigen Anzeige-

spitzen verschoben werden. Die Anzeigespitzen können ACHTUNG
abbrechen oder verbogen werden.
Der Zeiger darf nie gegen den Uhrzeigersinn hin zu
tieferen Temperaturen verdreht werden. Das Messsystem
Zum Prüfen der Mikroschalter, die sich rechts vom Zeiger wird dadurch beschädigt.
befinden, drehen Sie den Zeiger von Hand im Uhrzeigersinn
an den Mikroschaltern vorbei und anschließend wieder
zurück. Eine Rückholfeder zieht den Zeiger wieder in seine Mikroschalter, die sich links vom Zeiger befinden, sind zum
Ausgangsposition zurück (Bild 4). Prüfen im Uhrzeigersinn am Zeiger vorbeizuschieben (wie
beim Verstellen der Mikroschalter). Nach dem Prüfen müssen
die Mikroschalter wieder auf ihren ursprünglichen Wert
ACHTUNG eingestellt werden.
Der Zeiger darf hierzu nicht losgelassen werden, er muss
langsam in seine Ausgangsposition zurückgeführt werden. 5 Anzeigekontrolle und Nachjustierung
Schnellt der Zeiger zurück, können die Mikroschalter Die Zeigerthermometer werden im Werk kalibriert. Sollte es
beschädigt werden. dennoch erforderlich sein, die Anzeige neu zu justieren, so
sollten Anzeigekontrollen und Vergleichsmessungen nur in
bewegten Wasserbädern vorgenommen werden, die über
6 BA 2046/00/07
6 Wartung Messko
7 Technische Daten
einige Minuten (ca. 15 Min.) temperaturkonstant bleiben. 7 Technische Daten

Eine Nachjustierung ist möglich. Die Justierschraube (Bild 1/3)
Abmessungen siehe Bild 7
befindet sich auf der Vorderseite des Instruments.
Werkstoffe
Frontring und Gehäuse: Stahlblech, verzinkt,
ACHTUNG Pulverbeschichtung RAL 7033
Das Gerät ist werkseitig kalibriert. Durch eine Nachjus- Sichtscheibe: Verbundsicherheitsglas
tierung erlischt die Garantie für die ordnungsgemäße Temperaturfühler: Messing, blank
Funktion des Geräts. Befestigungsplatte: Edelstahl
Kapillarleitung: Kupfer-Kapillare mit
Weiterhin kann es durch eine nachträgliche Nachjustier- Schutzmantel
ung zu Abweichungen zwischen dem Zeigerthermometer Kabelverschraubungen: 4x M25x1,5 Messing,
und den Analogausgängen der Temperaturgeber ZT-F2 vernickelt
kommen.
Kenndaten
6 Wartung Meßbereich: -20...140°C Typ MT-ST160F,
0........160°C Typ MT-STW160F2,
Eine regelmäßige Wartung ist nicht erforderlich. Messtoleranz: ±3°C nach EN 13190 Klasse 1
Bei den turnusmäßigen Überprüfungen des Transformators und DIN 16196
empfehlen wir folgende Kontrollen durchzuführen: Aufstellung: Innenraum und Freiluft,
tropenfest
- Überprüfen Sie den äußeren Zustand des eingebauten
Umgebungstemperatur: -50... 80°C
Gerätes auf Beschädigungen.
Schutzart: IP55 nach IEC 60 529
Belüftung: Belüftungseinrichtung,
beschlagfrei bis 80% rel.
ACHTUNG Feuchte
Die in dieser Betriebsanleitung gemachten Angaben sind Schleppzeiger: Rückstellbarer Maximumzeiger
für Standardgeräte gültig. Bei Sonderausführungen sind die
Angaben des Typenschilds und der Bestellung zu beachten. Mikroschalter
Anzahl: 1 bis 6 verstellbare
Mikroschalter
1+2 eng, Standard Belastbarkeit: 5A bei 250VAC (110VAC)
cos␸=1
rot blau grün gelb
0,4A bei 250VDC
0,6A bei 110VDC
Schalterstellung: siehe Bild 5 und 6,
andere auf Anfrage
Schalterabstand: 6% des Meßbereiches
Schalthysterese: ca. 5°C
(bei sinkender Temperatur)
Kontaktmaterial: Silber-Cadmium-Oxid
Nennisolationsspannung: 2500VAC/1min-Schaltkon-
Bild 5/Fig. 5 takte gegen Erde
1+2/3+4 eng
rot blau grün gelb
Bild 6/Fig. 6
BA 2046/00/07 7
8 Anhang
8.1 Anbauzeichnung
Bild 7
8.2 Kabelverschraubung
Übergangsstück am Gerät nach EN 60423
SW30
SW28
Perbunan (NBR)-O-Ring
Messing, galv vernickelt
ausschneidbarer Dichtring, NBR

für Kabel ø 9 … 19 mm (0,35 … 0,75 ” )
Stahldruckring, verzinkt
Staubschutzscheibe, PE-LD
für ungenutzte Verschraubungen
Messing, galv. vernickelt

Kabel
Bild 8
8 BA 2046/00/07
1 Safety Messko
2 Product specification
1 Safety regulations. It is imperative to connect the ground wire in

order to ensure trouble-free operation.
1.1 Safety instructions
All personnel involved in installation, commissioning, CAUTION
operation or maintenance of this equipment must: Installation, electrical connection, commissioning, and
- be suitably qualified and maintenance of the device may only be carried out by
qualified, skilled personnel and only in accordance with
- strictly observe these operating instructions. these operating instructions.
Improper operation or misuse can lead to It is the responsibility of the user to make sure that the
- serious or fatal injury, device is used for the specified application only.
- damage to the equipment and other property of the user For safety reasons, any unauthorized and improperly
executed work, i.e. installation, modification, alteration
- a reduction in the efficiency of the equipment.
of the equipment, electrical connection, or commis-
Safety instructions in this manual are presented in three dif- sioning of the equipment, are forbidden without first
ferent forms to emphasize important information. consulting Messko!
WARNING WARNING
This information indicates particular danger to life and All relevant fire protection regulations must be strictly
health. Disregarding such a warning can lead to serious observed.
or fatal injury.
Pointer thermometers are used to indicate temperatures on
CAUTION power transformers, reactors or similar equipment.
This information indicates particular danger to the They always consist of a temperature sensor which is con-
equipment or other property of the user. Serious or fatal nected to the measuring device with a capillary tube. The
injury cannot be excluded. measuring device is equipped with a pointer which turns
to show the temperature on a scale. The measuring system
consisting of sensor, capillary tube and measuring device is
NOTE filled with a liquid.
These notes give important information on a certain
issue. CAUTION
Measuring instruments are sensitive. All parts should
1.2 Specified application therefore be protected against falling and against knocks
Pointer thermometers are used to measure temperatures on and vibrations.
power transformers, reactors or similar equipment. The capillary tube may not be shortened otherwise the
It is important to read and observe the limit values for pressurized measuring system will be destroyed.
operation indicated on the nameplate and in the operating The liquid used in the measuring system is hazardous to
instructions prior to commissioning the device. health.
2.1 MT-ST160F
1.3 Important notes on equipment operation
Pointer thermometers with adjustable microswitches for indi-
The user is obliged to comply with the national health and
cating the oil temperature. The indicated temperature is the
safety regulations.
oil temperature at sensor location. The mechanical measuring
It is especially emphasized that works performed to live, e.g. system functions independently and requires no power input.
dangerous-contact components, are permissible only while According to the type of applikation, the temperature sensor
these components are either de-energized or protected can be assembled into such accessory equipment as the ther-
against direct contact. mal well and combi well. Futher information on the combi
Electrical installation is subject to the relevant national safety well can be found in the operating instructions BA2032
BA 2046/00/07 9
3 Installation
4 Electrical connectio
2.2 MT-STW160F2 3.4 Kick protection (Fig.2/1) optional

These types of pointer thermometers with adjustable If required, fit the kick protection to the adapter of the
microswitches are used to indicate the winding temperature thermowell (Fig. 2/2) and route the capillary tube inside the
(thermal image). The temperature difference between the kick protection. Tighten the fixing screw (Fig. 2/4, wrench size
cooling medium (oil) and the winding depends, among other 13mm) of the kick protection to a flat side of the thermowell
things, on the current flowing in the winding. The CT second- adapter.
ary current is proportional to the winding of the transformer.
The CT secondary current feeds a heating resistor inside the
additional device ZT-F2. This provides an appropriate increase
(heat gradient) to the actual indication of the measured oil
temperature, corresponding to transformer load. For further
details please refer to the operating instructions BA 2033 for
the ZT-F2.
3. Installation
CAUTION
The operating and installation conditions demanded
by this installation and operating instructions must be
strictly complied with.
3.1 Mounting the device

The pointer thermometer is attached to the transformer by its Fig. 1
mounting plate (Fig.1/11). The spacing between the fixing holes
is 140mm and the diameter of the holes is 9mm. The thermom- 3.5 Maximum pointer (Fig.1/9)
eter should be installed vertically. The location of the device The maximum pointer is operated by the pointer and records
must be chosen to avoid any irregular vibrations or electro- the maximum reading of a temperature measurement. The
magnetic fields which are above the pertinent electromagnetic maximum pointer can be reset using the knob (Fig. 1/10).
compatibility standards.
3.2 Capillary tube (Fig. 1/12) 4 Electrical connection
Roll out the capillary tube avoiding kinks and loops. Do not rip,
pull, squeeze or bend this tube. Never carry the thermometer WARNING
by the capillary tube. Route the capillary tube and fix it in posi- Electrical voltages, danger to life!
tion. Roll up excess tube and store it in a position not subject
All connecting wiring must be free of voltage before
to excessive temperatures (max. 60°C). Minimum winding
opening the device.
diameter is 80 mm (see fig. 1).
3.3 Temperature sensor (Fig.1/13)
The bayonet fixing ring must be removed in order to connect,
Fill the transformer thermometer pocket (e.g. acc. to EN50216-4, set and check the microswitches. Turn the ring anti-clockwise
formerly DIN 42554 or similar) up to two thirds full with oil or as far as possible and then lift it off.
heat conducting paste and screw the thermowell as shown in
When closing the device, make sure that the maximum
Fig. 2/2 into place. Insert the temperature sensor and capillary
pointer (Fig. 1/9) is in the correct position. It must be to the
tube into the thermowell as far as possible and tighten it up
right of the pointer (Fig. 1/4). Replace the ring and turn it
using the M16 cable gland. If the thermometer is to be used
clockwise as far as it will go.
with either a combi well or a transformer transmitter type
ZT-FZ, please refer to the operating instructions BA2032 or 4.1 Connecting the microswitches (Fig. 3)
BA2033 respectively. To connect the microswitches flip up the covering plate (Fig.
1/2). Remove the outer sheaths of the connecting cables to
a length of approx. 160 mm and then the insulation of the
individual conductors to a length of approx. 6 mm. Install
10 BA 2046/00/07
5 Indication control and readjustment Messko
the cable glands provided loosely to the incoming cables and

housing. This must be done as shown in the appendix Fig. 8.
Pay close attention to cable gland assembly and ensure that
the seal is properly fitted to avoid any water ingress. Connect
the incoming wiring to the terminal strip (Fig. 3/1) in accord-
ance with the connection diagram (Fig. 3/3) printed on the
cover plate.
Fig. 3
4
1. Kick protection
2. Thermowell
3. Temperature sensor
4. Fixing screw
Fig. 2
4.2 Checking and adjusting the microswitches (Fig. 4)

To set a microswitch, slide it by hand to the desired position.
CAUTION
Fig. 4
Do not slide the microswitches on the colored indicator
points. The indicator points may break off or be bent.
CAUTION
The pointer must never be turned anti-clockwise to lower
To check the microswitches which are located to the right temperatures. This will damage the measuring system.
of the pointer, turn the pointer clockwise by hand past the
microswitches and back. A return spring pulls the pointer
back to its original position (Fig. 4).
5 Indication control and readjustment
CAUTION The pointer thermometers are calibrated at the factory. If it
is necessary to readjust it, indication control and comparison
Do not release the pointer here. It must be slowly retur-
measurements should only be carried out in agitated water
ned to its original position. If the pointer snaps back, the
baths in witch the temperature remains constant for several
microswitches may be damaged.
minutes (approx. 15 min.). Readjustments are possible. The
adjustment screw (Fig. 1/3) is on the front of the instrument.
To check the microswitches which are located to the left of
the pointer, slide them clockwise past the pointer, in the same
way as when setting the microswitches. After checking, the
microswitches must be reset to their original positions.
BA 2046/00/07 11
6 Maintenance
7 Technical data
7 Technical data
CAUTION Dimensions refer to Fig. 7
The pointer thermometers are calibrated and set at the Materials
factory. Readjusting them results in the loss of accuracy Ring and casing: Sheet steel, galvanized,
as well as the guarantee for the device. powder coating RAL 7033
Furthermore, a later readjustment can lead to deviations Glass: Laminated safety glass
between the pointer thermometer and the analog Temperature bulb: Brass, bright
Mounting plate: Stainless steel
outputs of the transformer temperature transmitter type
Capillary tube: Copper capillary tube
ZT-F2.
with protective sheath
Cable glands: 4x M25x1,5, nickel-plated
6 Maintenance
Specifications
Regular maintenance is not required. Measuring ranges: -20...140°C Typ MT-ST160F,
During the regular check of the transformer, we recommend 0........160°C Typ MT-STW160F2,
checking the following. Tolerances: ± 3°C according to EN 13190
class 1 and DIN16196
- Check the exterior of the installed device for damage. Location: indoor and outdoor, tropics
Ambient temperature: -50 to 80 °C
Degree of protection: IP55 in accordance with
CAUTION IEC 60 529
The details made within these operating instructions are valid Ventilation: Ventilation unit, no conden-
sation up to 80% humidity
for standard products only. For special designs refer to the
details of the nameplate as well as the order confirmation.
Drag hand: Resetable maximum pointer
Microswitches
Number: 1 to 6 adjustable
microswitches
Rated current: 5A at 250VAC (110VAC)
cos␸=1
1+2 close switching, standart
0,4A at 250VDC
red blue green yellow 0,6A at 110VDC
Switch positions: Refer to Fig. 5 and 6,
others on request
Switching distance: 6% of measuring range
Switching hysteresis: approx. 5°C
(at decreasing temperatures)
Contact materials: Silver-Cadmium-Oxide
Rated insulation voltage: 2500VAC/1min-switching
contacts to ground
Fig. 5
1+2/3+4 close switching
red blue green yellow
Fig. 6
12 BA 2046/00/07
8 Appendix Messko
8.1 Installation diagram
Fig. 7
8.2 Cable gland
Adapter at the device acc. to EN 60423
wrench size 30 mm
wrench size 28 mm
Buna N (NBR)-O-ring
brass, nickel electoplated
multiple sealing ring, NBR

for cables ø 9 … 19 mm (0,35 … 0,75 ” )
steel washers, galvanized

dust cap, PE-LD
for unused cable glands

cable
Fig. 8
BA 2046/00/07 13
1 Sécurité
2 Description du produit
1 Sécurité
ATTENTION
1.1 Consignes de sécurité Le montage, le raccordement électrique, la mise en
L‘ensemble du personnel chargé de l‘installation, de la mise en service et la maintenance de l’appareil sont exclusive-
service, de la commande, de l‘entretien et de la maintenance ment l’affaire d’un personnel qualifié et dûment formé,
de l‘appareil doit : et doivent être réalisés conformément aux présentes
instructions de service.
- être suffisamment qualifié et
- respecter rigoureusement ces instructions de service. L’exploitant est tenu responsable de l’utilisation con-
forme de l’appareil.
Les erreurs de commande ou une utilisation non conforme
peuvent être dangereuses pour : Pour des raisons de sécurité, il est interdit d’effectuer
- la santé et la vie de personnes, des travaux concernant le montage, le raccordement
- l’appareil et les autres biens matériels de l’exploitant et électrique, la mise en service, les modifications et la
- le bon fonctionnement de l‘appareil. maintenance de l’appareil sans avoir consulté au préala-
ble la société Messko !
Trois types de symboles concernant des consignes de sécurité
sont utilisés dans ces instructions de service pour mettre en
relief des informations importantes.
AVERTISSEMENT
AVERTISSEMENT Respectez absolument les consignes de protection contre
signale des dangers particuliers pour la vie et la santé. l‘incendie en vigueur dans le pays d’utilisation.
Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner des
blessures graves, voire mortelles.
ATTENTION Les thermomètres à cadran sont employés pour l’affichage
des températures des transformateurs, des bobines d’induc-
signale des risques pour l‘appareil ou d‘autres biens matériels tance ou d‘autres équipements similaires.
de l‘exploitant. De plus, des dangers pour la santé et la vie de Ils sont constitués essentiellement d’une sonde de tempéra-
personnes ne peuvent pas être entièrement exclus. ture, reliée au dispositif de mesure au moyen d’un capillaire.
Le dispositif de mesure est muni d‘une aiguille qui indique la
INDICATION température sur l‘échelle du cadran. Le système de mesure,
constitué d’une sonde, d’un capillaire et du dispositif de
signale des informations importantes concernant un
mesure, est rempli de liquide.
point particulier.
1.2 Utilisation conforme à l’affectation prévue ATTENTION

Le thermomètre à cadran sert à mesurer les températures sur Les appareils de mesure sont des dispositifs sensibles.
les transformateurs de puissance, les bobines d’inductance ou Protéger tous les composants contre la chute, les chocs
d’autres équipements similaires. ou les heurts.
Avant la mise en service de l’appareil, il convient de tenir Il est interdit de raccourcir le capillaire, car le système de
compte des valeurs limites figurant sur la plaque du construc- mesure serait alors soumis à une pression accrue, ce qui
teur et dans les instructions de service dans le cadre de risque de le détruire.
l’application, et de les respecter impérativement.
Le liquide utilisé dans le système de mesure est nocif
1.3 Remarques concernant le fonctionnement pour la santé.
de l’appareil
L’utilisateur doit obligatoirement tenir compte des prescrip- 2.1 MT-ST160F
tions en matière de sécurité et de prévention des accidents en
Thermomètre à cadran avec microrupteurs ajustables, servant
vigueur dans le pays d‘utilisation.
à afficher la température de l‘huile. La température affichée
Il est à noter particulièrement que toute intervention sur des
est la température de l’huile sur la sonde de l’appareil. Le
éléments actifs, autrement dit dont le contact est dangereux,
système de mesure mécanique fonctionne indépendamment
est permise uniquement si les éléments en question sont hors
et ne nécessite pas d’apport d’énergie. Conformément à l’ap-
tension ou protégés contre tout contact direct.
plication, la sonde peut être installée dans des équipements
14 BA 2046/00/07
3 Installation Messko
4 Branchement électrique
accessoires tels que le manchon de montage et le manchon butée, et vissez fermement le passe-câble à vis M16.
combiné. Des informations supplémentaires concernant le Si le thermomètre est utilisé avec un manchon combiné ou
manchon combiné sont fournies dans les instructions de avec un capteur de température de transformateur ZT-F2, voir à
service BA2032. ce sujet BA2032 (manchon combiné) ou BA 2033 (ZT-F2).
2.2 MT-STW160F2 3.4 Protection anti-heurts (fig. 2/1) en option
Thermomètre à cadran avec microrupteurs ajustables, servant Si nécessaire, placez la protection anti-heurts sur le vissage
à afficher la température de l’enroulement (image thermique). de l’enveloppe de protection (fig. 2/2) et guidez le capillaire
Le saut de température entre le liquide de refroidissement dans la protection anti-heurts. Serrez la vis de fixation (fig.
(huile) et l’enroulement dépend notamment du courant dans 2/4) de la protection anti-heurts au niveau d’une partie plate
l’enroulement. Le courant secondaire du transformateur du vissage hexagonal.
d’intensité est proportionnel au courant dans l’enroulement.
Le courant secondaire du transformateur alimente une
résistance de chauffage située dans l‘équipement accessoire,
ce qui entraîne l’augmentation de l’indication (gradient) de la
température de l‘huile effectivement mesurée, correspondant
à la charge du transformateur.
Des informations supplémentaires concernant l’équipement

accessoire ZT-F2 sont fournies dans les instructions de service
BA2033.
3. Installation
ATTENTION
Il convient d’observer strictement les conditions
d‘installation et de service prescrites dans les présentes
instructions d‘installation et de service.
Fig. 1
3.1 Installation de l’appareil
Le thermomètre à cadran est attaché au transformateur par sa 3.5 Aiguille entraînée (fig. 1/9)
plaque de fixation (fig. 1/11). L’écart entre les trous de fixation L’aiguille entraînée est actionnée par l’aiguille et enregistre la
est de 140 mm, les trous font 9 mm de diamètre. Le thermomè- lecture maximale de la mesure de température. Pour remettre
tre doit être installé à la verticale. L’emplacement d’installation à zéro l’aiguille entraînée, utilisez le bouton (fig. 1/10).
doit être choisi de telle sorte que le thermomètre ne devra subir
ni vibrations ni fluctuations du secteur. Le thermomètre doit 4 Branchement électrique
être installé à la verticale.
3.2 Capillaire (fig. 1/12) AVERTISSEMENT
Déroulez le capillaire en veillant à ne pas le couder et à ne pas Tension électrique ! Danger de mort !
le tordre. Ne portez jamais le thermomètre à cadran en le saisis- Avant l’ouverture de l’appareil, tous les câbles de
sant par le capillaire ! Effectuez la pose du capillaire et fixez-le connexion doivent être hors tension.
dans la position souhaitée, enroulez l’excédent de la conduite
et attachez-la à un emplacement non soumis à des tempéra-
tures excessives (max. 60° C). Rayon de pliure minimum 10mm. Pour pouvoir raccorder les câbles électriques, ajuster et
Diamètre d‘enroulement minimum 80 mm (voir fig. 1). contrôler les microrupteurs, il faut ouvrir l’appareil. A cette
fin, faites tourner l‘anneau à fermeture à baïonnette dans le
3.3 Sonde de température (fig. 1/13)
sens contraire aux aiguilles d‘une montre, jusqu‘à la butée,
Remplissez le doigt de gant du thermomètre du transformateur et enlevez-le. Lorsque vous refermez l’appareil, veillez au
(par ex. selon EN 50216-4, ancienne appellation: 42554 ou si- positionnement correct de l’aiguille entraînée (fig. 1/9). Celle-
milaire) aux 2/3 d‘huile ou de pâte thermoconductrice et vissez ci doit se trouver à droite de l’aiguille (fig. 1/4). Remettez en
le manchon de montage (fig. 2/2). Insérez le capillaire avec la place l’anneau à fermeture à baïonnette et faites-le tourner
sonde de température dans le manchon de montage, jusqu’à la dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre, jusqu’à la butée.
BA 2046/00/07 15
5 Contrôle d’affichage et réajustement
1. Protection anti-heurts
2. Enveloppe de protection
3. Sonde de température
4. Vis de fixation Fig. 3
Fig. 2
4.1 Raccordement des microrupteurs (fig. 3)

Pour effectuer le raccordement des microrupteurs, relevez le
couvercle (fig. 1/2). Enlevez la gaine des câbles de connexion
requis, sur une longueur de 160 mm env., puis l’isolation des
fils souhaités, sur une longueur de 6 mm environ.
Installez les passe-câbles joints avec les câbles de connexion,
conformément au dessin en annexe (fig. 8). Veillez à ce que
l’anneau d’étanchéité du passe-câble enveloppe bien les
câbles et ne laisse échapper aucun liquide. Raccordez chaque
fil sur la réglette à bornes (fig. 3/1) conformément au schéma
de connexions (fig. 3/3) imprimé sur le couvercle.
4.2 Contrôle et ajustement des microrupteurs (fig. 4)
Fig. 4
Pour régler un microrupteur, faites le glisser manuellement
dans la position voulue.
ATTENTION
ATTENTION
Il est interdit de faire tourner l‘aiguille dans le sens
Il est interdit de faire glisser les microrupteurs en les sai- inverse des aiguilles d‘une montre, vers des températures
sissant par les extrémités d‘affichage de couleur. En effet, plus basses. Ceci endommagerait le système de mesure.
les pointes risques de se casser ou de se déformer.
Pour contrôler les microrupteurs qui sont situés à droite de Pour contrôler les microrupteurs qui sont situés à gauche
l’aiguille, faites tourner l’aiguille à la main dans le sens des de l’aiguille, faites les glisser dans le sens des aiguilles d’une
aiguilles d’une montre, au-delà des microrupteurs, puis dans montre, au-delà de l’aiguille (comme dans le cas de la pro-
le sens de retour. Un ressort de rappel ramène l’aiguille dans cédure d’ajustement des microrupteurs). Une fois le contrôle
sa position initiale (fig. 4). effectué, il faut ajuster à nouveau les microrupteurs sur leur
valeur d’origine.
ATTENTION
Pour cela, ne relâchez pas l‘aiguille ; elle doit retourner 5 Contrôle d’affichage et réajustement
lentement dans sa position initiale. Le thermomètre à cadran est calibré à l’usine. S’il est
Si l’aiguille retourne brusquement en arrière, ceci risque cependant nécessaire d’ajuster à nouveau l’affichage, les
d’endommager les microrupteurs. contrôles d’affichage et les mesures comparatives doivent
16 BA 2046/00/07
6 Entretien Messko
7 Caractéristiques techniques
être effectuées uniquement dans des bains d’eau agités, qui 7 Caractéristiques techniques
conservent une température constante pendant plusieurs
minutes (15 min. environ). Des réajustements sont possibles. Dimensions voir fig. 7
La vis d’ajustement (fig. 1/3) se trouve sur la face avant de
Matériaux
l’instrument.
Anneau et carter : tôle d’acier galvanisée, revête-
ment par poudre RAL 7033
ATTENTION Verre de regard : Verre de sécurité feuilleté
L’appareil est calibré à l’usine. Tout réajustement du Sonde de température : Laiton nu
thermomètre à cadran entraîne l’annulation de la Plaque de fixation : inox
garantie de bon fonctionnement de l’appareil. Capillaire : capillaires en laiton avec
gaine de protection
Additionnellement, suite à un réajustement, des écarts Passe-câble à vis : 4x M25x1,5 laiton nickelé
peuvent survenir entre le thermomètre à cadran et les
sorties analogiques des capteurs de température ZT-F2. Caractéristiques assignées
Plage de mesure : -20...140°C Type MT-ST160F,
0........160°C,
6 Entretien type MT-STW160F2,
Il n’est pas nécessaire d’effectuer une maintenance régulière. Tolérance de mesure : ±3°C selon EN 13190 classe
Lors des contrôles de routine sur le transformateur, nous 1 et DIN 16196
recommandons d‘effectuer les vérifications suivantes : Mise en place : à l’intérieur et à l’extérieur,
- vérifiez si l’extérieur de l‘appareil installé ne présente pas tropicalisé
de dommages. Température ambiante : -50... 80°C
Type de protection : IP55 selon CEI 60 529
Ventilation : dispositif de ventilation, sans
ATTENTION condensation jusqu’à 80%
Les spécifications données dans ces instructions de service d’humidité rel.
sont applicables aux appareils standard. Pour des versions Aiguille entraînée : aiguille de maximum pouvant
spéciales, il convient d’observer les indications précisées être remise à zéro
sur la plaque signalétique et dans la commande. Microrupteurs
Quantité : 1 à 6 microrupteurs réglables
Puissance : 5A à 250VAC (110VAC)
1+2 commutation étroite, standard cos␸=1
0,4A à 250VDC
rouge bleu vert jaune
0,6A à 110VDC
Position du commutateur : voir fig. 5 et 6, autres sur
demande
Distance de commutation : 6% de la plage de mesure
Hystérésis de commutation : env. 5°C (à température en
baisse)
Matériaux de contact : Argent-Cadmium-Oxyde
Tension d’isolement nominale : contacts de commutation
2500VAC/1min et circuit
Fig. 5 chauffant contre la terre
1+2/3+4 commutation étroite
Fig. 6
BA 2046/00/07 17
8 Appendice
8.1 Schéma de montage
Fig. 7
8.2 Passe-câble à vis
Adaptateur sur l’appareil selon EN 60423
clé de 30
clé de 28
Joint torique Perbunan (NBR)
Laiton, galv. nickelé
anneau d’étanchéité découpable, NBR

pour câble .... 9…19 mm de diam.
(0.35…0,75“)
Rondelle en acier, galvanisée

Rondelle anti-poussière,
PE-LD pour vissages non utilisés

Câble
Fig. 8
18 BA 2046/00/07
1 Seguridad Messko
2 Descripción del producto
1 Seguridad Observar las disposiciones nacionales referentes a la instala-

ción eléctrica. Es preciso conectar el conductor protector para
1.1 Instrucciones de seguridad
garantizar un servicio sin averías.
Toda persona involucrada en los trabajos de montaje, puesta
en servicio, operación, mantenimiento y conservación del
equipo debe
ATENCIÓN
El montaje, la conexión eléctrica, la puesta en servicio y el
- disponer de la suficiente cualificación técnica y observar
mantenimiento del aparato deben efectuarse únicamente por
exhaustivamente el presente manual de servicio. En caso de
personal suficientemente calificado y capacitado, siguiendo
uso inadecuado o mal uso existe peligro para
estas instrucciones de servicio.
- la salud y la vida de personas,
El operador debe asegurarse de que el aparato se utilice
- el propio equipo y otros bienes del usuario, así como únicamente para los fines prescritos.
- el funcionamiento eficaz del equipo Por motivos de seguridad, queda prohibido realizar - sin
En el presente manual de servicio se utilizan tres tipos consulta previa con Messko - trabajos por iniciativa propia y
diferentes de señales de seguridad para poner de relieve en forma inadecuada durante el montaje, la reinstalación, la
información relevante. conexión eléctrica, la puesta en servicio y el mantenimiento.
¡PELIGRO! ¡PELIGRO!
Se utiliza para llamar la atención sobre peligros especiales Es absolutamente necesario observar las normas
para la integridad física y la vida. Si no se observan tales nacionales en materia de prevención de incendios.
indicaciones podrán producirse lesiones graves o mortales.

ATENCIÓN
Los termómetros de aguja se emplean para indicar la tempe-
Se utiliza para llamar la atención sobre peligros para el ratura en transformadores, bobinas de reactancia o aparatos
equipo u otros bienes del usuario. Asimismo, cuando se similares.
utiliza esta señal, no pueden excluirse peligros para la Siempre incluyen una sonda térmica que se conecta al
integridad física y la vida. mecanismo de medición por medio de un tubo capilar. En
el mecanismo de medición se ha colocado un indicador que
muestra el valor de la temperatura en una escala por medio
¡ADVERTENCIA! de un movimiento de giro. El sistema de medición, compuesto
Se utiliza para llamar la atención sobre información por un sensor, un tubo capilar y un mecanismo de medición,
relevante sobre cualquier tema determinado. está lleno de líquido.
1.2 Empleo conforme a lo prescrito

ATENCIÓN
El termómetro de aguja sirve para medir la temperatura
Los equipos de medición son sensibles. Por este motivo,
en transformadores de potencia, bobinas de reactancia o
es imprescindible proteger todas las piezas contra caída,
aparatos similares.
golpes o choques.
Antes de la puesta en marcha del aparato, observar y respetar
El tubo capilar no puede ser acortado, el sistema de
los valores límites indicados en la placa de identificación y en
medición estaría bajo presión y podría romperse.
los manuales de instrucciones.
El líquido utilizado en el sistema de medición es tóxico.
1.3 Instrucciones para el servicio del equipo
El usuario debe respetar las disposiciones nacionales en 2.1 MT-ST160F
materia de prevención de accidentes.
Termómetro de aguja con mircrointerruptores ajustables para
Se llama especialmente la atención sobre el hecho de que los indicar la temperatura del aceite. La temperatura indicada
trabajos con piezas activas, es decir, con piezas cuyo contacto equivale a la temperatura del aceite en el sensor del aparato.
entrañe un peligro, sólo están permitidos cuando las piezas El sistema de medición mecánico funciona de forma autóno-
estén fuera de tensión o protegidas contra un contacto ma, independientemente del suministro de energía. Depen-
directo. diendo del uso que se le vaya a dar, el sensor se puede montar
BA 2046/00/07 19
3 Montaje
4 Conexión eléctrica
en los equipos adicionales manguito de montaje y manguito Si se emplea un termómetro con un manguito combinado
combinado. Consultar más información sobre el equipo man- o un transmisor de temperatura del transformador ZT-F2,
guito combinado en el manual de servicio BA 2032. consultar los manuales BA 2032 (manguito combinado), o
bien BA 2033 (ZT-F2).
2.2 MT-STW160F2
3.4 Estribo de protección (fig. 2/1) opcional
Termómetro de aguja con microinterruptores ajustables para
indicar la temperatura de arrollamiento o devanado (imagen Si se desea, cabe la posibilidad de colocar un estribo de pro-
térmica). El gradiente de temperatura entre el arrollamiento tección sobre el manguito de protección (fig. 2/2) e insertar el
y el líquido refrigerante (aceite) depende de la corriente en el tubo capilar dentro del estribo. Apretar el tornillo de fijación
arrollamiento. La corriente secundaria del transformador de (fig. 2/4) del estribo de protección en una superficie accesible
intensidad es proporcional a la corriente en el arrollamiento del racor del manguito de protección.
del transformador. Esta corriente secundaria alimenta una
resistencia de calefacción en el equipo adicional ZT-F2 que
provoca un aumento de indicación de la temperatura de
aceite actualmente medida que corresponde a la carga del
transformador (gradiente de temperatura).
Consultar más información sobre el equipo adicional ZT-F2 en
el manual de servicio BA 2033.
3 Montaje
ATENCIÓN
Deben cumplirse de forma estricta las condiciones de
servicio y de montaje prescritas en estas instrucciones de
montaje y servicio.
3.1 Montaje del aparato

Fig. 1
El termómetro de aguja se sujeta al transformador con la placa
de fijación (fig. 1/11). La distancia entre los agujeros de fijación 3.5 Indicador de arrastre (Bild 1/9)
es de 140 mm y el diámetro de los agujeros de 9 mm. Montar el
aparato en vertical. Elegir el lugar de montaje de modo que el El indicador de arrastre se acciona por la aguja e indica su
aparato no esté expuesto ni a vibraciones ni a oscilaciones en la desviación máxima. El indicador de arrastre se pone a cero
red. Montar el aparato en vertical. por medio del botón (fig. 1/10).
3.2 Tubo capilar (fig. 1/12)

Desenrollar el tubo capilar sin torsiones ni pliegues. ¡No
transportar el termómetro de aguja agarrándolo por el tubo! ¡PELIGRO!
Colocar y fijar el tubo capilar, enrollar lo que sobre del mismo
y fijarlo en un lugar que no esté expuesto a altas temperaturas ¡Tensión eléctrica, peligro de muerte!
(máx. 60ºC). Radio de flexión mínimo 10 mm. Diámetro de Desenchufar todos los cables de conexión antes de abrir
arrollamiento mínimo 80 mm (ver fig. 1). el aparato.
3.3 Sonda térmica (Bild 1/13)
Para conectar los cables eléctricos, así como para ajustar y
Llenar 2/3 de la funda del termómetro del transformador comprobar los microinterruptores debe estar abierto el apa-
(p. ej., según EN 50216-4, antigua 42554, o similar) con rato. Girar y elevar para ello el anillo de cierre de bayoneta
aceite o pasta conductora del calor y atornillar el manguito hasta el tope en sentido contrario a las agujas del reloj.
de montaje (fig. 2/2). Introducir el tubo capilar con la
sonda térmica hasta el tope del manguito de montaje y
Al cerrar el aparato, asegurarse de que la posición del indica-
atornillar el racor para cables M16.
dor de arrastre (fig. 1/9) sea la correcta. Dicho indicador debe
hallarse a la derecha de la aguja (fig. 1/4). Volver a colocar el
anillo de cierre de bayoneta y girar hasta el tope en el sentido
que marcan las agujas de un reloj.
20 BA 2046/00/07
5 Control de indicación y reajuste Messko
4.1 Conexión de los microinterruptores (fig. 3)

Plegar hacia arriba la protección de cubierta (fig. 1/2) para
conectar los microinterruptores. Retirar el aislamiento de
los cables de conexión a una longitud de aprox. 160 mm
y el aislamiento de los hilos conductores necesarios a una
longitud de aprox. 6 mm. Montar las atornilladuras de cables
suministradas con los cables de conexión tal y como se indica
en el plano del anexo (fig. 8). Asegurarse de que dichas
atornilladuras se sujeten a los cables de forma hermética.
Conectar los hilos conductores, como indica el esquema de
conexión impreso en la protección de cubierta (fig. 3/3), a la
regleta de bornes (fig. 3/1).
1
Fig. 3
1. Estribo de protección
2. Manguito de protección
3. Sonda térmica
4. Tornillo de fijación
Fig. 2
4.2 Ajuste y comprobación de los microinterruptores (fig. 4)

Fig. 4
Para ajustar un microinterruptor, desplazarlo manualmente a
la posición deseada.
ATENCIÓN
ATENCIÓN No girar nunca la aguja en sentido contrario a las agujas
Los microinterruptores no deben desplazarse tomándolos del reloj, o sea a bajas temperaturas. El sistema de medi-
por las puntas de color del indicador. Las puntas del ción podría dañarse.
indicador podrían romperse o doblarse.
Para comprobar los microinterruptores que se hallan a la Los microinterruptores que se hallan a la izquierda de la aguja
derecha de la aguja, girarla manualmente en el sentido de las deben desplazarse por delante de la aguja en el sentido de las
agujas del reloj pasando por los microinterruptores y seguida- agujas del reloj (como al ajustar los mircrointerruptores) para
mente devolverla a su posición. Un muelle de retroceso hace la comprobación. Tras la comprobación, ajustar de nuevo los
volver la aguja de nuevo a su posición de salida (fig. 4). microinterruptores a su valor original.
ATENCIÓN 5 Control de indicación y reajuste

No soltar la aguja para ello, debe volver a su posición ini- Los termómetros de aguja vienen calibrados de fábrica. Sin
cial lentamente. Si la aguja vuelve a su posición demasiado embargo, si fuera necesario ajustar la aguja, los controles de
rápido podrían dañarse los microinterruptores. indicadores y las mediciones comparativas deberían realizarse
únicamente en baños de agua en movimiento, que se man-
BA 2046/00/07 21
6 Mantenimiento
7 Características técnicas
tengan durante unos minutos (aprox. 15 min) a temperaturas 7 Características técnicas

constantes. Es posible realizar un reajuste. El tornillo de
Dimensiónes ver Fig. 7
ajuste (fig. 1/3) se halla en la parte delantera del instrumento.
Materiales
Anillo frontal y caja: chapa de acero galvanizada y
ATENCIÓN recubierta de polvo RAL 7033
El aparato viene calibrado de fábrica. En caso de reajuste Cristal: vidrio de seguridad laminado
se pierde la garantía de funcionamiento adecuado del Sonda térmica: latón, brillante
aparato. Placa de fijación: acero inoxidable
Conducción capilar: capilares de cobre con
Asimismo, si se reajusta posteriormente se podrían envoltura de protección
producir desviaciones entre el termómetro de aguja y las Atornilladuras de cables: 4x M25x1,5 latón, niquelado
salidas analógicas del transmisor de temperatura ZT-F2.
Especificaciones
Margen de medición: -20...140°C tipo MT-ST160F,
6 Mantenimiento 0........160°C tipo
No se precisa un mantenimiento periódico. MT-STW160F2,
En las comprobaciones regulares del transformador Tolerancia de medición: ±3°C según EN 13190 clase 1
recomendamos realizar los controles siguientes: y DIN 16196
- Comprobar que el exterior del aparato no presente daños. Colocación: puede instalarse en interiores
o al aire libre, resistente a
ambientes tropicales
ATENCIÓN
Temperatura ambiente: -50... 80°C
Los datos indicados en este manual de instrucciones son
válidos para aparatos tipo estándar. En caso de modelos Tipo de protección: IP55 conforme a IEC 60 529
especiales, observar los datos indicados en la placa de Ventilación: dispositivo de ventilación, sin
identificación y en el pedido. condensación hasta un 80%
de humedad relativa
Aguja de arrastre: aguja de máximo con
puesta a cero
1+2 estrecho, estándar
rojo azul verde amarillo
Microinterruptores
Cantidad: entre 1 y 6 microinterruptores
ajustables
Cargabilidad: 5A a 250VAC (110VAC)
cos␸=1
0,4A a 250VDC
0,6A a 110VDC
Posición de interruptores: ver fig. 5 y 6, otros bajo
Fig. 5
demanda
Distancia entre interruptores: 6% del margen de medición
1+2/3+4 estrecho Histéresis de conexión: aprox. 5°C (en caso de tempe-
rojo azul verde amarillo ratura en descenso)
Material de contacto: óxido de plata-cadmio
Tensión de aislamiento nominal: 2500VAC/1min-contactos de
conmutación y circuito de
calefacción a tierra
Fig. 6
22 BA 2046/00/07
8 Anexo Messko
8.1 Plano de acoplamiento
Fig. 7
8.2 Racor para cables
Pieza de empalme en aparato Según EN 60423
Llave 30
Llave 28
Perbunan (NBR) – junta tórica
Latón, niquelado galv.
Junta múltiple NBR para

cable ø 9 … 19 mm (0,35 … 0,75 ” )
Arandela de acero galvanizada

Tapa protectora de polvo
PE-LD para racores no utilizados

Cabel
Bild 8/Fig. 8
BA 2046/00/07 23
© Messko GmbH Phone: +49 (0)6171 / 6398 - 0
11-08 Esser
Gewerbegebiet Fax: +49 (0)6171 / 6398 - 98
www.messko.com An den Drei Hasen E-Mail: info@messko.com
Messko-Platz 1
D-61440 Oberursel/Taunus
Bitte beachten: Die in allen unseren Publikationen

enthaltenen Angaben können in Details von dem gelieferten
Gerät abweichen. Änderungen bleiben vorbehalten.
Important note: The information contained in all of our
publications may differ in detail from the actual equipment
delivered. We reserve the right to make alterations without
notice.
A noter : les informations contenues dans toutes nos
publications peuvent différer en certains détails de
Le rogamos tenga en cuenta: Todos los datos contenidos
en nuestras publicaciones pueden diferir en determinados
detalles con respecto al aparato suministrado. Reservado el
derecho a realizar modificaciones.
BA 2046/00/07 • Art.Nr./Art. no./Núm. de art./Réf. art 990448 • Printed in Germany Messko

www.messko.com BA 2032
Note: Terminals for REMONTE INDICATION

(4...20mA or RTD) must be shortcircuit during
insulation test and the test voltage
(max. 500 VAC) shall be raised gradually
Montage- und Betriebsanleitung

MESSKO Kombihülse
Option: Analogausgang 4..20mA
Deutsch Seite 2, Technische Daten 6
Installation- and Operating Instruction

MESSKO Combi Well
Option: Analog Output 4..20mA
English page 3, technical specifications 6
Instructions de Montage et d’Utilisation

MESSKO Sonde Double
Option: Sortie analogique 4..20mA
Français page 4, Caracteristiques techniques 7
Instrucciones de Montaje y Servicio

MESSKO Vaina Doble
Opción: Salida de Corriente 4..20mA
Messko
Español página 5, Datos técnicos 7
Deutsch
1. Produktbeschreibung 6. Wartung
Die Kombihülse wird mit einem Zeigerthermometer zusam- Die Kombihülse ist wartungsfrei.
men verwendet und dient zur Fernübertragung des Tempe-
ratur-Meßwerts. Der Temperaturfühler (3) eines Zeigerther- 7.1 Anschlußplan
mometers wird in die Kombihülse eingeschoben; dadurch wird
die Temperatur auf dem Zeigerthermometer vor Ort ange-
zeigt. Zur Fernübertragung wird eine elektrische Temperatur-
anzeige an den integrierten Pt100-Meßwiderstand (4) ange-
schlossen. Anstelle des Pt100 Ausgangs kann die Kombihülse
einen 4..20mA Analogausgang erhalten.
2. Zeigerthermometer
Die Kombihülse kann mit unterschiedlichen Zeigerthermome-
tern und Auswerteinstrumenten kombiniert werden. Bei deren
Montage ist die jeweils dazugehörende Betriebsanleitung zu
beachten.
WICHTIG
2-Leiter Technik 3-Leiter Technik 4-Leiter Technik
Meßgeräte sind empfindlich. Bitte deshalb alle Teile vor
Fall, Schlag oder Stoß schützen. Max. Umgebungstempe- z Abschirmung z Abschirmung z Abschirmung
ratur 80°C beachten. + 1. Ausgleichsltg.
1 Meßleitung 1 Meßleitung 1 Meßleitung
3. Montage 2 Meßleitung 2 Meßleitung 2 Meßleitung
Die Kombihülse ist zur Montage in eine Thermometertasche 3 Ausgleichsltg. 3 2. Ausgleichsltg.
nach DIN 42 554 geeignet. Die Thermometertasche zu 2/3
mit Öl füllen. Die Verschraubung G1”(2) von der Kombi-Hülse
abschrauben und in die Thermometertasche einschrauben. 7.2 Anschlußplan
WICHTIG
Die Kombi-Hülse nur ausrichten oder verdrehen, wenn
die Kontermutter gelöst ist.
Die Kombi-Hülse in die Thermometertasche stecken, ausrich-

ten und mit der Kontermutter festschrauben. Den Deckel
abschrauben. Das Kabel für den Pt100 Anschluß durch eine
PG16 Durchführung stecken und unter Beachtung der VDE-
Vorschriften anschließen (siehe Bild 2 und 3). Den Fühler des
Zeigerthermometers durch die andere PG16 Durchführung
stecken und durchziehen ~ 50 cm. Den Fühler bis zum An-
schlag in die Kombihülse schieben ~ 210 mm tief. Die
Kapillarleitung zurückziehen. Die PG16 Durchführungen fest
verschrauben. Den Deckel wieder montieren. z Abschirmung
1 „+“ Anschlußleitung 4..20mA
4. Vergleichsmessungen, Prüfungen
2 „-“ Anschlußleitung 4..20mA
Nach einer Aufwärmzeit von 30 Minuten die Anzeige des Zei-
gerthermometers und der elektronischen Anzeige vergleichen.
Die Anzeigen sollten im Toleranzbereich beider Geräte liegen.
5. Service
Sollten die genannten Maßnahmen nicht zum Erfolg führen,
wenden Sie sich an unser Werk.
2 BA 2032/00/07
English Messko
1. Product Description The Combi Well is maintenance free.

The Combi Well is used in combination with a pointer ther- 7.1 Wiring diagram
mometer and serves for remote indication of the measured
value. The temperature sensor (3) of a pointer thermometer
is installed into the Combi Well; so the temperature value is
displayed locally by the pointer thermometer. For remote in-
dication an electric or electronic indicator is connected to the
Pt100 measuring resistor (4) in the Combi Well. The Combi
Well can be supplied with an analog output signal 4..20mA
instead of a Pt100.
2. Pointer Thermometer
The Combi Well is combined with different types of ther-
mometers and electric indicators. Installation and service
according to their own manuals.
ATTENTION 2 wire circuit 3 wire circuit 4 wire circuit

Measuring instruments are sensitive. So all parts should z shield z shield z shield
be protected from being dropped and from knocks. + 1. compens. line
Notice max. ambient temperature 80°C. 1 sense line 1 sense line 1 sense line
2 sense line 2 sense line 2 sense line
3 compens. line 3 2. compens. line
3. Mounting
The combi well is designed for installation in a thermometer
7.2 Wiring diagram
pocket to DIN 42 554. The thermometer pocket must be filled
at least 2/3 with oil. To install, unsrew the lower nut G1”(2)
of the Combi Well and screw it into the thermometer pocket.
IMPORTANT
Never apply force to the combi well, always slacken the
double screwed connection for realignment.
Insert the Combi Well and ensure correct alignment. Tighten

the double screwed connection. Unscrew the cover. Insert the
cable from the remote display through the cable gland PG16.
Connect it to the terminals (Pt100) as shown under Fig.2 and
3. Make sure to use the right „wire circuit“ for your display.
Insert the temperature sensor ~ 50 cm through the hole in
the casing (PG16) and push fully home (approx. 210 mm)
into the immersion tube of the Combi Well. Pull through the z shield
capillary line, route it without kinks and fix it. Tighten up the 1 „+“ lead wire 4..20mA
cable glands. Screw the cover. 2 „-“ lead wire 4..20mA
4. Testing
Check the indication of the pointer thermometer and the re-
mote display after a warm up of 30 minutes. Both indicators
should be in the individual tolerance.
5. Service
In case of malfunction contact our factory.
6. Maintenance
BA 2032/00/07 3
Français
1. Descriptif du produit 5. Maintenance

La Sonde Double est utilisée avec un thermomètre à aiguilleet Si les mesures préconisées demeurent infructueuses, veuillez
sert à la transmission à distance des valeurs mesurées. La vous adresser à notre usine.
sonde thermique (3) d‘un thermomètre à aiguille est engagée
dans la Sonde Double ; ainsi, la température est affichée sur 6. Entretien
place sur le thermomètre à aiguille. Un indicateur de tempé- La Sonde Double est sans entretien.
rature électrique est raccordé sur la résistance de précision
PT100 intégrée (4) pour la transmission à distance. La Sonde 7.1 Raccordement
Double peut avoir une sortie analogique 4..20mA à la place
de la sortie PT100.
2. Thermomètre à aiguille
La Sonde Double peut être associée à différents thermomètres
à aiguille et instruments d‘analyse. Lors de leur montage,
veuillez bien tenir compte du mode d‘emploi voulu.
IMPORTANT
Les appareils de mesure sont très sensibles. Veuillez
protéger toutes les pièces des chutes, des chocs ou des
coups. Veillez également à une température ambiante
n‘excédant jamais 80°C.
2 Système bifilaire Système à 3 fils
3. Montage z Blindage z Blindage
1 Ligne de mesure 1 Ligne de mesure
La Sonde Double convient à un montage dans une poche de
2 Ligne de mesure 2 Ligne de mesure
thermomètre prévue par la norme DIN 42 554. Remplir au
3 Ligne de comp.
2/3 d‘huile la poche de thermomètre. Dévisser la fermeture
G1” (2) du manchon combiné et la visser dans la poche de Système à 4 fils
thermomètre. Enfoncer la Sonde Double dans la poche de z Blindage + 1. Ligne de compesnation
thermomètre, ajuster et fixer à l‘aide d‘un contre-écrou. 1 Ligne de mesure
2 Ligne de mesure
IMPORTANT 3 2. Ligne de comp.
N‘ajuster ou ne faire pivoter la sonde double que si le

contre-écrou est desserré. 7.2 Raccordement
Dévisser le couvercle. Faire passer le câble de connexion du

PT100 à travers une traversée PG16 et le raccorder en respec-
tant les règles VDE (voir Fig.2 et 3). Introduire la sonde du
thermomètre à travers l‘autre traversée PG16 et la faire passer
jusqu‘à environ 50 cm. Pousser la sonde à fond dans la Sonde
Double à environ 210 mm de profondeur. Retirer le tube
capillaire. Serrer la traversée PG16. Remonter le couvercle.
4. Mesures comparatives, contrôles

Après avoir réchauffé le dispositif pendant 30 minutes,
comparer l‘indication du thermomètre à aiguille et l‘affichage
électronique. Les indications doivent se situer dans le cadre
des tolérances des deux appareils.
z Blindage
1 „+“ Ligne de mesure 4..20mA
2 „-“ Ligne de mesure 4..20mA
4 BA 2032/00/07
Español Messko
1. Descripción del producto 5. Servicio posventa

La Vaina Doble se usa en combinación con un termómetro En el caso de que con las medidas mencionadas no se
indicador y sirve para la transmisión del valor de medición consiguieran los objetivos deseados, les rogamos se dirijan a
de la temperatura. La sonda térmica (3) de un termómetro nuestra fábrica.
indicador se introduce en la Vaina Doble, de esta manera se
indica in situ la temperatura en el termómetro indicador. Para 6. Mantenimiento
la transmisión remota se conecta un indicador de temperatu- La Vaina Doble no precisa mantenimiento.
ra eléctrico a la resistencia de medición Pt100 (4) integrada.
En lugar de la salida Pt100 la Vaina Doble puede contener 7.1 Conexión
una salida análoga 4..20mA
2. Termómetro indicador
La Vaina Doble puede combinarse con diferentes termómetros
indicadores e instrumentos analizadores. Para su montaje
deben tenerse en cuenta las instrucciones de servicio.
IMPORTANTE
Los aparatos de medición son sensibles, por ello rogamos
que se protejan contra caídas, golpes o choques. Tener
en cuenta que la temperatura ambiental máxima debe
ser de 80°C.
sistema a 2 cond. sistema a 3 cond.
z Blindaje z Blindaje
3. Montaje
1 conductor de medición 1 conductor de medición
La Vaina Doble está diseñada para montarla en la bolsa para 2 conductor de medición 2 conductor de medición
termómetros según DIN 42 554. Llenar 2/3 de la bolsa para 3 conductor de medición
termómetros con aceite. Desenroscar la unión G1”(2) de la
sistema a 4 cond.
Vaina Doble y enroscarla en la bolsa para termómetros. Intro-
z Blindaje + 1. conductor de compens.
IMPORTANTE 1 conductor de medición
2 conductor de medición
Alinear correctamente o girar la Vaina Doble únicamente 3 2. conductor de comp.
cuando la contratuerca esté.
ducir la Vaina Doble en la bolsa para termómetros, alinearla 7.2 Conexión
correctamente y fijarla con la contratuerca. Desenroscar la
tapa. Pasar el cable para la conexión Pt100 a través de una
boquilla de paso PG16 y onectarlo teniendo en cuenta las
prescripciones VDE véase Fig. 2 y 3. Insertar la sonda del
termómetro indicador a través de la otra boquilla de paso
PG16 e introducirla ~ 50 cm. Introducir la sonda hasta el
tope en la Vaina Doble ~ 210 mm de profundidad. Retirar la
conducción capilar. Fijar la boquilla de paso PG16. Montar de
nuevo la tapa.
4. Mediciones comparativas, controles

Después de un período de calentamiento de 30 minutos
comparar el valor del termómetro indicador yel del indicador
electrónico. Las indicaciones deberían entrar en el margen de
tolerancia de ambos aparatos. z Blindaje
1 „+“ conductor de medición 4..20mA
2 „-“ conductor de medición 4..20mA
BA 2032/00/07 5
Deutsch English
Technische Daten Technical specifications

Werkstoffe Materials
Gehäuse Aluminium, Druckguß Case Aluminium, die cast
Hülse/Verschraubung Messing, blank Well/Thread Brass
Kabelverschraubung Messing, vernickelt Cable gland Brass, nickled
Pt100 Ausgang Meßwiderstand nach IEC 751 Pt100 output Measuring resistance to IEC 751
Isolation 500V, 50/60 Hz, 1 min., Insulation 500V, 50/60 Hz, 1 min., measuring
Messleitung gegen Masse lead against ground
Stromausgang (Option) Current output (option)
Versorgungsspannung DC: 10..36V ungeregelt, Supply DC: 10..36V unregulated,
max. 10% Restwelligkeit, max. 10% residual ripple,
verpolungssicher protected against reverse polarity
Ausgangssignal 4..20mA Output signal 4..20mA
Max. Bürde 750Ω z.B. Ub=24VDC, (Bild4) Maximum load 750Ω for Ub=24VDC, (Fig.4)
Wiederholgenauigkeit ≤± 0,1% vom Endwert Repeat accuracy ≤± 0,1% at the maximum value
Betriebs- und Umgebungsbedingungen Ambient conditions
Umgebungstemperatur -40..80°C (Pt100 Ausgang) Ambient temperature -40..80°C (Pt100 output)
-20..80°C (4..20mA Ausgang) -20..80°C (4..20mA output)
Schutzart IP55 nach DIN VDE 0470-1. Protection IP55 to DIN VDE 0470-1.
Die Kombihülse ist belüftet. The Combi Well is ventilated.
Aufstellung Innenraum und Freiluft Location Indoor and out of doors
Einbaulage Beliebig Positioning Any
Bild 4 Fig. 4
6 BA 2032/00/07
Français Español Messko
Caractéristiques techniques Datos técnicos

Matériaux Materiales
Caja Aluminio, fundición a presión
Boîtier Aluminium, coulé sous pression
Vaina/atornillado Latón, brillante
Gaine/Fermeture Laiton, mat
filetée Atornillado de cables Latón, niquelado
Salida Pt100 Resistencia de medición
Passe-câble à vis Laiton, nickelé
según IEC 751
Sortie PT100 Résistance de précision IEC 751 Tensión 500 V, 50/60 Hz, 1 min.,
Tension 500 V, 50/60 Hz, 1 min., cable de medición contra tierra
câble de mesurage contre la masse Salida de corriente (opción)
Sortie du courant (option) Tensión de DC: 10..36V no regulada,
alimentación máx. 10% ondulación remanente,
Tension d‘alimentation DC: 10..36 V non régulé
protegido contra polaridad inversa
max. 10% d‘ondulation résiduelle,
protégé des inversions de polarité Señal de salida 4..20mA
Carga máx. 750Ω, p. ej. Ub=24VDC. (Fig. 4)
Signal de sortie 4..20mA
Exactitud repetición ≤± 0,1% del valor final
Charge max. 750Ω par exemple Ub=24VDC
(Fig. 4) Condiciones de servicio y ambientales
Temperatura ambiente -40..80°C (Salida Pt100)
Reproductibilité ≤± 0,1% de la valeur totale
-20..80°C (Salida 4..20mA)
Conditions d‘exploitation et conditions ambiantes Tipo de protección IP55 según DIN VDE 0470-1.
Température ambiante -40..80°C (Sortie Pt100) La Vaina Doble está ventilada.
-20..80°C (Sortie 4..20mA) Colocación Espacio interior y aire libre
Protection IP55 d‘après DIN VDE 0470-1. Posicionamiento Arbitrario
La sonde double est ventilé.
Disposition A l‘intérieur et à l‘extérieur
Position d‘installation Indifférente
Fig. 4 Fig. 4
BA 2032/00/07 7
03-09 Esser
Messko-Platz 1
Bitte beachten: Die in allen unseren Publikationen enthalte-

nen Angaben können in Details von dem gelieferten Gerät
abweichen. Änderungen bleiben vorbehalten.

notice.
Messko
BA2032/00/07 • Art.Nr./Art. no. 990293 • Printed in Germany
BA 2046 Zeigerthermometer/Pointer Thermometer/
www.messko.com
Termómetro de aguja/Thermomètre à cadran
Betriebsanleitung/Operating Instructions/Instructions d’opération/Instrucciones de Operación
BA2046/00/07: deutsch Trasy-Serie: MT-ST160F

english Trasy-Series: MT-STW160F2
français Serie Trasy: MT-STW160F2
español Série Trasy : MT-ST160F
Messko
Inhaltsverzeichnis/Contents
Inhaltsverzeichnis Contents
1 Sicherheit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 1 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
1.1 Sicherheitshinweise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.2 Specified application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Hinweise für den Betrieb des Geräts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.3 Important notes on equipment operation . . . . . . . . . 3
2 Produktbeschreibung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 2 Product specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

2.1 MT-ST160F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.1 MT-ST160F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2 MT-STW160F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.2 MT-STW160F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3 Montage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
3.1 Montage des Geräts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.1 Mounting the device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.2 Kapillarleitung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.2 Capillary tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.3 Temperaturfühler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.3 Temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.4 Tretschutz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.4 Kick protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.5 Schleppzeiger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.5 Maximum pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 Elektrischer Anschluss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 4 Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

4.1 Anschluss der Mikroschalter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4.1 Connecting the microswitches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.2 Verstellen und Prüfen der Mikroschalter . . . . . . . . . . 7 4.2 Checking and adjusting the microswitches . . . . . . . . 7
5 Anzeigekontrolle und Nachjustierung . . . . . . . . . . .8 5 Indication control and readjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .8
6 Wartung. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 6 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
7 Technische Daten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 7 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
8 Anhang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 8 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

8.1 Anbauzeichnung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8.1 Installation diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
8.2 Kabelverschraubung . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8.2 Cable gland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
HINWEIS Note
Die in dieser Betriebsanleitung enthaltenen Angaben The data contained herein may differ in details to the
können von dem gelieferten Gerät abweichen. equipment delivered.
Änderungen bleiben vorbehalten. Subject to change without prior notice.
Für zukünftige Verwendung aufbewahren! Please keep this manual for future reference!
2 BA 2046/00/07
Messko
Table des matières Índice de contenidos

1 Sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 Seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 Consignes de sécurité . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1.1 Instrucciones de seguridad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Utilisation conforme à l’affectation prévue . . . . . . . 3 1.2 Empleo conforme a lo prescrito. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Remarques concernant le fonctionnement de l’appareil 1.3 Instrucciones para el servicio del equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2 Description du produit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2 Descripción del producto. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.1 MT-ST160F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 2.1 MT-ST160F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2 MT-STW160F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 2.2 MT-STW160F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3 Montaje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1 Installation de l’appareil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.1 Montaje del aparato . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.2 Capillaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.2 Tubo capilar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.3 Sonde de température . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 3.3 Sonda térmica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.4 Protection anti-heurts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.4 Estribo de protección . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.5 Aiguille entraînée . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 3.5 Aguja de arrastre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 Branchement électrique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4 Conexión eléctrica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.1 Raccordement des microrupteurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 4.1 Conexión de los microinterruptores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4.2 Contrôle et ajustement des microrupteurs . . . . . . . . . 7 4.2 Ajuste y comprobación de los microinterruptores . . . . . 7
5 Contrôle d’affichage et réajustement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 5 Control de indicación y reajuste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
6 Entretien. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 6 Mantenimiento . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
7 Caractéristiques techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 7 Características técnicas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
8 Appendice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8 Anexo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
8.1 Schéma de montage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8.1 Plano de acoplamiento . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
8.2 Passe-câble à vis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 8.2 Racor para cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
INDICATION ¡ADVERTENCIA!
Les informations contenues dans les présentes instruc- Las indicaciones contenidas en el presente manual de
tions de service peuvent différer en certains détails de servicio pueden diferir del aparato suministrado.
Reservado el derecho a realizar modificaciones.
Conserver soigneusement ce document pour toute utilisation ¡Guardar para uso posterior!
BA 2046/00/07 3
1 Sicherheit
1 Sicherheit Bei der elektrischen Installation sind die nationalen Vor-

schriften zu beachten. Um einen störungsfreien Betrieb zu
1.1 Sicherheitshinweise
gewährleisten, ist der Schutzleiter unbedingt anzuschließen.
Alle Personen, die mit der Montage, Inbetriebnahme, Bedie-
nung, Wartung und Instandhaltung des Geräts zu tun haben,
müssen
ACHTUNG
Einbau, elektrischer Anschluss, Inbetriebnahme und War-
- fachlich ausreichend qualifiziert sein und
tung des Geräts dürfen ausschließlich von qualifiziertem,
- diese Betriebsanleitung genau beachten. ausgebildetem Personal gemäß dieser Betriebsanleitung
Bei Fehlbedienung oder Missbrauch drohen Gefahren für durchgeführt werden.
- Leib und Leben, Der Betreiber hat für die bestimmungsgemäße Verwen-
dung des Geräts Sorge zu tragen.
- das Gerät und andere Sachwerte des Betreibers und
Eigenmächtig und unsachgemäß durchgeführte Arbeiten
- die effiziente Funktionsweise des Geräts bei Ein- und Umbau, elektrischem Anschluss, Inbetrieb-
In dieser Betriebsanleitung werden drei Arten von Sicher- nahme und Wartung – ohne Rücksprache mit Messko –
heitshinweisen verwendet, um wichtige Informationen sind aus Sicherheitsgründen verboten!
hervorzuheben.
WARNUNG
WARNUNG Beachten sie unbedingt die nationalen
weist auf besondere Gefahren für Leib und Leben hin. Brandschutzvorschriften.
Ein Nichtbeachten dieser Hinweise kann zu schwersten
Verletzungen oder Tod führen.
Zeigerthermometer werden zur Temperaturanzeige an Trans-
ACHTUNG formatoren, Drosselspulen oder ähnlichen Geräten eingesetzt.
weist auf Gefahren für das Gerät oder andere Sachwerte
Sie bestehen grundsätzlich aus einem Temperaturfühler, der
des Betreibers hin. Ferner können Gefahren für Leib und
durch eine Kapillarleitung mit dem Messwerk verbunden ist.
Leben nicht ausgeschlossen werden.
An dem Messwerk ist ein Zeiger angebracht, der über eine
Drehbewegung den Temperaturwert auf einer Skala anzeigt.
Das Messsystem, bestehend aus Fühler, Kapillarleitung und
HINWEIS Messwerk, ist mit einer Flüssigkeit gefüllt.
weist auf wichtige Informationen zu einer konkreten
Thematik hin. ACHTUNG
1.2 Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung Messgeräte sind empfindlich. Alle Teile vor Fall, Schlag
oder Stoß schützen.
Das Zeigerthermometer dient der Temperaturmessung an
Leistungstransformatoren, Drosselspulen oder ähnlichen Die Kapillarleitung darf nicht gekürzt werden, das Mess-
Geräten. system steht unter Druck und wird dadurch zerstört.
Vor Inbetriebnahme des Geräts sind die auf dem Typenschild Die in dem Messsystem verwendete Flüssigkeit ist
und in der Betriebsanleitung angegebenen Grenzwerte in der gesundheitsschädlich.
Anwendung zu beachten und unbedingt einzuhalten.
2.1 MT-ST160F
Zeigerthermometer mit verstellbaren Mikroschaltern zur An-
1.3 Hinweise für den Betrieb des Geräts zeige der Öltemperatur. Die angezeigte Temperatur entspricht
der Öltemperatur am Fühler des Gerätes. Das mechanische
Die nationalen Unfallverhütungsvorschriften hat der Anwen-
Messsystem funktioniert selbstständig und energieunabhängig.
der unbedingt einzuhalten.
Gemäß der Applikation, kann der Fühler in den Zusatzgerä-
Es wird besonders darauf hingewiesen, dass das Arbeiten an
ten Einbauhülse und Kombihülse montiert werden. Weitere
aktiven, d.h. berührungsgefährlichen Teilen nur zulässig ist,
Informationen für das Zusatzgerät Kombihülse finden sie in
wenn diese Teile spannungsfrei sind oder gegen direktes
der Betriebsanleitung BA2032.
Berühren geschützt sind.
4 BA 2046/00/07
3 Montage Messko
2.2 MT-STW160F2 3.4 Tretschutz (Bild 2/1) optional

Zeigerthermometer mit verstellbaren Mikroschaltern zur Falls gewünscht, Tretschutz auf die Verschraubung der
Anzeige der Wicklungstemperatur (thermisches Abbild). Der Schutzhülse (Bild 2/2) aufsetzen und die Kapillarleitung
Temperatursprung zwischen Kühlflüssigkeit (Öl) und Wicklung innerhalb des Tretschutzes verlegen. Ziehen Sie die Befesti-
hängt u.a. vom Strom in der Wicklung ab. Der Wandler-Se- gungsschraube (Bild 2/4) des Tretschutzes an einer Schlüssel-
kundärstrom ist dem Strom in der Wicklung des Transfor- fläche der Verschraubung der Schutzhülse an.
mators verhältnisgleich. Der Wandler-Sekundärstrom speist
einen Heizwiderstand im Zusatzgerät ZT-F2 das dadurch eine
der Transformatorbelastung entsprechende Anzeigeerhöhung
der tatsächlich gemessenen Öltemperatur (Sprungtemperatur)
bewirkt.
Weitere Informationen für das Zusatzgerät ZT-F2 finden Sie
in der Betriebsanleitung BA2033.
3 Montage
ACHTUNG
Die in dieser Montage- und Betriebsanleitung vorge-
schriebenen Betriebs- und Montagebedingungen müssen
strikt eingehalten werden.
3.1 Montage des Geräts

Bild 1
Das Zeigerthermometer wird mit der Befestigungsplatte (Bild
1/11) am Trafo montiert. Der Abstand der Befestigungslöcher 3.5 Schleppzeiger (Bild 1/9)
beträgt 140mm, der Lochdurchmesser 9mm. Die Einbaulage
muss senkrecht sein. Der Einbauort ist so zu wählen, dass weder Der Schleppzeiger wird vom Zeiger betätigt und kennzeichnet
Vibrationen noch Netzschwingungen auftreten. dessen Maximalausschlag. Die Rückstellung des Schleppzei-
Die Einbaulage muss senkrecht sein. gers erfolgt über den Knopf (Bild 1/10).
3.2 Kapillarleitung (Bild 1/12)

Rollen Sie die Kapillarleitung knick- und verwindungsfrei
aus. Das Zeigerthermometer darf nicht an der Kapillarleitung
WARNUNG
getragen werden! Verlegen und fixieren Sie die Kapillarleitung,
überschüssige Kapillarleitung aufwickeln und im Bereich nicht Elektrische, lebensgefährliche Spannung!
zu hoher Temperaturen (max. 60° C) befestigen. Minimaler Vor dem Öffnen des Gerätes müssen alle Anschlussleitungen
Biegeradius 10mm. Minimaler Aufwickeldurchmesser 80mm stromlos sein.
(siehe Bild 1).
3.3 Temperaturfühler (Bild 1/13) Zum Anschließen der elektrischen Leitungen, Einstellen und
Trafo-Thermometertasche (z.B. nach EN 50216-4 vormals Prüfen der Mikroschalter muss das Gerät geöffnet werden.
42554 oder ähnlich) zu 2/3 mit Öl oder Wärmeleitpaste füllen Hierzu den Bajonettverschlussring bis zum Anschlag gegen
und die Einbauhülse (Bild 2/2) einschrauben. Die Kapillarleitung den Uhrzeigersinn drehen und abheben.
mit dem Temperaturfühler bis zum Anschlag in die Einbauhülse Beim Verschliessen des Geräts ist auf die richtige Stellung des
einschieben und Kabelverschraubung M16 festschrauben. Schleppzeigers (Bild 1/9) zu achten. Dieser muss rechts vom
Wird das Thermometer mit einer Kombihülse oder einem Zeiger (Bild 1/4) stehen. Den Bajonettverschlussring wieder
Trafo-Temperaturgeber ZT-F2 eingesetzt, siehe hierzu BA2032 aufsetzen und bis zum Anschlag im Uhrzeigersinn drehen.
(Kombihülse) bzw. BA 2033 (ZT-F2). 4.1 Anschluss der Mikroschalter (Bild 3)
Zum Anschließen klappen Sie die Abdeckblende (Bild 1/2)
hoch. Entfernen Sie jeweils den Mantel der Anschlusslei-
tungen auf einer Länge von ca. 160mm und die Isolierung der
BA 2046/00/07 5
5 Anzeigekontrolle und Nachjustierung
benötigten Litzen auf einer Länge von ca. 6mm. Montieren

Sie die beiliegenden Kabelverschraubungen mit den An-
schlusskabeln entsprechend der Zeichnung im Anhang
(Bild 8). Achten Sie darauf, dass die Kabelverschraubungen
die Kabel flüssigkeitsdicht umschliessen. Schließen Sie die
einzelnen Litzen entsprechend dem auf der Abdeckblende
aufgedruckten Anschlussschema (Bild 3/3) an der Klemmleiste
(Bild 3/1) an.
Bild 3
4
1. Tretschutz
2. Schutzhülse
3. Temperaturfühler
4. Befestigungsschraube
Bild 2
4.2 Verstellen und Prüfen der Mikroschalter (Bild 4)

Zum Verstellen eines Mikroschalters, schieben Sie diesen von
Hand in die gewünschte Position.
ACHTUNG Bild 4
Die Mikroschalter dürfen nicht an den farbigen Anzeige-

spitzen verschoben werden. Die Anzeigespitzen können ACHTUNG
abbrechen oder verbogen werden.
Der Zeiger darf nie gegen den Uhrzeigersinn hin zu
tieferen Temperaturen verdreht werden. Das Messsystem
Zum Prüfen der Mikroschalter, die sich rechts vom Zeiger wird dadurch beschädigt.
befinden, drehen Sie den Zeiger von Hand im Uhrzeigersinn
an den Mikroschaltern vorbei und anschließend wieder
zurück. Eine Rückholfeder zieht den Zeiger wieder in seine Mikroschalter, die sich links vom Zeiger befinden, sind zum
Ausgangsposition zurück (Bild 4). Prüfen im Uhrzeigersinn am Zeiger vorbeizuschieben (wie
beim Verstellen der Mikroschalter). Nach dem Prüfen müssen
die Mikroschalter wieder auf ihren ursprünglichen Wert
ACHTUNG eingestellt werden.
Der Zeiger darf hierzu nicht losgelassen werden, er muss
langsam in seine Ausgangsposition zurückgeführt werden. 5 Anzeigekontrolle und Nachjustierung
Schnellt der Zeiger zurück, können die Mikroschalter Die Zeigerthermometer werden im Werk kalibriert. Sollte es
beschädigt werden. dennoch erforderlich sein, die Anzeige neu zu justieren, so
sollten Anzeigekontrollen und Vergleichsmessungen nur in
bewegten Wasserbädern vorgenommen werden, die über
6 BA 2046/00/07
6 Wartung Messko
7 Technische Daten
einige Minuten (ca. 15 Min.) temperaturkonstant bleiben. 7 Technische Daten

Eine Nachjustierung ist möglich. Die Justierschraube (Bild 1/3)
Abmessungen siehe Bild 7
befindet sich auf der Vorderseite des Instruments.
Werkstoffe
Frontring und Gehäuse: Stahlblech, verzinkt,
ACHTUNG Pulverbeschichtung RAL 7033
Das Gerät ist werkseitig kalibriert. Durch eine Nachjus- Sichtscheibe: Verbundsicherheitsglas
tierung erlischt die Garantie für die ordnungsgemäße Temperaturfühler: Messing, blank
Funktion des Geräts. Befestigungsplatte: Edelstahl
Kapillarleitung: Kupfer-Kapillare mit
Weiterhin kann es durch eine nachträgliche Nachjustier- Schutzmantel
ung zu Abweichungen zwischen dem Zeigerthermometer Kabelverschraubungen: 4x M25x1,5 Messing,
und den Analogausgängen der Temperaturgeber ZT-F2 vernickelt
kommen.
Kenndaten
6 Wartung Meßbereich: -20...140°C Typ MT-ST160F,
0........160°C Typ MT-STW160F2,
Eine regelmäßige Wartung ist nicht erforderlich. Messtoleranz: ±3°C nach EN 13190 Klasse 1
Bei den turnusmäßigen Überprüfungen des Transformators und DIN 16196
empfehlen wir folgende Kontrollen durchzuführen: Aufstellung: Innenraum und Freiluft,
tropenfest
- Überprüfen Sie den äußeren Zustand des eingebauten
Umgebungstemperatur: -50... 80°C
Gerätes auf Beschädigungen.
Schutzart: IP55 nach IEC 60 529
Belüftung: Belüftungseinrichtung,
beschlagfrei bis 80% rel.
ACHTUNG Feuchte
Die in dieser Betriebsanleitung gemachten Angaben sind Schleppzeiger: Rückstellbarer Maximumzeiger
für Standardgeräte gültig. Bei Sonderausführungen sind die
Angaben des Typenschilds und der Bestellung zu beachten. Mikroschalter
Anzahl: 1 bis 6 verstellbare
Mikroschalter
1+2 eng, Standard Belastbarkeit: 5A bei 250VAC (110VAC)
cos␸=1
rot blau grün gelb
0,4A bei 250VDC
0,6A bei 110VDC
Schalterstellung: siehe Bild 5 und 6,
andere auf Anfrage
Schalterabstand: 6% des Meßbereiches
Schalthysterese: ca. 5°C
(bei sinkender Temperatur)
Kontaktmaterial: Silber-Cadmium-Oxid
Nennisolationsspannung: 2500VAC/1min-Schaltkon-
Bild 5/Fig. 5 takte gegen Erde
1+2/3+4 eng
rot blau grün gelb
Bild 6/Fig. 6
BA 2046/00/07 7
8 Anhang
8.1 Anbauzeichnung
Bild 7
8.2 Kabelverschraubung
Übergangsstück am Gerät nach EN 60423
SW30
SW28
Perbunan (NBR)-O-Ring
Messing, galv vernickelt
ausschneidbarer Dichtring, NBR

für Kabel ø 9 … 19 mm (0,35 … 0,75 ” )
Stahldruckring, verzinkt
Staubschutzscheibe, PE-LD
für ungenutzte Verschraubungen
Messing, galv. vernickelt

Kabel
Bild 8
8 BA 2046/00/07
1 Safety Messko
1 Safety regulations. It is imperative to connect the ground wire in

order to ensure trouble-free operation.
1.1 Safety instructions
All personnel involved in installation, commissioning, CAUTION
operation or maintenance of this equipment must: Installation, electrical connection, commissioning, and
- be suitably qualified and maintenance of the device may only be carried out by
qualified, skilled personnel and only in accordance with
- strictly observe these operating instructions. these operating instructions.
Improper operation or misuse can lead to It is the responsibility of the user to make sure that the
- serious or fatal injury, device is used for the specified application only.
- damage to the equipment and other property of the user For safety reasons, any unauthorized and improperly
executed work, i.e. installation, modification, alteration
- a reduction in the efficiency of the equipment.
of the equipment, electrical connection, or commis-
Safety instructions in this manual are presented in three dif- sioning of the equipment, are forbidden without first
ferent forms to emphasize important information. consulting Messko!
WARNING WARNING
This information indicates particular danger to life and All relevant fire protection regulations must be strictly
health. Disregarding such a warning can lead to serious observed.
or fatal injury.
Pointer thermometers are used to indicate temperatures on
CAUTION power transformers, reactors or similar equipment.
This information indicates particular danger to the They always consist of a temperature sensor which is con-
equipment or other property of the user. Serious or fatal nected to the measuring device with a capillary tube. The
injury cannot be excluded. measuring device is equipped with a pointer which turns
to show the temperature on a scale. The measuring system
consisting of sensor, capillary tube and measuring device is
NOTE filled with a liquid.
These notes give important information on a certain
issue. CAUTION
Measuring instruments are sensitive. All parts should
1.2 Specified application therefore be protected against falling and against knocks
Pointer thermometers are used to measure temperatures on and vibrations.
power transformers, reactors or similar equipment. The capillary tube may not be shortened otherwise the
It is important to read and observe the limit values for pressurized measuring system will be destroyed.
operation indicated on the nameplate and in the operating The liquid used in the measuring system is hazardous to
instructions prior to commissioning the device. health.
2.1 MT-ST160F
1.3 Important notes on equipment operation
Pointer thermometers with adjustable microswitches for indi-
The user is obliged to comply with the national health and
cating the oil temperature. The indicated temperature is the
safety regulations.
oil temperature at sensor location. The mechanical measuring
It is especially emphasized that works performed to live, e.g. system functions independently and requires no power input.
dangerous-contact components, are permissible only while According to the type of applikation, the temperature sensor
these components are either de-energized or protected can be assembled into such accessory equipment as the ther-
against direct contact. mal well and combi well. Futher information on the combi
Electrical installation is subject to the relevant national safety well can be found in the operating instructions BA2032
BA 2046/00/07 9
3 Installation
4 Electrical connectio
2.2 MT-STW160F2 3.4 Kick protection (Fig.2/1) optional

These types of pointer thermometers with adjustable If required, fit the kick protection to the adapter of the
microswitches are used to indicate the winding temperature thermowell (Fig. 2/2) and route the capillary tube inside the
(thermal image). The temperature difference between the kick protection. Tighten the fixing screw (Fig. 2/4, wrench size
cooling medium (oil) and the winding depends, among other 13mm) of the kick protection to a flat side of the thermowell
things, on the current flowing in the winding. The CT second- adapter.
ary current is proportional to the winding of the transformer.
The CT secondary current feeds a heating resistor inside the
additional device ZT-F2. This provides an appropriate increase
(heat gradient) to the actual indication of the measured oil
temperature, corresponding to transformer load. For further
details please refer to the operating instructions BA 2033 for
the ZT-F2.
3. Installation
CAUTION
The operating and installation conditions demanded
by this installation and operating instructions must be
strictly complied with.
3.1 Mounting the device

The pointer thermometer is attached to the transformer by its Fig. 1
mounting plate (Fig.1/11). The spacing between the fixing holes
is 140mm and the diameter of the holes is 9mm. The thermom- 3.5 Maximum pointer (Fig.1/9)
eter should be installed vertically. The location of the device The maximum pointer is operated by the pointer and records
must be chosen to avoid any irregular vibrations or electro- the maximum reading of a temperature measurement. The
magnetic fields which are above the pertinent electromagnetic maximum pointer can be reset using the knob (Fig. 1/10).
compatibility standards.
3.2 Capillary tube (Fig. 1/12) 4 Electrical connection
Roll out the capillary tube avoiding kinks and loops. Do not rip,
pull, squeeze or bend this tube. Never carry the thermometer WARNING
by the capillary tube. Route the capillary tube and fix it in posi- Electrical voltages, danger to life!
tion. Roll up excess tube and store it in a position not subject
All connecting wiring must be free of voltage before
to excessive temperatures (max. 60°C). Minimum winding
opening the device.
diameter is 80 mm (see fig. 1).
3.3 Temperature sensor (Fig.1/13)
The bayonet fixing ring must be removed in order to connect,
Fill the transformer thermometer pocket (e.g. acc. to EN50216-4, set and check the microswitches. Turn the ring anti-clockwise
formerly DIN 42554 or similar) up to two thirds full with oil or as far as possible and then lift it off.
heat conducting paste and screw the thermowell as shown in
When closing the device, make sure that the maximum
Fig. 2/2 into place. Insert the temperature sensor and capillary
pointer (Fig. 1/9) is in the correct position. It must be to the
tube into the thermowell as far as possible and tighten it up
right of the pointer (Fig. 1/4). Replace the ring and turn it
using the M16 cable gland. If the thermometer is to be used
clockwise as far as it will go.
with either a combi well or a transformer transmitter type
ZT-FZ, please refer to the operating instructions BA2032 or 4.1 Connecting the microswitches (Fig. 3)
BA2033 respectively. To connect the microswitches flip up the covering plate (Fig.
1/2). Remove the outer sheaths of the connecting cables to
a length of approx. 160 mm and then the insulation of the
individual conductors to a length of approx. 6 mm. Install
10 BA 2046/00/07
5 Indication control and readjustment Messko
the cable glands provided loosely to the incoming cables and

housing. This must be done as shown in the appendix Fig. 8.
Pay close attention to cable gland assembly and ensure that
the seal is properly fitted to avoid any water ingress. Connect
the incoming wiring to the terminal strip (Fig. 3/1) in accord-
ance with the connection diagram (Fig. 3/3) printed on the
cover plate.
Fig. 3
4
1. Kick protection
2. Thermowell
3. Temperature sensor
4. Fixing screw
Fig. 2
4.2 Checking and adjusting the microswitches (Fig. 4)

To set a microswitch, slide it by hand to the desired position.
CAUTION
Fig. 4
Do not slide the microswitches on the colored indicator
points. The indicator points may break off or be bent.
CAUTION
The pointer must never be turned anti-clockwise to lower
To check the microswitches which are located to the right temperatures. This will damage the measuring system.
of the pointer, turn the pointer clockwise by hand past the
microswitches and back. A return spring pulls the pointer
back to its original position (Fig. 4).
5 Indication control and readjustment
CAUTION The pointer thermometers are calibrated at the factory. If it
is necessary to readjust it, indication control and comparison
Do not release the pointer here. It must be slowly retur-
measurements should only be carried out in agitated water
ned to its original position. If the pointer snaps back, the
baths in witch the temperature remains constant for several
microswitches may be damaged.
minutes (approx. 15 min.). Readjustments are possible. The
adjustment screw (Fig. 1/3) is on the front of the instrument.
To check the microswitches which are located to the left of
the pointer, slide them clockwise past the pointer, in the same
way as when setting the microswitches. After checking, the
microswitches must be reset to their original positions.
BA 2046/00/07 11
6 Maintenance
7 Technical data
7 Technical data
CAUTION Dimensions refer to Fig. 7
The pointer thermometers are calibrated and set at the Materials
factory. Readjusting them results in the loss of accuracy Ring and casing: Sheet steel, galvanized,
as well as the guarantee for the device. powder coating RAL 7033
Furthermore, a later readjustment can lead to deviations Glass: Laminated safety glass
between the pointer thermometer and the analog Temperature bulb: Brass, bright
Mounting plate: Stainless steel
outputs of the transformer temperature transmitter type
Capillary tube: Copper capillary tube
ZT-F2.
with protective sheath
Cable glands: 4x M25x1,5, nickel-plated
6 Maintenance
Specifications
Regular maintenance is not required. Measuring ranges: -20...140°C Typ MT-ST160F,
During the regular check of the transformer, we recommend 0........160°C Typ MT-STW160F2,
checking the following. Tolerances: ± 3°C according to EN 13190
class 1 and DIN16196
- Check the exterior of the installed device for damage. Location: indoor and outdoor, tropics
Ambient temperature: -50 to 80 °C
Degree of protection: IP55 in accordance with
CAUTION IEC 60 529
The details made within these operating instructions are valid Ventilation: Ventilation unit, no conden-
sation up to 80% humidity
for standard products only. For special designs refer to the
details of the nameplate as well as the order confirmation.
Drag hand: Resetable maximum pointer
Microswitches
Number: 1 to 6 adjustable
microswitches
Rated current: 5A at 250VAC (110VAC)
cos␸=1
1+2 close switching, standart
0,4A at 250VDC
red blue green yellow 0,6A at 110VDC
Switch positions: Refer to Fig. 5 and 6,
others on request
Switching distance: 6% of measuring range
Switching hysteresis: approx. 5°C
(at decreasing temperatures)
Contact materials: Silver-Cadmium-Oxide
Rated insulation voltage: 2500VAC/1min-switching
contacts to ground
Fig. 5
1+2/3+4 close switching
red blue green yellow
Fig. 6
12 BA 2046/00/07
8 Appendix Messko
8.1 Installation diagram
Fig. 7
8.2 Cable gland
Adapter at the device acc. to EN 60423
wrench size 30 mm
wrench size 28 mm
Buna N (NBR)-O-ring
multiple sealing ring, NBR

for cables ø 9 … 19 mm (0,35 … 0,75 ” )
steel washers, galvanized

dust cap, PE-LD
for unused cable glands

cable
Fig. 8
BA 2046/00/07 13
1 Sécurité
1 Sécurité
ATTENTION
1.1 Consignes de sécurité Le montage, le raccordement électrique, la mise en
L‘ensemble du personnel chargé de l‘installation, de la mise en service et la maintenance de l’appareil sont exclusive-
service, de la commande, de l‘entretien et de la maintenance ment l’affaire d’un personnel qualifié et dûment formé,
de l‘appareil doit : et doivent être réalisés conformément aux présentes
instructions de service.
- être suffisamment qualifié et
- respecter rigoureusement ces instructions de service. L’exploitant est tenu responsable de l’utilisation con-
forme de l’appareil.
Les erreurs de commande ou une utilisation non conforme
peuvent être dangereuses pour : Pour des raisons de sécurité, il est interdit d’effectuer
- la santé et la vie de personnes, des travaux concernant le montage, le raccordement
- l’appareil et les autres biens matériels de l’exploitant et électrique, la mise en service, les modifications et la
- le bon fonctionnement de l‘appareil. maintenance de l’appareil sans avoir consulté au préala-
ble la société Messko !
Trois types de symboles concernant des consignes de sécurité
sont utilisés dans ces instructions de service pour mettre en
relief des informations importantes.
AVERTISSEMENT
AVERTISSEMENT Respectez absolument les consignes de protection contre
signale des dangers particuliers pour la vie et la santé. l‘incendie en vigueur dans le pays d’utilisation.
Le non-respect de cet avertissement peut entraîner des
blessures graves, voire mortelles.
ATTENTION Les thermomètres à cadran sont employés pour l’affichage
des températures des transformateurs, des bobines d’induc-
signale des risques pour l‘appareil ou d‘autres biens matériels tance ou d‘autres équipements similaires.
de l‘exploitant. De plus, des dangers pour la santé et la vie de Ils sont constitués essentiellement d’une sonde de tempéra-
personnes ne peuvent pas être entièrement exclus. ture, reliée au dispositif de mesure au moyen d’un capillaire.
Le dispositif de mesure est muni d‘une aiguille qui indique la
INDICATION température sur l‘échelle du cadran. Le système de mesure,
constitué d’une sonde, d’un capillaire et du dispositif de
signale des informations importantes concernant un
mesure, est rempli de liquide.
point particulier.
1.2 Utilisation conforme à l’affectation prévue ATTENTION

Le thermomètre à cadran sert à mesurer les températures sur Les appareils de mesure sont des dispositifs sensibles.
les transformateurs de puissance, les bobines d’inductance ou Protéger tous les composants contre la chute, les chocs
d’autres équipements similaires. ou les heurts.
Avant la mise en service de l’appareil, il convient de tenir Il est interdit de raccourcir le capillaire, car le système de
compte des valeurs limites figurant sur la plaque du construc- mesure serait alors soumis à une pression accrue, ce qui
teur et dans les instructions de service dans le cadre de risque de le détruire.
l’application, et de les respecter impérativement.
Le liquide utilisé dans le système de mesure est nocif
1.3 Remarques concernant le fonctionnement pour la santé.
de l’appareil
L’utilisateur doit obligatoirement tenir compte des prescrip- 2.1 MT-ST160F
tions en matière de sécurité et de prévention des accidents en
Thermomètre à cadran avec microrupteurs ajustables, servant
vigueur dans le pays d‘utilisation.
à afficher la température de l‘huile. La température affichée
Il est à noter particulièrement que toute intervention sur des
est la température de l’huile sur la sonde de l’appareil. Le
éléments actifs, autrement dit dont le contact est dangereux,
système de mesure mécanique fonctionne indépendamment
est permise uniquement si les éléments en question sont hors
et ne nécessite pas d’apport d’énergie. Conformément à l’ap-
tension ou protégés contre tout contact direct.
plication, la sonde peut être installée dans des équipements
14 BA 2046/00/07
3 Installation Messko
4 Branchement électrique
accessoires tels que le manchon de montage et le manchon butée, et vissez fermement le passe-câble à vis M16.
combiné. Des informations supplémentaires concernant le Si le thermomètre est utilisé avec un manchon combiné ou
manchon combiné sont fournies dans les instructions de avec un capteur de température de transformateur ZT-F2, voir à
service BA2032. ce sujet BA2032 (manchon combiné) ou BA 2033 (ZT-F2).
2.2 MT-STW160F2 3.4 Protection anti-heurts (fig. 2/1) en option
Thermomètre à cadran avec microrupteurs ajustables, servant Si nécessaire, placez la protection anti-heurts sur le vissage
à afficher la température de l’enroulement (image thermique). de l’enveloppe de protection (fig. 2/2) et guidez le capillaire
Le saut de température entre le liquide de refroidissement dans la protection anti-heurts. Serrez la vis de fixation (fig.
(huile) et l’enroulement dépend notamment du courant dans 2/4) de la protection anti-heurts au niveau d’une partie plate
l’enroulement. Le courant secondaire du transformateur du vissage hexagonal.
d’intensité est proportionnel au courant dans l’enroulement.
Le courant secondaire du transformateur alimente une
résistance de chauffage située dans l‘équipement accessoire,
ce qui entraîne l’augmentation de l’indication (gradient) de la
température de l‘huile effectivement mesurée, correspondant
à la charge du transformateur.
Des informations supplémentaires concernant l’équipement

accessoire ZT-F2 sont fournies dans les instructions de service
BA2033.
3. Installation
ATTENTION
Il convient d’observer strictement les conditions
d‘installation et de service prescrites dans les présentes
instructions d‘installation et de service.
Fig. 1
3.1 Installation de l’appareil
Le thermomètre à cadran est attaché au transformateur par sa 3.5 Aiguille entraînée (fig. 1/9)
plaque de fixation (fig. 1/11). L’écart entre les trous de fixation L’aiguille entraînée est actionnée par l’aiguille et enregistre la
est de 140 mm, les trous font 9 mm de diamètre. Le thermomè- lecture maximale de la mesure de température. Pour remettre
tre doit être installé à la verticale. L’emplacement d’installation à zéro l’aiguille entraînée, utilisez le bouton (fig. 1/10).
doit être choisi de telle sorte que le thermomètre ne devra subir
ni vibrations ni fluctuations du secteur. Le thermomètre doit 4 Branchement électrique
être installé à la verticale.
3.2 Capillaire (fig. 1/12) AVERTISSEMENT
Déroulez le capillaire en veillant à ne pas le couder et à ne pas Tension électrique ! Danger de mort !
le tordre. Ne portez jamais le thermomètre à cadran en le saisis- Avant l’ouverture de l’appareil, tous les câbles de
sant par le capillaire ! Effectuez la pose du capillaire et fixez-le connexion doivent être hors tension.
dans la position souhaitée, enroulez l’excédent de la conduite
et attachez-la à un emplacement non soumis à des tempéra-
tures excessives (max. 60° C). Rayon de pliure minimum 10mm. Pour pouvoir raccorder les câbles électriques, ajuster et
Diamètre d‘enroulement minimum 80 mm (voir fig. 1). contrôler les microrupteurs, il faut ouvrir l’appareil. A cette
fin, faites tourner l‘anneau à fermeture à baïonnette dans le
3.3 Sonde de température (fig. 1/13)
sens contraire aux aiguilles d‘une montre, jusqu‘à la butée,
Remplissez le doigt de gant du thermomètre du transformateur et enlevez-le. Lorsque vous refermez l’appareil, veillez au
(par ex. selon EN 50216-4, ancienne appellation: 42554 ou si- positionnement correct de l’aiguille entraînée (fig. 1/9). Celle-
milaire) aux 2/3 d‘huile ou de pâte thermoconductrice et vissez ci doit se trouver à droite de l’aiguille (fig. 1/4). Remettez en
le manchon de montage (fig. 2/2). Insérez le capillaire avec la place l’anneau à fermeture à baïonnette et faites-le tourner
sonde de température dans le manchon de montage, jusqu’à la dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre, jusqu’à la butée.
BA 2046/00/07 15
5 Contrôle d’affichage et réajustement
1. Protection anti-heurts
2. Enveloppe de protection
3. Sonde de température
4. Vis de fixation Fig. 3
Fig. 2
4.1 Raccordement des microrupteurs (fig. 3)

Pour effectuer le raccordement des microrupteurs, relevez le
couvercle (fig. 1/2). Enlevez la gaine des câbles de connexion
requis, sur une longueur de 160 mm env., puis l’isolation des
fils souhaités, sur une longueur de 6 mm environ.
Installez les passe-câbles joints avec les câbles de connexion,
conformément au dessin en annexe (fig. 8). Veillez à ce que
l’anneau d’étanchéité du passe-câble enveloppe bien les
câbles et ne laisse échapper aucun liquide. Raccordez chaque
fil sur la réglette à bornes (fig. 3/1) conformément au schéma
de connexions (fig. 3/3) imprimé sur le couvercle.
4.2 Contrôle et ajustement des microrupteurs (fig. 4)
Fig. 4
Pour régler un microrupteur, faites le glisser manuellement
dans la position voulue.
ATTENTION
ATTENTION
Il est interdit de faire tourner l‘aiguille dans le sens
Il est interdit de faire glisser les microrupteurs en les sai- inverse des aiguilles d‘une montre, vers des températures
sissant par les extrémités d‘affichage de couleur. En effet, plus basses. Ceci endommagerait le système de mesure.
les pointes risques de se casser ou de se déformer.
Pour contrôler les microrupteurs qui sont situés à droite de Pour contrôler les microrupteurs qui sont situés à gauche
l’aiguille, faites tourner l’aiguille à la main dans le sens des de l’aiguille, faites les glisser dans le sens des aiguilles d’une
aiguilles d’une montre, au-delà des microrupteurs, puis dans montre, au-delà de l’aiguille (comme dans le cas de la pro-
le sens de retour. Un ressort de rappel ramène l’aiguille dans cédure d’ajustement des microrupteurs). Une fois le contrôle
sa position initiale (fig. 4). effectué, il faut ajuster à nouveau les microrupteurs sur leur
valeur d’origine.
ATTENTION
Pour cela, ne relâchez pas l‘aiguille ; elle doit retourner 5 Contrôle d’affichage et réajustement
lentement dans sa position initiale. Le thermomètre à cadran est calibré à l’usine. S’il est
Si l’aiguille retourne brusquement en arrière, ceci risque cependant nécessaire d’ajuster à nouveau l’affichage, les
d’endommager les microrupteurs. contrôles d’affichage et les mesures comparatives doivent
16 BA 2046/00/07
6 Entretien Messko
7 Caractéristiques techniques
être effectuées uniquement dans des bains d’eau agités, qui 7 Caractéristiques techniques
conservent une température constante pendant plusieurs
minutes (15 min. environ). Des réajustements sont possibles. Dimensions voir fig. 7
La vis d’ajustement (fig. 1/3) se trouve sur la face avant de
Matériaux
l’instrument.
Anneau et carter : tôle d’acier galvanisée, revête-
ment par poudre RAL 7033
ATTENTION Verre de regard : Verre de sécurité feuilleté
L’appareil est calibré à l’usine. Tout réajustement du Sonde de température : Laiton nu
thermomètre à cadran entraîne l’annulation de la Plaque de fixation : inox
garantie de bon fonctionnement de l’appareil. Capillaire : capillaires en laiton avec
gaine de protection
Additionnellement, suite à un réajustement, des écarts Passe-câble à vis : 4x M25x1,5 laiton nickelé
peuvent survenir entre le thermomètre à cadran et les
sorties analogiques des capteurs de température ZT-F2. Caractéristiques assignées
Plage de mesure : -20...140°C Type MT-ST160F,
0........160°C,
6 Entretien type MT-STW160F2,
Il n’est pas nécessaire d’effectuer une maintenance régulière. Tolérance de mesure : ±3°C selon EN 13190 classe
Lors des contrôles de routine sur le transformateur, nous 1 et DIN 16196
recommandons d‘effectuer les vérifications suivantes : Mise en place : à l’intérieur et à l’extérieur,
- vérifiez si l’extérieur de l‘appareil installé ne présente pas tropicalisé
de dommages. Température ambiante : -50... 80°C
Type de protection : IP55 selon CEI 60 529
Ventilation : dispositif de ventilation, sans
ATTENTION condensation jusqu’à 80%
Les spécifications données dans ces instructions de service d’humidité rel.
sont applicables aux appareils standard. Pour des versions Aiguille entraînée : aiguille de maximum pouvant
spéciales, il convient d’observer les indications précisées être remise à zéro
sur la plaque signalétique et dans la commande. Microrupteurs
Quantité : 1 à 6 microrupteurs réglables
Puissance : 5A à 250VAC (110VAC)
1+2 commutation étroite, standard cos␸=1
0,4A à 250VDC
0,6A à 110VDC
Position du commutateur : voir fig. 5 et 6, autres sur
demande
Distance de commutation : 6% de la plage de mesure
Hystérésis de commutation : env. 5°C (à température en
baisse)
Matériaux de contact : Argent-Cadmium-Oxyde
Tension d’isolement nominale : contacts de commutation
2500VAC/1min et circuit
Fig. 5 chauffant contre la terre
1+2/3+4 commutation étroite
Fig. 6
BA 2046/00/07 17
8 Appendice
8.1 Schéma de montage
Fig. 7
8.2 Passe-câble à vis
Adaptateur sur l’appareil selon EN 60423
clé de 30
clé de 28
Joint torique Perbunan (NBR)
anneau d’étanchéité découpable, NBR

pour câble .... 9…19 mm de diam.
(0.35…0,75“)
Rondelle en acier, galvanisée

Rondelle anti-poussière,
PE-LD pour vissages non utilisés

Câble
Fig. 8
18 BA 2046/00/07
1 Seguridad Messko
1 Seguridad Observar las disposiciones nacionales referentes a la instala-

ción eléctrica. Es preciso conectar el conductor protector para
1.1 Instrucciones de seguridad
garantizar un servicio sin averías.
Toda persona involucrada en los trabajos de montaje, puesta
en servicio, operación, mantenimiento y conservación del
equipo debe
ATENCIÓN
El montaje, la conexión eléctrica, la puesta en servicio y el
- disponer de la suficiente cualificación técnica y observar
mantenimiento del aparato deben efectuarse únicamente por
exhaustivamente el presente manual de servicio. En caso de
personal suficientemente calificado y capacitado, siguiendo
uso inadecuado o mal uso existe peligro para
estas instrucciones de servicio.
- la salud y la vida de personas,
El operador debe asegurarse de que el aparato se utilice
- el propio equipo y otros bienes del usuario, así como únicamente para los fines prescritos.
- el funcionamiento eficaz del equipo Por motivos de seguridad, queda prohibido realizar - sin
En el presente manual de servicio se utilizan tres tipos consulta previa con Messko - trabajos por iniciativa propia y
diferentes de señales de seguridad para poner de relieve en forma inadecuada durante el montaje, la reinstalación, la
información relevante. conexión eléctrica, la puesta en servicio y el mantenimiento.
¡PELIGRO! ¡PELIGRO!
Se utiliza para llamar la atención sobre peligros especiales Es absolutamente necesario observar las normas
para la integridad física y la vida. Si no se observan tales nacionales en materia de prevención de incendios.
indicaciones podrán producirse lesiones graves o mortales.

ATENCIÓN
Los termómetros de aguja se emplean para indicar la tempe-
Se utiliza para llamar la atención sobre peligros para el ratura en transformadores, bobinas de reactancia o aparatos
equipo u otros bienes del usuario. Asimismo, cuando se similares.
utiliza esta señal, no pueden excluirse peligros para la Siempre incluyen una sonda térmica que se conecta al
integridad física y la vida. mecanismo de medición por medio de un tubo capilar. En
el mecanismo de medición se ha colocado un indicador que
muestra el valor de la temperatura en una escala por medio
¡ADVERTENCIA! de un movimiento de giro. El sistema de medición, compuesto
Se utiliza para llamar la atención sobre información por un sensor, un tubo capilar y un mecanismo de medición,
relevante sobre cualquier tema determinado. está lleno de líquido.
1.2 Empleo conforme a lo prescrito

ATENCIÓN
El termómetro de aguja sirve para medir la temperatura
Los equipos de medición son sensibles. Por este motivo,
en transformadores de potencia, bobinas de reactancia o
es imprescindible proteger todas las piezas contra caída,
aparatos similares.
golpes o choques.
Antes de la puesta en marcha del aparato, observar y respetar
El tubo capilar no puede ser acortado, el sistema de
los valores límites indicados en la placa de identificación y en
medición estaría bajo presión y podría romperse.
los manuales de instrucciones.
El líquido utilizado en el sistema de medición es tóxico.
1.3 Instrucciones para el servicio del equipo
El usuario debe respetar las disposiciones nacionales en 2.1 MT-ST160F
materia de prevención de accidentes.
Termómetro de aguja con mircrointerruptores ajustables para
Se llama especialmente la atención sobre el hecho de que los indicar la temperatura del aceite. La temperatura indicada
trabajos con piezas activas, es decir, con piezas cuyo contacto equivale a la temperatura del aceite en el sensor del aparato.
entrañe un peligro, sólo están permitidos cuando las piezas El sistema de medición mecánico funciona de forma autóno-
estén fuera de tensión o protegidas contra un contacto ma, independientemente del suministro de energía. Depen-
directo. diendo del uso que se le vaya a dar, el sensor se puede montar
BA 2046/00/07 19
3 Montaje
en los equipos adicionales manguito de montaje y manguito Si se emplea un termómetro con un manguito combinado
combinado. Consultar más información sobre el equipo man- o un transmisor de temperatura del transformador ZT-F2,
guito combinado en el manual de servicio BA 2032. consultar los manuales BA 2032 (manguito combinado), o
bien BA 2033 (ZT-F2).
2.2 MT-STW160F2
3.4 Estribo de protección (fig. 2/1) opcional
Termómetro de aguja con microinterruptores ajustables para
indicar la temperatura de arrollamiento o devanado (imagen Si se desea, cabe la posibilidad de colocar un estribo de pro-
térmica). El gradiente de temperatura entre el arrollamiento tección sobre el manguito de protección (fig. 2/2) e insertar el
y el líquido refrigerante (aceite) depende de la corriente en el tubo capilar dentro del estribo. Apretar el tornillo de fijación
arrollamiento. La corriente secundaria del transformador de (fig. 2/4) del estribo de protección en una superficie accesible
intensidad es proporcional a la corriente en el arrollamiento del racor del manguito de protección.
del transformador. Esta corriente secundaria alimenta una
resistencia de calefacción en el equipo adicional ZT-F2 que
provoca un aumento de indicación de la temperatura de
aceite actualmente medida que corresponde a la carga del
transformador (gradiente de temperatura).
Consultar más información sobre el equipo adicional ZT-F2 en
el manual de servicio BA 2033.
3 Montaje
ATENCIÓN
Deben cumplirse de forma estricta las condiciones de
servicio y de montaje prescritas en estas instrucciones de
montaje y servicio.
3.1 Montaje del aparato

Fig. 1
El termómetro de aguja se sujeta al transformador con la placa
de fijación (fig. 1/11). La distancia entre los agujeros de fijación 3.5 Indicador de arrastre (Bild 1/9)
es de 140 mm y el diámetro de los agujeros de 9 mm. Montar el
aparato en vertical. Elegir el lugar de montaje de modo que el El indicador de arrastre se acciona por la aguja e indica su
aparato no esté expuesto ni a vibraciones ni a oscilaciones en la desviación máxima. El indicador de arrastre se pone a cero
red. Montar el aparato en vertical. por medio del botón (fig. 1/10).
3.2 Tubo capilar (fig. 1/12)

Desenrollar el tubo capilar sin torsiones ni pliegues. ¡No
transportar el termómetro de aguja agarrándolo por el tubo! ¡PELIGRO!
Colocar y fijar el tubo capilar, enrollar lo que sobre del mismo
y fijarlo en un lugar que no esté expuesto a altas temperaturas ¡Tensión eléctrica, peligro de muerte!
(máx. 60ºC). Radio de flexión mínimo 10 mm. Diámetro de Desenchufar todos los cables de conexión antes de abrir
arrollamiento mínimo 80 mm (ver fig. 1). el aparato.
3.3 Sonda térmica (Bild 1/13)
Para conectar los cables eléctricos, así como para ajustar y
Llenar 2/3 de la funda del termómetro del transformador comprobar los microinterruptores debe estar abierto el apa-
(p. ej., según EN 50216-4, antigua 42554, o similar) con rato. Girar y elevar para ello el anillo de cierre de bayoneta
aceite o pasta conductora del calor y atornillar el manguito hasta el tope en sentido contrario a las agujas del reloj.
de montaje (fig. 2/2). Introducir el tubo capilar con la
sonda térmica hasta el tope del manguito de montaje y
Al cerrar el aparato, asegurarse de que la posición del indica-
atornillar el racor para cables M16.
dor de arrastre (fig. 1/9) sea la correcta. Dicho indicador debe
hallarse a la derecha de la aguja (fig. 1/4). Volver a colocar el
anillo de cierre de bayoneta y girar hasta el tope en el sentido
que marcan las agujas de un reloj.
20 BA 2046/00/07
5 Control de indicación y reajuste Messko
4.1 Conexión de los microinterruptores (fig. 3)

Plegar hacia arriba la protección de cubierta (fig. 1/2) para
conectar los microinterruptores. Retirar el aislamiento de
los cables de conexión a una longitud de aprox. 160 mm
y el aislamiento de los hilos conductores necesarios a una
longitud de aprox. 6 mm. Montar las atornilladuras de cables
suministradas con los cables de conexión tal y como se indica
en el plano del anexo (fig. 8). Asegurarse de que dichas
atornilladuras se sujeten a los cables de forma hermética.
Conectar los hilos conductores, como indica el esquema de
conexión impreso en la protección de cubierta (fig. 3/3), a la
regleta de bornes (fig. 3/1).
1
Fig. 3
1. Estribo de protección
2. Manguito de protección
3. Sonda térmica
4. Tornillo de fijación
Fig. 2
4.2 Ajuste y comprobación de los microinterruptores (fig. 4)

Fig. 4
Para ajustar un microinterruptor, desplazarlo manualmente a
la posición deseada.
ATENCIÓN
ATENCIÓN No girar nunca la aguja en sentido contrario a las agujas
Los microinterruptores no deben desplazarse tomándolos del reloj, o sea a bajas temperaturas. El sistema de medi-
por las puntas de color del indicador. Las puntas del ción podría dañarse.
indicador podrían romperse o doblarse.
Para comprobar los microinterruptores que se hallan a la Los microinterruptores que se hallan a la izquierda de la aguja
derecha de la aguja, girarla manualmente en el sentido de las deben desplazarse por delante de la aguja en el sentido de las
agujas del reloj pasando por los microinterruptores y seguida- agujas del reloj (como al ajustar los mircrointerruptores) para
mente devolverla a su posición. Un muelle de retroceso hace la comprobación. Tras la comprobación, ajustar de nuevo los
volver la aguja de nuevo a su posición de salida (fig. 4). microinterruptores a su valor original.
ATENCIÓN 5 Control de indicación y reajuste

No soltar la aguja para ello, debe volver a su posición ini- Los termómetros de aguja vienen calibrados de fábrica. Sin
cial lentamente. Si la aguja vuelve a su posición demasiado embargo, si fuera necesario ajustar la aguja, los controles de
rápido podrían dañarse los microinterruptores. indicadores y las mediciones comparativas deberían realizarse
únicamente en baños de agua en movimiento, que se man-
BA 2046/00/07 21
6 Mantenimiento
7 Características técnicas
tengan durante unos minutos (aprox. 15 min) a temperaturas 7 Características técnicas

constantes. Es posible realizar un reajuste. El tornillo de
Dimensiónes ver Fig. 7
ajuste (fig. 1/3) se halla en la parte delantera del instrumento.
Materiales
Anillo frontal y caja: chapa de acero galvanizada y
ATENCIÓN recubierta de polvo RAL 7033
El aparato viene calibrado de fábrica. En caso de reajuste Cristal: vidrio de seguridad laminado
se pierde la garantía de funcionamiento adecuado del Sonda térmica: latón, brillante
aparato. Placa de fijación: acero inoxidable
Conducción capilar: capilares de cobre con
Asimismo, si se reajusta posteriormente se podrían envoltura de protección
producir desviaciones entre el termómetro de aguja y las Atornilladuras de cables: 4x M25x1,5 latón, niquelado
salidas analógicas del transmisor de temperatura ZT-F2.
Especificaciones
Margen de medición: -20...140°C tipo MT-ST160F,
6 Mantenimiento 0........160°C tipo
No se precisa un mantenimiento periódico. MT-STW160F2,
En las comprobaciones regulares del transformador Tolerancia de medición: ±3°C según EN 13190 clase 1
recomendamos realizar los controles siguientes: y DIN 16196
- Comprobar que el exterior del aparato no presente daños. Colocación: puede instalarse en interiores
o al aire libre, resistente a
ambientes tropicales
ATENCIÓN
Temperatura ambiente: -50... 80°C
Los datos indicados en este manual de instrucciones son
válidos para aparatos tipo estándar. En caso de modelos Tipo de protección: IP55 conforme a IEC 60 529
especiales, observar los datos indicados en la placa de Ventilación: dispositivo de ventilación, sin
identificación y en el pedido. condensación hasta un 80%
de humedad relativa
Aguja de arrastre: aguja de máximo con
puesta a cero
1+2 estrecho, estándar
rojo azul verde amarillo
Microinterruptores
Cantidad: entre 1 y 6 microinterruptores
ajustables
Cargabilidad: 5A a 250VAC (110VAC)
cos␸=1
0,4A a 250VDC
0,6A a 110VDC
Posición de interruptores: ver fig. 5 y 6, otros bajo
Fig. 5
demanda
Distancia entre interruptores: 6% del margen de medición
1+2/3+4 estrecho Histéresis de conexión: aprox. 5°C (en caso de tempe-
rojo azul verde amarillo ratura en descenso)
Material de contacto: óxido de plata-cadmio
Tensión de aislamiento nominal: 2500VAC/1min-contactos de
conmutación y circuito de
calefacción a tierra
Fig. 6
22 BA 2046/00/07
8 Anexo Messko
8.1 Plano de acoplamiento
Fig. 7
8.2 Racor para cables
Pieza de empalme en aparato Según EN 60423
Llave 30
Llave 28
Perbunan (NBR) – junta tórica
Junta múltiple NBR para

cable ø 9 … 19 mm (0,35 … 0,75 ” )
Arandela de acero galvanizada

Tapa protectora de polvo
PE-LD para racores no utilizados

Cabel
Bild 8/Fig. 8
BA 2046/00/07 23
11-08 Esser
Messko-Platz 1
Bitte beachten: Die in allen unseren Publikationen

enthaltenen Angaben können in Details von dem gelieferten
Gerät abweichen. Änderungen bleiben vorbehalten.
notice.
A noter : les informations contenues dans toutes nos
publications peuvent différer en certains détails de
Le rogamos tenga en cuenta: Todos los datos contenidos
en nuestras publicaciones pueden diferir en determinados
detalles con respecto al aparato suministrado. Reservado el
derecho a realizar modificaciones.
BA 2046/00/07 • Art.Nr./Art. no./Núm. de art./Réf. art 990448 • Printed in Germany Messko

9.13 Oil Level Indicator (OIL LEVEL MONITORING)

Page / Version Date
Sheet
No.
drawing:
Type: MTO-STF160G/2CO
Operating instructions: Operating instructions for Oil Level
Indicator

drawing:
Type: MTO-STF160G/2CO
Operating instructions: Operating instructions for Oil Level
Indicator
ATTENTION
diagram.
WARNING

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
9.14 Pressure Relief Valve (PRESSURE MONITORING)

Page / Version Date
Sheet No.
drawing:
Manufacturer: Messko
Type: LMPRD -8psi
Operating instructions: Operating instructions for Pressure
Relief Valve
Dimension drawing:
ATTENTION
diagram.
WARNING
DANGER
If a pressure relief valve triggers (pressure in the tank too high), there is a high risk of
injury by hot insulation oil spraying out under pressure.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
9.15 Dehydrating breather (OIL PROTECTION)

Page / Version Date
Sheet No.
drawing:
Manufacturer: Messko
Type: DB200-T-HTfor tank
Operating instructions: Operating instruction for
dehydrating breather
ATTENTION
diagram.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
9.16 Oil Data-sheets

Page / Version Date
Sheet No.
Material safety data-sheet: See chapter 3.2.3
WARNING
We expressly alert you to the danger of fire from the insulating oil. For flashpoint, see
safety data-sheet.

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
10 Test Certificates of Accessories
10 Test Certificates of Accessories

This chapter contains test certificates of all tests performed according to delivery contracts,
product specifications or instruction manuals / leaflets, not necessarily within the scope of
the standards specified at chapter 11, beside test certificates of tests performed by sub-
suppliers.
No. Test certificate Supplier

1. Test certificate for on-load tap-changer with motor drive / voltage regulator MR
2. Test certificate for control cubicle / connection box / terminal box Northeast power
transmitting and
transforming
3. Test certificate for bushings Shenyang Trench
Nanjingzhida
4. Test certificate for current transformers with control measurement Nanjingzhida
5. Test certificate for fined radiator Shenyangtiantong
6. Test certificate for Buchholz relay EMB
7. Test certificate for gas collector EMB
8. Test certificate for oil temprature indicator Messko
9. Test certificate for winding temprature indicator Messko
10. Test certificate for oil level indicator Messko
11. Test certificate for pressure relief device Messko
12. Test certificate for Dehydrating breather Messko

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
11 Test Certificates of Transformer
11 Test Certificates of Transformer

This chapter contains all transformer test certificates performed at test bay according to IEC .
No. Test certificate Page

1. Rating and Specification 2
2. Test standard 2
3. Leak testing with pressure for liquid-immersed transformers 3
4. Test of transformer oil 3
5. Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement 4
6. Measurement of winding DC resistance 5
7. Measurement of d. c. insulation resistance between each winding to earth, and check of 6
the core and frame insulation
8. Measurement of dissipation factor (tan ) of the insulation system capacitances, and 6
determination of capacitances windings-to-earth
9. Capacitive bushing test 6
10. Measurement of no-load loss and current at 90%, 95%, 100%, 105%, 110% of rated 7
voltage
11. Measurement of harmonic content of magnetizing current 7
12. Measurement of zero-sequence impedance on three-phase transformer 7
13. Measurement of sound level 10
14. Operation test on on-load tap-changer 10
15. Measurement of short-circuit impedance and load loss 10
16. Lightning impulse test 11
17. Applied voltage test 17
18. Line terminal AC withstand voltage test (LTAC) 17
19. Induced-voltage test with partial discharge measurement (IVPD) 18
20. Temperature rise test 19
21. Measurement of the power taken by the fans 20
22. Current transformer test 20
23. Auxiliary wirings check 20
24. Winding frequency response test 20

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
test report Serial No. 101175
Content
1. Rating and Specification............................................................................................................................ 2

2. Test standard ............................................................................................................................................ 2
3. Leak testing with pressure for liquid-immersed transformers................................................................... 3
4. Test of transformer oil .............................................................................................................................. 3
5. Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement ............................................................. 4
6. Measurement of winding DC resistance.................................................................................................... 5
7. Measurement of d. c. insulation resistance between each winding to earth, and check of the core and
frame insulation ................................................................................................................................................... 6
8. Measurement of dissipation factor (tan ) of the insulation system capacitances, and determination of
capacitances windings-to-earth............................................................................................................................ 6
9. Capacitive bushing test ............................................................................................................................. 6
10. Measurement of no-load loss and current at 90%, 95%, 100%, 105%, 110% of rated voltage ................... 7
11. Measurement of harmonic content of magnetizing current ...................................................................... 7
12. Measurement of zero-sequence impedance on three-phase transformer................................................. 7
13. Measurement of sound level .................................................................................................................... 8
14. Operation test on on-load tap-changer ................................................................................................... 10
15. Measurement of short-circuit impedance and load loss.......................................................................... 10
16. Lightning impulse test ............................................................................................................................. 11
17. Applied voltage test ................................................................................................................................ 17
18. Line terminal AC withstand voltage test (LTAC) ...................................................................................... 17
19. Induced-voltage test with partial discharge measurement (IVPD) .......................................................... 18
20. Temperature rise test ............................................................................................................................. 19
21. Measurement of the power taken by the fans ........................................................................................ 20
22. Current transformer test ......................................................................................................................... 20
23. Auxiliary wirings check............................................................................................................................ 20
24. Winding frequency response test............................................................................................................ 20
25. Test Conclusion ....................................................................................................................................... 20
Annex
1 Transformer sweep frequency response analysis report
Siemens Transformer (Wuhan) Co., Ltd., P.R. of China 1/20

1. Rating and Specification

Rated Power: 45000 / 45000 kVA at ONAF
27000 / 27000 kVA at ONAN
Rated voltage: 150±8x1.25% / 33 kV
Rated current: 173.2 / 787.3 A at ONAF

103.9 / 472.4 A at ONAN
Rated frequency: 50Hz
Connection symbol: YNd1
Type of cooling: ONAN / ONAF (60% / 100%)
Insulation level: HV Um 170 / LI 650 / LIC 715 / AC275 kV
HVN Um 36 / LI 170 / AC70 kV
LV Um 36 / LI 170 / LIC187 / AC70 kV
2. Test standard
IEC 60296-2012 Fluids for electrotechnical applications – Unused mineral insulating oils for trans-
formers and switchgear
IEC 60076-1-2011 Power transformers-Part1: General
IEC 60076-2-2011 Power transformers-Part2: Temperature rise for liquid-immersed transformers
IEC 60076-3-2013 Power transformers-Part3: Insulation level, dielectric tests and external clear-
ances in air
IEC 60076-4-2002 Power transformers-Part4: Guide to the lightning impulse and switch impulse
testing - Power transformers and reactors
IEC 60076-10-2016 Power transformers-Part10: Determination of sound levels
IEC 60076-18-2012 Measurement of frequency response
IEC 61181-2012 Mineral oil-filled electrical equipment-Application of dissolved gas analysis (DGA)
to factory tests on electrical equipment
IEC 60422-2013 Mineral insulating oil electrical equipment - Supervision and maintenance
guidance

3. Leak testing with pressure for liquid-immersed transformers
Leakage
Supplied pressure
Test method Position test time Test result
(kPa) (h)
Oil pressure of
Supplied dry No leakage and no
the highest oil 35 24
compressed air damage
level
4. Test of transformer oil
Breakdown voltage tan at 90 C Water content

( kV ) (%) (ppm)
78.4 0.17 3.6
Chromatography Analysis
H2 CO CO2 CH4 C2H4 C2H6 C2H2 C1+C2
(ppm)
Before dielectric tests 3.7 5.6 186.1 0.2 0 0 0 0.2
After dielectric tests 4.1 6.3 210.5 0.3 0 0 0 0.3

5. Measurement of voltage ratio and check of phase displacement
(H.V.) (L.V.) Calculated Measured error (%)

Voltage voltage
Tap Voltage (V) ratio AB/ab BC/bc CA/ca
(V)
1 165000 5.0000 0.14 0.13 0.16
2 163125 4.9432 0.12 0.13 0.15
3 161250 4.8864 0.11 0.13 0.14
4 159375 4.8295 0.10 0.10 0.13
5 157500 4.7727 0.09 0.11 0.12
6 155625 4.7159 0.11 0.10 0.11
7 153750 4.6591 0.08 0.08 0.09
8 151875 4.6023 0.08 0.08 0.08
9B 150000 33000 4.5454 0.06 0.09 0.07
10 148125 4.4886 0.06 0.09 0.06
11 146250 4.4318 0.05 0.06 0.05
12 144375 4.3750 0.03 0.05 0.03
13 142500 4.3182 0.00 0.04 0.02
14 140625 4.2614 0.02 -0.02 0.01
15 138750 4.2045 0.01 -0.03 -0.01
16 136875 4.1477 -0.02 0.01 -0.02
17 135000 4.0909 -0.03 -0.02 -0.03

Connection symbol: YNd1

6. Measurement of winding DC resistance

Temperature of oil: 25.2 C
Measured value ( ) Max Unbalance rate

Winding Tap
A-N B-N C-N (%)
1 1.038 1.039 1.040
2 1.028 1.029 1.029
3 1.018 1.019 1.019
4 1.007 1.009 1.009
5 0.9980 0.9989 0.9991
6 0.9875 0.9886 0.9887
7 0.9774 0.9783 0.9785
8 0.9671 0.9680 0.9680
H.V. 9B 0.9554 0.9560 0.9554 0.20
10 0.9665 0.9675 0.9675
11 0.9768 0.9777 0.9779
12 0.9870 0.9881 0.9880
13 0.9975 0.9985 0.9987
14 1.007 1.008 1.008
15 1.018 1.019 1.019
16 1.028 1.029 1.029
17 1.038 1.039 1.040
a-b b-c c-a

L.V. 0.24
/ 0.08027 0.08009 0.08028

7. Measurement of d. c. insulation resistance between each winding to earth, and check of the core and
frame insulation

Insulation resistance
Absorption ratio
Measurement part Test voltage (M )
R15S R60S R60S/R15S
LV - HV & G 5000V-DC 4330 11770 2.72
HV - LV & G 5000V-DC 5990 10610 1.77
HV & LV - G 5000V-DC 6290 13200 2.10
Core – Ground 2500V-DC 7700 M
Clamp – Ground 2500V-DC 9130 M
Core – Clamp 2500V-DC 12110 M
8. Measurement of dissipation factor (tan ) of the insulation system capacitances, and determination of ca-
pacitances windings-to-earth
Measurement part tan (%) Capacitance (pF)
LV - HV & G 0.184 18920
HV - LV & G 0.154 11950
HV & LV - G 0.190 15310
9. Capacitive bushing test

Capacitance
Serial No. Type Code tan (%)
(pF)
1708305 ETA-170/630-4 ET6128 0.374 346.0
1708306 ETA-170/630-4 ET6128 0.330 319.0
1708304 ETA-170/630-4 ET6128 0.360 350.8

10. Measurement of no-load loss and current at 90%, 95%, 100%, 105%, 110% of rated voltage
Mean value r.m.s. value No load current No load loss( kW )

%
(kV) (kV) (A) (%) Measure value Corrected value
90 29.740 29.803 0.279 0.035 10.81 10.79
95 31.343 31.412 0.295 0.037 12.03 12.00
100 33.009 33.086 0.310 0.039 13.45 13.42
105 34.645 34.727 0.326 0.041 14.93 14.89
110 36.311 36.402 0.347 0.044 16.70 16.66
11. Measurement of harmonic content of magnetizing current
Harmonics percent (%)

Phase
3 5 7 9 11
A 6.2 7.8 4.0 0.7 2.2
B 10.8 6.2 3.6 0.4 1.7
C 15.8 5.9 5.0 0.7 2.9
12. Measurement of zero-sequence impedance on three-phase transformer
Zero-sequence
Voltage Current
Impedance
Supplied terminals Status of other terminals
(V) (A) /phase)
ABC-N abc opened 1278.6 63.771 60.14

Note: The tap position is at principal tap.

13. Measurement of sound level

13.1 3.0m away from the principal radiating surface for no load test at 100%Ur(ONAN)
A weighted sound A weighted sound
pressure level pressure level
Measured point (dB) Measured point (dB)
1/3H 2/3H 1/3H 2/3H
1 47.1 44.4 22 44.6 43.4
2 44.8 45.3 23 43.7 42.8
3 45.7 43.5 24 43.9 44.9
4 45.6 45.1 25 45.1 43.8
5 46.0 45.3 26 44.4 45.9
6 45.1 46.4 27 44.0 42.7
7 46.3 45.5 28 44.3 45.6
8 45.8 47.3 29 44.3 44.6
9 46.3 45.9 30 44.8 43.7
10 45.6 45.3 31 45.6 47.8
11 46.8 45.1 32 45.3 46.1
12 43.3 45.3 33 46.8 44.3
13 44.6 45.3 34 48.3 47.6
14 43.2 44.6 35 48.2 45.4
15 45.3 45.1 36 46.1 43.2
16 45.2 44.7 37 44.6 42.7
17 47.5 43.8 38 44.5 47.3
18 45.3 46.3 39 45.3 45.2
19 45.3 43.1 40 46.1 47.2
20 45.1 46.3 41 45.3 46.7
21 46.7 46.5 42 45.4 45.3
Result:
Tap 9B
Uncorrected A-weighted surface sound pressure level (dB) 45.5
Environmental correction (dB) 3.4
Corrected A-weighted surface sound pressure level (dB) 42.1

13.2 3.0m away from the principal radiating surface for no load test at 100%Ur(ONAF)
A weighted sound A weighted sound
pressure level pressure level
Measured point (dB) Measured point (dB)
1/3H 2/3H 1/3H 2/3H
1 71.5 71.0 22 71.6 73.0
2 71.3 71.4 23 71.8 72.8
3 71.5 71.3 24 72.0 72.6
4 70.5 71.1 25 71.5 71.6
5 71.0 71.3 26 71.7 72.3
6 70.9 71.5 27 70.8 71.3
7 70.8 71.6 28 68.8 70.0
8 71.0 71.6 29 68.5 69.5
9 71.4 72.0 30 68.6 69.6
10 71.1 71.9 31 69.0 70.5
11 71.8 71.9 32 70.5 70.3
12 71.7 72.6 33 71.8 71.8
13 72.3 72.5 34 72.5 72.0
14 73.0 72.9 35 72.1 72.5
15 72.5 73.2 36 72.8 71.6
16 72.8 73.1 37 71.4 72.5
17 73.3 73.6 38 73.4 73.3
18 72.3 73.0 39 71.7 72.8
19 72.0 73.1 40 73.9 73.4
20 72.7 73.0 41 73.6 73.1
21 72.7 73.0 42 72.5 71.4
Result:
Tap 9B
Uncorrected A-weighted surface sound pressure level (dB) 72.0
Environmental correction (dB) 3.4
Corrected A-weighted surface sound pressure level (dB) 68.6

14. Operation test on on-load tap-changer
Manufacturer MR
Type: VMIII300Y-72.5/B-10193WR
Serial NO.: 1885552
Operation test:
(1) With the transformer un-energized, eight complete cycles of operation (a cycle of operation goes
from one end of the tapping range to the other, and back again).
(2) With the transformer un-energized, and with the auxiliary voltage reduced to 85% of its rated
value, one complete cycle of operation.
(3) With the transformer energized at rated voltage and frequency at no load, one complete cycle of
operation.
(4) With one winding short-circuited and, as far as practicable, rated current in the tapped winding,
10 tap-change operations across the range of two steps on each side from where a coarse or revers-
ing changeover selector operates, or otherwise from the middle tapping.
Above service test all normal.
15. Measurement of short-circuit impedance and load loss
15.1 Based on 27MVA

Measured
Measurement Supplied current Impedance Load loss at 75 C
Tap voltage
part (A) (%) (kW)
(kV)
1 95.412 13.046 7.83 68.89
HV- LV 9B 108.45 11.730 7.49 72.37
17 118.22 10.119 7.32 84.42
15.2 Based on 45MVA

Measured
Measurement Supplied current Impedance Load loss at 75 C
Tap voltage
part (A) (%) (kW)
(kV)
1 95.412 13.046 13.05 191.36
HV- LV 9B 108.45 11.730 12.49 201.03
17 118.22 10.119 12.20 234.49

16. Lightning impulse test
Full wave Chopped wave

Tested
Tap Conclusion
terminal Voltage (T1/T2) Voltage (T1/Tc)
(kV) s) (kV) ( s)
A 1 650 1.42/53.7 715 1.43/3.46
B 9B 650 1.41/51.4 715 1.43/3.41
C 17 650 1.45/52.1 715 1.44/3.42
N 1 170 1.23/49.4 - - Passed
a - 170 1.26/59.5 187 1.28/4.32
b - 170 1.27/55.8 187 1.27/4.32
c - 170 1.26/55.7 187 1.28/4.31
Full waveforms of lightning impulse test as follow:






17. Applied voltage test
Voltage supplied Test voltage Frequency Duration

Earthed Conclusion
to (kV) (Hz) (s)
HV line terminals All remaining
and HV neutral windings, core 70 50 60
terminal and clamp
Passed
All remaining
LV line terminals windings, core 70 50 60
and clamp
18. Line terminal AC withstand voltage test (LTAC)
Phase to ground test

Test voltage (kV) Frequency Duration
Tap Phase Conclusion
(Phase to earth) (Hz) (s)
5 A,B,C 275.0 200 30 Passed
Note: HV side is at tap 5; Test frequency: 200Hz.

19. Induced-voltage test with partial discharge measurement (IVPD)
Ur=150.0kV
Quantity of partial discharge
Time sequence Test voltage (pC)
(min) (kV)
A B C
(0.4 Ur)/ 3 / 34.6 18 21 19
0 103.9 18 21 19
(1.2 Ur)/ 3
1 103.9 17 23 23
0 136.8 17 23 25
(1.58 Ur)/ 3
5 136.8 17 23 24
(2.0 Ur)/ 3 30s 173.2 20 24 23
0 136.8 23 24 22
5 136.8 22 22 22
10 136.8 21 20 21
15 136.8 21 20 20
20 136.8 22 21 21
25 136.8 21 20 21
(1.58 Ur)/ 3 30 136.8 22 21 21
35 136.8 22 21 21
40 136.8 21 20 22
45 136.8 21 21 21
50 136.8 23 20 22
55 136.8 22 21 21
60 136.8 22 20 22
0 103.9 22 21 21
(1.2 Ur)/ 3
1 103.9 22 21 21
(0.4 Ur)/ 3 / 34.6 22 21 21
Result 22 20 21
Note: HV side is at tap 9B (rated tap); Test frequency: 200Hz

20. Temperature rise test

20.1 Test result at ONAN
Load loss at tap 17: 84.42 kW
No load loss: 13.42 kW
Total loss at tap 17: 97.84 kW
HV rated current at tap 17: 115.5 A
LV rated current: 472.4 A
Measuring result of the temperature rise test:
Top oil temperature rise at total loss: 40.8 K
Average oil temperature rise at total loss: 32.2 K
HV winding average temperature rise: 40.4 K
HV winding hotspot temperature rise: 51.5 K
LV winding average temperature rise: 46.1 K
LV winding hotspot temperature rise: 58.9 K
20.2 Test result at ONAF

Load loss at tap 17: 234.49 kW
No load loss: 13.42 kW
Total loss at tap 17: 247.91 kW
HV rated current at tap 17: 192.5 A
LV rated current: 787.3 A
Measuring result of the temperature rise test
Top oil temperature rise at total loss: 45.0 K
Average oil temperature rise at total loss: 30.3 K
HV winding average temperature rise: 43.2 K
HV winding hotspot temperature rise: 61.8 K
LV winding average temperature rise: 40.6 K
LV winding hotspot temperature rise: 58.4 K
20.3 Result for oil Chromatography Analysis

Chromatography
Analysis H2 CO CO2 CH4 C2H4 C2H2 C2H6 C1+C2
(ppm)
Before temperature
0.4 0.3 161.6 0.2 0 0 0 0.2
rise test
After temperature rise

3.7 5.6 186.1 0.2 0 0 0 0.2
test

21. Measurement of the power taken by the fans
Supplied voltage Measured current Measured Power

Measurement
(V) (A) (kW)
Fans group 399.6 12.61 6.85
Spare fan 405.9 1.430 0.78
22. Current transformer test
Phase: HV-B
Type:LR- Serial NO.:1769058
Primary Secondary Measured
Measured Resistance
current current error Polarity
terminal ( )
(A) (A) (%)
1S1-1S2 0.693 250 2 -0.748 Subtractive
Phase: HV-N
Type:PX- Serial NO.:1769056
Measured Resistance
terminal ( )
(A) (A) (%)
1S1-1S2 1.338 150 1 0.655 Subtractive
1S1-1S3 2.384 300 1 0.509 Subtractive
Phase: Lv-b
Type:LR- Serial NO.:1769060
Measured Resistance
terminal ( )
(A) (A) (%)
1S1-1S2 1.671 1050 2 0.457 Subtractive
23. Auxiliary wirings check

Point to point check
Device Check basis Conformity
All auxiliary wirings Schematic diagram Yes
24. Winding frequency response test
See report of transformer sweep frequency response analysis in annex 3
25. Test Conclusion
Test passed.

Frequency Response Analysis Report
Customer Indonesia Tolo Windfarm Project Substation Indonesia Tolo Windfarm Project
Winding Low voltage windings Serial No. 101175
Tap-change tap / Top oil temperature 24.8ºC
Test Equipment FRAX-99 Test Date 2017/11/11
Magnitude
-15
-20
-25
-30
(dB)
-35
-40
-45
-50
-55
0 200 k 400 k 600 k 800 k 1M 1.2 M 1.4 M 1.6 M 1.8 M 2M
(Hz)
[ab] [bc] [ca]
Conclusion passed
Siemens Transformer (Wuhan) Co., Ltd., P.R. of China

Winding High voltage windings Serial No. 101175
Tap-change tap Tap 1 Top oil temperature 24.8ºC
Magnitude
-10
-20
(dB)
-30
-40
-50
0 200 k 400 k 600 k 800 k 1M 1.2 M 1.4 M 1.6 M 1.8 M 2M

(Hz)
[AN ] [BN ] [CN ]
Conclusion passed

Tap-change tap Tap 9b Top oil temperature 24.8ºC
Magnitude
-10
-20
(dB)
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
0 200 k 400 k 600 k 800 k 1M 1.2 M 1.4 M 1.6 M 1.8 M 2M
(Hz)
[AN ] [BN] [CN ]
Conclusion passed

Tap-change tap Tap 17 Top oil temperature 24.8ºC
Magnitude
-10
-20
(dB)
-30
-40
-50
0 200 k 400 k 600 k 800 k 1M 1.2 M 1.4 M 1.6 M 1.8 M 2M

(Hz)
[AN ] [BN ] [CN ]
Conclusion passed

12 Drawings
12 Drawings
No. Name Drawing No. Sheet Rev.
Dimension drawing of transformer
1. Dimension partlist drawing V 04 17 775-01
2. Dimension drawing V 04 17 775
3. Nameplate drawing V 04 17 779
4. Transportation drawing V 04 17 776
5. Temperature control circuit drawing V 04 17 775
6. Operating instruction for transformer

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
Date Approved
release status
Distr.
Team
M
Des'd Title General
Chk'd tolerances
Project Scale
AutoCAD
STWH W.D. Dwg. Sheet
No. No. No.
2017
13.05 191.36
12.49 201.03 13.41
12.20 234.49 0.039
20200
Approved
Date
Distr. release status

Team
Des'd Title General

Chk'd tolerances
Project Scale
AutoCAD
No. No. No.
Approved
Date
Distr. release status
Team
Des'd Title General
Chk'd tolerances
Project Scale
AutoCAD
No. No. No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A
A
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF COOLING CONTROL CUBICLE (GH001)

B PROJECT NAME Indonesia Tolo Windfarm Project B
ORDER NO. V101175&1176

DRAWING NO. V04 17 778-01
C
C
EDITION 0
D D
E E
Date: Jul.20.2017 Approved
Rev.0
Des'd: Wang Jingying release status
Project: Indonesia Tolo Windfarm Project
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
Title: SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF COOLING CONTROL CUBICLE F
F
Dwg.Name COVER SHEET CAD
SIEMENS TRANSFORMER(WUHAN) CO.LTD. W.D. No. V101175&1176 Sheet 1/20
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Item DWG No Page No Sheets Date DOCUMENT DESIGNATION
1 V04 17 778-01 1 20 Jul.20.2017 COVER SHEET

A
A
2 V04 17 778-01 2 20 Jul.20.2017 CONTENTS
3 V04 17 778-01 3 20 Jul.20.2017 POWER CIRCUIT FOR MARSHALLING CABINET
4 V04 17 778-01 4 20 Jul.20.2017 FAN GROUP
5 V04 17 778-01 5 20 Jul.20.2017 FAN GROUP AND SPARE FAN
6 V04 17 778-01 6 20 Jul.20.2017 AUXILIARY CIRCUIT
B B
7 V04 17 778-01 7 20 Jul.20.2017 COOLING CONTROL CIRCUIT
8 V04 17 778-01 8 20 Jul.20.2017 SIGNAL CONTACT
9 V04 17 778-01 9 20 Jul.20.2017 TRIP CONTACT
10 V04 17 778-01 10 20 Jul.20.2017 ALARM CONTACT
11 V04 17 778-01 11 20 Jul.20.2017 SPARE AND BREATHER SIGNAL
C 12 V04 17 778-01 12 20 Jul.20.2017 CURRENT TRANSFORMER

C
13 V04 17 778-01 13 20 Jul.20.2017 THERMAL REPLICA
14 V04 17 778-01 14 20 Jul.20.2017 TERMINAL DIAGRAM 1
15 V04 17 778-01 15 20 Jul.20.2017 TERMINAL DIAGRAM 2
16 V04 17 778-01 16 20 Jul.20.2017 LIST OF EQUIPMENT 1
17 V04 17 778-01 17 20 Jul.20.2017 LIST OF EQUIPMENT 2
D 18 V04 17 778-01 18 20 Jul.20.2017 MARSHALLING CABINET OUTLINE

D
19 V04 17 778-01 19 20 Jul.20.2017 THE LOCATION OF ELEMENT TERMINAL
20 V04 17 778-01 20 20 Jul.20.2017 CABLE LIST
E E
Rev.0
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
F
Dwg.Name CONTENTS CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
POWER CIRCUIT FOR MARSHALLING CABINET
VOLTAGE MONITOR
POWER SUPPLY BY CUSTOMER SUPPLY FOR SUPPLY FOR AC380V SUPPLY FOR SUPPLY FOR SUPPLY FOR SUPPLY FOR SUPPLY FOR SUPPLY FOR
3PH/N 400/230VAC 50Hz FAN GROUP SPARE FAN OLTC HEATER&LIGHT CONTROL MAIN BREATHER OLTC BREATHER SOCKET
22 21
/7.A1 A
A X01
14 13
N 4 light blue
L1 1 1 2 yellow
I
L2 2 3 4 green
By customer
I
L3 3 5 6 red
light blue
light blue
light blue
light blue
light blue
light blue
yellow
green
green
yellow
yellow
yellow
green
green
green
-Q1
yellow
green
50A
red
red
red
red
red
red
green/yellow EB1
PE
B EB2 -K7 L1 L2 L3 B
/7.A2 14 11
1
3
5
1
3
5
-Q11 -Q31
13
21
13
21
13
21
13
21
13
21
13
13
21
21
3
-F1 -F2 -F3 -F4 -F5
3
21
/8.A2 22
14
22
14
22
14
22
14
22
14
22
14
22
14
22
4A 4A 4A 4A 10A
10A
10-16A
/7.C3
/8.A5
/7.A3
/8.A4
/8.A4
/7.D6
/8.C1
/8.A5
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Setting:15A
2
4
6
2
4
6
4
4 mm sq. 2.5 mm sq. 2.5 mm sq. 1.5 mm sq. 1.5 mm sq. 2.5 mm sq. 1.5 mm sq.
1
3
5
light blue
light blue
light blue
light blue
yellow
green
21L1
21L2
21L3
21N
K11
light blue
red
green
C
red
2
4
6
/6.D5
X01 C
7 8 9 5
X01 X01 X01 X01 X01
20L1
22L1
20L2
20L3
22L2
22L3
11 17 30 45 21 22 EB1 24 25 EB1 27 28
X1
/4.A1
/4.A1
/4.A1
/5.A6
/5.A6
/5.A6
1 5 6 7
1N1
2N1
3N1
+GX001 +GX002
1L1
2L1
3L1
OLTC
PE
PE
N
N
L
L
/6.A1
/7.A1
/6.A7
FAN GROUP SPARE FAN AC 400V OLTC
BREATHER BREATHER
HEATER&LIGHT CONTROL MAIN TANK OLTC SOCKET
SUPPLY SUPPLY
D D
E E
Rev.0
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
F
MARSHALLING Dwg.Name POWER CIRCUIT FOR CONTROL CABINET CAD
CABINET GH001
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FAN GROUP
FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN FAN
+AN 701 +AN 702 +AN 703 +AN 704 +AN 705 +AN 706 +AN 707
/3.C3
/3.C3
/3.C3
A
A
20L1
20L2
20L3
yellow
green
red
B /5.B1 B
/5.B1
/5.B1
1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
-Q41 -Q42 -Q43 -Q44 -Q45 -Q46 -Q47
31
41
31
41
31
41
31
41
31
41
31
41
31
41
32
42
32
42
32
42
32
42
32
42
32
42
32
42
/7.C4
/7.C4
/7.C4
/7.C4
/7.C4
/7.C4
/7.C4
/8.A6
/8.A7
/8.A7
/8.A7
/8.A7
/8.A8
/8.A8
1.1-1.6A 1.1-1.6A 1.1-1.6A 1.1-1.6A 1.1-1.6A 1.1-1.6A 1.1-1.6A
Setting:1.45A Setting:1.45A Setting:1.45A Setting:1.45A Setting:1.45A Setting:1.45A Setting:1.45A
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
C
2.5 mm sq. 2.5 mm sq. 2.5 mm sq. 2.5 mm sq. 2.5 mm sq. 2.5 mm sq. 2.5 mm sq. C
MARSHALLING
CABINET GH001
X4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EB1
D D
TRANSFORMER
RADIATORS
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
W
W
U
U
V
V
+AN 701 +AN 702 +AN 703 +AN 704 +AN 705 +AN 706 +AN 707
M M M M M M M
-M1 3~ -M2 3~ -M3 3~ -M4 3~ -M5 3~ -M6 3~ -M7 3~
E 840W 840W 840W 840W 840W 840W 840W E
1.45A 1.45A 1.45A 1.45A 1.45A 1.45A 1.45A
Rev.0
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
F
Dwg.Name FAN GROUP CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FAN GROUP AND SPARE

FAN FAN SPARE FAN
+AN 708 +AN 709 +AN 710
A
A
22L1 /3.C3
22L2 /3.C3
22L3 /3.C3
B /4.B7 B
/4.B7
/4.B7
1
3
5
1
3
5
1
3
5
-Q48 -Q49 -Q50
13
21
31
41
31
41
14
22
32
42
32
42
/8.C5
/7.C5
/7.C5
/8.A8
/8.A8
1.1-1.6A 1.1-1.6A 1.1-1.6A
Setting:1.45A Setting:1.45A Setting:1.45A
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
C
2.5 mm sq. 2.5 mm sq. C
MARSHALLING
CABINET GH001 2.5 mm sq.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
EB1
D D
TRANSFORMER
RADIATORS
PE
PE
PE
W
W
U
U
V
V
+AN 708 +AN 709 +AN 710
M M M
-M8 3~ -M9 3~ -M10 3~
E 840W 840W 840W E
1.45A 1.45A 1.45A
Rev.0
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
F
Dwg.Name FAN GROUP AND SPARE FAN CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AUXILIARY CIRCUIT
APTITUDE TEMPERATURE HUMIDITY
CONTROLLER
A
A
1L1 -X01 12 11
red
/3.C5
1N1 light blue
2 4
/3.C8
AUTO
EB1 green/yellow
AC230V 50Hz
OFF
-S10 -S20 21
3N1
3L1
MAN
PE
22
1 3
B B
light blue
yellow
TEMPERATURE SENSOR HUMIDITY SENSOR
X01
10
3
28 27
-B11
C
11
12
17
20
19
18
C
17
D 13 14 15
D
-X01
1 1
L
-E11 -E12 -E10 -E13
MARSHALLING
100W 100W
CABINET GH001
2 2
N
-X01 -X01
SWITCHKEY FORM -S10 18 19
SITUATION
E E
NUMBER MANUAL OFF AUTO
FACTORY SETTING: B11

1-2 Date: Jul.20.2017 Approved
Rev.0
HEATER
3-4
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
EXHAUST FAN Title:
F SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF COOLING CONTROL CUBICLE F
Dwg.Name AUXILIARY CIRCUIT CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
COOLING CONTROL CIRCUIT

FAN GROUP
CONTROL
A
A 2.5 mm sq.
AC 230V K7 86T
2L1 X01:30 -X01 -X01
red
/3.C5 14 11 31 32
/7.3
2N1 X01:45 light blue
TEMPORARY JUMPER 1 3 1 3
FOR CUSTOMER
AUTO AUTO
S11 OFF S12 OFF

MANUAL MANUAL
TRANSFOMER LOAD
2 4 2 4
(supplied by user)
B B
WINDING TEMP.
WINDING TEMP.
53
OIL TEMP.
K11
/7.D654
X01:37 X01:36
Q43 Q47
X01:35 X01:35 X01:34
43 43 13 13 31 31
14 14 14 31 31 31 31
-GL K14 K15 K11 K21 K11 K21
REMOTE A F35 75 F34 75 F31 Q41 Q42 Q48 Q49
50 /7.D3 44 /7.D5 44 /7.D6 14 /7.D6 14 /7.D6 32 /7.D6 32
/4.C2 32 /4.C2 32 /5.C4 32 /5.C5 32
11 11 11
C X01:43 X01:42 X01:42 X01:41 X01:39

C
13
K14
/7.D3 14
13 13
Q11 Q50
/3.B3 14 /5.C6 14
D K14 K15 K11 K21

A1 A1 A1 A1 D
MARSHALLING -H1 -H3 -H2 -H4
CABINET GH001 A2 A2 A2 A2
green green red red

13 14 13 14 1 2 1 2
/7.C3 /3.C3 /5.C6
SWITCHKEY FORM -S11 21 22 21 22 3 4 3 4
/3.C3 /5.C6
SITUATION 33 34 33 34 5 6 5 6 NOTE:
MANUAL OFF AUTO /3.C3 /5.C6
NUMBER H1:FAN GROUP ON
43 44 43 44 13 14 13 14
/7.C6 /7.C6 /7.C7 /7.C7 H2:FAN GROUP OFF
/8.C2 21
22
/8.C4 21
1-2 22
H3:SPARE FAN ON
3-4
/7.C8 31 32 /7.C8 31 32 H4:SPARE FAN OFF E
E 5-6
7-8 43 44 43 44
/8.C2 /8.C3
53 54 53 54
/7.B5
Rev.0
TEMPERATURE SETTING FOR FAN GROUP CONTROL
FAN GROUP FAN GROUP Des'd: Wang Jingying release status

ON OFF
WINDING TEMP. +CT034 -F34/+CT035-F35 Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
OIL TEMP. +CT031 -F31 Title: SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF COOLING CONTROL CUBICLE F
F
Dwg.Name COOLING CONTROL CIRCUIT CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SIGNAL CONTACT
2
A
A -Q41 -Q42 -Q43 -Q44 -Q45 -Q46 -Q47 -Q48 -Q49
21 21 21 21 21 21
21 21 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41 41
-Q1 -K7 -F1 -F2 F3 F4 F5 -Q31 42 42 42 42 42
42 42 42 42
/3.B5 /3.B6 /3.B7 /3.B8 /3.B4
/3.A1 /3.B2 /3.B5 /4.C2 /4.C2 /4.C3 /4.C4 /4.C5 /4.C6 /4.C7 /5.C4 /5.C4
22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
15
B B
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
X5 5 22 6 23
3 20 4 21 7 24 8 25
1 18 2 19
400VAC HEATER&LIGHT CONTROL MAIN BREATHER OLTC BREATHER SOCKET OLTC FANS POWER
SUPPLY FAILURE SUPPLY FAILURE SUPPLY FAILURE SUPPLY FAILURE SUPPLY FAILURE SUPPLY FAILURE SUPPLY FAILURE FAILURE
C
C
21 21 5 7 5 7
43 21 43 21
-Q11 -K11 -K11 -K21 -K21 -Q50 -S11 -S11 -S12 -S12
/7.D6 44 /7.D6 22 /7.D6 44 /7.D6 22 6 8 6 8
/3.B3 /5.C6 /7.C3 /7.C3 /7.C5 /7.C5
22 22
D D
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
9 26 10 27 11 28 12 29 13 30 14 31 15 32 35 16 33 36
FAN GROUP FAN GROUP SPARE FAN SPARE FAN SPARE FAN POWER COM AUTO MANUAL COM AUTO MANUAL
COOLER MCB
SUPPLY FAILURE ON OFF ON OFF FAILURE FAN GROUP STATUS SPARE FAN STATUS
E E
MARSHALLING Date: Jul.20.2017 Approved
Rev.0
CABINET GH001
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
F
Dwg.Name SIGNAL CONTACT CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TRIP CONTACT
BUCHHOLZ RELAY PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE RELIEF TYPE THERMOMETER TYPE THERMOMETER TYPE THERMOMETER OIL FLOW RELAY
MAIN TANK VALVE FOR OLTC TOP OIL TEMPERATURE WINDING TEMPERATURE WINDING TEMPERATURE FOR OLTC
MAIN TANK
A
A
BF80/10/8 MPREC MPREC XK2454 XK2464 XK2464 RS2001

B B
F50 F81 F82 F31 42 44 F34 42 44 F35 42 44 F61

24 34 14 22 14 22 2
t t t
13 21 13 21 1
23 33
+CP081 +CP082 +CT031 41 +CT034 41 +CT035 41 +CF061
+CF050
C TRANSFORMER
C
G/Y
G/Y
G/Y
G/Y
G/Y
G/Y
G/Y
EB1
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
1 12 2 13 3 14 4 15 5 16 6 17 7 18 23 8 19 24 9 20 25 10 21
X1
MARSHALLING
CABINET GH001
CONTROL ROOM
D D
E E
Rev.0
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
F
Dwg.Name TRIP CONTACT CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ALARM CONTACT
BUCHHOLZ RELAY OIL LEVEL INDICATOR OIL LEVEL INDICATOR DIAL TYPE THERMOMETER DIAL TYPE THERMOMETER
MAIN TANK MAIN TANK FOR OLTC TOP OIL TEMPERATURE WINDING TEMPERATURE WINDING TEMPERATURE
A
A
BF80/10/8 XK2382 XK2352 XK2454 XK2464 XK2464
B LOW HIGH LOW HIGH B
F50 F60 12 14 F60 22 24 F64 12 14 F64 22 24 F31 32 34 F34 32 34 F35 32 34

14
t t t
13 11 21 11 21 31 31 31
+CL060 +CL064 +CL064 +CT031 +CT034 +CT035
+CF050
TRANSFORMER
C
C
G/Y
G/Y
EB1
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
X2 1 10 2 11 19 3 12 20 4 13 21 5 14 22 6 15 23 7 16 24 8 17 25
MARSHALLING
CABINET GH001
CONTROL ROOM
D D
E E
Rev.0
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
F
Dwg.Name ALARM CONTACT CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SPARE SIGNAL CONTACT BREATHER SIGNAL CONTACT
DIAL TYPE THERMOMETER DIAL TYPE THERMOMETER DIAL TYPE THERMOMETER BREATHER BREATHER
TOP OIL TEMPERATURE WINDING TEMPERATURE WINDING TEMPERATURE MAIN TANK OLTC
A
A
XK2454 XK2464 XK2464 +GX001 DB200-T +GX002 DB100

Analog output Analog output
B B
ERROR
ERROR
11 10 9 11 10 9
F31 22 24 F34 22 24 F35 22 24
BLACK
BLACK
5 5
t t t
21 21 21 4 4
+CT031 +CT034 +CT034
TRANSFORMER
C
C
EB2
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
BLACK
X2 27 28 29 30 32 33 34 35
49 50 51 53 54 55 57 58 59
MARSHALLING
CABINET GH001
CONTROL ROOM
D D
E E
Rev.0
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
F
Dwg.Name SPARE SIGNAL CONTACT CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
A
A
HV-N
S1
S2
+CE104-T1
B 150-300/1 PX S3
B
C
C
TRANSFORMER
X3
1 2 3
MARSHALLING
CABINET GH001
D D
CONTROL ROOM
E E
Rev.0
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
F
Dwg.Name CURRENT TRANSFORMER CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
THERMAL REPLICA
A
A
CT for winding temperature CT for winding temperature
HV-B LV-b
XK2420-03 XK2420-03 XK2410
+CT034-B34 +CT035-B35 +CT031-B31
S1 S1
+CE150 +CE151
S2 S2
250/2 20VA 1050/2 20VA
B ATR3 ATR3 B
1 3a 3 1 3a 3 2
3
B34 B35 B31

2 4 2 4 1
C
C
TRANSFORMER
EB1
10 X2 13 X2 X2
X3 37 38 39 X3 41 42 43
4 5 6 7 45 46 47
MARSHALLING
CABINET GH001
D D
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
9 12
CONTROL ROOM
SWITCHKEY FORM -S13/-S14
SITUATION
E
NUMBER NORMAL TEST E
1-2
Rev.0
3-4
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
The designed value of temperature rise
F for top oil to winding:
Dwg.Name THERMAL REPLICA CAD
ONAN= 3.6K ONAF= 9.9K SIEMENS TRANSFORMER(WUHAN) CO.LTD. Sheet 13/20
W.D. No. V101175&1176 Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DESTINATION
X01 TERM.
No.
WIRE LABEL FAN GROUP DESTINATION
X5 TERM.
No.
WIRE LABEL
L1 1 Q1:1 TERM. 1 Q1:21

IN-PUT
AC 400V,3P+N L2 2 Q1:3
DESTINATION
X4 No.
WIRE LABEL
2 F1:21
50HZ L3 3 Q1:5 +AN701 M1:V 1 Q41:2 3 F2:21
N 4 F1:3 +AN701 M1:U 2 Q41:4 4 F3:21 A
A 21N +AN701 M1:W
OLTC X1:7 5 3 Q41:6 5 F4:21
6 +AN702 M2:V 4 Q42:2 6 F5:21
OLTC X1:1 7 Q31:2 +AN702 M2:U 5 Q42:4 7 Q31:21
OLTC X1:5 8 Q31:4 +AN702 M2:W 6 Q42:6 8 Q41:41
OLTC X1:6 9 Q31:6 +AN703 M3:V 7 Q43:2 9 Q11:21
10 +AN703 M3:U 8 Q43:4 10 K11:43
S20:21 11 F1:2 +AN703 M3:W 9 Q43:6 11 K11:21
12 S10:4 +AN704 M4:V 10 Q44:2 12 K21:43
E11:1 13 +AN704 M4:U 11 Q44:4 13 K21:21
E12:1 14 S10:3 +AN704 M4:W 12 Q44:6 14 Q50:21
E10:L 15 B11:18 +AN705 M5:V 13 Q45:2 15 S11:5
B 16 +AN705 M5:U 14 Q45:4 16 S12:5 B
B11:12 17 F1:4 +AN705 M5:W 15 Q45:6 17
E11:2 18 E10:N +AN706 M6:V 16 Q46:2 18 Q1:22
E12:2 19 E13:N +AN706 M6:U 17 Q46:4 19 F1:22
20 +AN706 M6:W 18 Q46:6 20 F2:22
+GX001 L 21 F3:2 +AN707 M7:V 19 Q47:2 21 F3:22
+GX001 N 22 F3:4 +AN707 M7:U 20 Q47:4 22 F4:22
23 +AN707 M7:W 21 Q47:6 23 F5:22
+GX002 L 24 F4:2 +AN708 M8:V 22 Q48:2 24 Q31:22
+GX002 N 25 F4:4 +AN708 M8:U 23 Q48:4 25 Q41:42
26 +AN708 M8:W 24 Q48:6 26 Q11:22
CZ L 27 F5:2 +AN709 M9:V 25 Q49:2 27 K11:44
CZ N 28 F5:4 +AN709 M9:U 26 Q49:4 28 K11:22
C
29 +AN709 M9:W 27 Q49:6 29 K21:44 C
K7:14 30 F2:2 +AN710 M10:V 28 K21:2 30 K21:22
31 K7:11 +AN710 M10:U 29 K21:4 31 Q50:22
86T
32 K14:43 +AN710 M10:W 30 K21:6 32 S11:6
33 31 33 S12:6
+CT031-F31:14 34 S11:2 32 34
+CT034-F34:14 35 +CT035-F35:14 33 35 S11:8
GL 36 34 36 S12:8
REMOTE 37 35 37
38 36 38
+CT031-F31:11 39 K14:13 39
40 40
+CT034-F34:11 41 K14:14 41
D GL 42 +CT035-F35:11 42 D
REMOTE 43 43
44 44
K14:A2 45 F2:4 45
46
47
48
49 X4: UK5N
50
X5: UK5N
E E
X01: 1-5 UK16N
X01: 6-50 UK5N
Rev.0
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
F
Dwg.Name TERMINAL DIAGRAM 1 CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TERM. TERM.
DESTINATION
X2 No.
WIRE LABEL
Danger! CT Jumpers do not open.
DESTINATION
X1 No.
WIRE LABEL
1 +CF050 F50 13 1 +CF050 F50 23

2 +CL060 F60 11 TERM. 2 +CF050 F50 33
3 +CL060 F60 21
DESTINATION
X3 No.
WIRE LABEL
3 +CP081 F81 13
A
4 +CL064 F64 11 1 +CE104-T1 S1 4 +CP081 F81 21
A F64 5 +CP082 F82 13
5 +CL064 21 2 +CE104-T1 S2
6 +CT031 F31 31 3 +CE104-T1 S3 6 +CP082 F82 21
7 +CT034 F34 31 X3 :9 4 +CE150 S1 7 +CT031 F31 41
8 +CT035 F35 31 +CT034 B34 1 5 +CE150 S2 8 +CT034 F34 41
9 X3 :12 6 +CE151 S1 9 +CT035 F35 41
10 +CF050 F50 14 +CT035 B35 1 7 +CE151 S2 10 +CF061 F61 1
11 +CL060 F60 14 8 11
12 +CL060 F60 24 X3 :4 9 S13 :2 12 +CF050 F50 24
13 +CL064 F64 14 +CT034 B34 2 10 S13 :3 13 +CF050 F50 34
14 +CL064 F64 24 11 14 +CP081 F81 14
15 +CT031 F31 34 X3 :6 12 S14 :2 15 +CP081 F81 22
B 16 +CT034 F34 34 +CT035 B35 2 13 S14 :3 16 +CP082 F82 14 B
17 +CT035 F35 34 14 17 +CP082 F82 22
18 15 18 +CT031 F31 44
19 +CL060 F60 12 16 19 +CT034 F34 44
20 +CL060 F60 22 20 +CT035 F35 44
21 +CL064 F64 12 21 +CF061 F61 2
22 +CL064 F64 22 22
23 +CT031 F31 32 23 +CT031 F31 42
24 +CT034 F34 32 24 +CT034 F34 42
X3:URTK/S
25 +CT035 F35 32 25 +CT035 F35 42
26 26
27 +GX001 10 27
C 28 +GX001 9 28
29 +GX001 4 29 C
30 +GX001 5 30
31
32 +GX002 10
33 +GX002 9
34 +GX002 4
35 +GX002 5 X1: UK5N
36
37 +CT034 B34 4
38 +CT034 B34 3
39 +CT034 B34 3a
40
41 +CT035 B35 4
D 42 +CT035 B35 3 D
43 +CT035 B35 3a
44
45 +CT031 B31 1
46 +CT031 B31 2
47 +CT031 B31 3
48
49 +CT031 F31 21
50 +CT031 F31 24
51 +CT031 F31 22
52
53 +CT034 F34 21
54 +CT034 F34 24
E 55 +CT034 F34 22 E
56
57 +CT035 F35 21
58 +CT035 F35 24
59 +CT035 F35 22
Rev.0
60
61-67
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
F
X2: UK5N Dwg.Name CAD
TERMINAL DIAGRAM 2
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ITEM DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION IDENTIFICATION DATA QTY. IDENTIFYING SYMBOL LOCATION
1 THERMOSTAT ZWS-5000-1W1S AC230V YUANZHENG CHINA 1 -B11 +GH001

A
A 2 HEATING ELEMENT DJR-G 100W 230V 50HZ YUANZHENG CHINA 2 -E11/-E12 +GH001
3 LAMP T5 8W AC230V 50HZ GUANZHOU CHINA 1 -E13 +GH001
4 EXHAUST FAN KA2206 AC230V 40W KAKU TAIWAN CHINA 1 -E10 +GH001
5 MINIATURE CIRCUIT-BREAKER 5SY6204-7CC+5ST3010-0CC, AC230V, 50Hz, 2A , SIEMENS 1 -F1 +GH001
6 MINIATURE CIRCUIT-BREAKER 5SY6204-7CC+5ST3010-0CC, AC230V, 50Hz, 4A , SIEMENS -F2 +GH001

1
7 MINIATURE CIRCUIT-BREAKER 5SY6204-7CC+5ST3010-0CC, AC230V, 50Hz, 4A , SIEMENS -F3/-F4 +GH001

2
8 MINIATURE CIRCUIT-BREAKER 5SY6350-7CC+5ST3010-0CC AC400V 50A SIEMENS 1 -Q1 +GH001
B 9 CIRCUIT-BREAKER 3RV6011-4AA10+3RV6901-1E AC400V 11-16A SIEMENS 1 -Q11 +GH001 B
10 CIRCUIT-BREAKER 5SY6310-7CC+5ST3010-0CC AC400V 10A SIEMENS 1 -Q31 +GH001
11 CIRCUIT-BREAKER 3RV6011-1AA10+3RV2901-1C AC400V 1.1-1.6A SIEMENS 9 -Q41----Q49 +GH001
12 CIRCUIT-BREAKER 3RV6011-1AA10+3RV6901-1E AC400V 1.1-1.6A SIEMENS 1 -Q50 +GH001
13 AUXILIARY RELAY 3RH6131-1APO0 AV230V SIEMENS 2 -K14/-K15 +GH001
14 CONTACTOR 3RT6018-1AN21+3RH6911-1HA22 AC220V 16A SIEMENS 1 -K11 +GH001
15 AC VOLTAGE MONITOR RELAY RM22-TR33 SCHNEIDER 1 -K7 +GH001
C 16 DOOR SWITCH YBLX-K1/411 CHNT CHINA 1 -S20 +GH001

C
INDICATOR LAMP AD 16-22B/G31 AC220V GREEN APT(SIEMENS) 1 -H1/-H3 +GH001
17
INDICATOR LAMP AD 16-22B/R31 AC220V RED APT(SIEMENS) 1 -H2/-H4 +GH001
18
19 SHIFT SWITCH LW39-16-4OB-101/1 APT (SIEMENS) 1 -S10 +GH001
20 SHIFT SWITCH LW39-16-4OB-202/2 APT (SIEMENS) 2 -S11/-S12 +GH001
21 MINIATURE CIRCUIT-BREAKER 5SY6210-7CC+5ST3010-0CC, AC230V, 50Hz, 10A , SIEMENS 1 -F5 +GH001
22 CONTACTOR 3RT6015-1APO1+3RH6911-1HA22 AC230V 9A SIEMENS 1 -K21 +GH001
23 SOCKET AC250V 10A 1 -CZ +GH001
D 24 SHIFT SWITCH(SINCE THE RESET SWITCH) LW39-16B APT (SIEMENS) 2 -S13/-S14 +GH001 D
25 AMMETER 250/2 0-3A 1 -A1 +GH001
26 AMMETER 1050/2 0-3A 1 -A2 +GH001
27
28
29
30
E E
NOTE:
GH001: MARSHALLING CABINET
T: TRANSFORMER
Rev.0
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
F
Dwg.Name LIST OF EQUIPMENT 1 CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ITEM DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION IDENTIFICATION DATA QTY. IDENTIFYING SYMBOL LOCATION
31 BUCHHOLZ RELAY BF80/10/8 EMB 1 -F50 T
32 PROTECTIVE RELAY FOR OLTC RS2001 MR 1 -F61 T

A
A 33 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE MAIN TANK MPreC MR 1 -F81 T
34 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE OLTC MPreC MR 1 -F82 T
35 OIL LEVEL INDICATOR MAIN TANK XK2382-03 MESSKO 1 -F60 T
36 OIL LEVEL INDICATOR FOR OLTC XK2352 MESSKO 1 -F64 T
37 TYPE THERMOMETER FOR TOP OIL XK2454 MESSKO 1 -F31 T
38 TYPE THERMOMETER FOR WINDING XK2464 MESSKO 2 -F34/-F35 T
39 TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR TOP OIL XK2410 PT-100 MESSKO 1 -B31 T

B B
40 TEMPERATURE SENSOR FOR WINDING XK2420-03 PT-100 MESSKO 2 -B34/-B35 T
41 CURRENT TRANSFORMER HV-B 250/2 20VA ATR3 1 +CE150 T
42 CURRENT TRANSFORMER HV-N 150-300/1 PX 2 +CE104-T1 T
43 CURRENT TRANSFORMER LV-b 1050/2 20VA ATR3 1 +CE151 T
44 10 +AN701-710
FAN FN050 T
45
46
C
47 C
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
D D
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
E 62 E
63
Rev.0
NOTE: Project: Indonesia Tolo Windfarm Project
GH001: MARSHALLING CABINET Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
T: TRANSFORMER Title: SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF COOLING CONTROL CUBICLE
F F
C:CONTROL ROOM
Dwg.Name LIST OF EQUIPMENT 2 CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front Sight Back Sight Left Sight
A
A
B B
C
C
D D
E E
Rev.0
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
NOTE:
F
The control cubicle is made by stainless steel 304(thickness 2mm).
Dwg.Name MARSHALLING CABINET OUTLINE CAD
The protection degree is IP55.
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Front Sight(without inside door) A

A
S20
B B
C
C
E11 E12
D D
EB1 EB2
E E
Rev.0
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
F
Dwg.Name THE LOCATION OF ELEMENT TERMINAL CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DesignAtion Device Sign Description Model Core Color REMARK
W1-W2 +CF050-F50 Black 1,2,3,G/Y

Cable for Buchholz relay main tank
W3 Black 1,2,3,4,5,6,G/Y A
A +CP081-F81 Cable for pressure relief valve main tank
W4 +CP082-F82 Cable for pressure relief valve oltc Black 1,2,3,4,5,6,G/Y
W5 +CL060-F60 Cable for oil level indicator Black 1,2,3,4,5,6,G/Y
W6 +CL064-F64 Cable for oil level indicator of OLTC Black 1,2,3,4,5,6,G/Y
W7 +CF061-F61 Cable for oil flow relay of OLTC Black 1,2,3,G/Y
W8-W9 +CT031-F31 Cable. for dial type thermometer oil temperature Black 1,2,3,4,5,6,G/Y
W10 +CT031-B31 Black 1,2,3,G/Y

Cable. for Pt100 oil temperature
B B
W11-W12 +CT034-F34 Cable. for dial type winding temperature Black 1,2,3,4,5,6,G/Y
W13 +CT034-B34 Cable. for Pt100 winding temperature Black 1,2,3,4,5,6,G/Y
W14-W15 +CT035-F35 Cable. for dial type winding temperature Black 1,2,3,4,5,6,G/Y
W16 +CT035-B35 Cable. for Pt100 winding temperature Black 1,2,3,4,5,6,G/Y
W17 +CE150 Cable for current transformer HV-B Black 1,2,3,4,5
W18 +CE104-T1 Cable for current transformer HV-N Black 1,2,3,4,5
C W19 +CE151 Cable for current transformerLV-b Black 1,2,3,4,5

C
W20-W29 FAN1-FAN10 Cable for Fans Yellow,Green,Red,G/Y
W30 OLTC Cable for OLTC motor supply Black 1,2,3,4,5,6,G/Y Shrink tubing:Yellow,Green,Red,Blue
W31 GX001 Cable. for main tank breather supply Yellow,Green,Red,G/Y
W32 GX001 Cable. for main tank breather signal ZR-KVVRP-7*1.5 Black 1,2,3,4,5,6,G/Y
W33 GX002 Cable. for OLTC breather supply Yellow,Green,Red,G/Y
W34 GX002 Cable. for OLTC breather signal ZR-KVVRP-7*1.5 Black 1,2,3,4,5,6,G/Y
D D
E E
Rev.0
Chk'd: Sun Shuqiang
F
Dwg.Name CABLE LIST CAD
Dwg. No. V04 17 778-01 No.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13 Photographs
13 Photographs

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
14 Spare Parts and Special Tools
14 Spare Parts and Special Tools
14.1 Spare Parts

The spare part list below refers to the delivered spare parts of the delivered
transformer/reactor.
Delivered Spare Parts Quantity Description

/

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
15 Check Lists
15 Check Lists
No. Designation Document No. Page Rev. Date
1 Check list „Arrival Inspection“ 101175
2 Check list „Oil Sampling“ 101175
3 Check list „Commissioning“ 101175
4 Check list "Maintenance Work and Electrical Tests" 101175

Document No.:101175
Serial No.:101175
Check list “Arrival Inspection”

Customer: EQUIS ENERGY Serial no.: 101175
Station: Tolo windfarm Fabrication No.:
Project name: EQUIS ENERGY Production plant: Siemens Transformer
(Wuhan)Co., Ltd., P.R. of China
Type: TLSN7752 Year of Build: 2017
Output: Assembly manager:
Assembly No.: Transporter:
Assembly date 2017. Transport means:
Shock Recorder (for acceptable values see chapter 4)

Records yes / no Download from:
Shock recorder log submitted to customer: yes / no Recipient:
Shock recorder log submitted to manufacturer's plant: yes / Recipient:
no
vertical lateral longitudinal
Date / g / / /
Heavy part
Pressure/Vacuum Bottle: bar Tank: bar Temperature: °C
Transport with oil Tank tight Tank leaking
Filling gas mbar present not present
overpressure in
the tank
Moisture image present Moisture below 8 % Moisture exceeds 8 %
not present Measured value:
Contact manufacturer
complete damaged Inspected Inspected Comments
yes no yes no on by
Transformer welding seams
Transformer paint coat
Measured value core earthing:

M
Tank
Wheels/chassis/attachment
elements
Wiring
Unrestricted © Siemens AG 2017 1

Document no.:101175
Serial no.:101175
Accessories complete damaged Inspected Inspected Comments

yes no yes no on by
Accessories paint coat
Bushings and adapters +
moisture image
Cooler
Pumps
Buchholz relay
Pressure relief valve
Protective relay for load
control switch
Oil flow indicator
Contact thermometer/oil
Contact thermometer/coil
Impedance thermometer
Oil level indicator
Oil temperature monitor
air dehumidifiers
Motor drive for switch
Switching cabinet
Insulating oil
Pipelines
Corrosion protection
Refilling bottle not present Filing gas overpressure in: mbar
General comments:
Date Date
Name Name
Signature Signature
Customer Siemens Supervisor

Document no.:101175
Serial no.:101175
Check list "Maintenance Work and Electrical Tests"

Customer:EQUIS ENERGY Typ of Transformer:TLSN7752
Serial No.:101175 Rating:45/27MVA

Project:101175 Ratio: kV
Station:Tolo windfarm Maintenance Company:
Inspection
Maintenance work Date Signature Remarks
intervalls
Checking for leaks and cleanliness
Transformer tanks, covers, domes and pipes
1 year
Cooling system with pipe

1 year
Slide valves and fittings

1 year
Bushings
1 year
Cable box
1 year
On-load tap changer

1 year
Conservator with pipe (external)

1 year
Conservator (internal)
variabel
Oil level indicators

6 months
Current transformer box

1 year
Monitoring devices
1 year
Functional tests
Dehydrating breather
1 month
Monitoring devices (functioning and contacts)

Siemens Buchholz relay (sludge)
Sludge
1 year
Alarm
1 year
Tripping function
1 year
Diverter switch protection

1 year
Oil level monitor main transformer

compartment 1 year
© Siemens AG 2017
Document no.:101175
Serial no.:101175 Page 1 of 5


Inspection
intervalls
Oil level monitor on-load tap changer
compartment 1 year
Dial thermometers
1 year
Adjusting with stem-type thermometer

1 year
Resistance thermometer
1 year
Temperature monitor setting in °C

1 year
Oil circulating pumps

1 year
Fans
1 year
Oil flow monitors

6 months
Air flow monitors

6 months
Water flow monitors

6 months
Leak monitors
6 Monate
Fan and pump control

1 year
Pressure relief device

1 year
Cooling system
Oil entry/exit temperature
6 months
Water entry/exit temperature

6 months
Current transformers
Current transformer terminals

1 year
Current transformer earthing

1 year
De-energized tap changer
© Siemens AG 2017
Document no.:101175


Inspection
intervalls
Traversing all taps
1 year
Interlocks
1 year
Drive
1 year
Checking the control cubicles

Heating, lighting
1 year
Tightness
1 year
Contact functions
1 year
Wiring, ducts
1 year
On-load tap changer

Tap changer revision
Variabel
Motor drive
1 year
Contactor control
1 year
Stops, mechanical and electrical

1 year
Tap-to-tap interlock
1 year
Anti-corrosion coating
1 year
Oil examination
Transformer tank (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)*
1 year
Conservator (1)*
1 year
Tap selector compartment (1, 6)*

1 year
Bushing compartment (1, 6)*

1 year
Cable box (1, 6)*

2 years
© Siemens AG 2017
Document no.:101175


Inspection
intervalls
Condenser bushing
* recommended examinations: 1 = Disruptive discharge; 2 = Purity; 3 = Neutralization value; 4 = Saponification value; 5 = dieletrical dissipation factor; 6 = Gas analysis)
Cable box
Check moisture content of the cable boxes
filling compound variabel
Moisture collecting in air-filled cable cover

hoods variabel
Miscellaneous
Corrosion protection
1 year
Spark gaps, setting according to dimension

drawing 1 year
Sound absorption
1 year
Earth connections (protective earth)

1 year
Gas test device

1 year
Electrical Tests
Winding insulation resistance
max. 5 years
Transformation measurement
max. 5 years
No-load currents
max. 5 years
Winding resistance
max. 5 years
Dielectric dissipation factor at the 2 years,

transformer/reactor max. 5 years
Dielectric dissipation factor at condenser 2 years,
bushing max. 5 years
Insulation resistance of the wiring
2 years
Insulation resistance of the motors

2 years
© Siemens AG 2017
Document no.:101175


Inspection
intervalls
Siemens Transformers Service/TLM:
Date of maintenance test:
In the prescence of
Place, date of issue Place, date of issue
Customer SIEMENS TRANSFORMERS
© Siemens AG 2017
Document no.:101175
SIEMENS Check list “Oil Sampling”
Check list “Oil Sampling”

The oil sample is an essential contribution to quality monitoring of oil-filled transformers and
reactor coils.
When taking samples and transporting the oil sample, great care is required to make a
representative assessment of the transformer based on the test results.
Manufacturer: Siemens Transformer (Wuhan)Co., Ltd., P.R. of China

Customer: EQUIS ENERGY
Station: Tolo windfarm
Year of Build: 2017
Type: TLSN7752
45000 / 45000 kVA at ONAF
Power Rating: 27000 / 27000 kVA at ONAN
Transformation: 150±8x1.25% / 33 kV
Serial no.: 101175
Reference no.:
Sample no.:
Sampling date:
Oil type:
Oil temperature at sampling:
No. of operations of tap changer:
Load at sampling:
Sampling
Sample Position Oil sampling tap
Oil drain device A 22/31/40 DIN 42 551
Tank: Top Middle Bottom
Diverter switch: LU tank ______________ ______________
Conservator: Transformer Diverter Switch Bushing pocket _____________
Bushing: ______________ ______________ ______________ _____________
Cable box: ______________ ______________ ______________ _____________
Sampling cause
New filling on: Filled volume: (t)
Remaining filling on: Filled volume: (t)
Interference on:
Oil treatment on:
Routine inspection:

Document no.:101175
Serial no.:101175
SIEMENS Check list “Oil Sampling”
Examinations
Recommendation:
New transformer new
Maintenance multiple
commissioning
contact switch
After defect or
Maintenance
transformer
damage
Requested analysis
Color number ISO 2049 / ASTM D1500
Appearance IEC 60422 / ASTM D1524
Neutralization value IEC 62021 / ASTM D974
Breakdown voltage IEC 60156 / ASTM D1816
Water content IEC 60814 / ASTM D1533
Diel. Dissipation factor at 50 Hz IEC 60247 / ASTM D924
Interfacial tension EN 14210 / ASTM D971
Dissolved Gas Analysis (DGA) IEC 60567 / ASTM 3612
Furan analysis IEC 61198 / ASTM D5837
Inhibitor content IEC 60666 / ASTM D2668
Corrosive sulfur IEC 62535 / ASTM D1275B
Corrosive sulfur DIN 51353
Passivator content IEC 60666
Additional examinations
Protocol language
German English French ____________
Further information and history

_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________
Sample taken by
__________ _________________________ __________________ _______________

Date Name in print Company/Dpt. Phone
Responsible service engineer
__________ _________________________ __________________ _______________

Date Name in print Company/Dpt. Phone
Lab processing note

Serial No.: Special features:
Sample receipt date:
Sample analysis date:
Type of sampling vessel:

Document no.:101175
Serial no.:101175
SIEMENS Oil Sampling Instructions
Oil Sampling Instructions

Sample volume
Oil examination requires 1 liter of oil.
Gas-analytic oil examination requires a separate oil sample of 1 liter.
Sampling vessels
Sampling vessels must be clean 1 liter bottles with gas-right closing mechanisms.
Usually, special aluminum bottles with plastic screw cap and seal are used. The closing
mechanism must be so tight that no air is drawn in when the sample cools off.
NOTE
Suitable sample bottles are available from the manufacturer's plant.
NOTE
Only take the oil sample with glass bottles when the sample temperature at sampling is
guaranteed to be greater or the same as the storage and transport temperature.
Otherwise, coordinate with the examination lab.
Samples for gas analysis must only be taken by the overflow procedure. The work steps
for sampling must be performed quickly and without any interruption to prevent contact
between the oil sample and the atmosphere as far as possible. In every case, notice the
temperature inside the oil jet in the test protocol.
Sampling points
for gas analysis examinations: usually tank "top"
for other examinations: usually tank "bottom"
Procedure when taking oil from the oil sampling valve

1. Screw a threaded connection piece with seal, hose attachment and oil-proof hose (30 - 50
cm long) onto the threaded piece of the oil sampling valve.
2. Open the oil sampling valve and let about two to three liters of oil (from the outlet
pipeline) flow into the oil collection vessel.
3. Push the hose into the oil sample bottle to the ground. First fill the bottle slowly from the
bottom, then let oil flow strongly until oil at a volume of 2 to 3 times the bottle content has
flowed over into an oil collection container.
4. Last, reduce the oil flow again and draw the bottle from the hose downwards with the oil
sampling valve still open. Close the bottle at once when it was drawn from the hose.
5. Then close the oil sampling valve again properly.
6. Dispose of discharged oil in the oil collection vessel properly.

Document no.:101175
Serial no.:101175
SIEMENS Oil Sampling Instructions
Procedure when taking oil samples from the conservator of the diverter switch
1. Open the drain slide valve at the conservator diverter switch.
2. Work steps 1-6 from “Taking oil from the oil sampling valve”.
NOTE
Oil samples must only be taken with a suitable sampling valve in case of direct oil filling
to the transformer tank from oil barrels.
1 Transformer tank
2 Oil sampling valve
3 Hose
4 Oil sample bottle
5 Oil collection vessel
Fig. 1 Oil sampling with oil sample bottle and oil collection vessel

Document no.:101175
Serial no.:101175
SIEMENS Protokoll "Inbetriebnahme" / Check list "Commissioning"
Protokoll "Inbetriebnahme" / Check list "Commissioning"

Kunde/Customer: EQUIS ENERGY Standort/Station: Tolo windfarm
Serien-Nr./Serial No.: 101175 Transformatortyp/
Projekt/Project: V101175 Type of transformer: TLSN7752
Inbetriebsetzungsingenieur von Siemens:

Commissioning engineer of Siemens
Datum der Inbetriebsetzungsprüfungen:

Date of commissioning tests:
In Anwesenheit von:
In the prescence of
Datum der Inbetriebnahme (voraussichtlich):

Date of energizing (expected):
In Anwesenheit von:
In the prescence of
Ort, Datum Ort, Datum

Place, date of issue Place, date of issue
Kunde/Customer SIEMENS TRANSFORMERS
© Siemens AG 2017
Dokument-Nr./Document no.:1001175
Serien-Nr./Serial no.:101175 Seite/Page 1 von/of 11

1. Nenndaten
Rating
Vorschriften:
Standards
Hochvolt Niedervolt Tertiär

High voltage Low voltage Tertiary
Leistung
Power
Spannung
Voltage
Strom
Current
Schaltgruppe:
Vector group
Regelbereich: in Stufen von

Control range in steps of
Kurzschlussspannungen HV/LV tap %

Impedance voltages HV/LV
tap %
tap %
Frequenz: Hz
Frequency
Kühlungsart::
Type of cooling
Baujahr:
Year of Manufacture
© Siemens AG 2017

2. Elektrische Prüfungen
Electrical tests
2.1 Isolationswiderstand
Insulations resistance
Prüfspannung: kV Gleichspannung
Test Voltage: kV DC
Zeit / Time
Min. / min.
Umgebungstemperatur: °C Öltemperartur: °C
Ambient temperature Oil temperatrue
2.1.1Kernisolation
Core insulation
Prüfspannung: 0,5 kV Gleichspannung / 2,5 kV AC
Test Voltage: 0.5 kV DC / 2.5 kV AC
Zeit / Time
Min. / min.
© Siemens AG 2017

2.2 Schaltgruppenkontrolle
Check of vector group
Alle 3 HV Klemmen anspeisen, 1HV und 1NV (tertiär) Klemme verbinden.

3 phase supply connected to HV terminals, one HV terminal connected to one LV (Tertiary) terminal.
© Siemens AG 2017

2.3 Magnetisierungsstrom (HV)

Magnetizing current (HV)
Schalterstellung Anspeisung mA
Tap position Supply voltage Phase Phase Phase
2.4 Übersetzung: mit Meßbrücke oder Voltmeter

Ratio: with bridge or voltmeter method
Schalterstellung Nennübersetzung Abweichung in % / Deviation in %

Tap position Rated ratio Klemmen / Terminals
© Siemens AG 2017

2.5 Wicklungswiderstände
Winding resistances
Schalterstellung Klemmen Widerstand Mittlere Öltemp.

Tap position Terminals Resistance Average oil temp.
W °C
© Siemens AG 2017

2.6 Stromwandler
Current transformer
Polaritätsprüfung -Check of the polarity
Wandlerbezeichnung laut Leistungsschild - CT - Nr. and CT - Location according to rating plate
2.7 Öl - Durchschlagsfestigkeit
Dielectric strength of oil
Lieferfirma: Type:
Supplier of oil Type
Probe von: Druchschlag kV/cm

Sample from Breakdown voltage
Kessel oben
Top of main tank
Kessel unten
Bottom of main tank
2.8 Isolationswiderstand der Verkabelung

Insulation resistance of secondary circuit
Prüfspannung : V Gleichspannung
Test voltage : V DC
Isolationswiderstand:
Insulation resistance:
© Siemens AG 2017

3. Prüfungen auf Betriebsbereitschaft

Operational
3.1 Regelschaltereinrichtungen
Tap changing equipment geprüfet / Bemer.
tested / remarks
Durchschalten händisch - stationär und mit Fernbedienung
Manual operation - loccal and remote operation
Sperrschalter - Kurbel oder Motorantrieb
Action of manual operation safety inerlock
Endschalter / Limit Switches
Stellungsanzeiger mechanisch u. elektrisch in allen Positionen
Mechanical and electrical check of indicator for all positions
Zählwerk für Schaltungen / Tap change counter
Motor Nennleistung / Rated power of motor W
Motor Nennstrom / Rated current of motor A
Strom gemessen / Measured current A
Überstromrelais eingestellt / Setting of overload relay
3.2 Kühlungseinrichtung
Cooling equipment
geprüfet/Bemerkungen
testet / remarks
Lüfter / Fans Pumpen /Pum.
Motor Nennleistung / Rated power of motor W W
Motor Nennstrom / Rated current of motor A A
Strom gemessen / Measured current A A
Motorschtzschalter / Motor contactors
Drehrichtung / Direction on rotation
Überstromreais eingestellt / Setting of overload relay
Kühlersteuerung händisch / Manual control of coolers
Kühlersteuerung automatisch von der HV /HV
Wicklungstemperatur NV/LV
Control cooling automatic from Tertiär
Winding - temp indicator Tertiary
© Siemens AG 2017

4. Prüfen und einstellen von Schutzvorrichtungen

Check and setting of protection equipment
4.1 Temperatur- Anzeiger - Temperature indicators

Hersteller/ Manufacturer:
Funktion geprüft Kontakt HV NV Tertiär ÖL
Kontakte eingestellt Contact HV LV Tertiary Oil
Alarm
Function checked Trip
Contacts are adjusted Cooler 1
Cooler 2
Alle eingestellten mit den angezeiten Temperatruen verglichen Ja / Nein

All settings checked against indicated temperatures Yes / No
5. Sicht - Funktionsprüfungen
Visual inspections - functional tests
Geprüft / Checked
5.1 Erdungssystem
Equipment earthing
5.2 Trafo ist entlüftet
All air release plugs vented
5.3 Ölstand im Dehngefäß
Oil level in conservator
5.4 Trafo ist Öldicht
Transformator oil tight
5.5 Alle Absperrorgane in Betreibsstellung
All valves left in service position
5.6 Durchführungen unbeschädigt und sauber
Bushings undamaged und clean
5.7 Atmer
Breather
5.8 Lackierung (Korrosionsschutz)
Painting (protection against corrosion)
5.9 Buchholz: Alarmkontakte - Auslösungskontakte geprüft
Buchholz Relay Alarm contact - Trip contact checked
5.10 Reglerschutz
OLTC - Protective Relay
5.11 Ölstandsanzeiger: Minimum - Maximum Kontakt geprüft
Oil level indicators: Minimum - Maximum contact checked
5.12 Ölströmungsanzeiger geprüft
Oil flow indicator checked
5.13 Überdruckschutz
Pressure relief
5.14 Heizung im Steuerschrank und im Motorantrieb
Kiosk and cubicle heaters operating correctly
5.15 Verdrahtung
Wiring
© Siemens AG 2017

© Siemens AG 2017

© Siemens AG 2017

Installation and Operating Manual For Transformer-Email

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation and Operating Manual For Transformer-Email

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation and Operating

Manual for Transformer

Indonesia Tolo Windfarm Project

Rated Power 45/27 MVA

Product Power Transformer

Transformer type TLSN7752

Document no. STWHMIV101175

Edition date 2017-12

Warranty and Maintenance Declaration

Chapter 1 Ordering Data

Chapter 2 Technical Data

Chapter 3 Safety and Environment

Chapter 4 Transport, Arrival Inspection and Storage

Chapter 5 Assembly, Evacuation and Oil Filling

Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspection

Chapter 9 Technical Documentation of the Heavy Part and Accessories

Chapter 10 Test Certificates of Accessories

Chapter 11 Test Certificates of Transformer

Chapter 14 Spare Parts and Special Tools

Chapter 15 Check Lists

Unrestricted © Siemens AG 2017 I

Unrestricted © Siemens AG 2017 II

Unrestricted © Siemens AG 2017 III

Warranty and Maintenance Declaration

Unrestricted © Siemens AG 2017 IV

Station/Plant: Tolo windfarm

Serial no.: V101175

Product: Power Transformer

Transformer type: TLSN7752

Rated power: 45/27MVA

Production plant: Siemens Transformers (Wuhan)

Unrestricted © Siemens 2017 Date, Ref. 1–1

3 Safety and Environment

Unauthorized conversion and spare parts production

Persons authorized to work at the transformer/reactor

Unrestricted © Siemens 2017 Date, Ref. 3–1

3.1.2 Safety Symbols

Precautions must be taken for transformers/reactors or heavy attachment parts to prevent

Transport of the transformer/reactor must be performed by authorized transport companies.

3.1.4 Set-Up, Assembly and Oil Filling

Unrestricted © Siemens 2017 Date, Ref. 3–2

3.1.5 Operation, Inspection and Maintenance

Any action contrary to the above may lead to:

3.1.5.1 Conduct during assembly and maintenance work at the electrical

Unrestricted © Siemens 2017 Date, Ref. 3–3

The following five safety rules must be observed:

3.1.5.2 Work inside the tank

3.1.6 Fire protection measures when working at oil transformers

Fire prevention, alarm and initial measures are generally mandatory.

Specifically observe the following:

Unrestricted © Siemens 2017 Date, Ref. 3–4

3.2 Environmental Protection

Among others, this includes:

We recommend charging specialized disposal companies with environmentally compatible

3.2.2.1 Insulating oil and oil-insulated components

3.2.2.2 Condenser bushings

Oil- or resin-insulated components are no hazardous substances in the delivered condition,

Unrestricted © Siemens 2017 Date, Ref. 3–5

3.2.2.3 Paint with thinner for outer corrosion protection/varnish impregnation

3.2.2.4 Desiccant beads

3.2.3 Safety Data-sheets

3.2.3.2 Paints and thinners

Unrestricted © Siemens 2017 Date, Ref. 3–6